Ingenious Mechanisms Volume 2

INGENIOUS MECHANISMS
FOR DESIGNERS AND INVENTORS

VOLUME II
Mechanisms and Mechanical Movements Selected
from Automatic Machines and Various Other Forms
of Mechanical Apparatus as Outstanding Examples
of Ingenious Design Embodying Ideas or Principles
Applicable in Designing Machines or Devices Re-
quiring Automatic Features or Mechanical Control
Edited by
FRANKLIN D. JONES
INDUSTRIAL PRESS INC.
200 MADISON AVENUE, NEW YORK 10016
...
Industrial Press Inc.
200 Madison Avenue
New York, New York 10016-4078
INGENIOUS MECHANISMS
FOR DESIGNERS AND INVENTORS-VOLUME II
Copyright 1936 by Industrial Press Inc., New York, N.Y. Printed in the
United States of America. All rights reserved. This book or parts thereof may
not be reproduced in any form without permission of the publishers.
26
CONTENTS
CHAPTER PAGE
I. Cam Applications and Special Cam Designs. 1
II. Intermittent Motions from Gears and Cams........... 61
III. Intermittent Motions from Ratchet Gearing 114
IV. Intermittent Motions of the Geneva Type 164
V. Tripping or Stop Mechanisms 189
VI. Overload Relief Mechanisms and Automatic Safe-
guards 221
VII. Reversing Mechanisms of Special Design 242
VIII. Drives of the Crank Type for Reciprocating Driven
Members 260
IX. Reciprocating Motions Derived from Cams, Gears,
Levers and Special Mechanisms :.. 284
X. Speed-Changing Mechanisms 321
XI. Special Transmissions and Over-running Clutches........ 346
XII. Self-Centering Pivoted Levers and Sliding Members.... 369
XIII. Multiple-Lever Mechanisms with Dwelling or Idle
Periods and Other Special Lever COIhbinations........ 385
XIV. Feeding Mechanisms and Auxiliary Devices 412
XV. Feeding and Ejecting Mechanisms for Power Presses.. 455
XVI. Miscellaneous Mechanisms or Mechanical Movements.... 480
XVII. Engine Valve Diagrams and Their Applications in
Studying Valve Action 513
SECOND VOLUME OF INGENIOUS MECHANISMS
THIS additional volume of INGENIOUS MECHANISMS
FOR DESIGNERS AND INVENTORS has been published
as a companion book to Volume I in order to present illus-
trated descriptions of a large variety of mechanisms and
mechanical movements not at hand when Volume I was
produced. The continual demand for Volume I from engi-
neers and machine designers, both here and abroad, is not
only a tribute to the value of this treatise, but an indication
of the need for information on outstanding mechanical
movements. The publication of this second volume makes
it possible to present many additional mechanisms of great
practical value to designers of automatic machines or other
devices, as well as to students of the general subject of
mechanism.
Many of the main sections or chapters in Volume II have
titles similar to those found in the first volume to assist the
user of both books in locating all the information on a given
but the mechanisms illustrated and described in the
two volumes are entirely different- in design. While the
second volume is a continuation of the first one, each book
an independent treatise; taken together, they constitute
an unusually complete work of reference on the very im-
portant subject of mechanism. The numerous mechanical
movements featured in Volume II, like those in Volume I,
have been applied successfully to automatic machines and
many other forms of mechanical apparatus. While it is not
feasible in any work of this kind to include mechanisms
that are directly applicable to every type of machine and
operating condition, it is believed that the numerous de-
signs found in Volumes I and II embody mechanical prin-
ciples which may be utilized in the solution of practically
any mechanism designIng problem likely to be encountered.
CHAPTER I
CAM APPLICAliONS AND SPECIAL CAM DESIGNS
Cams in their various forms. doubtless are more useful to
designers of automatic and semi-automatic machines than
any other type of mechanical device. Mechanicalmove-
ments which would be difficult or impracticable to obtain
by other means may, in numerous instances, be derived
readily either from a single cam or from two or more cams
used in combination. The cams which follow illustrate a
variety of interesting applications taken from different
classes of mechanical equipment. Other applications of
cams and cam-operated mechanisms will be found in Chap-
ter I, Volume I, of INGENIOUS MECHANISMS FOR DESIGNERS
AND INVENTORS.
Indexing Cam for Varying Stroke of Follower.-For a
given number of strokes of a slide, almost any variation in
the length of each successive stroke may be produced by
means of an indexing cam mechanism like that shown in
Fig. 1. The construction of this cam is economical and the
design is unusually simple, when the movements involved
are considered. The cam member consists of a core A in
which are secured eight cam inserts B. Each insert is
tapered at a different angle and has a throw correspond-
ing with the required movement of the follower roll C.
The core is keyed to a shaft turning in bearings on the
slide D, which is reciprocated through a rack and gear by
a member of the machine in which the cam is used. To one
1
2 CAM APPLICATIONS AND SPECIAL CAM DESIGNS
CAM APPLICATIONS AND SPECIAL CAM DESIGNS 3
cD
,s:l
+>
~
=
.f:
~
t>
~
.:
cD
~
0
:::
r=
cD
~
oS
~
'l:l
~
E!
~
0
+>
=
cD
~
lI:l
~
~ ~
+>2
=+>
5l
rll
cD""
~ ;
~
0
~ r z t
!
~
~
~
'"
cD
+>
';j
'l:l
cD
H
cD
'l:l
~
.l!!
~
:a
~
::J: 9
0
~
~
'l:l
fa
..;
~
~
0
end of the core shaft is keyed a helical gear, meshing with
a similar gear on the vertical shaft E. This shaft, running
in two bearings cast integral with the slide, carries a ratchet
wheel J, which is operated by the pawl F, pivoted to the
machine base. There are as many teeth in the ratchet
wheel as there are inserts.
The various movements are obtained in the following
manner: From the position indicated, the slide moves
toward the right, causing the follower roll to ride along the
bearing G and on the insert B to point H. The slide now
returns, during which time the follower roll is also returned
by means of a coil spring (not shown). Toward the end of
the return stroke, as the roll dwells on bearing G, a tooth
in ratchet J engages the pawl F. Upon the continued move-
ment of the slide, the pawl forces the ratchet wheel around
one tooth, causing the core to rotate until insert K is in line
with the follower roll. Thus, on the return stroke, the roll
rides on insert K, which imparts a shorter movement to the
follower than the preceding one. In this way, each succeed-
ing movement of the follower is varied until the core has
been indexed one revolution. At this time, the roll will
again be in line with the insert B and the cycle of move-
ments will be repeated.
Although not shown, a friction brake should be applied
to either the core or the ratchet-wheel shaft to prevent over-
run of the cam due to the momentum imparted by the pawl.
Other combinations than that shown here may be obtained
by using different inserts to vary the throw or a different
number of inserts to increase or decrease the number of
follower movements per cycle. In the latter case, the num-
ber of teeth in the ratchet wheel must be changed to cor-
respond with the number of inserts.
Cam-Plate with Four Adiustable Lobes.-In developing
an automatic machine, it was necessary to provide means
for transmitting an oscillating motion to an arm or lever
from a rotating shaft. The arm was attached to a slide
which was returned to the zero position by means of a coil
spring after having reached its maximum position.
The variation in the sizes of the product made necessary
an occasional change in the length of travel or movement
of the slide. To obtain the desired adjustability with the
least number of ~ t u t i n g parts, the adjustable cam-plate
shown in Fig. 2 was'designed. The two side plates A are
spaced a given distance apart by spacers B and are clamped
together by screws C. Four cam-plates D, spaced 90 de-
grees apart, are held on pivot studs E. Circular slots Fare
milled in these plates through which clamp bolts G are in-
serted.
These plates are a sliding fit between the plates A, so
that when bolts G are tightened, cam-plates D are held se-
curely in place. To the outer side of one end plate A is
fastened the flanged bearing H, which is held by a cross-pin
to the driving shaft I. The lever arm roller J was made
wide enough to allow it to ride on both the central cam lobe
and on the periphery of side plates A. The various distances
to which the cam lobes can be projected and the angles of
rise and fall are shown in Fig. 3. This particular cam has
four adjustable lobes, but a larger or smaller number of
lobes can be used.
Cam for Guiding a Follower Along a Square Path.-
A mechanism for guiding a pointer along a square path
is illustrated in Fig. 4. The rotating shaft A, through the
action of cam B and dovetailed slides C and D, causes the
pointer E to follow the square contour indicated by the dot-
and-dash outline. The horizontal slide D is mounted in the
stationary member F, which also serves as a bearing for
the shaft A,. and the vertical slide C is mounted in the
slide D. Elongated holes are provided in both slides so that
the slides will clear the shaft in operation.
Alternate vertical and horizontal movements of slide C
are obtained through the action of the positive cam B, the
lay-out of which is shown in Fig. 5. Here it will be seen
6 CAM APPLICATIONS AND SPECIAL CAM DESIGNS CAM APPLICATIONS AND SPECIAL CAM DESIGNS 7
Fig. 5. Lay-out of Cam Used on
Mechanism Shown in Fig. 4
R
tions of the cam are in con-
tact with the surfaces K
and H, preventing slide C
fro m moving vertically.
However, when the pointer
E reaches position G these
concentric surfaces contact
with surfaces J and Land
s
prevent horizontal move-
ment of slide C. In the
meantime, the cam rises
come in contact with the
surfaces K and H and raise
the slide C until the pointer
reaches position M. These alternate vertical and horizontal
movements guide the pointer E in its required path.
Combination Cam and Parallel Motion for Guiding
Spindle in Square Path.-The mechanism shown in Fig. 6
was designed to guide the center of the spindle A along a
square pathway indicated by lines M and N. It is used in
conjunction with a woodworking machine for gouging out
an endless grooved recess of square contour into which a
decorative insert is fitted. The movement involves two sep-
arate motions-a cam motion and a parallel motion. The
former is the actuating member which imparts the move-
ment to the follower, while the latter serves merely to
maintain the direction of motion of the follower. By the
use of interchangeable cams and follower plates, as ex-
plainedlater, the follower can be made to follo'w paths of
various dimensions.
The mechanism is mounted on the machine frame B, and
consists chiefly of cam C, follower D which carries the cut-
ter-spindle A, and the parallel motion links E, F, and G.
The follower is connected to the stationary bracket H
through these links. With this arrangement, the angular
position of the follower will remain unchanged, regardless
o
c
B
A
~ ~
I
I
J-
+-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
+--
I
1---..,.--====---=::::::::::--4---'-- -t--
I
I
I
--l-
I
--+
I
I
I
I J
I
I
I
I
-...L.
I
-T
I
-r------'--I----t---.-------....
I I I I I I
F
Fig. 4. Positive Cam Movement for Guiding Pointer E along
Square l'ath Indicated by Dot-and-dash Lines
is in its lowest position and has just completed one half of
the horizontal movement imparted by the cam B. As the
cam continues to rotate in the direction of the arrow, slide C
will move toward the left, carrying pointer E to position G.
During the entire horizontal movement the concentric por-
that sections PQ and RS are concentric with the shaft A,
and sections RP and SQ are drawn by scribing arcs having
centers at Sand R, respectively, to form the rises of the
cam.
Referring again to Fig. 4, pointer E, attached to slide C,
of its location relative to the cam. The cam is of the tri-
angular type, imparting movement in the four directions
required.
From the position shown the cam is rotated in a clock-
wise direction. Since edges J and K are concentric with the
camshaft, continued rotation of the cam will not impart a
ilorizontal movement to the follower; but the upper edge L
of the cam will raise the follower so that the center of the
spindle will move along a path coinciding with the line M.
When the curved edge J becomes tangent to the top cam
surface of the follower, the center of the spindle will co-
incide with the top end of line M and the vertical move-
ment of the follower will cease. Edge L will now force the
follower toward the right so that the spindle center will
follow a path coinciding with line N.
The action of the cam and follower is the same for each
side of the square over which the spindle center passes.
This cam is of the positive type, since the distance between
the two points at which the edges of the cam intersect a line
passing through the center of the camshaft is the same, re-
gardless of the angularity of the line.
If the spindle is required to follow a square path of
smaller dimensions, the cam surfaces of the follower are
lined by means of four flanged plates, and a cam giving the
required throw is substituted for the one shown. The cam-
plate can be quickly attached by means of screws which pass
through the plate flanges into tapped holes R.
Owing to the movement of the spindle in a plane normal
to its axis, the upper end of the spindle is provided with
two universal joints and a sliding sleeve. This provides a
flexible connection with the upper driving shaft of the ma-
chine. Since, however, this arrangement is a common one,
it is not shown. The follower is supported in its overhang-
ing position from the bracket H by two pads integral with
the follower, which rest on finished pads cast on the ma-
chine frame. In order to compensate for wear in the lever
and link connections, the connection pins were designed as
shown in the cross-section. With this arrangement, any
wear can be taken up by tightening the check-nuts Q.
Fig. 6. Meohanism for Guiding Tool along a Path of Square Outline
o
Fig. 7. Mechanism for Accelerating Speed of Driven Shaft During
a Portion of Ea.ch Revolution
mounted on shafts A and B. The bearing G carries the
flanged disk H, which is slotted at S to receive the pins
E and F in the disks C and D. The feet of bearing G are
slotted so that the position of the bearing may be changed
in relation to shafts A and B. The motion of shaft B is
transmitted to shaft 'by the pins E and F, which act in
the slot S in disk H.
In the position shown in the illustration, bearing G is
so located that the axis of disk H coincides with that of
shafts A and B, in which case the motion of shaft B is
transmitted uniformly to shaft A. If the bearing G is
moved to one side, the axis of disk H is thrown out of
alignment with those of shafts A and B. As disk H then
revolves in the same plane but on a different axis from
shafts A and B, the pins E and F will alternately approach
and recede from the center of disk H, thus imparting a
periodically fast and slow motion to disk C. The amount
of variation in the motion given shaft A is controlled by
the amount of movement given bearing G.
An interesting application of this mechanism was made
on a machine on which shaft A carried a cam. The speed
with which the operating point of the cam passed under
the follower was varied by shifting the bearing G.
Right. and Left-Hand Threaded Cam for Converting
Rotary into Oscillating Motion.- A simple mechanism for
converting rotary into oscillating motion consists of a cylin-
der having a right- and left-hand thread and a half-nut
made as shown in Fig. 8. This mechanism was incorporated
in a specially constructed printing press for the purpose
of imparting a reciprocating motion to the rollers which
assists in distributing the ink. A similar arrangement can
be used in numerous other applications, when the speed of
rotation is not too high and the load is not too great.
In the application referred to, three rollers were used
for distributing the ink. The two outside rollers were
CAM APPLICATIONS AND SPECIAL CAM DESIGNS
o
Changing Cam Speed by Transforming Uniform Circular
Motion into Periodic Variable Motion.-Fig. 7 shows a
mechanism by means of which a uniform circular motion
is transformed into a periodic variable circular motion.
The driven shaft A and the driving shaft B rotate in bear-
ings located on the same axis. Disks C and D are securely
10
and carry ballbearing pins that work against the flanges
of spools on the ink-distributing rollers. Thus, as the rocker
arms move back and forth, they transmit the required mo-
tions to the ink-distributing rollers.
The half-nut B is made from a T-shape, the thickness of
the stem being equal to,the width of the thread groove. The
stem is formed to a concave shape to fit the contour of the
root diameter of the thread, while its over-all length is
made somewhat greater than the outside diameter of the
thread. Its minimum length must be such as to more than
span the gap made by the crossing of the right- and left-
hand threads. At the center of the T-shaped bar is an
elongated hole D, which slides over a pin E attached to the
crank-arm. Thus, pin E causes the crank to rock back and
forth with the longitudinal travel of the nut. An elongated
hole is necessary for pin E, since the arm swings in an arc
while the nut travels in a straight line.
When the half-nut approaches the end of its travel in
one direction, its axis is on an angle with the center line of
the shaft. This angle is equal to the pitch angle of the
screw. In order to reverse the travel, the axis of the half-
nut must pivot about pin E until it is in the proper angular
position for the reverse traverse motion imparted by the
thread of the opposite hand lead.
The last thread on the cylinder C is cut back a sufficient
distance to allow the half-nut to pivot, and the "following"
edge where the thread runs out at the end is filed back
sufficiently to allow the nut to clear this surface and the
end flange. The nut is also beveled at the edge where it
enters the thread. The threaded cylinder C and the half-
nut B are shown separately in the views to the left.
This mechanism operates smoothly, having a short dwell
at each end of the stroke while the nut reverses and picks
up the opposite thread. In the printing press application,
the two outside rollers are operated by a double rocker arm
which causes them to move an equal amount in opposite
Fig. 8. y l i ~ e r .cam C with Right- and Left-hand Threads Designed to Reverse
DIrectIon of Travel of Half.nut B at Each End of Stroke
thus Imparting an Oscillating Motion to Lever A '
12
operated by a double rocker arm actuated by the crank-
arm A, which is fitted with a half-nut B. The right- and
left-hand threaded cylinder C at one end of a rotating
shaft serves to oscillate or move the end of arm A forward
and back. The center ink-distributing roller is moved by
a single rocker arm driven by another threaded cylinder
similar to the one shown at C. The rocker arms are pivoted
14 CAM APPLICATIONS AND SPECIAL CAM DESIGNS CAM APPLICATIONS AND SPECIAL CAM DESIGNS 15
I
I I
I

"1 I
[
-_L. I.."'l-
-- ----" N
'"
0
...
'd
.;
5.
G/
pt
:3
G/
a
G/
l>
;Ii
60
G/
G/
...
*
0
E-4
....
0
$
oj
pt
to
oj on

-S1;l

'dO
a60
LJ..
>-

qj'a
;t..
tn:a
UJ
a c>
z
0

I-
G/(l)
rz.:..
()
G/
....
I.LJ
0...
(J)
A
l:1
0
x

*

z
1 0
i=
qj
() 60
W

"
CI)
oj
@
:..
0
....
'a
oj
c>
:;
Q
directions. It is desirable to introduce as much variety as

possible into the motion of the three rollers in order to
smooth out the ink more effectively. For this reason, the
leverage for the crank-arm of the center roller is made
somewhat different from that for the outside rollers. In
this case, the length of the thread on the cam for actuating
the crank-arm of the center roller is longer than that of
the cam for the outside rollers. With this arrangement,
the center roller continuously varies its position in relation
to the outer rollers.
Mechanism for Making Quick Change in Angular
Positions of Feed Cams.- The staggered production re-
quirements and the available tool equipment for rough-
turning several parts of similar design necessitated
ing the angular relationship of the two principal feed-cams
on one shaft for each tool set-up. The arrangement pro-
vided to permit the positions of the cams to be. changed
quickly to suit the machining requirements of the different
parts is shown in Fig. 9.
Cam A on shaft B is driven by shaft C through keys D
in sleeve E. Keys D operate in spiral slots F. Pin G fits
in sleeve E and extends through slots H of shaft B. Pin G
also extends through the shifter shaft J in shaft B. Axial
movement of shifter shaft J, by means of lever K, from
position V to Z causes cam A to advance clockwise in rela-
tion to cam L. This movement of sleeve E from position
S to T causes keys D to operate in slots F of shaft c.
Shaft J is piloted in shaft C to maintain the alignment of
shafts Band C. The follower on cam A is released when
changing cam positions. Shifter lever K is provided with
conventional means (not shown) for locking in any of the
required positions.
Cam and Eccentric Combinations.- The vertical ram B,
Fig. 10, is given the required motion by combining a cam
and a crank or eccentric motion. In this mechanism, gear C
supports cam D and gear E supports the eccentric A. The
Fig. 10. Combination of Gears, Crank, Cam and Eccentric
for Operating Ram
17
Fig. 11. Levers Operated by Cam and Eccentric Cambinations
mitted by means of a rod B to the bellcrank C, which is
required to oscillate or swing back and forth through an
angle of approximately 80 degrees about the center of
shaft D.
To obtain this movement, the driving cam E must have
a rise of about 121/32 inches. The quick rise in the cam
groove required to meet this condition, however, prevented
the mechanism from being satisfactory for this particular
Compound Cam Drive to Reduce Cam Rise.- The pos-
sibilities of mechanisms consisting of links, gears, and
cams for imparting oscillating movements to bellcranks are
indicated by the illustrations Fig. 12. These mechanisms
.are incorporated in a shoe-sewing machine. The first de-
sign, shown in the view to the left, consists of a simple cam
drive. The motion of the swinging member A is trans-
E
F
G

I
I
I
,
crankpin, as shown in the upper view, Fig. 11. For special
cases, the cam profile may also take the form of an eccentric
disk. In that event, the form of the mechanism can be
changed, so that the cam is replaced by an eccentric which
actuates a rod. The crank-arm can also be replaced by an
eccentric A, as shown in the lower view. This gives a
simple mechanism having two eccentric rods coupled to-
gether by means of a link G.
sliding member F which carries the fulcrum of the lever G
is driven by means of a connecting-rod H. The movements
of both the' cam and the crank serve to give the lever G
a long stroke. A small slideway at the outer end of lever G
provides the connection with the ram B.
The sliding member F may be omitted in some cases and
the end of lever G connected directly to an eccentric on a
16
application. An enlargement of the base diameter of the
cam disk or a change in the distance between the fulcrum
of the lever and the cam axis to overcome this difficulty was
impractical.
For this reason, the improved mechanism shown in the
view to the right w ~ designed. In the latter mechanism,
an additional motion is irp.parted to the swinging lever by
the use of another cam. The two cams F and G are driven
in opposite directions by spur gears Hand J, which are
of equal size. These gears revolve on the same axis as the
cams that they drive. Cam F actuates roller K attached to
the slide L, which is mounted between guides on the cam-
plate. The lever M is attached to the slide L and receives
an additional motion from the cam disk G through the
roller N.
The motion of bellcrank lever P is derived from lever M
through rod Q. As shown in the illustration, the stroke of
lever M is greatly increased by the two cams F and G and
the slide L. The rise of each cam in the new mechanism is
reduced to about 5/8 inch. The mechanism described works
satisfactorily at speeds ranging from 400 to 500 revolu-
tions of the driving gears per minute.
Long-Stroke Camof Small Diameter with Rapid Return.-
Cylindrical cams of the usual type for imparting a rela-
tively long and powerful stroke to the follower must neces-
sarily be large. Frequently this is undesirable, especially
in a machine of light construction. In designing a certain
machine for inserting the packing in stuffing-boxes, a rather
long stroke of a slide was required to press the packing
into place. The return or idle stroke was to be rapid. Be-
cause of the light construction of the machine and the
elevated position of the cam, it was desirable to have the
cam of small diameter, as well as light.
To meet these requirements, the cam mechanism illus-
trated in Fig. 13 was developed. It consists of the cylin-
,"r'------
, ..... i,
". \
~ .
\ \ ~
\ \
\ \
\ \ \
". \ \
.... \ \
\
\
18
drical cam A, secured to a shaft running in the stationary
bearings B. The cam is rotated by means of a worm (not
shown) and worm-gear C, and is engaged by the follower
roll D on the slide E. This slide is mounted on the machine
column M and carries the levers G and J on the shaft N.
Although both levers, are free to rotate on the shaft, the
lower lever G is normally held against the pin Oin lever J
by means of the coil spring L. The upper end of lever J is
connected to a plunger P. This plunger slides in a bearing
cast integral with the slide and carries the follower roll.
A counterweight on cable H returns the slide to its upper
position, the upward movement being limited by stop Q on
the slide and adjusting screw R on the machine column.
Stop K is fastened to the machine column and serves to
operate levers G and J for engaging the roll with the cam
groove at the top of the stroke as explained later.
In the position shown, the slide is about to begin its down-
ward stroke. As the cam is rotated in the direction of the
arrow, the slide moves downward until the roll has reached
the part of the groove at F. Here the bottom of the groove
is sloped gradually toward the outside of the cam; thus
when the cam continues to rotate, the roll is forced out of
the groove and the slide is returned to the upper position
by the counterweight. Just before the slide reaches the
upper position, the lever G comes into contact with the
stop K and swings lever J with plunger P toward the left
carrying the end of the roll stud against the cam. At the
top of the stroke the roll is forced into the groove through
the action of coil spring L. As the cam continues to rotate,
the slide is once more carried downward.
Axial Movement from Mating Cam Sections Rotating
at Different Speeds.- Certain copper tubes used in con-
nection with steam-heating apparatus are covered with
strips of copper, the strip being wound around the tube
and soldered. The strip and the solder must be removed
fromthe ends of the tubes to provide a bare length of 1 inch
Fig. 13. Rotary Cam in which Roll is Disengaged at the Bottom of
the Stroke to Allow the Slide to be Returned Rapidly by a Counter-
weight. Ite-engagement Takes Place at the Top of the Stroke
i ~ 14. Seotional. and Plan Vi.ew Showing Toolfeeding Mechanism Equipped with
1rIatmg Oam SeotIons which Rotate at Different Rates
to Provide the Motion Required
for connection to a tank or header. This "stripping" of the
tube ends is done by using a machine having three cutters,
which are held radially and feed inward as the cutter-head
rotates about the tube. The machine used for this work
is shown by the sectional and plan views.
The end of a wound tube (represented by the zigzag
lines) is pushed over a' stationary pilot B, Fig. 14, which
fits snugly inside the tube. An air-operated clamp is next
tightened and the tube is ready for the stripping operation.
The head of the machine, which contains the three cutters
(one of which is shown at D), revolves continually at the
rate of 600 revolutions per minute, and when a clutch is
tripped by a foot-pedal, the three tools feed inward a dis-
tance of 3/4 inch at the rate of about 0.018 inch per revolu-
tion. The mechanism for obtaining and controlling this
feeding movement is the interesting feature of the machine.
The drive from the motor to the cutter-head is through
gears F and G. Gear G is attached to the main spindle K,
which connects with the cutter-head. A head L, which is
rotated by the cutter-head proper, is free to slide for a
limited distance along spindle K. Attached to sliding head L
there is a cam M which fits a mating cam N. Cam N is
free to revolve on spindle K, and it has attached to it a
gear H which meshes with the gear J.
Before the tool feeding movement begins, cam M drives
the mating section N through the step or shoulder 0 (see
plan view), and gears Hand J revolve idly. When the
tools are to be fed inward, cam N is rotated 40 1/2 revolu-
tions to 40 revolutions of cam M. The result is that cam N
exerts a wedging effect against M, causing the latter, with
head L, to slide along the spindle. When this sliding move-
ment occurs, racks R, attached to sliding head L, transmit
this movement through pinions to racks S, attached to the
cutter-holders. The method of obtaining this differential
movement between cam sections M and N will now be de-
scribed.
23
25
Duplex Cam Action for Turning Cam Contour and
Maintaining Proper Cutting Angle of Tool.-A special
movement, embodied in a camshaft lathe, controls the turn-
ing tool by two sets of cams, so that the cutting angle in
relation to the cam outline will always be the same. A par-
tial cross-section of the lathe showing the carriage slide can
be seen in Fig. 15. Both the cam at the top and the one
at the left revolve at the same number of revolutions per
minute as the camshaft to be machined. The cam at the
left is used as a master while the top cam controls the
swinging motion of the tool about the horizontal axis in
such a way that the cutting angle remains constant.
With the combined movements of both cams, the desired
result is obtained. The master cam at the left is ground ac-
curately in the lathe by using a grinding wheel in place of
the cam. roller and of the same size, while a suitable mem-
ber engages a revolving cam of correct form on a shaft
between the lathe centers.
Cross-section of Lathe, Showing Cams tha.t Maintain
Consta.nt Cutting Angle of Tool
Fig. 15.
In order to start the tool-feeding movement, a clutch trip
lever is raised by depressing a foot-pedal. This releases
a clutch dog or plunger connecting plate P through a clutch
with the shaft of worm-wheel W, which is rotated continu-
ally from the driving shaft. As soon as plate P begins to
revolve, the dog or clutch lever R is forced out of the notch
in plate P, thus connecting, through a clutch, the driving
shaft with gear J; consequently, cam section N is now
driven from shaft E through gears J and H, and since it
rotates 40 1/2 revolutions to 40 revolutions of cam M, the
wedging action and traversing movement previously re-
ferred to occurs. This difference in the speeds of cams
M and N is due, of course, to the ratios of gears F and G
as conlpared with gears J and H. Gear F has 25 teeth
and G 40 teeth; hence, for each turn of gear G, F makes
40
40/25 turn. Therefore, 40 turns of G require - X 40 = 64
25
turns of shaft E and gear F. For each turn of gear J, H
makes 31/49 turn, as J has 31 teeth and H 49 teeth; hence,
31
if J makes 64 turns then H will make - X 64 = 40 1/2
49
turns.
While the driving shaft is turning sixty-four times in
order to complete one cycle in the movement of the feeding
mechanism, plate P is turned 64/65 revolution, as the
worm-wheel W has sixty-five teeth. At the end of the
cycle, clutch lever R is again opposite the notch in plate
P and gear J is disconnected from the driving shaft, thus
stopping the feeding movement automatically. Shoulder 0
on cam N is also around to the point where section M can
slide back into engagement, which it is forced to do by
means of springs concealed in the cutter-head. The differ-
ence in the speeds of the two cam sections is so slight that
this re-engagement occurs easily and without objectionable
shock.
27

a
<It
l>

r:l
11
'0
r:l
H
"OJ
1:l
0
1:

ClIl
I
.c
'0
4>

0
::l
0
r<t
i
2
l>
0
::ot

.s

FJ
cS
5
til
1
II
a
ol
0
<is
.g
:a

.S

'a
w
.g
(/)

<
co
tD
>-
p4
0:::

<
z
0

l-
(/)
Double-Acting Cam which Oscillates Follower and also
Indexes it Horizontally.-In the mechanism shown in
Fig. 16, a cam is used to impart an oscillating movement, as
well as a horizontal indexing movement, to the table of a
machine for sawing teeth in combs. A comb is clamped
rigidly between the straps A on the table C. This table
oscillates about the bearing B and receives its motion from
the cam E acting against the follower D. The cam is driven
by a belt passing over the pulley I. The circular saw G
revolves in stationary bearings, the comb being fed to it by
the oscillating action of the table.
The principal feature of this cam motion is the manner
in which the horizontal movement is imparted to the comb
for cutting the successive teeth. On the outside of the cam
is cut a continuous V-groove which engages corresponding
grooves in the follower D. The several turns of the groove
on the cam follow a parallel plane perpendicular to the
center line of the shaft K until they approach the dwelling
portion H, where they are deflected to one side a distance
equal to the pitch of the groove. This pitch is also equal to
that of the slots being cut in the comb. The grooves in the
follower, however, are not continuous but are a series 'of
separate grooves.
In the position shown, the table is at its lowest point and
the saw has just completed cutting a tooth in the comb. As
the cam continues to revolve in the direction of the arrow
an upward movement is imparted to the table. When the
dwelling surface of the cam has come in contact with the
follower, the comb is clear of the saw, and the horizontal
or indexing movement of the table begins, continuing until
the follower has passed over the angular portion of the cam
groove. Further movement of the cam carries the table
downward, causing the comb to be fed against the saw for
cutting th,e next tooth. This completes the cycle of opera-
tions. The follower D does not revolve in actual operation,
but can be adjusted to present new wearing surfaces. The
28
...
design of this mechanism permits the use of interchange-
able cams and followers for slotting combs having teeth of
different pitches.
Straight-Line Movement Applied to a Cam Follower.-
A practical application of a straight-line movement ob-
tained by means of a link and a lever is shown in Fig. 17.
Fig, 1'1. Application of a. Simple Straightline Motion to the-
Follower Roll E
This movement is applied to the follower roll of a cam on
an automatic machine intended for sawing slots in latch
needles.
The roll E moves 3 inches forward and backward, and
the return movement is effected during one-twelfth of a
revolution of cam C. Originally, the roll lever A was pivoted
to the stationary bracket B, and was not equipped with the
auxiliary link D. Consequently, the center of the roll E fol-
lowed a curved path,aIid on the return of the lever A, the
roll had a tendency to leave the cam surface, especially
when the machine was operated at high speed. This action
caused the roll to strike the low point of the cam with an
appreciable impact during each cycle.
To overcome this condition, the pivot hole in the upper
end of the lever A was elongated and the link D added to
force the roll E to travel in a straight instead of a curved
path. The center distance between the pivot F and the
roll E is equal to that of the holes in the ends of the link.
The lower end of the link is pivoted to the bracket, while
its upper end is pivoted to the lever. This pivot is located
in such a position that the distance X equals one-half of
the distance Y.
As the cam rotates from the position shown, the upper
end of lever A is gradually lifted and lowered through the
3tction of the link, so that the center of the roll E follows
very closely the center line G. Thus, when the steep incline
of. the cam is reached, the roll is returned along the same
straight line and remains in contact with the incline in-
stead of leaving the cam surface, as when the roll followed
a curved path.
Varying the Cam Dwell with Two Adiustable Follower
Rolls.- An increase in the variety of products manufac-
tured .in one plant made it necessary to alter some of the
wire-forming machines so that the dwelling periods of their
slides could be varied. To do this, instead of employing one
follower roll for each slide, two adjustable rolls were used,
as shown in Fig. 18. The two dwelling periods of the slides
can thus be varied to suit requirements. The cam, indi-
cated at A, is secured to the driving shaft and engages both
rolls Band C. The rolls are mounted on flanged bushings
and secured to slide D by studs. They can be adj usted to
any position along the curved T-slot E.
The amount of dwell and the timing of the rise and fall
of the slide depend upon the distance between the two rolls
Double-Faced Cam for Rapid Rise without Excessive
Side Thrust.- The cam for operating the slide of a certain
machine required a rapid rise without excessive side thrust.
To meet this requirement, a double-faced cam was used (see
Fig. 19). Each face or edge of this cam C has a rise equal
to one-half the total rise required. The cam has a sliding
fit on shaft A, and if is revolved by the driving gear G
which meshes with gear teeth extending around the center
of the cam.
Fig. 18. The Dwelling Period and Timing of This Cam ca.n bo
Varied by Simply Changing the Positions of the
Two Follower Rolls
and their .location along the T-slot. For instance, if the
slide were required to dwell longer in its upper position,
the distance between the rolls would be increased. On the
other hand, if the dwelling time in the upper position was
to be decreased, the rolls would be brought closer together.
The time at which the rise and fall of the slide occurs may
be varied by adj usting the rolls along the T-slot without
changing their center distance.
Fig. 19. Double-faced Cam which Moves Driven Slide a. Distance Equal to Sum
of Leads of Both "Faces
As the cam rotates it rises, owing to the fact that it rests
on a roller R, which is supported by the machine frameF
and remains stationary except for rotation about its own
axis.. Bearing against the top face of the cam is another
roller RI, which is supported by slide S; this slide is the
one that is operated by the cam. It will be evident that
when the cam makes one revolution, slide S moves a dis-
tance equal to the sum of the leads of both cam faces, but
roller R1 and the slide take the thrust of only one cam face.
Reciprocating Motion to Square Bar from Cam Made
of Helical Gear Segments.-A novel and what proved to
be a very practical application of helical gear segments and
pinions is shown by Fig. 20. Shaft A has an intermittent
rocking movement, which is alternately clockwise and coun-
ter-clockwise. The range of these movements is through
an angle of about 5 degrees. This rocking lever is required
to impart an endwise movement to the square bar or
shaft B. For this purpose, a segment of a single helical
multiple of 4 and cutting four keyways in the shaft hole,
it is possible to bring new teeth of the pinion into the work-
ing position when wear takes place by changing the posi-
tion of the gear on the shaft. When the square shaft B
can be made to serve equally well in any position, only one
keyway is necessary, .\as the shaft and gear can be keyed
together as a solid unit and relocated in one of four posi-
tions to bring unworn teeth into contact with the seg-
ment C. The segment C is supported on each side, a roller
FRONT VIEW
Fig, 21. Mechanism for Transmitting Motion to Three Levers of a
Wire-bending Ma.chine
--- -
-1 A
l_.,j
-+-t .,
-I I ,k

__..J
I
I
I
I
-J
Fig, 20, Relical Gear Segment and PinIon as Cams to Produce
Longitudinal Reciprocation from Rocklng Movement
gear C is attached to lever D, and a helical pinion F of equal
angle, but of opposite hand, is fitted to the shaft B. Shaft B,
being square, cannot rotate, and is therefore forced to move
endwise.
The helical segments and the helical pinions used in this
construction were much less expensive than cams. A com-
plete ring gear furnishes enough segments for several ma-
chines. By making the number of teeth in the pinion a
support being used when necessary to reduce the friction
load. Gears with teeth having a helix angle of 45 degrees
or more give satisfactory performance in this kind of
service.
Double Cam Drive for Three Reciprocating Rods.-
The lever-motion mechanism shown in Fig. 21 is used on
a wire-forming machine to obtain the motions described in
the following: Two rods J and L are given a reciprocating
motion, the timing relationship of which must be adjust-
able. Each of these rods must pass through a complete cycle
of motions for each revolution of the drive shaft, although
they never operate simultaneously. A third rod K is given
a similar reciprocating motion of lesser magnitude. The
latter rod, however, must pass through two complete cycles
for each revolution of the drive shaft, each cycle being per-
formed simultaneously with the cycle of the other two rods.
Any change in the timing relationship between the first two
rods must be automatically transmitted to the third rod.
The cams A and B operate at the same speed, and impart
the required oscillating movements to the levers C and D.
Cams A and B, although similar in outline, are set with
their lobes approximately 180 degrees apart, and each cam
can be adjusted slightly in its timing relationship with the
other cam. Lever C fulcrums on stud E, while lever D
fulcrums on stud F. Studs E and F are so located that
levers C and D are in a horizontal position when their oscil-
lating ends are held at their lowest points by the cams.
Lever I is supported on studs G and H, carried on the
oscillating ends of levers C and D, respectively. Rods J, K,
and L are attached to levers C, I, and D, respectively, and
serve to transmit the motion to the required points. As
lever C is oscillated by cam A, lever I is given a similar
motion, being pivoted on stud H, which is held in a fixed
position by cam B.
After lever C has passed through its cycle and come to
rest, lever I is given a similar movement at the opposite
end by cam B through lever D. As the movement of lever 1
is produced entirely by levers C and D, it must always ~
erate in exact synchronism with these levers, regardless of
the adjustment of cams A and B. The front view shows
the levers at rest. The side view shows rod K moved to its
lowest point by the action of lever I.
Obtaining Instantaneous Movement of Cam-Operated
Lever.- One of the best known means of imparting a very
quick movement in one direction to a reciprocating part of
an automatic machine is by a cam and spring mechanism,
such as shown in Fig. 22. The member to be actuated (not
shown) is attached to the upper end of link A. The other
end of this link is connected to the rocker lever B, pivoted
on stud C. Lever B acts in conjunction with cam J through
roller E and spring F.
The left-hand diagram shows the mechanism just at the
end of a dwell period of the lever B. Further rotation of
the cam in the direction indicated by the arrow will result
in roller E dropping into the recess of the cam and thus
producing a quick downward movement of lever Band
link A. It is clear that no matter how heavily spring F is
loaded, there is a relatively slow accelerating movement of
lever B while point G of the cam moves from the position
shown to point K on roller E, or along the arc GK. Only
. when the cam has made an angular movement equivalent
to angle GDH does lever B completely lose the restraint
imposed upon it by the cam and roller and allow spring F
to pull lever B downward with a quick motion. The point H
is found at the intersection of the cam outline with an
arc KH swung about stud C as a center and tangent to
roller E.
The angle GDH, through which the cam rotates during
the delayed action, depends primarily on the length of the
radius of the roller E and to a much smaller extent upon
the lengths CK and GD. This angle represents, in terms
of angular velocity of the cam, the delay in the time of the
snappy spring action, the delay being greater the larger
the roller size, the shorter the roller arm CS, and the slower
the rotation of the cam.
In most cases, this delay is not objectionable. It may
even be welcome in some cases, as it results in much less
shock to the mechanism. However, there are occasions
when this delay must be eliminated, as for instance, when
a hot fluid which sets very quickly must be pumped into a
mold. Under such conditions, a very sudden action on the
fluid-forcing pistons is desired. The right-hand diagram
shows how this action can be effected by the addition of a
few parts.
At the side of cam J is mounted an auxiliary shoe M,
which is rotated about shaft D. This shoe engages the
square block L, which is held rigidly to the lever B. Lobe
NQ of the shoe M remains in contact with block L for
some time after cam J has lost contact with the roller E.
During the time cam J and shoe M are rotating from the
position shown to the point of release, lever B remains
nearly stationary, as the lobe NQ of shoe M slides under-
neath the flat face of block L.Further movement of the
cam and shoe in the same direction results in an instan-
taneous drop of lever B.
Following the sudden drop of lever B, shoe M and block L
are inoperative. After the desired dwell, the follower is
restored to its initial position by the lobe P of the cam,
which acts upon the roller E alone. Just before the end of
the cycle of shaft D, both the roller and the block engage
the cam and the shoe simultaneously. A little care in the
design of the details insures smooth operation.
The angular margin between points Nand G can be ma-
terially reduced without danger of the roller interfering
with the cam during the, sudden drop. If desired, this an-
gular margin can be increased, provided lobe NQ of the
shoe is made of sufficient size. This is a very desirable
feature, as the exact moment of the drop can be adjusted
Fig. 23. Cam-actuated Lever that Always Returns to its Starting Position,
Regardless of the Part of the Cycle in which the Machine is Stopped
The mechanism consists chiefly of a disk B which rotates
continuously in the direction of the arrow and a cam C
which is pivoted on the disk shaft D and held normally
against the spring bumper E by spring F.
As the disk rotates from the position shown, cam C and
lever A become loclfed and remain stationary until the
lug G, secured to the disk, comes in contact with tne roll H
on the lever. Further movement of the disk then forces the
lever toward the right, so that the upper roll J on the lever
will move out of the hooked part of the cam. The remain-
ing part of the stroke of lever A is imparted by the cam
through the action of spring F. As the end of the cam
passes roll J, the lever is immediately returned to its start-
ing position by the spring K.
With this arrangement, it is obvious that the movement
of the lever is obtained through a trigger action between
cam C and roll J and regardless of the position in which
disk B may stop, the lever will always return to its' starting
position when roll J is released.
If, however, the disk is stopped during the angular ~ o v
ment a of lever A, that is, before the roll J is released, the
lever also will stop and will not return to its starting 'posi-
tion. In the present application, however, the lever does
not begin to function until it has moved through this angle,
and hence is sufficiently near its starting position to fulfill
the conditions reqUired.
Single Cam Action Performs Four Different Functions.-
An excellent example of a multiple cam action in which
four movements are obtained essentially by one simple
edge-cam is shown in Fig. 24. It is applied to a device
used for capping bottles, and although two cams are used
here, they are identical and impart the same movements
simultaneously. The cam arrangement is such that by
swinging the forked lever G toward the right, a split collar
or "table" grips the neck of the bottle, the table being auto-
matically locked in this position while continued movement
K
"'-/\ /\ 1-----
'-7'V VVL _
within fairly wide limits, independent of the exact moment
of the withdrawal movement.
Cam Mechanism that Returns Lever to its Starting
Position when .Machine is- Stopped.- In a certain type of
machine, an oscillating lever is required to return to its
starting position, or very near it, regardless of the part
of the cycle in which the machine is stopped. This lever,
which is indicated at A in Fig. 23, controls the movement
of an independent feeding device on the machine.
38
o
of the lever causes the cap to be forced in place. To re-
move the device from the bottle after the capping opera-
tion, the lever' is merely returned to its original position.
One of the outstanding features in the design of this de-
vice is'that only one screw is required in its assembly. No
machining is done on any of the parts, as sufficient clear-
ance has been allowed to permit the use of unfinished cast-
ings. This arrangement resulted in an inexpensive product
which in no way affects its utility. The body A is cast in
two parts, which are held together by the interlocking hooks
at B and the screw C. The cup-shaped capping hood D is
held in place between the two halves of the body and pre-
vented from rotating by the two lugs E. Inside the cap-
ping hood is a rubber pad F which is forced into place and
held by a stem projecting through a hole in both the hood
and the body.
The forked capping lever G has two pins H cast integral
with it. These pins serve as a pivot for the lever and en-
gage holes in the lower part of the body. On each side of
the forked lever is a cam J. The most important part of
the device is the split collar or table which consists of two
parts-the lifting cam-plate K and the guide plate D, the
latter having a sliding fit in the body. Both parts of this
table are interlocked, as shown in Fig. 25.
The cams J on the capping lever impart four different
movements. When lever G is in its farthest position to-
ward the left, the table halves are separated in order to
permit the open end of the bottle to pass through. Separa-
tion of the table halves, as indicated in both sectional views,
is accomplished as the point of the cam engages the proj ec-
tion M on the cam-plate. Referring to the extreme left-
hand view, it will be noted that the table halves are to-
gether, in position to grip the neck of the bottle. This is
done with the portion R of the cam as it engages the pro-
jection N on the cam-plate when lever G is swung toward
the right. Continuation of this lever movement (see ex-
CAM APPLICATIONS AND SPECIAL CAM DESIGNS 43 CAM APPLICATIONS AND SPECIAL CAM DESIGNS
treme right-hand view) causes the cam to rotate into a
position where it has forced the cap down over the bottle
top, thus completing the operation.
During the capping operation, there is a side thrust on
the cam-plate K which tends to separate the halves of the
table. This would, of course, permit the bottle neck to pass
through the table. To prevent this, latches 0 are provided
on the cam-plate. These iatches hook over the end of the
guide plate and lock the two halves after they have been
closed around the neck of the bottle.
When the lever G is swung toward the left to open the
table halves, the cams on this lever tilt the cam-plate K
enough to disengage the latch and permit it to pass under
the guide plate L. This is shown clearly in the central
view. A spring P, Fig. 24, keeps the cam in contact with
the cam-plate. One end of this spring is fastened to the
body and the other end to the guide plate.
Switching Arrangement for Cylindrical Cam with
Intersecting Grooves.-Cylindrical cams having intersect-
ingroll grooves are sometimes used when a cam of small
diameter is desired, or when two revolutions of the cam-
shaft are required to one cycle of the follower. These
cams have also found application in sewing machines, gas
engines, etc. In the ordinary cam of this type, the break
.in the grooves at their intersection necessitates the use of
a follower of .special design, because a roll would become
wedged at this point. The roll is usually replaced by an
oblong shoe, the sides of which curve inward at the ends
so that the shoe will be a sliding fit in any part of the
groove.
This arrangement is not always satisfactory when a
smooth action of the follower is required, owing to the in-
creased clearance around the shoe at the intersection of
the groove. Moreover, at this point, the pressure of the
sides of the shoe against the corners of the groove causes
a great deal of wear on both members. These objections
ell
a
oj
0
=
~
Eo!
Q)
.:=
....
l
,.0
't:l
Q)
=
3
,.0
0
ell
= 0
:;:l
~
b.D
'aQ)
Po
0
't:l
a
bD
=
'a.
Po
oj
0
bD
,S
,!ol
Q
0
H
bD
~
,g
0
Q)
~
b.D
.S
..J
~
0
.:=
til
;
Q)
i):
.Q
~
~
~
0
42
are overcome,however, by the rather ingenious switching
arrangement on the cam illustrated (Fig. 26). It is en-
tirely automatic and provides a continuous groove for the
roll, regardless of which groove the roll is in.
The arrangement consists of the grooved plunger A,
member J secured to the plunger shank, and the stationary
cams Band C. These cams are mounted on the arm F
extending within the c()red portion of the cylindrical cam
and serve to rotate the plunger 90 degrees for every revolu-
tion of shaft E. Cam C has a shank which is a sliding fit
in a hole bored in the arm F. The sha.nk is backed up by
a coil spring to compensate for the interference of cam C
when engaging with member J. Pins D lock the plunger
in position after each indexing movement.
In the position shown, the lower end of plunger A has
engaged cam B. Further rotation of the cylindrical cam in
the direction of the arrow will cause cam B to force the
plunger outward until pins D have been withdrawn from
holes G. The plunger is now free to rotate. As the cylin-
drical cam continues its rotation, the end of cam C comes
in contact with lobe H on member J and rotates the plunger
90 degrees. In this position, the pins D are directly over
another set of h o l ~ like those at G, and the plunger is
seated through the action of the coil spring L and locked
-in position by the pins as they enter these holes.
The groove in the plunger is now aligned with cam groove
K in which the roll is guided as the cylindrical cam con-
tinues to rotate. For each succeeding revolution of this
cam, the indexing action of plunger A is repeated, so that
the plunger groove is always in line with the proper cam
groove. In designing a cam of this type, it should be re-
membered that the ~ m grooves must cross at an angle of
exactly 90 degrees; otherwise inaccurate alignment of the
cam .and plunger grooves will result. Hardened bushings
in the cylindrical cam may also be provided for the index-
ingpins to reduce wear at these points.
l.L.
Cam-Operated Threading Tool and Automatic Index-
ing for Multiple Thread Cutting.- To meet the demand for
an economical method of chasing quadruple threads on the
short sleeves, an automatic threading lathe was redesigned.
The usual lead-screw was replaced by a cam, and the cr03S-
feed was arranged to once in every fourth pass of the
tool. By employing a cam. and proportioning the change-
gears correctly, it was possible to index the work automat-
ically from thread to thread with each longitudinal cycle
of the tool.
A diagrammatic plan view of the lathe is shown in Fig.
27. The work, indicated at D, is mounted on an arbor and
supported in the lathe in the usual manner. The gear A on
the spindle and gear B on the camshaft K are connected by
means of an idler. On the right-hand end of the camshaft
is keyed the cam J which imparts an intermittent recipro-
cating movement to the carriage E through the bronze fol-
lower H attached to the slide G. In order to maintain con-
tact between the follower and cam, a weightM was pro-
vided, which is connected to the carriage by a cable passing
over pulley L.
The ratio of gears A and B is such that, for every revolu-
tion of the cam, the work rotates 1 3/4 revolutions. In other
words, the work assumes a new angular position at the be-
ginning of each cut. This change in position is equivalent
to 90 degrees. Thus the work is indexed smoothly from
thread to thread without employing a complicated indexing
mechanism.
Calculating Gear Ratio and Developing Cam.- The
method of calculating the gear ratio and developing the cam
for the multiple-threading operation will now be described.
In Fig. 28, the line ON was drawn equal to the cam circum-
ference, and on this line the cam was developed. Line ON
was divided into seven equal parts by vertical lines num-
bered as indicated. Since the thread to be cut was quad-
ruple, each one of these equal parts was assumed to repre-
..,
i
<II
0
::J: r:l
CD
.!Il
'"
CD
...
Hr:l
(1)0
'<:l ....
.:I]
0
ol>
.... 0>

I:: a
(1)01
Cl20
U.
(1)0
6.0
'0
...
a
rll
w

0=
8
'<:l
r:l<lf
01'
S...
ol

. 11
CI2 ...
016.0

0 ...

.... 1>,
CD,o

6.O11
.!:l8

(l)p,

8'<:l
.2

a
0
0
'<:l
CD
.
0>
'<:l
CD
r.:
01
46
sent one-fourth of a spindle turn. Thus the ratio of the
spindle turn to the cam turn is 7 to 4; that is, when the
cam completes one turn, the spindle makes 7/4 or 1 3/4
turns. Gears corresponding to this ratio have 40 and 70
teeth. The larger gear or the one having 70 teeth is mounted
on the camshaft.
Now it is obvious tlIat the part of the cam that forms the
thread must be an accurate helix, the development of which
is a straight line. To develop this line, a point was located
on vertical No.4, 3.120 inches (the thread lead) above line
ON. Through this point a straight line was drawn from
point 0 to vertical No.7. It was found that stopping the
thread-forming portion of the cam on vertical No.3 pro-
vided ample carriage travel for cutting the thread.
The exact dimensions for the cam rise were found by first
dividing the thread lead (3.120) by 4 to obtain the rise for
one-quarter revolution of the spindle, or 0.780 inch. This
rise was then multiplied by the number of spaces from 0
corresponding to three-quarters of a revolution of the spin-
dle, and the total cam rise, 2.340 inches, was obtained. The
lead (5.460 inches) for the working portion -of the cam
was found by multiplying the entire number of spaces by
the rise during one-fourth revolution of the spindle.
The dwell at the top of the cam allowed time for backing
the tool out of the thread before the carriage started on its
return movement. The longer dwell at the bottom allowed
time. for moving the tool forward and for the functioning
of the cross-feed. With this arrangement, the work rotates
continually in the same direction. To enable multiple
threads of different leads to be cut on this machine, the sizes
of suitable cams and gears can be computed by the method
described.
This lathe can also be used for chasing internal threads
in short bores. In this case, the action of the cross-feed is
reversed, so that the cutting tool will be moved toward the
center of the bore at the end of each cut.
\t)-----\----=---f---f-
0 __
1
' '-__......
o
(Y) ---t-----+----I-----I-
r-Pea1 weO 9 V ~
E
::J
I-
Cll
C\l --::0-------\--+---1-
c
"a.
en
....
48
o
Double Acting Pivoted Cam Mechanism for Folding
Die.- The forming plunger H and slides I of the die shown
in Fig. 29 are so actuated by an ingenious mechanism that
the two tabs of a flat blank are folded and tightly clenched
over the central portion, as shown at B, in one stroke of the
punch-holder C. After placing the piece in the position
shown at W, the press is tripped.
The upper surface of part G, coming in contact with stud
F, causes cam E to act on plunger H. Plunger H, acting on
the work, forces it between the ends of slides I, causing the
tabs of the work to be bent upward. As the lobe of the cam
E passes the roller P, the spring L in plunger H reacts on
cam E, causing it to swing quickly to the right until it is
restrained from further movement by stud F coming in
contact with the lower flange of part G, as shown in Fig. 30.
This has the effect of causing plunger H to rise rapidly and
thus avoid interference with the inward movement of the
slides 1. As the ram reaches its bottom position, the slides I
are operated by the cams D, causing the tabs in the work
to be folded over.
Fig. 30 shows the die with the ram at the bottom posi-
tion. As the ram ascends, the slides I return to the posi-
tions shown in Fig. 29, while the cam E, being returned to
its original position, again acts on plunger H, causing it to
press tightly on the folded tabs of the work. On this stroke
of plunger H, there are three thicknesses of metal under
it, whereas on the first stroke there were only two thick-
nesses. This causes plunger K to recede a distance equal
to one thickness of the stock. Thus the pressure on the
work will always be equal to that exerted by the spring N,
and can never be great enough to crush the work.
Two Slides in Opposite Directions with
Cam.-In redesigning a tapping ma-
used for tapping opposite sides of a part
two tapping heads were required to travel in
This movement, as first suggested, was
a.
0
'\1
II
I(
/1
a.
o
o
52
Fig. 31. Cylindrical Cam with One Groove which Serves to Move
Two Slides in Opposite Directions
ing and unloading of the work. Frequently this dwell is
unusually long, and the movement of the cam follower con-
siderable; hence, a cam of the usual design would not only
be large in proportion to other parts of the machine, but
also would require a comparatively long stroke. These ob-
jections are overcome with the cam shown in Fig. 32. This
cam is positive and compact.
slides are connected to their respective heads by the tie-
rods G and H through which the required movement is
transmitted.
Sliding Triangular Cam for Reducing Cam Size and
Stroke.- In many automatic machines, sliding cams are
employed for transmitting a straight-line movement to the
tool or the work-holder, followed by a dwell to permit load-
Fig. 30. Die Shown in Fig. 29 in Final Tab-clinching Position
tion. There are numerous cases to which this idea may be
applied, with a great reduction in construction and upkeep
cost. As indicated, one cam groove serves both heads (not
shown) . In stationary guides A and B, on opposite sides of
the cam, are slides C and D. These slides carry the rolls E
and F, both of which engage the same cam groove. The
to be obtained by means .of individual cams. A simpler
method was devised for transmitting m.ovement to both
heads from a single cylindrical cam being used, as indicated
by the diagram, Fig. 3l.
The diagram is so clear that it hardly requires a descrip-
The cam A is supported at the ends Hand J by suita.ble
bearings, and is given a reciprocating horizontal movement
by some member of the machine. It has a continuous roll
groove following a triangular path, and is equipped with
locking plates Band C for retaining the roll D in the proper
section of the groove. These locking plates are a sliding
fit in the caps E and F, and are normally held
in the position shown by coil springs.
In the position indiCated, the cam has nearly completed
its stroke toward the right. Further movementof the cam
will cause the roll to depress the locking plate B; and at the
end of the stroke, when the roll has reached the end of the
horizontal section of the groove, the plate will once more
return to the position shown.
As the movement of the cam is reversed, the roll is forced
upward along the edge of the plate and finally into the
groove, imparting a vertical upward movement to the fol-
lower arm G. This movement of the follower arm continues
during the first half of the cam stroke. During the re-
mainder of the stroke, however, the follower arm is re-
turned to its starting point, after having passed the locking
plate C, which is similar to plate B.
At this point, the movement of the cam is reversed and
the roll simply rides in the horizontal section of the groove
for the entire return stroke of the cam. During the latter
stroke no vertical movement is imparted to the roll, and
hence the follower armG dwells at this time. This completes
the cam cycle. The distance that the cam follower moves,
as well as the timing, may be varied by changing the angle
of the angular groove sections.
Double-Action Cam that Rotates Follower and Moves
it Axially.-The interesting mechanism Figs. 33 and 34 is
used in a four-slide spring-winding machine. Springs 1/2
inch in diameter and 1 1/4 inches long are made in this
machine. At one station, the spring is coiled and cut off.
It is then carried, by means of a transfer arm, to another
..,
I
I
\
\
\
\
\
\
"
""-
"-
""-
"
"
"
I II II I
I I AI I
Fig. 33. Cam Mechanism for Opera.ting Tra.nsfer Ann of Sprlng-ooilinlr Mttchine
Fig. 34. Side View oleam MeQha.nism Shown in Fig. 33
57
station, where the ends are bent parallel with its axis, after
which the completed spring is ejected from the machine.
The transfer arm moves through three different planes dur-
ing each cycle, yet all its actions are controlled by a single
cam. The reason for forming the spring ends at a separate
station is that another spring is being wound while the
preceding one is being formed. With this arrangement, the
production is practically double that obtained when the
forming was done on the coiling mandrel. As a matter of
fact, it would have been extremely difficult to perform all
the operations at one station.
The transfer arm A has two jaws B mounted on its over
c
hanging end. Between the jaws is gripped the coil spring
W, on which the coiling and cutting operations have been
performed. The jaws are centralized by the pin C against
which they are held normally by the coil spring shown. The
arm is bolted and doweled to the vertical plunger E, which
is a free fit in a long bearing cast in the machine frame.
The plunger is given a combined vertical and rotary move-
ment by means of the cam G mounted on the drive shaft H.
The connection between the cam and the plunger is made
by the roll J pivoted in the plug K. The plug, in turn, is a
free fit in a hole bored in the lower end of the plunger. Thus
the plunger. can be rotated to any position, yet the roll will
remain in the same plane, being constrained by the con-
tinuous cam groove L. As indicated, jaws B have grasped
spring Wand elevated it vertically to the position shown,
through the action of cam G. Incidentally, the coiling arbor
R has automatically receded to permit the spring to pass
upward. The lower end of plunger E is square and is a
sliding fit between the flanges of the cam. Thus, when the
square end is confined between the flanges, the plunger can-
not rotate. However, at certain points in the flanges, gaps
are provided to permit rotation of the plunger for swinging
the transfer arm 90 degrees to the forming station indicated
in dot-and-dash outline at the upper part of Fig. 34.
Fig. 35. Pla.n View of Oollar 0, Fig, 33, Showing Finger N About to
Rotate Plunger E
59
The finger N is fastened to the cam for the purpose of
rotating the plunger at this time. This finger engages a lug
on the collar 0, pinned to the plunger, and starts the rota-
tion of the plunger. The rotary movement is then picked
up and continued as the end P of the flange comes in contact
with the squared end of the plunger. This action is more
clearly illustrated in Fig. 35. Here the cam is rotating in
a clockwise direction and the finger N is about to swing the
plunger in the direction indicated by the arrow.
As the cam rotates the finger N engages lug Q and rotates
the plunger until the flange end .P comes in contact with the
squared end of the plunger and continues the rotation of
the latter until it has completed its 90-degreemovement.
this position, the squared end of the plunger enters be-
flanges, thus preventing further rotation of the
and in addition, the finger and lug absorb the
starting torque. The rotary movement of the plunger
while the roll is passing over the concentric portion
cam; hence, the height of the arm remains constant
time. However, as the cam continues to rotate, the
descends to the low concentric part of the cam lobe at T
and dwells, causing the arm also to descend and dwell. In
descending, jawsB enter between two stationary guides U
which prevent the jaws from opening during the forming
operation. The operation at this station consists of bending
the projecting ends of the spring outward so that they will
be parallel with the axis of the spring. This is done by the
automatically controlled punches which advance, with their
slides, and bend the ends over the corners Y of the jaws.
The position of the spring ends relative to the jaws is main-
tained by the two pins indicated.
When the ends have been formed, the cam raises the arm
vertically to its former height. At this time, the roll en-
gages the cam surface at Z and, as on the opposite side of
the cam. the plunger ana arm are brought back to their
original position. In this case, however, finger D, engaging
lug F, starts the rotation of the plunger, after which the
corresponding flange end completes the 90-degree move-
ment. When the arm is swung back, a latch (not shown)
engages the pin V and opens the right-hand jaw, allowing
the completed spring to drop into a chute. The cam then
allows the arm to dwell until the succeeding spring has been
coiled and cut off. Next, the roll passes to the cam surface
X, causing the plunger and arm to descend until the jaws
snap over and grip the spring. This completes the cycle.
The heavy coil spring on the plunger insures constant
engagement of the roll with the cam. Although this mech-
anism was designed primarily for a two-station machine,
the same principle can be used for three or more stations
by merely modifying the cam throws and adding the re-
quired fingers and lugs. In order to facilitate the machin-
ing of the cam, the cam is made in two sections and fast-
ened together with screws, the parting line coinciding with
the side of the roll groove. For the purpose of simplifica-
tion, this sectional construction is not shown.
CHAPTER II
INTERMITTENT MOTIONS FROM GEARS AND CAMS
The term "intermittent motion" is applied to mechanisms
for ?btaining a "dwell" or possibly a series of dwells or
mOVIng .and stationary periods of equal or unequal lengths.
Many dIfferent designs of intermittent motions are in use
because .they are on so many different types of
and semI-automatic machines. The intermittent
mot:ons Illustrated and described in this and the two fol-
lOWIng c?apters, supplement the two chapters on this gen-
eral subject found in Volume I of INGENIOUS MECHANISMS
FOR DESIGNERS AND INVENTORS.
Reciprocating Motion with Dwell at Each
Pom! of Reversal.- In coating certain parts of household
with enamel by means of a combination dipping
and the parts are hooked on an endless'con-
veyor chaIn and passed through a bath of enamel and then
through an. adj acent heating oven for drying the coated
surfaces. In order to facilitate the spreading of
the wh.Ile the parts are passing through the bath,
the ChaI? IS gIven an advancing reciprocating movement.
The chaIn advances to deliver the parts to the oven.
mov:men.t of the chain is obtained by the mechan-
shown In FIg. 1. The mechanism is mounted on the
A of the machine. It consists essentially of a com-
nuw',t.tem of planetary gearing and a double intermittent
The intermittent gearing. provides the
movement, while the planetary gearing is
to this movement to the chain sprocket.
WIth the intermittent gearing, ring gear B
61
63
and center gear C are supported in the stationary bear-
ing D and mesh with the driving pinion E, which rotates
in a stationary bearing. At the left-hand end of the sleeve
that forms the journal for gear B is keyed an ordinary in-
ternal ring gear F, and on the shaft to which gear C is
secured is keyed the pinion G. Gear H is free to turn with
the stud in arm J and meshes with internal gear F and
pinion G. The arm J is keyed to an extension sleeve in-
tegral with the conveyor chain sprocket K, the sleeve be-
ing free to rotate on the center shaft.
When driving gear E rotates in the direction indicated
by the arrow, the single tooth will engage the adjacent
tooth space in gear B and rotate the latter 1/18 revolution.
During this movement, gear C will be locked in a station-
ary position by gear E. Hence, the partial rotation .of
gear B will rotate gear F and cause gear H to roll around
the stationary pinion G and swing arm J, with the sprocket
K, .in the same direction.
As the gear E continues to rotate, its cylindrical portion
locks gear B and the single tooth engages a tooth space
in the center gear C, rotating the latter 1/11 revolution,
after which the cylindrical portion of gear E locks it <in a
stationary position. Rotating gear C in this way causes
gear G .to rotate and roll gear H on the now stationary
gear F. In this manner, gear H carries arm J and sprocket
K .around the center shaft in a direction opposite to that
of the driving gear E. This completes one cycle of move-
ments.
The required angular movements of the sprocket are as
follows: 14 1/2 degrees, or approximately 0.04 revolution,
a clockwise direction, as observed from the right-hand
of the mechanism. The sprocket then dwells and re-
its movement, rotating 9 degrees, or 0.025 revolution.
angular advance of the sprocket for each cycle is
- 0.025 = 0.015 revolution, or about 5 1/2 degrees.
"aJ'''IAJLa''JLUlS the ratios and the number of teeth and tooth
...
o
>.
Cll
>
C
o
- - - - - - ~ - . : - - T - - - - r I- 0
\ \0 /
rnTfllTflTrITjTnil?
llJJ1UlliLll tiLli
INTERMITTENT MO!I'IONS FROM GEARS AND CAMS 62
spaces in the gears, two separate conditions are involved:
First, the sprocket movement when gear E rotates gear B
while gears C and G are locked; and second, the sprocket
movement in the opposite direction when gear E rotates
gear C while gears Band F are locked.
One Revolution", of Shaft is Followed by Dwell
Equivalent to One Revolution.-The shaft A of the drive
shown diagrammatically in Fig. 2 is required to make a
revolution and then stop or dwell for a period equivalent to
one revolution. Shaft A is driven by shaft B, which ro-
tates continuously. The gearG is keyed to shaft A and
meshes with the gear E, which is a running fit on shaft B.
The sleeve C is pinned to the driving shaft B. When the
drive is in operation, the clutch dog D, which is a sliding
fit in a slot in sleeve C, drives gear E one-half revolution;
then as the angular face on the dog comes in contact with
the angular or cam face F of the stationary piece H, the
dog is withdrawn from contact with gear E at point K,
allowing gear E to remain stationary while shaft B makes
one-half revolution.
After shaft B has made one-half revolution, the dog D
passes out of contact with the pieceH at point L, allowing
the dog to re-engage gear E through the action of spring S.
Gear E then makes one-half revolution, following which
the cycle of movements described is repeated. Thus gear E
rotates one-half revolution and then remains stationary
while shaft B rotates one-half revolution.
As gears E and G have a driving ratio of 2 to 1, gear G
is given the required intermittent motion. A wide range
in the timing of the intermittent motion may be obtained
by varying the ratio of the gears and the length of the
actuating or cam surface of the piece H.
Positive High Speed Intermittent Rotary Motion.-
The mechanism shown in Fig. 3 provides the intermittent
rotary motion required for operating the conveyor of a
wire stitcher. The member A receives its intermittent ro-
65 INTERMITTENT MOTIONS FROM GEARS AND CAMS
T ~
~
INTERMITTENT MOTIONS FROM GEARS AND CAMS 64
Fig, 3, A Constantly Rotating Shaft B and Eccentric Imparts ll< Positive Intermittent
Motion to Member A which is Locked During the Idle Period
tary motion from the continuously rotating shaft B through
the positive indexing action of an eccentric strap C operated
by the eccentric L keyed to shaft B. A sprocket or gear-
not shown-attached to the hub or face of member A trans-
mits the intermittent motion to the conveyor.
At each revolution of shaft B the member A is indexed
1/11 revolution by pin D which engages one of the eleven
evenly spaced slots S. During the idle or return movement
of pin D, the member A is locked in position by pin E. The
ratio of the idle time between the indexing movements, to
the indexing time, is 73 to 107 in the design illustrated.
At the beginning of the indexing movement, member A
moves slowly, but the speed increases rapidly to the maxi-
mum and then slows down as the end of the movement is
reached. As the mechanism stops the load slowly and with-
out shock, it can be operated at high speeds, as compared
with the usual ratchet wheel and pawl mechanism, which is
difficult to balance and, has a tendency to "overthrow" un-
der appreciable loads.
The member A is always engaged by one or both of the
actuating teeth Dand E. These teeth are pivoted to the
extreme opposite ends of the eccentric strap C. Overthrow
is prevented by the locking tooth E,which is a free sliding
fit in the groove G machined in the frame H. This slot
restricts the movement of the pivoted tooth E so that it is
forced to travel in a vertical direction.
The view at the left shows the parts of the mechanism in
the positions they occupy at the completion of the indexing
movement. It will be noticed that the tooth E has entered
one of the slots in member A before tooth D has become
disengaged from another slot of the member.
The peculiar motion imparted to the eccentric strap C by
the eccentric L, due to the vertical path which its lower end
is forced to follow, causes the top end of the strap to move
in an elliptical path, carrying with it the actuating tooth D.
Tooth D is always held in a radial position by a slot in the
guiding arm, which is a free fit on the hub of member A.
The elliptical motion and the radial guide force the actuat-
ing tooth D to engage and disengage successively the slots
in the edge of member A, thus converting constant rotary
motion into a positive intermittent motion.
The mechanism is equally efficient when operated in
either direction. In adapting it for other purposes, the
following characteristics should be considered: The slot
spacing in member A controls the amount of intermittent
motion and also the idle time. There must be an odd num-
the best action is to be obtained, but as a gear
or sprocket drive of the proper ratio can be used to suit in-
66
Fig. 4. Intermittent Mecha.nism which Provides a. Longer Idle Period tho the
Design Shown in FiJr. 3
dividual requirements, this characteristic is not a vital fault.
If too few slots are used, the eccentric throw will be
excessive and the action of the mechanism will not be so
smooth as with a greater number of slots. It is well to
bear in mind that fewer slots decrease and more slots in-
crease the idle time.
The interior of the mechanism shown is filled with grease,
but the flanged parts of the frame could be fitted with a
cover and a packing ring could be provided on the hub of
member A so that the mechanism could be filled with oil.
With this form of lubrication, the carrying power would be
increased to handle greater loads at higher speeds.
Another Design of Positi ve High-Speed Intermittent
Motion.- The intermittent rotary motion just described is
suited for use where the idle time is short, as compared
with the feeding time. The total idle time between the
rotary or feeding movements in the case of the mechanism
about to be d e s r i e ~ is equivalent to more than 180 de-
greesper revolution, while in the case of the previously
described mechanism it was less than 180 degrees.
The principal difference in the designs is found in the
location of the actuating teeth D and E (see Fig. 4) in
relation to the member A to which the intermittent or in-
dexing mption is imparted. The actuating teeth operate on
the outside of the slotted ring of member A, so that the
idle time occurs while the eccentric throw travels above the
center line during the return stroke of strap S. The for-
ward or feeding movement, therefore, occurs while the
eccentric throw travels below the horizontal center line.
With this arrangement, the longer throw of the eccentric
is utilized for the idle or return movement of arm S, while
the shorter throw is employed for the feeding movement.
It will be noted that the shaft and its eccentric driver B
rotate in a direction opposite to that of the driven mem-
ber A, whereas in the design previously described, these
members rotate in the same direction.
When the mechanism is in operation, the central shaft
to which the eccentric driver B is keyed rotates at a con-
stant speed. The lower end of the strap S is restricted to
a vertical motion by the tooth E. Tooth E is pivotally
mounted on strap S, having a wide bearing on the strap,
and slides freely in a groove in the rigid frame. The tooth
Dat the opposite end of strap S has a similar pivoted con-
nection to the strap and slides freely in a groove cut in the
radial rocker guide R, which is a free turning fit on the
central shaft bushing. The guide rocker R serves to main-
tain the tooth D in a radial position with respect to the
central shaft. When the mechanism is in operation, the
68
eccentric B causes the teeth D and E alternately to engage
and disengage the equally spaced slots T cut in the annular
ring and produces the intermittent motion of member A.
The vertical motion of the bottom end of the strap S,
combined with the rotary motion at the center imparted
by the eccentric B, gives the top end of the strap carrying
tooth D a peculiar elliptical motion. This motion is such
that tooth D alternately engages and disengages successive
slots T, thereby imparting the required intermittent motion
to the driven member A. The length and shape of the teeth
are such that either or both teeth are always in engage-
ment with slots in member A, thus giving a positive control
over the motion. Tooth E locks the part A in position while
tooth D is on its return or idle stroke. Tooth D engages
a slot preparatory to the forward movement before the lock-
ing tooth E is disengaged. A hub at the side of member A
is provided so that a sprocket or gear can be attached to it,
through which the motion is transmitted to other parts.
This mechanism has several desirable characteristics,
such as its slow starting and stopping action, absence of
over-throw, positive locking between movements, compact-
ness, and ability to operate in either direction. It can also
be operated at relatively high speeds. The idle time is de-
termined by the number of slots, and is always equivalent
to more than 180 degrees per revolution. With nine slots.
as in the design illustrated, the idle time is 200 degrees per
revolution. With fewer slots, the idle time would be greater,
and with a greater number, the idle time would be less. For
the best action, there should be an odd number of indexing
slots.
Planetary Intermittent Gearing.- Intermittent gearing
of the planetary type may be used to advantage in cases
where the driving and driven shafts must be in line with
each other, and where a large number of dwells per revolu-
tion of the driven shaft is required. A drive of this type
is shown in Fig. 5.
Fig. 5. Intermittent Gearing of l'lanetary Type
Pitch diameter of ring gear=9.6" 1/
Pitch diameter of all other gears =3.2
All teeth are 5 diametral pitch K . . . t ~
D, E, and B, in this case, have the same pitch and pitch
diameters; hence, according to the principles of epicyclic
gearing, one-third of a revolution of shaft C is required to
index the arm F one division.
In the position shown, the single tooth in gear B is about
to engage a tooth space in the ring gear. As .soon as this
engagement occurs, arms F and G will start to rotate on
shaft C in a counter-clockwise direction. Rotation of the
The ring gear A is stationary, and the single-tooth gear B
is driven by means of the shaft C through the gears D and
E. Gear D is keyed to shaft C, while gear E is integral
with gear B. Both gears E and B are free to turn on the
shaft J, mounted in the arms F and G. A hub on the lower
end of armF turns freely in the stationary bearing H, the
intermittent movement being taken from this hub. Gears
73 INTERMITTENT MOTIONS FROM GEARS AND. CAMS
arms continues until the single tooth has left the tooth
space, at which time the concentric portion of gear B en-
gages the corresponding cylindrical surface L in the ring
gear, locking gear B and causing arms F and G to dwelL
The arms continue to dwell until the tooth in gear B has
engaged the next tooth space in the ring gear, which causes
the arms to move toward their next dwelling position. In
designing the single-tooth gear B, sufficient clearance should
be provided, as indicated, at K,. otherwise, interference with
the ring gear will result.
Rotary Motion which Varies from Zero to Maximum
and Vice Versa.-The purpose of the mechanism illus-
trated in Fig. 6 is to produce an intermittent rotary motion
which will start and stop a driven member without shock
and yet keep it under positive control throughout the cycle.
This motion is obtained by the practical application of the
mathematical curve known as the epicycloid, which is the
curve traced by a point on a circle as the latter revolves on
the outside of another fixed circle.
The arm A is keyed to the driving shaft B which revolves
continuously at a constant rate. At each end of arm A is
a revolving shaft C, which has a revolving gear D keyed to
one end and a short arm or crank E keyed to the other.
The two revolving gears D mesh with a fixed gear F which
is concentric with the driving shaft. All three gears are of
equal diameter. At the end of each crank E is a roller G,
the center of which lies on the pitch circle of the correspond-
ing gear D. The circular plate H revolves freely on the
driving shaft B as it is driven by rollers G, each of which
engages a radial slot in the plate. The drive is taken from
plate Hin any desired manner.
It will be seen from the illustration that the centers of
the.:rollers G trace the epicycloids shown by the broken
curves in the end view. As the arm A rotates, the angular
velocity of the centers of the rollers. and of the driven plate
gradually increases from the zero point at K until, in the
I
:s
-a
l>-
E!
.
H
<II
~
0
+>
~
N
E!
0
~
10<
CIl
,c
!
s:l
CIl
.E:
'" A
....
0
'Co
CIllo<
CIl CIl
't'l
0
~
.S,!ll
too
~ ~
~ g
';;14\1
.a
oj
10<
C
10<
~
s:l
:3
0
~
,!ll
~
~
....
0
W
CIl
P<
;>.
E-t
~
+>
CIl
a
i4
<D
. ~
r-c
SECTION x-x
Fic. .,/, Kecha.nism for Driving Wormwheels C and B Intermittently and Alterna.tely from Shaft
position shown, the angular velocity is greater than that
of the driving shaft; from this point and during the follow-
ing half revolution of the driving arm, the angular velocity
of the roller center and of the driven plate is gradually re-
duced again to zero at point K. Since the gears are of equal
diameter, the roller centers and the driven plate make a
complete revolution in the same time as the driving shaft.
The angular velocity of the driving shaft is constant. If
() equals the angular position of the driving arm from the
zero point K, and w equals the angular velocity of the driven
(l-cos ()
plate H, then w = . The maximum angular
5 -4cos ()
velocity of the driven plate is 1.3 times that of the driving
arm.
Mechanism for Driving Two Shafts Intermittently and
Alternately.-The mechanism shown diagrammatically in
Fig. 7 was designed for use on a special machine. In opera-
tion, the constantly rotating shaft A, through a gear train,
drives worm-wheel B one revolution in the direction indi-
cated by the arrow, after which the gear-shifting mechan-
ism functions autonlatically, causing worm-wheel B to dwell
and the driving motion to be transmitted to worm-wheel C
through another gear train. After worm-wheel C has been
driven one revolution, the gear-shifting mechanism again
functions, causing worm-wheel C to dwell while the driving
action is again transmitted to worm-wheel B, thus complet-
ing the cycle, which is continuous as long as the driving
shaft A rotates.
The clutch member D, which is slidably keyed to shaft G,
is shown in the neutral position, but when the mechanism,
is in operation, this clutch is in engagement with either
pinion E or F, causing shaft G to rotate in one direction
or the other, depending upon which pinion is engaged. The
driving of shaft G in either direction from the crown gear
on shaft A is made possible by the "free-wheeling" type fric-
tionclutches, consisting of two members H and I, and the
friction rollers arranged as shown in the section view in the
lower right-hand corner of the illustration. Two mem-
bers [of the proper hand are keyed to the shaft and the
two friction members Hand J are slipped over them. Thus,
74
when the clutch member D is in mesh with pinion F, the
wedging action of the friction rollers serves to lock mem-
bers H and I together as one piece, while member J runs
freely over its mating member 1. When the clutch engages
pinion E, the direction of rotation of shaft G is reversed,
the drive being through friction clutch J, while member H
runs free. Thus, the direction of rotation of shaft G is
controlled by the movement of clutch member D.
Spur gear teeth on members Hand J mesh with the spur
gears K and L, which have worms cut on their hubs that
mesh with the worm-wheels Band C, respectively. The
manner in which the clutch is automatically controlled to
give the worm-wheels Band C their respective intermit-
tent movements is shown by the upper view.
Assume that the mechanism is in operation and that
clutch D is in engagement with gear E, so that worm-
wheel C is being driven in the direction indicated by the
arrow. When pin M on the worm-wheel comes in contact
with the flat spring on the swinging arm N, which is a
free turning fit on the worm-wheel shaft, it causes the
swinging arm to come in contact with the roller on shifter
lever O. The latch P would be down at this time instead
of in the position shown. In the down position, a step on
the latch engages a collarQ on the shifter slide, preventing
the slide from moving to the right. Thus, continued rota-
tion of the arm N serves to compress the spring R until a
cam surface on the shifter lever lifts latch P, releasing the
spring, which forces clutch member D to the right into
mesh with gear F, engaging the drive to worm-wheel B,
and allowing worm-wheel C to dwell. When this takes
place, the shifter lever 0, being released from the pressure
exerted by spring R, also moves to the right and the arm N
is rotated past the roller on lever 0 by the flat spring, pre-
viously compressed by pin M.
When worm-wheel B has rotated through the required
angle, the pin S comes into contact with the flat spring on
a swinging arm similar to the arm N previously described.
The movement of the clutch member D into engagement
with gear E is accomplished automatically, the same as the
movement in the opposite direction. This cycle of opera-
tions is repeated automatically.
Adjustment of In!ermittently Driven Sprockets while
Drive is Operating.- Motion picture projectors are de-
signed to give the film a rapid intermittent movement, stop-
ping it sixteen times every second. These dwelling periods
in the movement of the film are so timed that the light is
projected through the film only when it is stationary. Mov-
ing pictures, therefore, are in reality a series of sixteen
stationary pictures proj ected on the screen every second at
normal operating speed, and owing to the "persistence of
vision" this rapid succession of still pictures causes the suc-
cessive views to blend into one another and produce the
effect of continuous Inotion.
The edges of the film have accurately spaced perforations
which are engaged by teeth on a double sprocket E (see
Fig. 8). The drive to this sprocket is through the internal
driving gear A, the driven gear B, driving disk C of the
intermittent motion, and driven member D on the s p r ~ k t
shaft. This driven member turns 1/4 revolution for every
complete turn of driver C, and this quarter turn of D oc-
. curs during one-fifth of the revolution of C. During the
remaining four-fifths of a turn of C, member D is locked
in the stationary position.
This mechanism has an original feature which makes it
possible to shift the film sprocket E from, say, its lowest
position, which is the one illustrated, to a higher. position,
without interfering with the intermittent drive and while
this drive is in operation. It was discovered accidentally
that four points in a plane may be so located relative to one
another that two of these points, if moved along straight
lines perpendicular to each other, will cause a third point
describe an arc about the fourth; thus, if points a, b,
77
78 INTERMITTENT MOTIONS FROM GEARS AND CAMS INTERMITTENT MOTIONS FROM GEARS AND CAMS 79
cos 30
0
(2 cos 30
0
-1)
x (1 )
RadiusR= X ( 1 =0.21x
2 cos 30
0
- 1 cos 30
0
The movement of sprocket E is effected by a hand-lever
and e on the diagram are located properly, the movement
of point a to al and of e to el will cause point b to describe
an arc of radius R about point e.
Before describing the essential requirements in this de-
sign, its practical application will be explained. This ap-
plication is illustrated by the diagram just referred to, in
conjunction with the sectional view just above it, which
represents the actual Dlechanism. The line abc of the dia-
gram represents the center line of the arm G. When the
axis of the sprocket E is shifted along a straight line, as
indicated on the diagram at eCI the axis of roller H moves
along a perpendicular straight line aal. In conjunction
with these two straight-line movements, the axis of driven
gear B (represented at b on the diagram) describes an arc
bb
l
of 90 degrees. As this arc is concentric with the axis
of driving gear A, driven gear B continues to mesh prop-
erly with A during the straight-line movement of sprocket
E, which is the requirement.
From what has preceded it will be evident that, in de-
signing this mechanism, the problem is to so proportion the
angular arm abe that when e and a move along straight
lines at right angles, point b will follow a circular arc 'hav-
ing a radius R equal to one-half the difference between the
pitch diameters of gears A and B. To obtain this circular
movement of point b, the design must be according to the
following requirements:
Points a and e must be equidistant from point b.
The angle between arms ab and bc must be 120 degrees.
If x equals the length of the straight-line movement, and y
equals the dimension ab or be, then,
x
y=---------
=1.57x
connected with link F. This adjustment in the position of
the sprocket is only used when an improperly made splice
in the film requires what is known as "framing."
Intermittent Rotation for Measuring Typewriter
Ribbon as it is Wound on Spool.- In winding typewriter
ribbon on spools, a device like the one shown in Fig. 9 is
used) for stopping the rotation of the spool when a prede-
termined length of ribbon is wound up on it, at which time
the ribbon is cut off. The spool is slipped on the end of the
power-driven shaft A" and the ribbon is drawn from be-
tween the two rolls Band C. A coil spring (not shown),
acting upon the upper roll, serves to keep a constant pres-
sure of the rolls on the ribbon, so that as the ribbon is
wound on the spool, both rolls are rotated.
Roll C, through the medium of the gears D, E, and F,
rotates the chain sprocket G, over which the chain H is
hung. Protruding from one of the links in this chain is
the pin J which, through the levers K and L, disengages
the clutch M from the driving pulley N and thus discon-
tinues the rotation of the spool. The length of the ribbon
wound on this spool depends upon the circumference of the
roll C, the ratio of the gears, the number of teeth in the
sprocket, and the number of links in the chain.
For every cycle of this chain, the pin depresses the lower
end of the lever K, and in doing so, forces the upper end
of the lever toward the right, allowing the hand-lever L to
swing in a clockwise direction under the pull of the
spring O. This hand-lever is secured to the clutch mem-
berM, at the right-hand end of which is a cam-shaped pro-
jection engaging a similar projection on the stationary hub
of the bracket P. As the end of lever L moves downward,
the clutch member is oscillated on the shaft A and the cam
projections are disengaged, allowing the coil spring Q to
force the clutch member to the right and disengage its
teeth from those of the driving pulley, thus discontinuing
the rotation of the shaft and the spool.
'a
0
lJ1
m
g
s:l
0
,c
,c
iii
f.<
]
CD
PI
t;
...
0

:f
CD
t-1
'l:l
'j

CD
'l:l
CD
f.<
P4
d

f.<
0
...

'a
oS

CD
;l;I
0)
.
-I
S<l
0
0
0-
en
80
Fig. 10. This Clutoh is Operated Intermittently the Aotion of a Trip-lev&%'
83
In the design shown, roll C has a circumference of
12 inches, and the ratio of the gears and sprockets is such
that when the roll rotates once, the linear movement of the
chain is equal to the pitch of the chain; hence, the number
of links in the chain corresponds to the number of feet of
ribbon upon the spool. Although designed primarily for
winding typewriter ribbon, this device could doubtless be
used successfully for other applications.
Intermittent Movement from Continuous Rotary
Motion.-A mechanism for transforming continuous rotary
motion into intermittent rotary motion is shown in Fig. 10.
A movement such as this is often applied to indexing plates
or tables of multi-stage drilling or chucking machines. The
mechanism consists chiefly of two clutch members A and B,
which are automatically disengaged at uniform intervals by
means of a key actuated by the trip-lever C.
The driving gear D is rotated uniformly, receiving its
motion from some other member of the machine. This gear
meshes with the pinion E on the lower clutch member B.
In the upper clutch member A is a sliding key F, which is
backed up by a coil spring. This key is forced by the spring
into the slot G when the lower clutch member is rotated
into a position where the key and slot are in alignment.
When this engagement occurs, both members of the clutch
are locked together. The ring R, which is shrunk on the
lower part of the clutch member A, serves to retain the key
in its slot.
Pinion H is integral with the upper part of the clutch
member A and meshes with the gear J. This gear, in turn,
serves to drive an indexing plate (not shown). The clutch
is engaged through the action of the pin K in the driving
D,. and at a certain point in the rotation of this gear,
pin trips the lever C so that the lever and the dog M
the indicated by the dotted lines in the
plan view at the right. The shaft on which the lever
dog are keyed rotates in a stationary bearing secured
PUN, VI EW'
OF TRIP LEVER
CLUTCA CLUTCH ENGAGED
OISE.NGAGED
VIEW x-x.
82
To prevent further rotation of the rolls (due to inertia)
. after the clutch has been disengaged, the brake arm R is
provided. This arm is attached to the pivot shaft of the
lever K, so that just as soon as this lever has been tripped,
or imrnediately after the clutch has been disengaged, the
end of the hand-lever L swings downward and wedges
against the edge of lever K, forcing the brake-shoe against
the roll C.
\ \

I I
y
85
o
Fig. 12. High-speed Intermittent Gearing with Arrangement for Reducing
Tooth Impact
fingers or cams is shown in Fig. 11. The device is operated
by means of a hand-lever, which is indicated by dotted lines.
At X, the finger B has just left a slot, and the inclined face
, of the finger A is engaging a corner of the same slot. As
the finger continues toward the/ right and enters the slot,
the ring is moved through a little more than half a division.
'The .movement of the finger is now reversed and the

1\
k..- I i 0:\.
x ..,r/Q?,f \ \
. \
\ \
\
I
I
to the machine. As soon as the point of the dog is lifted
out of the wedge-shaped slot in the key, the latter is free to
drop down into the slot G, provided the two members of the
clutch are located in the proper position radially. When
the key enters the slot G, the gear J rotates. In the mean-
time, the pin K has passed the lever C, and the dog M is
returned to its original position in the annular groove N
by a spring (not shown).
When the clutch has rotated nearly a complete revolution,
a bevel face 0 on the key F (see detail in lower right-hand
corner) comes into contact with a bevel P on the dog; and
as the clutch continues to rotate, the key is forced upward
and out of the slot G, as shown in the detail view.
This mechanism will operate satisfactorily at speeds up
to 50 revolutions per minute, but at higher speeds, the key
is not given sufficient time to drop into the slot G. If ac-
curate indexing is required, the usual plunger arrangement
for the indexing plate is used in conjunction with the
mechanism described. A mechanism of this type lends it-
self very well to jobs where it is necessary to vary the in-
dexing ratios. To obtain
the various ratios, the
gear H may be made de-
mountable with respect
to clutch member A. In
this way, gears Hand J
can be changed to suit
the required indexing
ratio.
Escapement Type of
Indexing Mechanism.-
A simple indexing mech-
anism consisting of a ro-
tating ring h a v i n g a
number of radially milled
Fig. 11. Simple Indexing Mechanism which
is Operated Rapidly by One Lever slots and sliding indexing
84
finger B engages the corner of the next slot, as seen at Y.
As the movement continues toward the left, the finger B
enters the slot and pushes the ring around to its correct
indexing position.
Shock Absorber for High.Speed Intermittent Gearing.-
One of the greatest objections to the intermittent type of
gearing when used for transmitting high-speed movements
is the impact of the mating gear teeth at the beginning of
each intermittent movement. This action is due, of course,
to the inertia of the driven gear and the offset position at
which tooth contact takes place, as. indicated at A in the
illustration.
The greater part of the wear, tooth breakage, and noisy
operation resulting from the tooth impact is prevented by
means of the arrangement shown in Fig. 12. Here a steel
spider B having as many arms as there are dwelling posi-
tions in the driven gear D is mounted on the shaft G. This
spider, although free to rotate on the gear-shaft, is held
normally by a coil spring against pin C in gear D. The
movement of the spider on the shaft is limited by pin H.
Just before the tooth contact at A occurs, one of the
pins E in gear F forces the top arm of the spider toward
the right, causing the spring to exert a pull on pin C and
start gear D gradually. Thus the inertia of gear D is over-
come before the contact at A occurs; hence the force of the
impact at the point of engagement of the teeth is greatly
reduced.
Auxiliary Friction Driven Gear to Reduce Starting
Shock of Intermittent Gearing.- In the operation of in-
termittent gear trains the impact of the teeth at the begin-
ning of each. movement may not be serious at lower speeds,
but for higher speeds, the operation of the mechanism is
likely to be noisy:, and the leading teeth are either soon bat-
tered out of shape or broken. To overcome this condition
in an intermittent gear train operating an automatic
hopper.. a second set of gears was incorporated, as shown in
Fig. 13. These gears A and B serve to start the driven
shaft G rotating with very little shock just before the lead
ing teeth in the intermittent gears come into contact. An-
other advantage is that the starting torque is borne by a
number of teeth in gears A and B instead of by two teeth
only, as in the usual type of intermittent gear train, thus
reducing tooth wear.
The intermittent gears, which are keyed to their respec-
tive shafts, are indicated at D and C. The second set of
gears is also mounted on these shafts. Gear A, however,
is free to turn on its shaft, while gear B is keyed to the
lower shaft (not shown). Both the gears A and B have
teeth all around their circumference, the tooth pitch and
pitch diameters being the same as in the corresponding
gears D and It will be noted that gear A is confined
between friction washers, which tend to transmit a turning
movement to the driven shaft. The pressure of the wash-
ers against the gear can be varied by adj usting the lock-
nuts, which changes the tension of the coil spring. With
this arrangement, the pitch-line speed of gear A and of
gear D (when in motion) are the same.
In operation, the driving gears C and B rotate in the
direction of the arrow. With the gears in the position
shown, it is obvious that unless special provision is made,
the entire force of impact in starting the indexing move-
. ment will be at point H. In the present design, however,
part of the force is divided between several teeth in gears
A and B. As soon as point F has passed point E, gear D
begins to rotate, through the action of the friction drive,
before the leading teeth in gears D and C come into contact.
This rotation is started with practically no shock, and con-
tinues until the teeth of both intermittent gears are prop-
erly meshed.
Some experimenting may be required before the check-
nuts are adj usted so that the tension on the coil spring is
sufficient to balance the normal load imposed on the mech-
Fig. 14. Gear Drive with Special Gears Designed to Have Shaft A Drive
Shafts Band C Intermittently
Gear Drive for Imparting Intermittent Motion Alter-
nately to Parallel Shafts.-In designing a transformer tap
changer, provision had to be made for alternately moving
the arms of two tap adjusters with a dwell between each
movement. Also the arms were required to be locked be..
tween movements. !twas desirable to have the driving
shaft at right angles to the shafts that operated the tap
adjuster arms. The speed reduction was required to be
approximately 1 to 12.
These conditions were fulfilled by the mechanism shown
anism. The clearance J in gear D also deserves some men-
tion. By removing the metal at this point, a longer
dwelling surface K is obtained, thus reducing the time, at
the beginning and end of each dwell, in which the gears
are in their unlocked positions. It should be understood
that this mechanism is suitable for light loads only. If the
load is too great"" the wear on the dwelling surfaces of the
intermittent gears will be excessive due to the torque pro-
duced by the friction drive during each dwell. Rapid wear,
however, can be prevented by the use of hardened inserts
in the dwelling surfaces.
...
2
I>
0
llll

'Cl
s::
H
.g
r"l
tQ
1::
ti.l
...
<ll
.<:l
...
cI)
Q)
0
s::
.S
1)
'':
I"l
l
,c
'Cl
Q)
'Cl
cI)
cI)
tQ
,!d
()
...
0
PI
tl
.<:l
0

.a
<ll
Q)
0
...
s::
cI)

Q)
1:l
tot
c.)
...
.
I"l
in Fig. 14. The gear drive consists of a combination worm
on the driving shaft A which meshes with two gears on the
shafts Band C connected to the tap adjusters. The worm
is built of two parts D and E. Part D has tooth spaces
that appear simply like annular grooves. This part com-
prises a segment of 270 degrees. The other part E has a
helix angle of 53.1 degrees. These two parts have grooves
in their sides into which annular ribs on the side plates fit
when the four members are bolted together as shown.
The two gears F and G are alternately in mesh with both
parts D and E of the worm. This is accomplished by mak-
ing gears F and G with teeth, as indicated at H, which will
mesh with the teeth in both section D and section E of the
driving worm. When the teeth in F and G are in mesh
with the teeth in section D, no motion is transmitted from
the driving to the driven shaft. One rotation of segment E
past F or G serves to rotate either one of these gears
through an angle of 27 degrees. The gears F and G each
have 40 teeth. The section E is a 90-degree segment of a
12-thread worm. With this arrangement, gear F and then
gear G will be turned through an angle of 27 degrees. There
is a stop or dwell between each movement corresponding to
three-fourths revolution of the driving shaft. Both pinions
are locked between their respective rotational movements.
Combination Cam and Differential Gear Movement
for Chain Conveyor.-Sprocket chain conveyors are used
extensively for conveying containers through filling ma-
chines, and frequently the drive is arranged so that the
chain dwells at regular intervals to permit the filling of
the containers. One rather interesting drive for obtaining
this intermittent conveyor movement is shown in Fig. 15.
Its design embodies a cam which transmits a rocking move-
ment to a differential planet gear for controlling the rota-
tion of the driving sprocket of the conveyor chain. This
mechanism has its application in a machine for filling glass
vials with liquid. To prevent the spilling of the liquid from
the vials as they pass along on the conveyor, provision is
made to eliminate shock in stopping and starting the chain.
The intermittent movement is transmitted to the sprocket
shaft A from the constantly rotating drive shaft B through
the spur gears C and D, miter gears E, F, and G, and also
through the cam H. Gears C and E are pinned to the drive
shaft, the end of which turns freely in the end. of the driven
shaft A. On this shaft is keyed gear G which meshes with
gear F. GearF is mounted on the arm J,which is free to
turn on shaft B. The outer end of arm J carries a fol-
lower roll Lwhich engages the cam H, the latter being
pinned to the pinion shaft K. In order to synchronize the
conveyor movement with that of the rest of the machine,
each intermittent cycle of the conveyor chain must occur
during one-quarter revolution of the drive shaft B.
There are four vial stations to each length of conveyor
chain equivalent to the pitch circumference of the sprocket;
hence, in order to cause the chain to dwell as each station
passes the filling valve, the sprocket M must dwell after
each quarter revolution. It was found by experiment that
a vial could be filled in the same time that it takes shaft B
to rotate one-eighth revolution. Thus, having determined
the angular movement of this shaft during the dwell period,
it remains to proportion the gears and cam to impart the
required rocking motion to arm J for obtaining this dwell;
that is, to cause gear F to roll on gear G without rotating
the latter and the sprocket.
Assuming that arm J is stationary, one-eighth revolu-
tion of gear E in the direction of the arrow would rotate
gear G the same amount in the opposite direction. Now
suppose that during this one-eighth revolution of gear E,
arm J were rotated one-sixteenth revolution in the same
direction. Then gear F would merely roll on gear. G and
the latter would remain stationary. Since we know the
movement of arm J required to cause gear G and sprocket M
to dwell during one-eighth revolution of the drive shaft,
the contour' of the cam can be developed. The throw of the
cam will, of course, correspond to the angular movement of
the arm. One complete cycle of the cam is required for
each one-quarter revolution of the drive shaft. Therefore,
the ratio of gears C and D must be 4 to l.
Thus, while the drive' shaft B rotates one-eighth revolu-
tion from the position shown, the cam will rotate one-half
revolution and gear F Will roll on gear G, causing the latter
and the sprocket to dwell. During the next one-eighth revo-
lution of shaft B, however, the cam will complete its revolu-
tion, swinging the arm in the opposite direction and causing
gear F to rotate gear G one-quarter revolution, or twice the
amount it would rotate if arm J were stationary. In this
way, it will be seen that shafts B and A have the same
angular movement for each station movement, although
shaft A rotates at a higher velocity, owing to lost motion
resulting from its dwell.
By observing the contour of the cam, it will be noted
that it is developed to impart a constant rise for the first
half revolution. This constant rise is important if a steady
dwell is to be obtained. For the remaining half of the cam,
the contour is such that the beginning of the upward move-
ment of the arm is accelerated and then retarded at the
top. This accelerating and retarding of the arm, when
transmitted through the gears, results in a corresponding
movement being imparted to the conveyor chain, the shock
to the chain being so slight that spilling of the liquid in the
vials does not occur. The working torque transmitted
through the gears is sufficient to maintain engagement of
the follower roll on the cam.
Parallel Slides with Latch and Cams for Operating One
Slide Intermittently.-In connection with a certain extru-
sion process, it was found necessary to withdraw two slid-
ing members of a stripping mechanism up to a predeter-
mined point, after which one slide had to remain stationary
while the other completed its full travel. On the return
now anchored to the bedplate; as the die is attached to the
moving slide, the effect is to strip the die from the rod.
When the two notches in the cams come opposite each other,
the latch swings out of the lower notch and into the upper
one, so that the carriage is picked up and carried along with
slide B. Just before the latch swings upward, at which
time the rod is clear of the die, the rear trip-rod H releases
the pawls, leaving the rod free to be removed.
Intermittent Movement of Reciprocating Slide.-Many
ingenious slide movements are to be found in the various
types of Wire-forming machines. One intermittent move-
ment, applicable to these machines, is shown in Figs. 1'1
and 18. In this design, the two adjacent slides A and B
are actuated by the connecting-rod C. Slide A is connected
directly to this rod and is given a continuous reciprocating
movement. Slide B operates intermittently. For each cycle
of the mechanism, slide B moves with slide A for one work-
ing and one return stroke, dwelling for three succeeding
working and return strokes.
Both slides operate in the stationary guideway D. On
slide A is mounted a locking device consisting of housing E,
locking plunger F (Fig. 18) which engages bushing G, 'and
cam H with its indexing pins J. This device is actuated
by the spring pawl K, which slides in a boss on the guide-
way.
In the position shown, the slides are locked together by
the plunger F, consequently, both slides are moving to-
gether. They have just completed their working stroke and
are about to return in the direction indicated by the arrow
(Fig. 17). On the return stroke, pawl K engages one of
the pins J and rotates the cam 90 degrees, causing the pro-
jection L (Fig. 18) to slide upward along the deep notch in
the housing E and drop into one of the three shallow
notches M. This results in the plunger being withdrawn
from bushing G in the lower slide just before the return
stroke is completed. Hence, some means must be provided
94 INTERMITrENT MOTIONS FROM' GEARS AND CAMS
stroke, the stationary slide had to be "picked up" and car-
ried along with the other slide. Fig. 16 shows how this is
accomplished by the use of a swinging latch, the principle
of which might well be applied to other devices where one
of a pair of slides must have a temporary dwell. This latch
operates between two flat profile cams with oppositely dis-
posed notches shaped to receive the rollers on the latch.
The upper cam A is secured to the moving platen or slide
~ w
Stub
o
Fig. 16. Two Slides, One of which is Operated Intermittently by a. Latch
Actuated by Opposing Cams
B, while the lower cam C is fixed to the bedplate D. The
carriage E has. a limited range of sliding movement on the
slide B equal to the longitudinal distance between the two
cam notches when the platen is in its "back" position. At
both ends of the carriage travel, adjustable trip-rods J and
H engage and disengage pawls F, respectively, these pawls
gripping the extruded rod.
As soon as the "stub" has been severed from the rod by
the saw, the slide B is started ahead. At this time the rod
is held stationary by the pawls F on the carriage, which is
C
1-4
Z

is:
1-4
.-3
Z
.-3
is:
0
.-3
1-4
0
Z
00
I'%j
0
is:
>
00
>
Z
t::l
0
>
is:
U.2

\' II I ---

0/' _-=::L _
<: E:3: E
K
STROKE
B
A
I __
>f.i
p I
l
/-:--
j
1 ..
)

Fig. 17. Plan View of Double-slide Movement Shown in Fig. 18
Fig. 18.
..

/ \, .d/-f\
/ '----/ \.
I'
I
Double-slide Movement with an Arrangement that Causes One Slide to Dwell During a Predetermined Number of
Strokes of the Other SUde
1-4
Z
is:
1-4
.-3
.-3
t;Ij
Z
.-3
is:
o
.-3
1-4
o
Z
00
o
is:
00
>
o
>
is:
00
-.J
Fig. 19. Mechanism for Converting a Constant Reciproca.ting
Movement" into an Intermittent Movement
For each of the two succeeding working and return
strokes of slide A, cam H is indexed 90 degrees, as previ-
ously described; but as the projection L enters a shallow
notch for all three indexing movements, slide B remains
stationary for three working and three return strokes of
slide A. On the last return stroke, however, cam H is
again indexed. This time the projection enters the deep
notch, allowing pIunger F to drop down and enter bushing
G. At the end of this return stroke the cycle is completed,
and on the succeeding working and return strokes both
slides travel together. The object of the shallow notches iv.
housing E is to prevent the cam from reversing its move-
ment after being indexed due to the back drag on the pins J
when they leave the pawl.
Intermittent Movements from a Constant Reciprocating
Movement.-A feeding mechanism operated by an air cyl-
inder was required to convert the constant reciprocating
movement of the air piston into an intermittent movement
on the outward stroke. This movement was to be at right
angles to that of the piston. On the return stroke, the mo-
tion was to be continuous and at a constant speed. The
mechanism for obtaining these movements is shown dia-
grammatically in Fig. 19. The reciprocating piston B is
attached to the slide A. Slide A has a cam groove with the
side C formed with a dwell to impart the required inter-
mittent movement to the feeding plunger D on the outward
movement of the piston.
On the return movement, the side F of the cam gro()ve
returns the plunger D to the starting position without the
intermittent motion required on the outward movement.
There is sufficient friction in the mechanJsm to keep the
roller E of the plunger D in contact with the sides C and F
on the outward and inward movements, respectively. Auto-
matically operated air valves control the dwell at the end
of each stroke. The speed of the feeding and return move-
ments of plunger D is governed by the rate at which air is
admitted to the cylinders by the air valves.
Adjustable Clock-Controlled Intermittent Mechanism.-
The mechanism shown in Fig. 20 is used in a bottle-cap
counting machine. It is the function of this mechanism to
swing a pivoted chute alternately from one position to an-
other, allowing the chute to remain in each position long
for completing the return movement of slide B. Stops N
and 0 serve this purpose. As these stops are in contact
with each other at this time, the upper stop resumes push-
ing the lower slide to the end of its return stroke. At this
point, spring button P engages the depression in the pad Q
and prevents slide B from moving toward the right (during
its dwell), due to frictional contact with slide A.
98
enough to permit a packing case to be filled with bottle-cap
crowns which are delivered by the chute. Although the
movements obtained with the mechanism here illustrated
could be duplicated by other mechanical arrangements, none
of the available types met the particular requirements of
the counting machine. The mechanism here described has
llroved successful.
The required movements are transmitted to the chute by
the slide A. Thepih Z in slide A engages a slot on the
under side of the pivoted chute. When slide A is in the
position shown in the upper view, Fig. 20, the chute dis-
charges into one of the packing cases. As soon as the pack-
ing case is filled, a clock, having its actuating lever con-
nected to rod W of the yoke P, releases the latter
member, which causes the clutch to engage the driving and
driven shafts and then disengage them after the driven
shaft has carried the crank-arm K around one-half revolu-
tion.
The pin L of the crank-arm engages a slot in slide A and
carries the slide to the opposite position, where it remains
while the packing case under the chute is being filled. The
clock then acts again, and the chute is automatically trans-
ferred to the other filling position. This cycle of operations
is repeated continuously, the mechanism being driven by
the constantly rotating shaft I through the helical gears C
and shaft D. With this arrangement, the transfer move-
ment of the chute is accomplished very quickly and smooth-
ly. The timing of the movements and the duration of the
rest periods are controlled by the clock, which can be ad-
justed to meet any operating requirements.
Construction and Operation of the Clock - Controlled
Intermittent Mechanism.-Referring now to the construction
of the mechanism, the toothed clutch member E is fastened
to the continuously rotating shaft D, mounted in the bear-
ings F. Another part of the mechanism is supported in
the bearing G, and consists of shaft H, on which the toothed
103
~ POSITION D
rises in the cam surface, after which a sudden drop follows.
These drops are just 180 degrees apart.
To disengage the clutch elements, it is only necessary to
move the clutch element E
1
a certain distance, depending
upon the depth of the clutch teeth plus a reasonable amount
of clearance between the teeth. In this case, the depth of
Fig. 22. Form and Operation of Cam 0, Fig. 20
~ k
I O<:------E:S:
POSITION A i
~
~
----
I 2
POSITION 8 I
. I
I .
The cam 0, which causes the slide A to pause at the end
of each stroke, or one-half revolution of shaft H, is fast-
ened to the clutch element Ep The contour of cam 0, when
rolled out in a flat position, is shown in the views to the
right, Fig. 22. It will be noted that there are two gradual
the outer end of shaft H. The collar M prevents any lateral
movement of the shaft and at the same time serves as a
guide for the spring N. When the mechanism is released,
the spring N forces the clutch element E
1
into engagement
with element E, thus providing for the positive rotation of
the crank K through one-half revolution.
Fig. 21. Section XX, Fig. 20
clutch member E
1
is a sliding fit. Rotation of E
1
on shaft
H is prevented, however, by the two small feather keys J,
which are fixed in the shaft and are a close sliding fit in
the keyways in E1.
The crank-arm K, previously referred to, is fastened to
102
the teeth was 1/16 inch. The rise of the cam contour was
7/32 inch, giving a clearance between the teeth, of 5/32
inch. This large clearance is necessary, as will be made
clear from the following description of the cam followers.
The cam, which is machined in the form of a ring, is fast-
ened to the clutch element E1 by a set-screw, so that these
two members are free to move laterally along the shaft H.
The cam follower arrangement is somewhat moreelab-
orate than the average type of follower, and is the most
interesting and unique feature of the mechanism. Referring
to Figs. 20 and 21, the yoke P is guided in the bearings Q.
These bearings are split for the purpose of facilitating the
assembling of the mechanism. To prevent the yoke from
rotating in its bearing, a small key Y is provided and a
keyway is cut in the lower stem of the yoke. This restricts
the. yoke to a vertical movement.
The lower stem of the yoke is provided with the adj ust-
able pin follower W, which may be locked in place by nut v.
The adjustment of this pin is very important, as it deter-
mines the amount of movement necessary in the lever mech-
anism (not shown here), which is attached to the pin fol-
lower W. This lever mechanism is connected to the clock
that times the movements. The clock-operated mechanism
will remove the lower pin and permit the clutch elements
to make contact under the action of the spring N. The
upper stem of the yoke is counterbored and provided with
the plunger pin follower R and the light spring U, which is
held in place by the nut S. The spring T keeps the yoke in
the upper position with its shoulder against the lower side
of the bearing Q.
The function of the two pin followers will be more easily
understood by referring to the four diagrams in Fig. 22,
which show the main positions of the pin followers with
relation to the cam contour. At A is shown the normal
position of the pin followers at the starting position. The
lower pin is in. contact with the cam contour, while the
upper pin is free. As soon as yoke P, Fig. 20, is pulled
downward, the lower pin is removed and the upper pin
strikes the outer edge of the cam ring, as shown in posi-
tion B, Fig. 22.
It will be noted that the upper pin is larger in diameter
than the lower one. ,The purpose of this feature will be-
come obvious on further consideration of the mechanism.
When the upper pin strikes the outer edge of the cam ring,
the spring U, Fig. 20, is compressed. However, this condi-
tion only exists momentarily, inasmuch as the spring N
forces the clutch elements into contact as soon as the lower
pin is removed from the cam contour, resulting in the ro-
tation of the cam and all its attached parts.
As soon as rotation begins, the upper pin is freed and
drops down under the action of the spring U, so that it
makes contact with the cam contour as illustrated in posi-
tion C, Fig. 22. When the cam has rotated 180 degrees, the
clutch elements are separated and the rotation ceases. This
last step is illustrated by position D, where the point
marked 1 has been replaced by the point marked 2 'under
the upper pin follower R. In the meantime, the crank has
traversed from one end of its stroke to the other and
stopped. The lower pin is still out of contact with the cam
contour, the upper pin having performed the action of sep-
.arating the clutch elements. As soon as the yoke is released,
it is raised by the spring T, Fig. 20, and at the same mo-
ment, the upper pin is removed from the cam contour and
replaced by the lower pin. This explains the necessity for
having the upper pin slightly larger in diameter than the
lower one.
The upper pin causes the cam contour to move, or be set
back slightly from the edge of the lower pin follower. This
permits the lower pin to rise freely into position opposite
the cam contour. The cam and the clutch member E
1
move
toward the clutch member E as the upper pin leaves the
contour of the cam, but this movement is stopped by the
lower pin.
Two very important details should be noted. First, the
distance between the ends of the upper and lower pins must
be such as to bring the lower pin opposite the cam contour
before the upper pin is entirely removed from contact with
, the cam. If this condition does not exist, the spring N will
force the clutch elements into contact before the lower pin
is in place to hold it back when the upper pin is removed.
The second important detail is to note that the rise of the
cam contour is determined by the size. of the upper pin. The
upper pin must obviously be able to fall in with the lower
part of the cam contour before it can perform its function.
If the yoke is released before the cam has rotated through
180 degrees, the lower pin itself will perform the function
of separating the clutch elements and leave the upper pin
inactive as far as contact with the cam is concernd. In
this particular case, there was no absolutely definite time
release for the yoke, so that a positive operating arrange-
ment had to be provided which would allow a rotary motion
of only 180 degrees at each releasing movement of the
yoke P, regardless of how long the yoke was held in the
lower position. This feature .accounts for the use of two
cam followers instead of one.
It might be of interest to mention here that this mechan-
ism is operated at a speed of about 100 revolutions per min-
ute with no difficulty. However, it might be necessary to
provide small depressions in the surface of the cam contour
at the points where the followers rest if the speed is much
above 200 revolutions per minute. This will prevent over-
running of the cam due to the inertia developed in the ro-
tating parts.
Intermittent Reciprocating Motion Derived from Cam
Operated by a Chain.- At times it is necessary to obtain
a positive reciprocating motion, followed by a period of
dwell, from a moving chain. Such a motion can be im-
parted by each link of the chain with the device shown in
Fig. 23; or by omitting certain cam-rolls, the device can be
made to operate only as sections of the chain pass it.
Referring to the illustration, the chain J is constructed
of flat steel links which are joined together by two lengths
of tubing, one within the other, in a way to permit a free
turning action at the link joints. Each link is equipped
with a spindle G, the top end carrying the work-holder (not
shown) while at the lower end is mounted a set of three
rolls. The smallest roll is a slip fit on the hub of one of
the larger ones and acts against the flat cam A when the
chain is in motion. The two larger rolls come in contact
with the bar C, thus providing the necessary support for
the chain while under the action of the cam. The cam is
fastened by screws and dowels to the swinging arm M,
which is pivoted in the bracket B by the pin N, held in the
bracket by the set-screw O. The bracket is secured to the
machine table by screws, the supporting bar C being
mounted on its upper part. There are also two other plain
brackets (.not shown) to support the extreme ends of this
bar. Connected to a projection on arm M is the link P
which carries the reciprocating motion to the required part
of the machine.
In operation, the roll D, as shown in the side view, is
about to force the point K of the cam away from the chain,
and as the cam is pivoted on pin N, the end L will move to-
ward the chain between the two rolls F and E. Upon fur-
ther movement of the chain, edge X will come in contact
with the roll E. At this time, the center of roll D has passed
the point K, so that as roll E forces edge X away, point K
swings toward the chain and between rolls D and F. The
projection Y on the cam prevents the point K from swing-
ing further than is shown toward the center of the chain.
The cam is in action only during a movement of the chain
approximately equal to the diameter of the cam-rolls, and
as the projection to which link P is connected is integral
with the cam, the motion of the latter, as described, will
produce the required reciprocating movement of the link P.
Intermittent Motion for High Rotary Speeds.-Various
forms of intermittent motions have been designed for
driving machine parts that must alternately turn through
part of a revolution and then dwell or remain stationary
between each fractiOnal turning movement. Some mechan-
isms of this class, however, are not adapted to high speeds
owing to excessive shocks each time the driven member is
started. The design here illustrated (see Fig. 24), which is
similar in principle to those used on motion picture ma-
chines, although much larger, operates quietly and smoothly
at high speeds.
This particular mechanism is used on a milk-bottle cap-
making machine. The driver, which is 24 inches in diame-
ter, makes four revolutions to one of the driven member,
which has four equally spaced arms each equipped with a
roller, as the illustration shows. The speed of the driver
is 960 revolutions per minute, and it requires a minimum
movement of 90 degrees to operate the driven member
smoothly and quietly at this speed. The action may be ex-
tended over a larger angle, thus permitting higher speeds
and shortening the idle time.
General Design of High-Speed Intermittent Motion.-
The rollers on the driven member engage a large annular
track (see end view), and after each quarter turn, the
driven shaft is securely locked during the idle period. As
the driver turns in the direction of the arrow, it rotates
the driven shaft intermittently in the same direction. The
surface at G (Fig. 24) of the outer track acts against
roller B until roller A enters the groove H. When roller A
has fully entered groove H, roller C begins to enter
groove J. When point P on the driver passes roller B,
roller A is about half way through groove H, and as roller B
begins to engage surface K, roller A emerges from track H.
When roller A has reached the position marked AI'
m
roller D has swung around so that it is again in contact
with the inner track as at D1, roller B is at B
l1
and the
driven member has turned one-fourth of a revolution. The
entrance to groove H now passes roller C, which follows
roller D1 around the inner track. At no time is the driven
member free to turn in either direction, except as it is re-
volved by the tracks or cam grooves, and two or more
rollers are always in engagement with the driver.
Laying Out the Cam Curves.-In order to avoid shocks,
especially at high speeds, it is necessary to gradually ac-
celerate and then gradually retard the movement of the
driven member. The method of developing or laying out
the cam curves to obtain this result will now be explained.
With N as a center, draw an arc FE through the axis of
the driven shaft and divide this arc into thirty-six equal
spaces. Next, with F as a center, draw an arc through the
axes of rollers A and B and extend this arc 45 degrees to
point M. Beginning at the center of roller A, layoff a
division of 1 degree, then a division of 2 degrees, followed
by one of 3 degrees, 4 degrees, and so on, up to and includ-
ing 9 degrees. The total number of degrees thus laid off
equals 45, since the nine divisions progressively increase
from 1 degree up to 9 degrees by increments of 1 degree.
This procedure is now reversed; that is, the divisions
begin at the 45-degree point and progressively decrease
from 9 degrees down to 1 degree. Beginning at the center
of roller B, the order is again reversed, the divisions be-
ginning with 1 degree and increasing up to 9 degrees, end-
ing at M.
Each division from A to M is now bisected; consequently,
between the centers of rollers A and B there are now
thirty-six divisions, the same as between the centers F and
E. Assume that the divisions from F to E are numbered
from 1 to 36, and that the divisions from A to B are also
numbered from 1 to 36.
From these divisions we shall now proceed to locate vari-
110 INTERMITTENT MO'rIONS FROM GEARS AND. CAMS
111
ouspoints on the center lines of the cam grooves J and H.
With N as a center, draw an arc through division number 1
on arc AB,extending it to the right and left of the vertical
centerline NP a short distance. Draw another arc through
division number 2 and continue up to division number 36
next to the center of roller B. The arcs through these
various division points need not be continuous, but they
should be located to the right and left of the vertical line
NP far enough, as near as can be judged, to intersect the
center line of the cam grooves.
.Now set the compass to the radius.of the driven member,
or from the center of shaft F to the center of one of the
rollers. With division number 1 (adjacent to F) as a
center, draw an arc intersecting arc number 1 struck from
centerN and to the right of the vertical line NP. Continue
until arcs of the radius of the driven member have been
struck from each of the thirty-six divisions on FE, thus
intersecting all of the thirty-six arcs (to the right of NP)
struck from center N.
The thirty-six centers thus located lie on the center line
of the cam groove H, and various points along the sides
of this groove are located by setting a bow pencil or bow
pen to the radius of the driven rollers and drawing a series
of arcs. The sides of groove H, which are tangent to these
arcs, can then be drawn.
To layout the cam groove J, again use the compass set
to the radius of the driven member, and in striking arcs to
intersect those extended to the left of NP from N, work
from E to F; for example, with division number 36 as a
center (adjacent toE) intersect arc number 1 struck from
center N and to the left of the line NP, continue until finally
division number 1 (adjacent to F) is used in striking an
arc intersecting arc number 36 struck from N. In this
way, the series of roller centers for groove J can be located.
In laying out the curve GPK of the outer track of the
driver, proceed as follows: With N as a >center, and from
each of the eighteen divisions on the arc from the center
of B to M, strike eighteen arcs to the right of center P
and eighteen to the left, all adjacent to the surfaces K and
G; then with the compass set to the radius of the driven
member, intersect the thirty-siX" arcs just struck by another
series of thirty-six arcs from the divisions on arc FE.
If we assume thaCthe,thirty-six arcs adjacent to G and
K are numbered from 1 to 36 from left to right, then divi-
sion number 1 on FE will be used to intersect arc number 1,
and so on, until the thirty-sixth division, adjacent toE, is
used to intersect the thirty-sixth arc at the extreme right
of surface K. Arcs equal to the roller radius are now struck
from these thirty-six centers to locate points along the
profile GPK.
Although the ratio of this particular mechanism is 4 to 1,
other ratios are possible by adding more arms and rollers
to the driven member and extending the cam action over
a longer arc on the driver. This mechanism has one ob-
jectionable feature-the driven shaft must end at the driver
and cannot be supported on each side, as will be evident
by examining the end view. However, the continuous posi-
tive relation between the driving and driven members, the
good distribution of wearing surfaces, and the adaptability
to high speeds with smooth action compensate for the ob-
jectionable feature mentioned.
CHAPTER III
INTERMITTENT MOTIONS FROM RATCHET GEARING
Intermittent motions so designed that a ratchet mechan-
ism constitutes an important element will be found in this
chapter. These motions of the ratchet type have been
segregated to facilitate finding an intermittent motion likely
to meet the requirements of any given design, as, for ex-
ample, when the application of some form. of ratchet gear-
ing appears to offer the best solution.
Ratchet Mechanism for Uniform Intermittent Move-
ment and Heavy Duty.- The ratchet and pawl mechan-
ism illustrated in Fig. 1 was designed for moving, inter-
mittently and accurately, a heavy load at medium speed.
The ratchet wheel is positively locked during the idle period,
and a positive stop prevents over-travel and insures uni-
form intermittent movements.
The ratchet wheel W is free to turn on the driving shaft,
which is shown in section. Behind the ratchet wheel and
attached to the driving shaft there is an eccentric E con-
necting with the short arm of bellcrankB, which is pivoted
at P. The operating pawl 0 is pivoted to the long arm of
the bellcrank. Pawl R, which locks the ratchet wheel dur-
ing the idle period, is pivoted at U and is shown in the
locking position. Both pawls 0 and R are normally held
in engagement with the ratchet wheel by coil spring C,
which is attached to each pawl. At the upper end of the
long arm of the bellcrank there is a steel plate S which
engages a flat spring F, thus lifting the locking pawl R to
which spring F is attached.
This ratchet mechanism will operate with the constant-
speed driving shaft turning in either direction in relation
114
INTERMITTENT MOTIONS FROM RATCHET GEARING 115
to the ratchet wheel. The eccentric E attached to the shaft
starts and stops the load gradually like a crank; .the full
and dotted lines show the extreme positions of bellcrank. B
and pawl O. Before pawl 0 comes into engagement with
u
s
Fig. 1. Ratchet Mechanism Designed to Move a Heavy Load
Intermittently and Accurately
a tooth on wheel W, plate S, by engagement with spring F,
lifts pawl R, thus unlocking the ratchet wheel.
A short movement of plate S causes it to pass the center
line between pivots P and U,. consequently, it is soon dis-
116 INTERMITTENT MOTIONS FROM RATCHET GEARING
engaged from spring F, but not until pawl 0 has moved
wheel W about half a tooth, so that when plate S passes
spring F, the hook end of pawl R falls on top of the next
approaching tooth. Before pawl 0 reaches the end of its
forward movement, plate S enters a space ahead of the ra-
dial face of an approaching tooth, so that this tooth face
comes into contact with plate S at the end of the stroke, and
any over-travel is thus vrevented. During the backward
movement of plate S to the starting position, it strikes
Fig. 2. Intermittent Motion Drive Mechanism Used on
Wire-forming Machine
spring F and bends it upward slightly, which insures seat-
ing the locking pawl firmly. This ratchet mechanism has
a ratio of 12 to 1, there being twelve turns of the driving
shaft to one complete turn of wheel W. The connection be-
tween the ratchet wheel and the driven member which it
operates is through gearing not shown.
Intermittent Rotary Motion from Constantly Rotating
Shaft.-The mechanism shown in Fig. 2 is designed to
transmit an intermittent rotary motion to the shaft D from
the constantly rotating shaft A. This intermittent move-
ment operates the feeding device on a wire-forming ma-
chine which requires three partial revolutions of the driven
member for each rotation of the driving member. Drive
shaft A with the attached disk B rotates continuously in
the direction indicated by the arrow. The disk B has three
equally spaced pins C on one side. The ratchet wheel E
is keyed to shaft D. Lever F carries the pawl G and is
free on shaft D. Spring H serves to keep pawl G in con-
tact with the ratchet wheel E and also tends to rotate
lever F in a direction opposite to that in which member B
is driven.
Pawl G is so shaped that when the actuating end is in
contact with ratchet wheel E, the opposite end lies in the
path of the pins C. As one of the pins C makes contact
with pawl G, the pawl is carried with it, causing ratchet
wheel E to rotate. When the pin I on pawl G comes in
contact with the cam J, pawl G is disengaged from ratchet
wheel E, which then stops moving.
Continued movement of disk B causes the end of pawl G
to be further depressed by the action of cam J until the
pawl slips under pin C. The two views of the mechanism
show pawl G about to be disengaged from ratchet wheel
E. As soon as the pawl has discontinued positive contact
with pin C, the action of spring H causes pawl G and
_lever F to rotate in a direction opposite to that of the driv-
ing member B, until the upper end of lever F strikes the
end of cam J which limits its movement and controls the
angular movement of ratchet wheel E. The driving move-
ment is repeated as each pin C comes into contact with the
pawl.
High-Speed Ratchet-Feeding Mechanism with Positive
lock.- The positive intermittent indexing or ratchet-feed-
ing mechanism shown in Fig. 3 is designed for operating
a paper feed-roll R used in connection with a printing unit
of a machine. One end of the roll R and the ratchet
wheel Z, with its actuating and locking pawls, are mounted
...
'tl
Q)
41
R
rI.l
,q

N

41
:::>

l:lt
0
.s
'tl
Q)

a
(!}

'a
til
,q
()
Q)
>t
eo
R
;a
Q)
Q)
:;;;
Q)
'5
cti
1lO

on arm A. Because of the rocking motion of arm A about
shaft U, it is necessary to have roller R positively locked
against rotation during the return movement of the index-
ing pawls D and E. For this reason, the use of a friction
feeding device was impracticable.
The indexing mechanism is not affected by the rocking
motion, as the ratchet-operating link B has a movement
corresponding to or parallel with that of arm A when it is
not being used to actuate the indexing pawls. The index-
ing pawl E and lever F are pinned together, and locking
pawl J is pinned to pawl latch H, but this is not shown in
the illustration.
To index the roller R, link B is given a reciprocal motion
which rotates the bellcrank C clockwise. The indexing
pawls D and E are connected to bellcrank C by stud Y.
Pawl D, being held in position by spring M, engages
ratchet wheel Z which is connected to shaft X. Pawl E
is held in position by the connections to levers F and G.
The locking pawl J is spring-connected to lever G, and
the latching pawl K is held in engagement with the ratchet
wheel Z by the spring O. The pawls J and K are attached
to rocker arm A by studs Wand V. As the bellcrank C
rotates, the indexing pawl D rotates ratchet wheel Z. The
indexing pawl E is disengaged by the action of levers F
and G. As lever G moves outward, pin L allows locking
pawl J to strike the top of the ratchet wheel Z through
the action of spring N.
As the ratchet tooth passes, the spring N finally pulls
locking pawl J into engagement with the tooth. Latching
pawl K is disengaged by the tooth of ratchet wheel Z and
is snapped into engagement at the end of the stroke by
spring O. The positions of the pawls D, E, and J at the
end of the forward or indexing stroke are shown by the
full. lines in the view at the right. The dot-and-dash lines
in this view show the positions of the latches and pawl K
when the bellcrank has almost completed its return stroke.
Fig. 4. Ratchet Mechanism that Automatically Increases and Decreases
Effective Length of Ratchet Al'm Twice During Each Revolution
carries the pinion E, which meshes with gear B. Lever D
also carries the pawl J, which engages ratchet C.
Lever F is attached to the side of pinion E, and is con'-
nected to the link G at its lower end. The upper end of
link G is carried on stud K, which also carries one end of
the rod H. Stud K fits into a hole in the block M, which
slides in a dovetail groove on the upper end of lever
121
c
K
T--
I
In operation, rod H is given a reciprocating motion by
a cam. The movement of rod H produces an oscillating
motion of lever D on shaft A. On the forward stroke,
pawl J engages with ratchet C, causing the entire assembly
to make a partial revolution in the direction indicated by
the arrow on gear B. On the return stroke, pawl J rides
over the teeth of ratchet C, while shaft A, with gear B,
The dot-and-dash lines of pawl latch H and locking pawl J
showthe positions of these pawls when J rides against the
.top of ratchet wheel Z.
On the return stroke, the ratchet wheel Z is held station-
ary by pawl K which has returned to its original position.
Pawl D is disengaged by the tooth of the ratchet wheel,
and pawl E is returned by the action of levers F and G.
Pawl J is not disengaged until the last quarter of the stroke
of bellerank C, when it is disengaged by pin L which forces
the pawl latch over against the pull of spring N. Referring
to the dot-and-dash outlines of the pawls D, E, and J in
the view at the right, pawl J is shown in the position it
occupies just after disengagement with the ratchet wheel Z;
pawl E is shown about to engage the ratchet wheel; and
pawl D is shown riding against the top of the ratchet wheel.
It will be noted in the central view and the view at the
.left that all spring connections are made by bringing studs
P, S, and T out from the pawls. This was done to simplify
the assembling and disassembling of the unit. The delayed
action of locking pawl J is the main feature of this unit.
On the return stroke of bellcrank C, lever F, when rotated
about one-third of its total movement, causes lever G to
move only a small fraction of its total movement. After
the second third of the movement of lever F, lever G will
have moved one-half of its stroke., Thus pawl J is not
disengaged until after three-quarters of the return stroke
of bellcrank C is completed.
Ratchet Motion which Varies Movement of Driven
Shaft Twice per Revolution.-A ratchet mechanism that
automatically increases and decreases the movement of tlie
driven shaft twice in each revolution is shown in Fig. 4.
This motion is applied to a wire-forming machine to pro-
duce a constantly varying rate of feed. The gear Band
the ratchet wheel C are mounted on shaft A and revolve
with it. The oscillating lever D is free on shaft A and
remains stationary. This causes piniop E, which meshes
with gear B, to make a partial revolution.
The movement of pinion E carries lever F to the posi;.
tion indicated by the dotted lines R, causing the link G, con-
nected to rod H by stud K, to move upward, increasing the
center distance between. stud K and shaft A. In this man-
ner, the length of tfie lever arm is varied from L as a
minimum to L 1 as a maximum. The number of cycles per-
formed per revolution of shaft A is determined by the ratio
between pinion E and gear B, which, in this case is 2 to 1.
Solenoid - Operated Reversible Ratchet Mechanism
Adapted to Remote Control.- The mechanism shown in
Fig. 5 has interesting possibilities as a means for control-
ling machines or equipment from a distance. By sending
current through one of the two electromagnets or solenoids
Land R one of the two centering springs P will be stretched
so that it will index the ratchet wheel one tooth in one
direction when the current to the solenoid is cut off. Send-
ing electric current through the other solenoid indexes the
ratchet wheel one tooth in the opposite direction. The
solenoids act very quickly and the spring centers the mech-
anism without shock. Thus the ratchet wheel can he in-
dexed rapidly in either direction at the will of the operator.
No switching arrangement for sending the current, through
either of the solenoids is shown, but copper contacts set in
the periphery of a revolving fiber or Bakelite disk can be
arranged to furnish the intermittent electrical impulses
necessary to energize the magnets so that each impulse will
move the ratchet wheel one tooth in the desired direction.
The reversible ratchet mechanism shown could be used
to actuate an elevator position indicator, for example. By
using some of the parts and eliminating others, a self-lock-
ing device that will index in one direction only could be
obtained. Such a device would be suitable for an automatic
feed for a notching press. Numerous other applications
are possible for this device when used as a reversible
i
i
j
~
JiI
.a
~
1
PI
'2
!
a
Cl
""
:l
0
~
~
j
fa
~
1:
~
~
PI
1
i
0
~
i
0
.!l
JiI
a.
iii
j
lit
INTERMITTENT MOTIONS ~ R O RATCHET GEARING 122
point A, pulling the triangular boss H of pawl D up the
side of the tooth of the ratchet wheel. This action lifts
the stationary locking pawl B from its notch, as shown in
Fig. 6, and drops boss H into the notch formerly occupied
by pawl B. At this point of the operation only pawl C is
engaged. This pawl p:revents the ratchet wheel from being
moved in a counter-clockwise direction b;y> the friction de-
veloped by the moving parts.
The tension spring P has now been extended, and when
the current through the solenoid is broken, this spring
returns arm G to the central position. The triangular
projection H on pawl D pushes the ratchet wheel one tooth
in a clockwise direction. Pawl B rides down the side of
the triangular projection H and stops the movement of the
ratchet wheel. Thus the ratchet wheel is rotated an
amount equivalent to one tooth space and positively stopped
each time the electrical circuit is completed and opened.
The direction of rotation is controlled at the will of the
operator, rotation in the opposite direction being obtained
Mechanism Shown in Fig. 5, with WOl'!dng Parts in Fositions Occupied
on Application of Electric Current
Fig. 6.
ratehet with solenoid control or when controlled by mechan-
ical means. In some cases, it has been used as a single-
direction ratchet with either magnetic or mechanical
control.
The electromagnets are used to set the mechanism and
to stretch or extend one of the adj ustable tension springs P.
These springs are adj usted to overcome the friction of the
mechanism and of the machine part actuated by the mech-
anism. When these springs contract, they gradually exert
less force on the parts actuated, so that there is less shock
to .the mechanism when the stopping pawl drops into its
proper notch in the ratchet wheel.
A solenoid should not be used to move the ratchet wheel,
because the pull of a solenoid increases very rapidly as the
length of the air gap in the solenoid is decreased. For
instance, with an air gap 1 inch long, we might obtain a
pull of, say, 5 pounds, but when the gap of the same
solenoid has been decreased to 1/32 inch, the pull may be
as high as 2000 pounds. The hammer blows delivered by
the application of such force would flatten the end of the
stopping pawl and the sides of the ratchet wheel. It would
also cause a rebound of the parts, which would not give
sufficient time for the stopping pawl to become properly
seated, and the shock of the sudden stopping action might
upset the parts actuated. Hence, an adjustable iniUal ten-
sion spring of sufficient strength to overcome the working
friction of the mechanism and the parts actuated by it is
preferable.
Operation of the Reversible Ratchet.- In considering
the operation of the mechanism, let us first assume that an
electric current is sent through the solenoid R. This causes
arm K to be pulled to the right until it strikes the right-
hand pin J on the arm G. This, in turn, causes the claw F
on arm K to turn and move the pawl E so that the triangu-
lar projection Q is released from the slot in the ratchet
wheel. Next, arm G moves to the right about the pivoting
by making and breaking the circuit through solenoid L
instead of solenoid R.
The springs for pawls B, C, D, and E are designed to
give just sufficient tension to operate their respective pawls
satisfactorily, while the initial tension centering springs P
are adjusted to give jtlst sufficient tension to move the
work, the mechanism, 'and the plunger cores' of the solenoids.
Fig. 5 shows the mechanism in a neutral position-that
is, with no electric current applied to the magnets. The
arm K is shown in a central position for clearness in illus-
trating the details, although this arm would probably never
remain in this position when the mechallism was in use.
It may be noted here that there is no need for the spring to
be so adj usted that the arm K will be exactly centered when
no current is passing through either of the solenoids.
Ratchet Feed with Link - Motion Adiustment.-The
ratchet and pawl feed shown in Fig. 7 was designed to
fulfill the following conditions: (1) The rate of feed must
be changeable without stopping the machine; (2) the pawl
must always terminate the feeding stroke in the sameangu-
lar position; (3) after making four complete revolutions,
the feeding movement must cease for an interval and the
pawl must always engage the same notch on the final move-
ment.
~ feeding movement is derived from the crankpin A,
which imparts a non-varying angular reciprocating move-
ment to plate B about the fulcrum stud C. By having the
crankpin A rotate in the direction shown by the arrow, a
quiCk-return motion is obtained for the pawl. The link D
transmits the movement to pawl lever E, and pawl F trans-
mits the feed to ratchet wheel G.
The swinging link H is connected to the link D and the
anchor lever J, which can be swiveled to various positions
along the segment K by withdrawing the spring plunger L.
The operator can easily adjust this member on the return
stroke of the pawl F when the parts are not under a load.
...
o
indexing cycle, a swing of 72 degrees plus, say, 3 degrees
for clearance, will be insufficient to engage the tooth at g2'
which, as previously stated, is 80 degrees from gl. Thus no
movement of ratchet G will occur during the next feeding
stroke, and there will be no indexing movement until
pawl F advances to and engages the correct notch y.
Ratchet G will then be rotated until notch g reaches the cor-
rect finishing point.
From the preceding description it will be obvious that
the coarsest feed must be slightly less than twice the finest
feed in order to insure proper functioning. Thus, if we
let 8 equal the smallest number of divisions and G the
greatest, then G must equal 28 -1. In the case described,
8 = 5; therefore, G = 9. If 8 = 8, G = 15.
Theoretically, we could then use all the numbers from
9 to 14, inclusive. In practice, however, some of these
divisions would interfere, but this trouble. could be avoided
by having two ratchets mounted side by side with the divi-
sions split up between them and the zero notches on both
ratchets in alignment. Individual pawls, would, of course,
be necessary. If a slight irregularity in feed is not objec-
tionable, one ratchet could be used, employing the maximum
number of equally spaced notches consistent with strength,
but with the spaces from gl to g and g to g2 left blank.
Each of these spaces would equal 360 -;- 15 = 24 degrees.
Intermittent Rotation of Ratchet Wheel During For
ward and Reverse Movements of Pawl Lever.- The mech-
anism shown in Fig. 8 was designed to provide an auto-
matic infeed for the reciprocating table of a grinding ma-
chine. The mechanism is so designed that the table is fed
inward at the moment of reversal at each end of the stroke.
Ratchet wheel G turns counter-clockwise when left-hand
pawl E moves downward, and G also turns in the same
-direction when right-hand pawl E moves downward. Pawls
E are attached to and operated by lever D. The cross-slide
or unit B, which is actuated by the feeding mechanism, is
Adjustment of lever J causes the upper end of link D to
slide along the lower slot in plate B. Thus by locating the
upper end of lever D either nearer or farther from the
fulcrum C, a shorter or longer movement of the pawl F
may be obtained, as desired.
The lower slot in plate B is formed to a radius of the
same length as link D. Thus, when plate B is in the highest
position,as shown in the illustration, the center e of the
arc-shaped slot will always be in the same place. It will
be seen that when the motion is arrested in the position
shown, the upper end of link D can be traversed the whole
length of the lower slot without imparting any movement
to the pawl F.The turnbuckle 1M provides the adjustment
required for locating the point e accurately.
The ratchet wheel G is given a rather unusual form in
order to meet the third requirement. The number of in-
dexing movements per cycle ranges from 20 to 36, and as
four revolutions of the ratchet wheel are completed per
cycle, we have 20 -;- 4 = 5 notches and 36 -;- 4 = 9 notches,
The number of notches required for the different numbers
of indexing movements within this range are obtained in
the same manner. The essential feature is that the first
notch for aU feeding movements shall be located at g.
With this ratchet feed, it is obvious that the coarsest
feed will require a minimum angular movement of pawl F,
equivalent to 360 -;- 5 = 72 degrees, and that the finest
feed will require an angular movement of 360 -;- 9 = 40
degrees. The notches nearest notch g, that is, gl and g2'
are located 40 degrees each side of point g, or 80 degrees-
apart.
Now, if the anchor lever J is moved during the running
period to increase the feed to the maximum amount, the
first one or two movements following the change may be
erratic and the pawl may fall short of the required move-
ment; but even if it happens to engage notchgI, which
rightly belongs to the 40-degree feed or the 36-movement
mounted on the reciprocating table A of the grinding ma-
chine. The member D is mounted on a fulcrum stud S.
When the table A is about to reverse at either end of its
travel, the lower end of the lever strikes one of the adj ust...
able stops F. This action causes member D to pivot about
stud S, thus transmitting a rotary motion to one of the
ratchet wheels G through the pawl E. The ratchet wheels
are secured to meshing gears W, one of which is mounted
on the cross-slide feed-screw. Thus the pivoting or angular
movement of member D causes the feed-screw to be rotated
a certain amount in the same direction' when the table re-
verses at each end of the stroke.
The amount of angular movement of member D is de-
termined by the position of the stops F with respect to the
position of the table at the moment of reversal. After
member D has been actuated by coming in contact with
one of the stops F, it is inclined in the proper direction for
operation by the stop F at the opposite end of the table.
The handwheel H can be connected with the cross-slide
feed-screw by setting the knob C to engage an internal
clutch. When the handwheel is thus connected, it provides
a means for feeding the cross-slide in or out. With the
automatic feeding mechanism applied as shown in the illus-
tration, however, the pawls E must be thrown up out of
contact with the ratchet feeding wheels in order to per-
mit the slide to be fed inward by the handwheel.
Intermittent One-Revolution Drive.-The mechanism to
be described is designed to revolve a disk intermittently,
so that it will make one revolution at the conclusion of the
feeding movement of a certain machine. The ratchet wheel
A, Fig. 9, which is keyed to shaft B, revolves continuously
at a constant speed. Shaft B rotates freely within the boss
of disk C, but when pawl D, attached to disk C, is allowed
to engage ratchet A, the parts A and C revolve as one unit.
GearE, which is keyed to shaft B, then transmits motion
to a slide (not shown).
<
Fig. 9, Mechanism by which Rotating Shaft B Imparts One Revolution to
Gear E when Shaft F Releases Latch G
H
Fig, 10, Position of Bar X after Beinl;' Released by Latch G, Fig, 9
At the completion of the feeding movement, shaft F is
rocked in a clockwise direction until latch G, keyed to
shaft F, moves clear of the drop-bar H. This allows bar H
to drop and clear the end of pawl D, which then pivots on
stud J, under the action of the tension spring K, and en-
gages the revolving ratchet wheel in the manner illustrated
in Fig. 10.
In order to limit the rotation of disk C to one revolt:tion,
the projecting lug L; affixed to and rotating with disk C,
engages the upper hook h on bar H, as shown in Fig. li.
The lug L then lifts bar H high enough to allow latch G,
Fig. 9, to re-enter the notch in bar H, and hold the latter
member in the upper position. This repositioning of bar
H takes place before one revolution is completed. The con-
tinued movement of disk C causes the end of pawl D to
come in contact with the lower projection on bar H, thus
forcing the pawl out of engagement with the revolving
ratchet A and arresting the movement of disk C after it has
completed one revolution. When bar H is down, the upper
hook h must clear the end of pawl D, and the lower hook on
bar H must clear projection L, in order to have the mechan-
ism function correctly.
With proper attention to lubrication, bar H will function
satisfactorily, but dirt or gummy oil will cause it to become
stuck in the upper' position, as only the weight of the bar
itself is relied upon to cause the return movement. It was
therefore decided to change this detail. Although a spring
could have been used to exert a downward pull on bar H,
a lever M, as shown in Fig. 12, was substituted for bar H.
This construction was less expensive than the first one, and
the rotating movement about fulcrum stud N produced less
frictional resistance than the sliding movement of bar H.
The only other difficulty experienced in the design illus-
trated in Fig. 9 was with the time interval required to free
latch G after the drop-bar had been allowed to fall. The
rate of the rotation of ratchet wheel A is comparatively
high, and with a very slow feed, the trip motion shaft F
did not operate quickly enough. Thus, .latch G would not
be ready to retain bar H when the latter member was lifted
by the lug L. This meant that the disk would be given a
second revolution before pawl D was disengaged. To avoid
this difficulty, latch G was replaced by two latches, as shown
at G1 and G2, Fig. 12:' Latch G
1
is keyed to shaft F, but
latch G2 is free to revolve.
When shaft F is rocked clockwise, latch G
1
pushes latch
G2 from under lever M by means of the pin P. Lever M
then occupies the position shown by the view in the upper
right-hand corner. Thus lever M is raised slightly, but
when it is released by latch G2, latch G
1
occupies a position
directly under lever M, thus preventing it from dropping
the full distance. When shaft F is released and latch G
1
returned to the original position, the pressure of spring Q
tends to return latch G2, but cannot do' so because the latch
strikes the side of lever M. Lever M is then free to drop
between the two latches and start the one-revolution drive.
This arrangement prevents the one-revolution drive from
functioning until shaft F has been tripped and returned to
its original position.
Dwell of Sprocket-Chain Conveyor at Regular Intervals
for Loading.- Endless sprocket-chain conveyors are used
extensively for carrying lacquered or paint-sprayed parts
through drying ovens. The work-holders, as a rule, are
mounted at each link joint. In one application of this type,
the chain travels a distance equal to the length of seven
links and then dwells long enough to allow these links to be
loaded by means of an automatically operated feeding de-
vice. This alternate movement and dwell of the chain is
repeated continuously, so that the chain is always fully
loaded as it passes through the oven.
The arrangement for obtaining this intermittent move-
ment is shown in Fig. 13. It consists of driving sprocket A,
ratchet wheel B, pawl C, and driving sleeve D. In each link
H
Fig. 12. Improved Development of Drive Shown in Fig. 9
Fig. 11. Lug L Engaging Hook h by which it Lifts Bar H
holder, and work to rotate, so that the paint or lacquer
being applied will be distributed evenly.
Both the sprocket and ratchet wheel are keyed to shaft E,
which turns freely in the sleeve D. The sleeve is rotated
continuously in a clockwise direction by another member of
the machine, and at its upper end is pivoted the ratchet
pawl. As indicated, lhe pawl has been forced out of en-
gagement with the ratchet wheel by pin F. This causes the
sprocket and chain to dwell long enough for seven work-
holders to be loaded. As sleeve D continues to rotate, the
outer end of the pawl passes by pin F, permitting the other
end of the pawl to engage the next tooth and carry the
sprocket wheel around to the position shown. Here, the
pawl is again forced out of engagement with the ratchet,
causing the sprocket wheel to dwell a sufficient time for
seven more work-holders to be loaded. The movements
described are repeated for each succeeding revolution of
sleeve D.
Duplex Type of Intermittent Drive.- The mechanism
shown in Fig. 14 has the component parts so arranged that
it can be used for two distinct purposes. In the application
to be described first, the continuously rotating shaft A
transmits an intermittent rotating movement to the shaft B.
In disk C, fastened to shaft A, is a pin D which contacts
with the surface of the internal cam on the combination
cam and lever E.
Lever E is pivoted on shaft B and is provided with a lug
to which the spring pawl F is fastened. Two spring pawls
are shown. but one or more may be provided, depending
upon the movements imparted to lever E, as will be ex-
plained later.
The enlarged view, Fig. 15, illustrates the method of pro-
ducing the oscillations in lever E. The movement of pin D
on the internal cam surface of lever E forces the lever to
one side until a point is reached, as shown by the dotted
lines, where pin D passes over the ridge or shoulder in the
joint of the chain is mounted a slender shaft, threadedat its
upper end for a work-holder. The lower end of these shafts
is provided with a roll, which, at a certain point in the chain
travel, comes in contact with a rapidly moving endless
leather belt (not shown). This causes the shaft, work-
Fig. ~ Ratchet Mechanism that Disengages a Sprocket Wheel froIl'l.
its DrlvIng Member at Regular Intervals to Obtain an Intermittent
Movement of the Chain
cam surface. The location of pin D inside the cam pro-
duces a positive motion in the lever and eliminates the use
of any form of spring.
If the stroke of the lever movement is sufficient to pro-
duce a movement in the pawl equivalent to one-half the
pitch of the teeth in the gear or ratchet wheel G, then two
spring pawls are reqUired, as illustrated, the inner pawl
being shorter by one-half the pitch of the teeth. If the
lever stroke is equivalent to one-third of the tooth pitch,
three spring pawls are required, each being shorter than
the next outer one by one-third the tooth pitch. In this
manner, the number of intermittent lTIOVements of gear G
can be varied to conform with requirenlents.
In the second application, shaft B is driven continuously
in a counter-clockwise direction. Through a friction clutch
arrangement (not shown) shaft B drives shaft A in a clock-
wise direction. Lever E stops the rotation of shaft A at
predetermined intervals, so that shaft A rotates intermit-
tently.
Referring to Fig. 15, assume that pin D has reached the
position shown by the dotted lines and that shaft A is being
driven by shaft B through the friction clutch drive.' As
shaft A with its disk C revolves, pin D acts on the cam sur-
face of lever E, causing it to pivot about shaft B in a direc-
tion opposite to that of the rotation of shaft B until pin D
reaches its lowest position, as shown by the full lines in both
Figs. 14 and 15. At this point the pin comes in contact
with the shoulder on lever E and rotation of shaft A is
stopped, due to the engagement of pawl F with the teeth on
gear G.
It should be mentioned here that the drive between shafts
B and A is designed to rotate shaft A at a faster speed than
the driving shaft B. Slippage of the friction clutch in the
drive from B to A occurs, of course, at this point and con-
tinues until shaft B, rotating in a counter-clockwise direc-
tion and carrying the spring pawls F around with it, causes
; ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
,/'
~
~
0
()
~
~
a
!
R
~
In
~
lit
-;;
1 ~
;;$
<.!) 6IIj:q
0
~ a
i!
!
...
.:::
t
12I
:Ii
~
lever E to pivot or swing around to the position shown by
the dotted lines in Fig. 15. Pin D is released when contact
with the shoulder on lever E is made at this point, and the
cycle is repeated as described.
Combination Roller Clutch and Ratchet for Imparting
Variable Rotary Movement.- The over-running or "free
wheeling" feature of roller friction clutches is used to ad-
vantage for imparting a variable rotary motion to the work-
holding dial of a polishing machine. In connection with
this movement, a ratchet mechanism is employed. Simi-
lar pieces of two different diameters are polished on this
machine. The work stations are so spaced that the large
pieces will be close together on the dial, in order to reduce
to a minimum the non-productive time of the wheel in pass-
ing from one piece of work to the other. However, the
same dial and the same station spacing are employed for
polishing the small-diameter work; hence, without the spe-
cial variable-motion mechanism illustrated (see Fig. 16),
an appreciable loss in production time would result, owing
to the gaps between the work over which the wheel must
pass.
With the mechanism shown, each station is advanced
rapidly toward the polishing wheel until the polishing ac-
tion commences. At this time, the rotary movement of the
dial is immediately decreased to the desired speed. This
speed of the dial continues until the part passes out of con-
tact with the wheel, and the speed is then immediately in-
creased, so that the succeeding dial station is moved rapidly
to the wheel. Provision is made for imparting a constant
rotary movement to the dial when polishing the larger
work.
The mechanism for imparting the variable dial movement
is relatively simple. The dial is driven by the shaft A,
which rotates at a constant velocity. On thisshaft is keyed
the gear B, meshing with gear C on stationary stud D.
Gears C and E are pinned together, the latter meshing with
f_
142 INTERMITTENT MOTIONS Ii'ROM RATCHET GEARING
gear F, which is free to turn on shaft A. Pinned to gear F
and also free to turn on shaft A is the plate G, to which is
pivoted the pawl H. This pawl intermittently engages the
ratchet wheel J, its engagement being controlled by the sta-
tionary cam N. Wheel J turns freely on shaft A, and its
left-hand end forms the pinion R for rotating the dial, the
pinion meshing with the bull gear S secured to the back of
the dial. The inside of the ratchet wheel is bored out to
receive the roller clutch arrangement, which consists of the
core Land rollsM. The core is keyed to shaft A.
The ratio of the gears B, C, E, and.F is such that plate G
rotates four times as fast as shaftA. Hence, owing to the
over-running feature of the roller clutch, if pawl H is in
engagement with the ratchet wheel, the dial will be rotated
at high speed through gear R. However, provision is made
for automatically disengaging the pawl just as the polishing
wheel comes in contact with the work. This is accomplished
by means of the cam N.
For example, the pawl is shown engaged, the dial having
been rotated at high speed to advance the work to the wheel.
With the ratchet wheel in the position indicated, the wheel
is just about to come in contact with the work. As the
plate G continues its rotary movement, the cam N swings
the pawl out of engagement with the ratchet wheel, allow-
ing the roller clutch to pick up the motion and continue the
rotation of the dial at one-fourth the preceding angular
velocity.
This new angular velocity is constant and continues until
the polishing wheel has passed over and commences to leave
the work. At this point, the pawl leaves the lower part of
cam N and coil spring T forces it into engagement with the
ratchet wheel, so that the high speed of the plate is once
more transmitted to the ratchet, thus rotating the dial at a
corresponding velocity to advance the next station toward
the polishing wheel. In this way, the two driving members
G and L alternately transmit the required speeds to the
pinion gear R. Cam N is designed to hold the pawl out of
engagement with the ratchet wheel for one-half revolution
of gear R. Hence, since plate G rotates four times as fast
as core L, the angular movement of gear R for one-half
turn will be four times that for the remaining half tUI"n of
the cycle.
When the larger work is being polished, a constant angu-
lar velocity of the dial is required. To obtain this condi-
tion, the holes P and Q in the pawl and plate, respectively,
are aligned, and the pin 0 is inserted through them. Thus,
the pawl is held out of engagement with the ratchet wheel
to allow the roller to transmit the constant rotary move-
ment of shaft A directly to the gear. There is sufficient
friction in the various moving parts of the mechanism to
prevent over-run of the roller clutch each time the pawl is
disengaged. In applications where the inertia of the ro-
tating part is likely to cause over-run, a simple brake can
be mounted on one of the driving members.
This mechanism is designed to operate with the dial in a
vertical plane, as the engagement of the rollers in the clutch
is dependent upon gravity. However, the mechanism can
be readily adapted to any other position of the clutch by
inserting coil springs behind the rolls. Creeping movement
of the clutch rolls in this unit does not accumulate and
change the dial station location, since the creep for each
cycle of the gear R is compensated for by the positive action
of the ratchet.
Differential Ratchet for Imparting Slight Axial Move-
ment to Feed-Screw.-In designing machines, it is some-
times necessary to make provision for transmitting an in-
termittent movement to a feed-screw from a reciprocating
slide. For a comparatively large movement of the screw,
an ordinary ratchet arrangement is suitable, but for an ex-
tremely small movement, such as that required for the feed-
screw illustrated (see Fig. 17), special means must be
provided.
The screw G provides the transverse feed for the wheel
of a surface grinding machine used in grinding. wood
planer knives. It has the very short axial movement of
0.00045 inch for each cyCle of the reciprocating slide A. To
obtain the desired feed, two ratchet wheels C and D, operat-
ing on the differential principle are used. One wheel has
23 teeth and the other 24. Axial movement of both wheels
is prevented by the bracket B fastened to the machine. This

o
o
0!
I
1
Fig. 17. Ratchet Mechanism for Imparting Slow Movement to Feed-screw
bracket also forms the bearings for the wheels. It will be
noted that wheel C is provided with a feather key which en-
gages the spline in the screw and that the screw is free to
slide axially in this wheel. The bore in wheel D, however,
is threaded to engage the screw. The angular movement is
imparted to the ratchet wheels by their respective pawls
E and F, pivoted to the slide A.
In explaining the action of this mechanism, let us assume,
for simplicity, that both ratchet wheels have the same num-
ber of teeth. Thus, for every cycle of slide A, both the
wheels, as well as the screw, would rotate together; conse-
quently, there would be no axial movement of the screw.
Now returning to the actual case, wheel C has one less tooth
than wheel D,. therefore, during one cycle of the slide,
pawl F will rotate wheel D 1/24 revolution. Owing to the
difference in the number of teeth, however, wheel C will be
rotated by pawl E 1/23 revolution; and the axial movement
of the screw will be equivalent to the difference between
these two movements multiplied by the lead of the screw,
or:
(
1 1) 1
--- . X -=0.00045 inch
23 24 4
Perhaps it should be mentioned here that, in so far as
the preceding description is concerned, both pawls could
have been incorporated into one wide pawl encompassing
both wheels. However, the requirements of the machine
were such that a faster feeding movement of the screw was
required for certain jobs. To accomplish this, the pawl E
is swung to the left to clear wheel C and held in this posi-
tion by a latch. A plunger is then released which locks
wheel C to prevent its rotation. AlI movements for disen-
gaging and locking the wlreel are obtained by shifting one
lever. However, the latch, plUnger and operating lever are
not shown. With the pawl E disengaged, one cycle of the
slide will cause only ratchet wheel D to rotate, its angular
movement being 1/24 revolution. The corresponding move
ment imparted to the screw is approximately 0.010 inch.
Adiustable Pawl Shield to Vary Ratchet Wheel Move,
ment.- Alterations made in a certain product necessitated
shortening a ratchet movement on the production machine.
The new ratchet arrangement is shown in Fig. 18. Oscil-
lating lever A is actuated by a cam (not shown) and carries
the pawl E, which through the ratchet wheel C, transmits
the required intermittent movement to shaft F. Adjust-
ment of the angular movement of this shaft is obtained by
means of the shield D. Bearing B was turned down on one
end to serve as a support for the shield, which is held in a
stationary position by a set-screw. Near the end of the
back stroke of the lever, the shield lifts the pawl away from
the ratchet wheel. Thus, part of the subsequent forward
stroke of lever is completed before the shield permits
the pawl to' engage the ratchet wheel, so that the angular
Fig. 18. Application of a Shield to a Ratchet for Reducing the Angular
Movement Transmitted
movement of the shaft is shortened. By varying the posi-
tion of the shield, the angular movement of the shaft will
also be varied.
Combined Eccentric and Friction Ratchet for Auto-
matically Varying a Feeding Motion.-On a special pol-
ishing machine, the work is passed under a set of oscillat-
ing brushes charged with abrasive. In the original design,
the work-table was fed at a uniform rate by means of a
toothed ratchet, which transmitted its movement through a
shaft to the work-table. However, under certain light con-
ditions, the surface of the polished work showed a series of
marks corresponding to the movement of the work-table.
Though it was considered impossible to eliminate the
marks entirely, it was thought advisable to break up their
symmetry, so as to render them less noticeable. This was
accomplished by the, use of a variable ratchet movement,
the design of which is shown in Fig. 19.
The shaft A, which operates the work-table, carries the
eccentric B, which is keyed to it. The eccentric B is en-
Fig., 19. in which Eccentric Mounting of Ratchet Member B
Vanes EffectlVe Length L of Ratchet Arm from Maximum to Minimum
Once in Each Revolution of the Driven Shaft A
circled by the strap D, which is given an oscillating motion
by the rod E. Eccentric B is grooved to receive the rollers
C, forming a conventional type of roller clutch or ratchet
which operates through the wedging action of the rollers C
between the eccentric B and the strap D.
As the eccentric B revolves with shaft A, the effective
length L of the lever arm changes constantly, the range of
variation being controlled by the throw of the eccentric B.
The view to the left shows the mechanism with L at its
148 INTERMITTENT MOTIONS FROM RATCHET GEARING INTERMITTENT MOTIONS FROM RATCHET GEARING 149
maximum, while the view to the right shows L at its mini..
mum. As the reciprocating movement of rod E is constant,
the degree of movement imparted to shaft A is controlled
by the length L of the lever arm. One cycle of variations
is produced at each rotation of shaft A.
Mechanism for Oscillating a Part Mounted on a Moving
Member.-Sometimes a designer finds it necessary to pro-
vide means for imparting a short, quick oscillating move-
ment to a machine part on a member that is also in motion.
The mechanism shown in Fig. 20 was designed to meet such
a requirement. In this mechanism, the part or D is
required to have a quick movement upward from the frame
or part C in the direction indicated by arrow F, and then
return to the starting position. This movement takes place
while frame C is moving through the downward cycle of
its oscillating movement, the direction of which is indicated
by the full arrovV at G.
The mechanism shown is a stop-pin bed used in a type-
casting machine for the purpose of selecting groups of type.
The bed consists of a multitude of flat stop-pins, slidable
in a honeycomb holder. Some of these pins A are shown
in the restored or cleared position, while others, such as
those marked B, are shown in their depressed positions.
These stops are arranged in rows, and in plan view pre-
sent a two-dimensional field in which code patterns can be
depressed.
Frame D is built above bed framework C with a number
of bars E attached to it, and forms a sort of rigid grate
which, when raised at right angles to the bed in the direc-
tion indicated by arrow F, restores all the depressed stops
B to the clear positions A. When lowered into contact with
the frame C as shown, the restoring unit, consisting of the
members D and E, permits a new pattern to be depressed
in the stop-pin bed to suit the new cycle.
Now, it is necessary to perform this clearing operation
by raising and immediately dropping the unit consisting
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
--.1
9JI
I
__I
__
1
I
-JI
of members D and E, while the bed section is making a
short, quick stroke in the direction G. This is effected by
means of a single outside connection-a lever H acting with
the bed frame through a roller and slot at I. The lever is
propelled by a cam (not shown) through link J.
Under one of the several interconnected bellcranks L
provided to secure true parallelism in the motion of mem-
bers D and E is mounted a ratchet K. This ratchet is
-;p.
Fig. 21. Train of Gears Operated by a Rack: for Imparting an Intermittent
Motion in One Direction to Shaft 14
mounted idly on a stud in the bed frame C and is made to
act in combination with the roller P on the bellcrank L. A
pawl M is arranged to receive its motion from the lever H
through the connecting link N and rocking plate 0, mounted
idly on the same stud as the ratchet K.
It can be readily seen that during the stroke indicated by
the dotted arrows there is skipping of the pawl M over the
ratchet teeth, while during the stroke in the direction indi-
cated by the solid arrows, the ratchet wheel is given positive
indexing which forces the bellcrankL and the restoring
unit upward. As soon as the crest of a ratchet tooth passes
the roller, the frame unit is restored to its lower position
on the bed frame by virtue of its weight, ~ s s i s t by the
tension in the spring Q.
The lay-out of the ratchet gear is such that, when the
roller is in any of the ratchet tooth gashes, the roller clears
the adj acent teeth by a slight amount. The stroke of the
pawl is sufficiently in excess of the tooth spacing to cover
this clearance and insure a full tooth spacing. The number
of teeth in the ratchet is, of course, of no consequence, and
such requirements as desirable size of the roller, easy cam-
ming of the roller by the back slope of teeth, available space
for the whole device, etc., are factors governing the design
of the ratchet.
Rectilinear Movement Converted to Intermittent
Rotary Movement.-By means of the mechanism shown in
Fig. 21, the reciprocating rack A imparts an intermittent
rotary movement in one direction to the shaft M through
the gears B, D, C, E, and K, and the ratchet wheels F and
G. During each stroke of the rack, shaft M rotates one..
half of a revolution and then dwells. The length of this
dwell, as well as the velocity of shaft M, is controlled by
automatic valves on an air cylinder (not shown) which
actuate the rack.
Teeth cut in opposite sides of the rack engage gears B
and D, keyed to shafts Nand 0, respectively. Gears C and
E are free to turn on their shafts and mesh with gear K
keyed to shaft M. Pawls, pivoted to gears C and E, en-
gage ratchet wheels F and G, fixed to their shafts.
When rack A moves toward the left, gears Band D ro-
tate in opposite directions, and pawl J simply rides over
the ratchet teeth without imparting motion to gear C. Pawl
H, however, engages ratchet wheel G and causes gear E and
ratchet wheel G to rotate together. Now, as gear E is in .
chine is given an intermittent movement by means of a pawl
engaging evenly spaced teeth on the slide. To eliminate
jerking at the beginning and over-run at the end of each
slide movement, the pawl was actuated by means of a crank,
as shown in Fig. 22. Here the teeth on the slide are indi-
cated at C, one of which is engaged with the pawl D. The
pawl turns freely on pin F in the crank disk B. The disk
is integral with the end of the continuously rotating shaft
A, which turns in the stationary bearing E.
As the shaft A rotates in the direction of the arrow the
pawl is carried toward the right until it engages the 'next
tooth. At this time the pin F is diametrically opposite the
position in which it is now shown. Continued rotation of
shaft A causes the slide to start very gently toward the left,
owing to the curvature of the path through which the pin
travels. The velocity of the slide, however, increases as the
pin approaches the bottom of disk B, and decreases as it
approaches the position shown, the movement at the end
of the stroke being barely perceptible. Consequently, the
momentum of the slide is greater at the 'middle of the stroke
and decreases at the end of the stroke.
Automatic Indexing Head with Self
Mechanism.-Automatic indexing heads are used on many
special machines having work-tables of the reciprocating
type. One design of head particularly adapted for these
machines, especially where an unusually large number of
divisions is to be indexed, is shown in Fig. 23. The work
is secured by some suitable means to the left-hand end (not
shown) of shaft A. At the end of each indexing movement,
the shaft is locked to prevent rotary movement of the work
during the machining operation.
The indexing head housing B is fastened to the recipro-
cating machine table. Extending from one side of this head
is the shaft C, to which are keyed the bevel gear D and the
forked lever E. The forked end of this lever engages a
stationary pin F secured to the machine, while gear D
mesh with gear K, gear K will rotate in a clockwise direc-
tion. When the rack reaches the end of its stroke, the auto-
matic valves close for a predetermined time, thus holding
the rack stationary and causing shaft M to dwell.
When the valves open, air is admitted to the opposite side
of the piston and the rack moves toward the right. In doing
so, pawl H rides over the teeth of ratchet G, and pawl J
engages in ratchet F, causing gear C and ratchet
wheel F to rotate together; and as gear C is in mesh with
gear K, gear K will rotate in a clockwise direction as before.
Fig, 22. Crank-driven Pawl that Imparts a Slow Movement at Both
Ends of its Stroke to Prevent Jerking and Over-run
The movement of shaft M continues until the rack has
reached the end of its stroke, at which time the automatic
valves close once more to obtain the required dwell.
The angular movement of shaft M after each dwell de-
pends upon the stroke of the rack and the ratio of the gears.
In this case, all the gears have the same number of teeth;
consequently, during one stroke, the travel of the rack must
equal one-half the pitch circumference of gear K, or slight-
ly more, to allow the pawls to engage properly.
Ratchet Pawl Having a Slow Movement at Both Ends'
of Its Stroke.-A feed-slide in a special tube cutting-off ma-
153
155
SECTION x-x
Cross-section of Indexing Mechanism, Fig. 23, Showing
Action of Locking Cam
Fig. 24.
B
meshes with gear G, keyed to the arm H. Arm H carries
a spring-actuated pawl J that engages a ratchet wheel K,
keyed to the bevel gear L.
A locking ring M is keyed to the ratchet wheel and, as
indicated in Fig. 24, engages the plunger N in the housing
B. Cam 0, which is a thin plate pinned to the arm H, dis-
engages the plunger N from the locking ring just before
each indexing movement. Plunger N is wide enough to
engage both the locking ring and the cam. To reduce the
indexing movement so that a large number of divisions
could be indexed, a combination spur and worm gear train
was introduced, as indicated by the dot-and-dash lines in
~
~ \
\
\
j
/
m
Fig. 23. This gear train is operated by the bevel gears L
and P.
Shaft A is indexed as the head moves toward the right
just before the cutter engages the work, and is idle during
the return stroke, while the machining is being done. In-
cidentally, if the cutter thrust is against the head, these
movements should be reversed by mounting lever E and
gear D on the other side of gear G. In the position indi."
cated, thebead has just completed the end of its indexing
stroke toward the right. Now, as the head returns toward
the left, the lever E, meshing with pin F, will be swung in
a counter-clockwise direction, causing gear G and arm H
to rotate about 63 degrees.
By referring to Fig. 24, it will be seen that during this
movement of arm H, pawl J will be carried to the left and
will engage ratchet tooth Q. However, just before pawl J
engages this tooth, plunger N is disengaged from ring M
by the lobe Ron cam O.
On the return or indexing stroke of the table, lever E is
swung in the opposite direction (clockwise), causing pawl J
to rotate ratchet wheel K, with gear L, one-sixth revolution.
This movement of gear L is transmitted through the spur
and worm gear train, causing the shaft A to turn one di-
vision.
A washer S, Fig. 23, is provided to eliminate any back-
lash in the bevel gears and preserve the accuracy of the
head. The backlash is taken up by tightening the screw T,
thus bringing the gears into closer mesh. The number of
divisions obtained with this type of head can be varied by
changing the number of teeth in the ratchet wheel, by chang-
ing the gears or by varying the throw of lever E. This lever,
with pin F, may be replaced by a rack and pinion.
Intermittent Motion for Feeding Wire to a Cutting-Off
Machine.-Short pieces of twisted wire, approximately one
inch long, are used in a certain product. Measuring and
cutting off these short lengths by hand was found to be a
slow and unsatisfactory process; hence the machine shown
in Figs. 25 and 26 was designed to do this work automat-
ically. It consists essentially of a mechanism for feeding
the wire intermittently to two rotating shear blades.
All the working parts of the machine are mounted on a
steel baseplate. Bracket A provides a support for the fixed
shear blade Band 3.1so ~ o n t n s a double bearing for the
shaft C (Fig. 25) on. which a rotary shear blade head is
mounted. It willbe noted that bracket A is threaded to
receive the two bronze bearing bushings D for shaft C.
These bushings provide the necessary adj ustment for set..
ting the blades of the rotating shear head close to the sta..
tionary blade B. After this adjustment is made, the bear..
ing bushings are locked in position by tightening the
screws E.
Shaft C is driven by a 1/4-horsepower motor through re-
duction gearing, and drives the shaft F by means of helical
gears. Shaft F runs free in the grooved roll G and in the
ratchet wheel H. Keyed to shaft F is the feed-crank K,
and connected to this crank is the link L (Fig. 26). This
connection is made by the screw M, which also serves as a
pivot on which link L oscillates. Secured to the head of
screw M and to the link L is a spring, the purpose of which
will be explained later. This spring, which has been omitted
to avoid confusion, is of the "mouse-trap" type and is
wound around the head of the screw M.
At the lower end of link L is secured the roller N and the
feed pawl O. The pawl engages the ratchet wheel H, while
roller N rides upon the periphery of cam P. Cam P is a
running fit on the hub of feed-crank K (Fig. 25), and is
prevented from turning by screw Q (Fig. 26). Roll G is
keyed to the ratchet wheel H.
Operation of Wire- Feeding Mechanism.- The manner
in which the feeding movement is imparted to the ratchet
wheel and roll G is as foIIows: As shaft F revolves, the
feed-crunk K and its connectin1r members JJf, L, N, and 0
SHEAR H.EA.D I I ......
01
00
.....
Z

.....

Z

o

o
Z
00.

o

(")
p::

Z
G1
Fig-. 25. Plan View of Intermittent Wire-feeding Mechanism Shown in Fig. 26
c
.....
Z

.....

t.':fj
Z

o

.....
o
Z
00.

(")
p::

Z
G1
Fig. 26. Intermittent Feed Mechanism on Machine which Cuts off Wire at the Rate of 120 Pieces per Minute
!-L
01
c.o
are carried around cam P. Roller N is forced. to maintain
contact with the cam by means of the "mouse-trap" spring
previously mentioned. The cam has two low places cor-
responding to the feeding intervals.
As roIler N drops into these low places, the link L is
pulled toward the center of the cam, carrying pawl 0 into
engagement with the ratchet wheel H and thus rotating the
ratchet wheel and roIl G. This movement continues until
~
roller Nengages the high part onthe cam and is forced out-
ward, carrying link L outward also, and disengaging pawl 0
from the ratchet wheel.
In operation, the end of the wire is carried by hand under
and over idler roIl R, under and over feed-roIl G, through
a short piece of tubing (not shown) to keep it from buck-
ling, and then over the edge of fixed shear blade B, where
it is cut to length by the blades in the rotating head after
the machine is started. Idler roIl U, mounted on two arms
pivoted on the stud S, serves to exert a pressure on the
wire against roIl G through the medium of spring T. This
provides the necessary traction to pull the wire from the
reel, which, although not shown, is located on the steel base-
plate at the right.
Ninety-nine teeth were cut on the ratchet wheel, so that
all the teeth would come into action. In this way, the wear
is distributed over all. the teeth. These teeth have a face
angle of 15 degrees to permit the pawl to disengage readily
under load. Any feeding movement from 1/99 of the cir-
cumference of the roIl G to approximately one-half this
amount can be obtained by substituting suitable plate cams.
As cam P has two low places on its periphery, it is obvi...
ous that two feeding movements take place for every r v o l u ~
tion of shaft F. Through reduction gearing, shaft C op-
erates at 60 revolutions per minute, cutting two wires at
each revolution, or 120 wires per minute. Thus for a period
of eight hours, the production is approximately 57,000
wires.
Indexing Mechanism with Interchangeable Turrets for
Either Three or Four Stations.-A reciprocating slide on
an automatic machine designed for drilling and counter-
boring small fiber parts is provided with two turrets which
are interchangeable. One turret has three equaIly spaced
tool stations, while the other has four stations. The three-
station dial is replaced by the four-station dial when the
work requires the use of four different tools. By the elimi-
nation of the extra indexing movement through the use of
the three-station turret whenever possible, an appreciable
saving is realized.
Referring to Fig. 27, the tool-slide is shown at A. Upon
the slide is mounted the permanent indexing dial B which
is free to turn on the stud C fixed in the slide. The four-
station turret D is shown mounted on the dial. The pin E,
which is a drive fit in the dial and a slip fit in the turret,
prevents the turret from rotating on the dial. The turret
is indexed by means of the blade F, which is integral with
the spring-actuated plunger G, the blade engaging the pins
H, J, K, and L in the dial.
It wiIl be noted that the four pins H, J, K, and L are in
equaIIy spaced holes in the dial, which correspond with the
four turret stations. When this turret is replaced by the
three-station turret (not shown), only three pins are used
in the dial. In that case, two pins are located at M and N,
pin H remaining in the position shown. The indexing of
the turret is accomplished during the idle part of the stroke
indicated.
In the position shown, the slide, moving toward the right,
is approaching the working part of its stroke. On con-
tinuing this movement, the tool opposite the work performs
its operation, after which the slide starts on its return
stroke. As pin H leaves the heel of blade F on its move-
ment to the left, the dial is prevented from reversing its
movement by the pawl P pivoted to the slide. This pawl
engages teeth cut in the periphery of the dial. IncidentaIly,
without this ratchet arrangement, the reversal of the dial
would prevent the engagement of the blade with the suc-
ceeding pin, thus preventing the indexing of the dial. After
pin J has left blade F, the latter is forced forward by spring
0, a distance equal to about three-quarters the diameter of
the pin.
Now, when the slide reverses its movement, pin J comes
in contact with the left-hand end of blade F, so that further
movement of theslide will cause the blade to rotate the
turret. Continued rotation of the turret results in pin K
coming in contact with the blade; and as the slide con-
tinues, the blade. is pushed outward, so that pins J and K
become located in contact with the long edge of blade F. The
tool in the second turret station is now in position for per-
forming its operation.
No means other than blade F are provided for locking
the turret. The tool pins, pressing against the blade F as
shown, serve to prevent the turret from rotating. This
arrangement has been found entirely satisfactory for the
class of work handled on the machine on which it is used.
When the three-station turret is employed, it is necessary
to move the bracket Q inward, so that the heel of blade F
on plunger G will pass the center line of the right-hand pin
when the slide is moved to its extreme left-hand position.
To make this adj ustment, it is only necessary to loosen the
screws R which lock the bracket in place.
o
I
I
I
I
r-
t
I
I
I
I
t
II
I.
I.
I.
II
162 INTERMITTENT MOTIONS FROM RATCHET GEARING INTERMITTENT MOTIONS FROM RATCHET GEARING 163
INTERMITTENT MOTIONS OF THE GENEVA TYPE 165
'"
Q)
0
a
Q)
>t
R
CI)
.!=
'" A
'g
R
0
()
---.. .. _.
Q)
A
'd
R
<ll
R
0
....
..aJ
CI)
()
()
ell
....
0
co
41
P:l
Cl)
()
::l
'd
Cl)
P:l
.s
'd
Q)
R
2
A
<II
a
t-4

41
>t
CI)
R
CI)
.J

r..
CHAPTER IV
INTERMITTENT MOTIONS OF THE GENEVA TYPE
The Geneva type of intermittent motion is based upon
the principle' of the Geneva stop which has been applied to
watches, etc., to prevent winding the main spring too
tightly. This stop mechanism, as the name implies, is in-
tended to prevent rotation after a certain number of revolu-
tions. This is not the case, however, when the principle
of the Geneva stop is applied to intermittent gearing.
Geneva wheels or mechanisms are used to transmit an
termittent motion to some driven member at regular in-
tervals which may be repeated indefinitely, as, for example,
when some part of a machine tool requires indexing or
rotating through some fractional part of a revolution at
certain intervals while the machine is in operation.
Geneva Motion Designed to Reduce Rate ofAcceleration
and Deceleration of Driven Member.-The Geneva stop
mechanism is used frequently because of its simple design
and serviceability. In the form generally used, the driving
roll follows a circular path. With this the
disk begins its movement from a stationary position and
comes to a stop without shock, but the acceleration and
deceleration in the velocity of the disk occur at a rapid
rate, producing a . relatively high angular velocity in the
rotating disk. In order to eliminate these disadvantages,
a German inventor developed a modified form of Geneva
stop mechanisms in which the driving roll that transmits
intermittent motion to the cross or slotted disk is operated
by a mechanism consisting of four articulated members, as
shown at A, Fig. 1.
In this mechanism, the driving member D rotates on
164
well-known Geneva gear movement to adapt it for a par-
ticular purpose, intermittent gearing was incorporated in
the design, as illustrated in Figs. 2 and 3. After laying out
the design on the drafting board, a model was made which
operated satisfactorily. The mechanism consists of a modi-
fied double driving arm Geneva wheel with intermittent
gear segments. The gear segments are so placed that they
transmit a practically uniform speed movement to the
driven member from the instant the driving arm ends its
accelerating movement until the second driving arm be-
radially located. The normal of curve Y is found by ex-
tending a line from V through the center of the shaft on
which M is mounted, so that it intersects a line perpendicu-
lar to rod R, drawn from the center of the fixed stud on
which block S is pivoted. A line from the point of intersec-
tion 0 to the center of roller W fornqs the desired normal
to curve Y.
Combined n v ~ and Intermittent Gear Movement.-
In order to modify the operating characteristics of the
Intermittent Drive Mechanism Designed to Accelerate and Decelerate
Motion at Start and Finish of Dl'iving Movements
Fig. 2.
166 INTERMITTENT MOTIONS OF THE GENEVA TYPE
axis E, and by means of rod F, gives member G a swinging
motion. As the center of the connecting stud H describes
a circle and stud I moves through only a part of a circle,
all other points on the rod or member F describe curves of
a distinct form. A stud at J supports the driving roll for
the Geneva stop mechanism. When crank D completes a
ful1 rotation, roll J enters a slot in disk K. and drives the
disk to the next stopping position, after which it leaves the
slot.
The difference between this mechanism and the older
well-known arrangement is that t h ~ height of the curve
followed by the roll on stud J is not so great; thus the angu-
lar velocity of the disk K, which depends on the distance
of point L from the top of the curve, is considerably re-
duced. To prevent any unintentional movement of disk K,
a blocking disk is necessary. For this purpose, a disk M,
as shown in view B, is supplied. This disk is driven by
intermediate gears from crank D. The addition of this
blocking system, however, considerably complicates the
mechanism. Another disadvantage of this drive is the
bulky unsymmetrical design.
Another similar drive which functions through a turning
block linkage is shown at C. The small fixed bracket L
forms the bearing for the shaft of the driving crank M.
This crank-arm also serves as the blocking disk for holding
the driven disk N stationary during the dwelling periods.
The crank-arm M is connected at V to the rod R, which
slides in a block S, pivoted on the stand T. On the op-
posite end of rod R, is mounted a roller W. As shown in
the illustration, roller W describes a heart-shaped curve Y.
The upper or spear-shaped portion of the curve Y is used
for imparting the driving movement to the three-armed
cross or driven disk N.
As roller W enters the slots in disk N, tangents to the
path followed by the roller at this point must pass through
the center of the disk and the center of the slots, which are
gins its decelerating movement in stopping the driven mem-
ber. One advantage of the mechanism, in its application
to an automatic machine, is that the driver requires a move-
ment of only about 130 degrees to rotate the driven member
180 degrees. This leaves 230 degrees of the driver cycle
SECTION x-x
Fig. 3. Mechanism Shown in Fig. 2 with Various Members in Different
Operating :Positions
free to perform other useful work or operations while the
driven member dwells.
Referring to the illustrations, A is the driving gear,
which operates at a uniform speed. The whole driving unit
is mounted on the stationary stud B and rotates in the
direction shown by the arrow. The first driving arm C is
integral with the driving member, while the second arm D
is pivoted to it and suitably spaced from the first arm.
When arm C engages slot E in the driven spider S, it will
start rotation of the latter member and accelerate its speed
until arm C reaches the center line between the two mem-
bers. At this point the intermittent gear segment F meshes
with its mating segment G on the driven member. As the
pitch line of the intermittent gears corresponds with the
center line of the ,path in which the arm rollers rotate, the
gears continue the motion of the driven member at approxi-
mately the same speed as was attained by the roller arm C
at the instant it passed the line between the centers of the
driving and driven members. The slot or arm on the far
side of the spider S is shortened and so shaped at H that
the roller cannot interfere with the uniform motion im-
parted by the gears as the roller recedes from the slot.
The ratio of the intermittent gears is such that the driven
gear G will rotate 90 degrees while the gears are engaged,
the remainder of the 180-degree movement being derived
from the two driving movements of 45 degrees each,im-
parted by the accelerating arm C and the decelerating
arm D. The latter arm, because of its pivoting feature
(see Fig. 3) and the tension of the spring J is held out of
engagement with its slot K, as indicated by the dotted lines
L, until just before it reaches the center line, when the
action of the lobe of the stationary cam M on the pin N
forces the arm down into engagement with its slot. This
engagement occurs at the instant when the intermittent
gears pass out of engagement. The Geneva gear action of
the arm D, in its further rotation, decelerates the driven
member to a stop 180 degrees from the point where the
accelerating arm C started its rotation.
Inverse Geneva Wheel Motion.- The term "inverse"
is applied to an unsual form of the well-known Geneva
mechanism for producing intermittent circular motion, be-
cause the driving and driven members rotate in the same
direction, whereas with the usual form of Geneva motion,
the rotations are reversed. The arrangement is such that
the driving crank axis and the crank circle are entirely
within the radius of the plate or driven member, and this
produces a vastly different effeet in the timing, acceleration,
and the velocity of the plate. These effects are things to
be considered in applying the mechanism to a machine
design. In ,some designs, the effects produced may not be
altogether while in. others they may have distinct
advantages and introduce an improvement.
The inverse Geneva stop or wheel, motion was developed
to fill the requirements of a particular type of drive for
feeding strip stock into power press dies. Since its incep-
tion a variety of successful applications in automatic ma-
chinery have been made.
Typical forms of the inverse Geneva wheel are shown in
Figs. 4 and 5, the former showing a three-station and the
latter an eight-station plate. The essential parts are few
and simple, consisting of a constant-velocity driving crank
C and a variable-velocity driven member D, called the plate.
The plate rotates in equal intermittent movements from
station to station, stopping for a short interval of time at
each station. As the rotation of the plate is caused by the
motion of the crank-pin roller E in passing through radial
grooves in the plate surface, the number of stations is de-
pendent upon the number of grooves.
The smallest number of radial grooves with which a
Geneva mechanism will function is three. The greatest
number is infinite, being limited only by the diameter of
the plate and the width of the grooves, both of which may
theoretically be made to any proportions. In actual prac-
tice, however, the number of grooves required is not very
great.
Working and Idling Angles of Driver Rotation.-By
comparing Figs. 4 and 5 it will be seen that as the number
of grooves increases, the working angle a of the driving
Fig. 4. Three-station Inverse Geneva Wheel Mechanism
Fig. 5. Inverse GenevlI. Wheel Mechanism with Eight Stations
crank decreases and the idling angle b increases. These
angles are determined as follows: Referring to Fig. 6, the
angle 8 between two adj acent radiants on the Geneva plate
is equal to 360 degrees divided by the number of radiants
N. As the roller enters and leaves the grooves when the
crank center line is at right angles to the radiants, two
equal triangles are formed by the lines AEBand AE'B,
from which Jt is seen that angle b equals 180 - s. Then
angle a equals 360 - (180 - s) = 180 + 8.
Fig. 6 also shows some of the practical points to be con-
sidered in the design of an inverse Geneva wheel or stop.
In both Figs. 4 and 5 the inner ends of adj acent grooves
are joined by a circular arc which is concentric with the
crank circle. This arc is of little or no use, and to facilitate
machining, it is preferable to connect the grooves with
straight lines, as at h, Fig. 6. The corners should be broken
by a small radius to permit the roller to enter the grooves
more easily.
Locking the Driven Member.-In any sort of intermit-
tent motion device it is desirable, and usually necessary,
that some means be provided for locking the driven mem-
ber in position while it is at rest. The locking feature em-
ployed in this mechanism is shown in Fig. 6. In this illus-
tration, a circular arc lobe, machined concentric with the
driving crank axis, is shown as an integral part of the
crank at d.
During the idling period of the driving crank, this lobe
is in contact with one of the locking segments e, which are
made to project from the face of the plate and are machined
to the radius of the lobe just described. This feature pre-
vents any accidental rotation of the plate while it is in one
of the rest positions. The angles f andy subtended by the
arcs on e and d, respectively, are equal, and their magni-
tude is a matter that should be given careful consideration.
The angles should be made as large as possible in order
to keep the plate locked during the entire time that it is
lNTERMITTENT MOTIONS OF THE GENEVA TYPE 173
l
o
H
not in motion, but making them too large will result in in-
terference of the parts. The best results are obtained by
making angles f and g each equal to angle b. This per-
mits the locking action to begin the instant the crank roller
leaves one groove and to end the instant it enters the next
groove. This, it will be seen, is the case in Fig. 6. The
heavy full outlines show the crank in the act of entering
a groove, while the left half of the locking segment is just
being by the lobe on the crank so that rotation may
begin in the plate. The light dot-and-dash outlines show
the crank in the act of leaVing the groove, with the lobe
engaging the left half of the locking segment.
A locking segment e is placed midway between each two
grooves, as shown. Their centers represent the relative
positions of the crank during the idling interval between
working periods. The radius of the locking segment is
more or less arbitrary, but it will be limited by the radius
of the plate. The locking segments do not add greatly to
the cost of manufacturing the plate, because their shape is
quite simple. In fact, the structural lines of the entire
plate are made up of simple geometrical figures and are
easily machined without the use of templets or masters.
Geneva Type of Work - Reversing and Transfer
Mechanism.- Many types of automatic machines must be
provided with means for turning over or reversing the
position of the work at some point during its progress
through the machine. This is accomplished very effectively
in one case by the mechanism shown in Fig. 7. The work
at A is turned over and transferred to position B. To
accomplish this, the work A is fed in the direction indicated
by arrow C to the position D in the reversing mechanism
E. A plate F in this mechanism holds the work by means
of pressure applied by two springs, only one of which can
be seen in the illustration. Attached to the reversing
mechanism is a gear H which is nlOunted on a shaft J.
The Geneva mechanism shown below gear H turns the
entire unit through an angle of 180 degrees in the direction
indicated by arrow K each time it functions. This move-
ment transfers the work from position D to L. When the
next piece is pushed into position D, it comes in contact
with pad N on plunger M, pushing it to the right. Thus
the pad P on the other end of the plunger pushes the work
into the position indicated at B. This action is repeated
F
_ -t-t---t-+-t----1r'f--

Fig. 7. Mechanism for Reversing Work D and Transferring it to
Position B
at each cycle of the machine causing the work, which has
been reversed, to be pushed along, as shown at Band R.
The indexing is accomplished by means of a Geneva move-
ment, in which the combination lever and locking segment
S revolves in the direction indicated by arrow T through
one complete revolution for each 180-degree indexing move-
ment of member E.
176 INTERMITTENT MOTIONS OF THE GENEVA TYPE INTERMITTENT MOTIONS OF THE GENEVA TYPE 177
The roll V, at each revolution, engages one of the slots
W in the plate, causing the large spur gear X to revolve
in the direction indicated by arrow Y through one-sixth of
a revolution. The speed ratio between gear Z and gear X
is three to one. Thus gear G is revolved anti-clockwise
one-half revolution, causing gear H to revolve one-half
revolution in the dIrection indicated by arrow K. This
completes one cycle in the operation of the automatic ma-
chine.
Segment Gear and Geneva Wheel for Intermittent
Rotary Motion.- The mechanism shown in Fig. 8 was de-
signed to give a large heavy table or turret an intermittent
rotary motion. The drive shaft A carries a gear segment
B which contains just enough teeth to cause gear C to make
one revolution. On the same shaft with gear C is a crank
carrying a roller D which engages slots in plate E. Plate E
is so mounted on the table or turret that it is free to revolve.
Plate E carries pins F which are engaged by the rim or
periphery of the circular segment G which is a part of the
crank. This action locks the plate E in position while the
roller is out of engagement with the slots. By varying the
number of teeth in the pinion, the size of the segment, and
the number of slots, the length of the dwell period can be
increased or decreased. During the dwell period, while
segment B is out of contact with the gear C, the roller D
remains in the position shown. Very little shock occurs
when the segment comes into contact with the gear. This
mechanism is adapted for moving heavy loads, as the power.
is applied near the periphery of the table.
Locking Driven Wheel of Geneva Movement.-The
modified Geneva movement shown at the left in Fig. 9,
illustrated and described in Volume I, "Ingenious Mechan-
isms for Designers and Inventors" (page 74), provides
positive locking of the driven member between the indexing
movements. The locking is accomplished by having one or
two of the rollers R engage the annular groove G. The
roller P, carried by the driving disk B, is shown about to
leave its slot, having completed the indexing of shaft s.
The roller R,. shown entering the groove G, serves to lock
the disk and shaft S until the next indexing movement.
'rhis mechanism has the disadvantage of being rather large.
Also, roller R is so located that the driver B must be of
. such a large diameter D that it would interfere with the
shaft S if ~ were extended through the driven wheel. This
construction necessitates placing the driven wheel at the
end of the shaft, thus preventing the use of an outboard
bearing.
Fig. 9. Examples of Modified Geneva Movements
These objections have been overcome by the arrangement
shown by the diagram at the right in Fig. 9, in which the
locking of the driven disk is accomplished by lugs L which
extend beyond the radial grooves of the driven member, so
that they are engaged by the groove G in the driving mem-
ber. Rollers can be substituted for the lugs L, but they
are more expensive. It will be noted that the same diameter
of driven wheel requires a driver of much smaller diameter
than the mechanism shown at the left. It will be noted
also that the lugs L are located in the most effective posi-
tions for locking the driven member, whereas the rollers R
are so positioned that they lose about 30 per cent. of their
effectiveness. In other words, a given clearance between
the locking members will permit more play or looseness in
the case of the mechanism shown at the left. The loads on
the locking pin required to resist a given torque will be
about 50 per cent greater than on the lugs L .
Another advantage. of the improved nlechanism is that
it is easier to make, especially in shops not accustomed to
handling precision work, because the groove G extends for
exactly half the driver area, or through an angle of 180
degrees, while the groove G of the other mechanism is some-
what over 180 degrees and must be carefully calculated and
laid out. The rollers R must not only be accurately spaced
between the grooves of the star wheel of the driven mem-
ber, but they must also be accurately located at the correct
distance from shaft S. On the other hand, the lugs L can
easily be centered on the slots in the star wheel, and their
location from the center is also easily accomplished. Still
another advantage is that by cutting away a little material
on the star wheel and modifying the arm of. the driver
that carries the roller P, either the driver or the driven disk
can be assembled or dismantled without disturbing its mat-
ing part by sliding one part past the other.
Application of Geneva Wheel to Turret Indexing.-
A well-known method of indexing the turrets of automatic
machines is by the use of the principle of the "Geneva"
motion. This has the advantage of giving 3i slow starting
movement which gradually accelerates and then slows
down before reaching the stopping point, thus securing
rapid indexing and at the same time avoiding shock. An
example illustrating the application of a Geneva wheel
to turret indexing is shown in Fig. 10. In this case, the
pin A engages the slots in the disk B to index the turret.
The cylindrical portion of the pin carrier C engages con-
cave portions of the disk B to locate the turret approxi-
mately; the automatic spring-operated latch D accurately
locates the turret by engagement with notches in the large
dividing wheel E. The turret is afterwards locked by a
sliding steadyrest. This indexing mechanism gradually
accelerates the heavy turret at the time of indexing and
Fig. 10. Turret Indexing Mechanism of the Geneva Type
Fig. 11. Another Turret Indexing Mechanism of the Geneva. Type
then gradually checks its momentum. Fig. 11 shows an-
other application of the Geneva drive, in which a roller A
engages slots formed between blocks B for indexing the
turret C. The roller is carried on a sleeve D which is in-
termittently turned by gear E.
Graphical the Geneva Mechamsm.- In de-
signing a Geneva mechanism for intermittently indexing
a shaft or some other machine member through part of a
revolution, it is frequently difficult for the designer un-
familiar with the mechanism to study its action. The fol-
lowing analysis is presented with a view to making the
study of this mechanism easier. In the analysis it will be
shown that a pair of imaginary arms connected by an im-
aginary link can be substituted for the Geneva mechanism
and be kinematically identical with it. This is true for
every point of the working range of the motion. The im-
aginary arms and connecting link will be of varying lengths
at the different points of action, but at every point will be
subject to the very simple laws covering the action of link
work.
Fig. 12 shows in outline a typical form of the Geneva
transmission at the beginning of the cycle. For simplicity,
four slots are shown in the driven wheel N, although this
analysis is equally applicable to any number of slots. The
driving arm is shown at M, the center of the driving arm
at A, the center of the driven wheel at B, and the center
of the roller at E. The same mechanism is illustrated in
Fig. 13 at an intermediate point in the cycle; here the
letter 0 represents the imaginary driving arm, P the im-
aginary driven arm, and Q the imaginary connecting link.
The imaginary arms and link are laid out as follows: Draw
a line connecting E, the center of the roller, and B, the
center of the driven wheel. Passing through E, draw the
normal ED, and through A draw a normal to ED, inter-
secting at D. The imaginary driving arm, is now length
AD, the imaginary driven arm. EB, and the imaginary con-
183
Fig. 15. Initial Position of Geneva Transmission, at which Point
the Velocity Ratio is Zero
Fig. 14. Illustration Showing Geneva Mechanism Further Advanced
along its Cycle
ened. In Fig. 16, the mechanism is shown at the middle
of the cycle, where the imaginary driving arm attains its
maximum length and coincides in length and position with
the actual driving arm M. The imaginary driven link has
shortened to the minimum, coinciding in position and length
with line BE of the driven wheel, and the length of the
Fig. 12. Outline of a Typical Form of the Geneva Mechanism
at the Beginning of a Cycle
Fig. 13. Geneva Mechanism, with Imaginary Arms and Link that
are Kinematically Identical with the Geneva Motion
necting link, ED. This imaginary linkage system kine-
matically replaces the Geneva mechanism for the point of
thecycle at which E is in this illustration.
Fig. 14 shows the mechanism laid out with center E at a
point still further advanced in the cycle. It will be noted
from this illustration that the imaginary driving arm 0
has lengthened and that the arm P and link Q have short-
182
connecting link is now zero. At this point the velocity ratio
is at the maximum.
At the initial position of the Geneva transmission, which
is illustrated in Fig. 15, the length of the imaginary driving
arm is zero and the length of the driven link equal to BE,
the maxinlum acting radius of the driven wheel. The length
of the imaginary connecting link is also zero. In this case,
the ratio is evidently zero.
Determining the Velocity Ratios at Intermediate
Points.- It is now in order to show the method of finding
,-----,.
I
."\ I
I I
I /
I //
I ",/
t.--
Machinerg
Fig. 16. Mechanism at Middle of Cycle, where Velocity Ratio is
at the Maximum
the velocity ratio at intermediate points. In Fig. 13, the
AD
ratio is, by the law of leverages, --, as the connecting link
BE
is normal to both levers, and in Fig. 14 the velocity ratio is
AD
also --. (Compare with a pair of pulleys of radius AD
BE
and BE, connected by a belt DE). By laying out a number
of lever systems, as in Figs. 13 and 14, the velocity curve
of a Geneva mechanism can be determined for as many
points as desired.
There is, however, a more direct method of determining
the velocity ratio. In Figs. 13 and 14, the triangles ADC
and BEG are similar by construction; therefore AD: BE: :
AD AG
AG: BG. Hence -- equals --, and the velocity ratio is
BE BG
AG
equal to --. Lines AG and BG are the segments into
BG
which the imaginary connecting link Q divides the line of
centers AB.
Laying out the Velocity Curve.- To layout the veloc-
ity curve, first divide the circumference EEh Fig. 17, into
any number of parts, preferably equal. Then from B draw
lines BX, BY, etc., through these points spaced out on the
circumference. From these lines BX, BY, etc., draw nor-
mals 40-40, 35-35, etc., intersecting the points on the cir-
cumference and the line of centers AB. Now, assuming
that A-15 along the line of centers measures 2.4 inches, and
B-15, 6 inches, the velocity ratio at point 15 on the circum..
ference equals 2.4 -;- 6 or 0.4. Compare this result with
the velocity curve in Fig. 18.
Now prepare for laying out the velocity curve by erecting
ordinates on the base line 0-90, Fig. 18, at equal distances
apart. Layoff on each ordinate a distance corresponding
A-5 A-I0
to the quotient obtained by dividing --, --, etc., and
B-5 B-I0
connect, .these points. The resulting curve will be tangent
to the base line at 0 and 90 and tangent to a line parallel
to the base at the vertex, as shown. The velocity begins at
zero, gradually increases to a maximum at the vertex of the
curve, and then gradually diminishes till at the end of the
cycle it again becomes zero.
Using the Velocity Curve.- If it is desired to find the
point at which a velocity of 100 per cent occurs, bisect the
line of centers AB, as in Fig. 19. On these segments draw
the semicircles ADG and GEB. Through point E where one

I E 6")j;<
MAXIMUM VELOCITY = = 241'" +
I-l
00
0:.
1-4
Z
t'
1-3
t?:.l
a=
1-4
1-3
1-3
t?:.l
Z
1-3
a=
0
0
z
00
0
Io%:l
t-3
::II
t?:.l
Z
t?:.l
1-3
'i:l
l';1
I
Mac'hinertl
Fig. 17. PrOcedure Followed in Gra.phica.lly Determining the Velocity of the Driven Member at Various Points along tlt.e Path of the Roller
Attached to the Driver
Curve which Shows the Velocity Ratio Between the Driving and Driven Members of a Geneva Mechanism at DiffereBt Points
along the Path of the Roller Attached to the Driver
I-l
00
....
Z
is:
1-4
1-3
Z
1-3
a=
o
o
Z
00
o
I:lj
1-3
::II
tl:j
Z
l?=.:l
1-3
'"d
t;1
MacMnerg
i I
1
MaoMne.ry

--..
-j
8'1.5
........:.
I
,...;;:
i
81
,....",
"'"
..........
H

MacMnerl)
35 40 50 5,5 60
I MOrMENTOr DRIVERi IN DEGRrS
M M m
MOVEMENT OF DRIVEN MEMBER IN DEGREES
i
15
.--
i
9
.--
I
5
---'
i
2.5

10
r
0.2
o
j
180
1401 I : I I I 125J!d;
100
60
20
Fig. 18.
220
Fig, 19. Method of Determining at which Point a Velocity Ratio of
100 Per Cent is Obtained in the Movement of the Driving
and Driven Membeu
Fig, 20. Construction Used to Determine at which Point a. Velocity
Ratio of 200 Per Cent is Obtained Between the Driving
and Driven Members
semicircle intersects the path of the center of the roller,
draw the line ED, intersecting the line of centers AB
through G. The angle GEB, being drawn on a diameter,
will be a right angle. From A drop a normal AD, inter-
secting DE. The velocity ratio is AG -7- BG, which equals 1.
The construction for the 200 per cent ratio is shown in
Fig. 20; in this case, the line of centers is trisected. Hori-
zontal line, may be drawn intersecting the velocity curve
in such a manner as to afford instant means for determin-
ing the velocity at any desired point. A ready method is
to determine by the means suggested in the preceding para-
graph, the height of ordinate H-45, Fig. 18, for a 100 per
cent increase. Then divide H-45 into five equal parts, each
of which will be equal to 20 per cent. Draw horizontal lines
through these points of division and where these lines in-
tersect the velocity curve, the velocity percentage will be
known. The whole range of the velocity curve can be treated
in this manner. It will be obvious that the velocity, after
the driving member has moved 10 degrees, is found at the
intersection of the ordinate 10 and the horizontal line
marked 20 per cent.
To find the angular position of the driven wheel, prolong
the lines BX, BY, etc., in Fig. 17, until they intersect arc
ET. Measure angles ABX, ABY, etc., and layoff below the
velocity curve, as shown in Fig. 18. The angular position
of the driven wheel corresponding to any position of the
driver can then be read off directly.
The only practical point in the design of the Geneva
transmission that will be referred to here is to call attention
to the desirability of enlarging the diameter of the driven
wheel, as shown at points R, Fig. 17. This permits of oper-
ating a locking mechanism while the driven wheel is con-
strained by the driver, and makes the Geneva stop of very
general application in automatic and semi-automatic ma-
chinery.
CHAPTER V
TRIPPING OR STOP MECHANiSMS
Mechanisms of this general class may be used to stop a
machine automatically either at the conclusion of a series
of operations, possibly for stock renewal, or after a pre-
determined number of revolutions. Another function of a
stop mechanism is to prevent the transmission of power to
the machine whenever an abnormal operating condition
would result in damage to the machine. These and other
applications will be described.
Mechanism for Stopping Machine Automatically when
Reel is Filled with Wire.-The mechanism shown in Fig. 1
is part of a machine for insulating electric wire. The pur-
pose of this mechanism is to automatically disengage the
machine clutch and thus stop the machine when the reel
upon which the finished wire is being wound has been filled.
This leaves the operator free to attend to other duties while
the wire is being wound on the reel.
As the wire reel A gradually becomes filled, the roll B)
resting on the layers of wire, is forced outward, causing
the arm G, through a sliding clutch mechanism, to dis-
engage the power actuating the reel. The roll B is held
snugly against the wire by means of a weight (not shown)
connected to the arm G by the cable Y.
The driving shaft D for the reel is supported in bearing
E bolted to the machine base G. On this shaft is shrunk
the clutch member H which engages the clutch teeth on
sleeve J, to which gear K is keyed. Gear K meshes with
gear L keyed to the shaft M on which the reel is secured.
Sleeve N is a free fit in bearing F, and at its right-hand
end has a turned collar. One end of coil spring 0 is placed
189
in a hole drilled in the end of bearing F. This spring, when
released as explained later, serves to rotate sleeveN in
bearing F, so that the screw pin P, engaging a cam slot S
in the sleeve, causes the clutch to move axially, disengaging
the clutch members Hand J.
The latch for releasing the spring is shown at Q. This
latch slides radially in the guide R cast integral with bear-
ing F. The movement of this latch is controlled by the pin U
which is riveted to the latch and engages the deep cam slot
T in a projection on arm C. Arm C turns freely on drive
shaft D and is prevented from moving axially by the sta..
tionary pin V which engages a segmental groove in its hub.
When in its lowest position, the latch engages the pro-
jection I on the hand-lever W, which is a free fit on shaft D
but is kept from moving axially relative to sleeve Nand
shaft D by collar X pinned to this shaft. Incidentally, lever
W is pinned to the end of sleeve N and must therefore ro-
tate with it. Sleeve Z provides for an axial movement of
shaft D; the shaft slides in the sleeve, but is prevented
from rotating by a key engaging a spline in the shaft. This
sleeve is part of a shaft which is connected directly to the
driving motor shaft.
The wire passing on to a nearly full reel is indicated in
dot-and-dash lines in the end view. At this time, the last
layer of wire on the reel has forced the roll B and arm C
very nearly to their farthest right-hand position. During
this movement of the arm, the cam pin U has been f o r ~
outward radially until latch Q is just about to leave projec-
tion I on the hand-lever W. As soon as another layer of
wire is wound on the reel, the lever C will swing to the right
a corresponding amount and cam slot T will raise pin U,
so that latch Q will be entirely disengaged from projection I.
It should be mentioned that a torque has been developed
by the coil spring 0 which, up to this point, has held the
projection I tightly against the latch. As soon as the latch
releases the lever, the energy stored in the spring causes
190 TRIP OR STOP MECHANISMS
TRIP OR STOP MECHANISMS
191
Fig. 2. Mechanism for Automatically Stopping the Machine when New Bar
of Stock is Required
the lever to swing in a clockwise direction, rotating sleeve N
until pin P comes into contact with the opposite end of cam
slot S. The action of the pin in this slot will cause the
sleeve, together with lever W, shaft D, and clutch member
H, to move axially toward the left and thus disengage clutch
member Hfrom the clutch teeth in sleeve J. By disengaging
these clutch members, the power is thereby disconnected
from the r ~ l causing thel latter to stop, so that it can be
replaced by' an empty one.
there is no excessive end thrust on the bearing, a condition
which is typical of mechanisms of this type.
Stopping Machine for Stock Renewal.-A device for
stopping the machine when the bar of stock has all been
used is shown in Fig. 2; this result is accomplished by a
mechanism controlled by the disengagement of the feeding
device with the stock:' The mechanism is so designed as to
stop the machine with the jaws of the chuck open, so that a
new rod of stock may be inserted; it is also devised so that
the machine is not stopped nor the chuck opened until the
length of stock projected by the forward movement of the
feeding mechanism is acted on and severed from the re-
maining stock. This is accomplished by so constructing
the stop mechanism that it is thrown into operative position
when the feeding devices are disengaged from the stock,
but does not operate to stop the machine until the feeding
devices are again advanced.
In this construction, the slide A, connecting with the
feeding tube by the grooved collar B, is drawn back by a
spring when the stock passes beyond the feeding fingers,
there being no friction to hold it; this operates lever D
(shown dotted), the movement being made possible by the
widened space in the cam groove at E. This movement al-
lows the projection F to pass the latch G so that, on the next
revolution of the cam, the lever H, carrying the latch, is
rocked together with shaft I, which throws the driving
mechanism out of operation and also sounds the gong J to
notify the operator that a new piece of stock is needed.
Cork Cap. Disk Feeding Mechanism which Operates
Only When Caps are in the Receiving Position.- The
device shown in Fig. 3 is used in conjunction with a cap-
feeding mechanism for inserting cork disks in the caps.
As the caps are fed down the line the device places a cork
disk in each cap, after which the caps continue on their
way to other stations. The outstanding feature of the de-
vice is that it will not feed a cork disk R from the mag-
When the empty reel is in place, the hand-lever W is
merely swung downward to start the reel rotating. This
causes roll B to rest on the core of the reel and the cam
slot T to allow pin U to move downward, so that latch Q
once more engages the projection I and locks the lever in
position. This downward movement of the hand-lever, of
course, rotates the sleeve N so that the reverse action of
the pin in the cam slot S occurs, moving the sleeve N toward
the right and engaging the clutch members Hand J, thus
rotating the reel.
One outstanding feature of this arrangement is that
192
N
N
Z
o
j::::
o
w
(/)
moo I-
azine Q unless there is a cap ready to receive it. This is
quite important, because it frequently happens that the flow
of caps is interrupted. If the device continued to feed the
cork disks, they would be wasted and in all probability, the
mechanism would jam.
This cork disk feeding mechanism is synchronized with
the cap-feeding mechanism, so that there is no chance for a
misstep in production. The cork disks R are stacked in the
vertical magazine or tube Q, which is kept in continuous
agitation so that the disks assume a horizontal position, the
upper ones falling down when those at the bottom are re-
moved. A feeding finger M, slightly larger in width than
the diameter of the cork disk, passes back and forth under
the stack of disks, pushing them, one by one, under the
plunger P. The plunger then forces the cork disk intothe
cavity provided for it in the cap. An anvil S is provided
under the caps to take the pressure of the plunger.
The finger M slides in a groove provided for it between
D and T. A hinged latch, consisting of parts K and Land
the latch part B, is fastened to the feeding finger per-
manently. Below the feeding finger is the driving slideF,
which functions in a groove between T and E. The driving
slide reciprocates continuously under the action of the
rocker arm H through the pin connection G. A groove cut
in the top of the driving slide corresponds in shape to the
projection C on latch B. When projection C rests in the
groove on the top of the driving slide, the feeding finger M
is reciprocated under the cork disk stack.
The mechanism is synchronized, so that a cork disk is in
place ready to be forced down by the plunger just at the
time when the cap begins to move from its place directly
ahead of the cork disk feeding mechanism. A feeler bar N
is placed at this point ahead of the cork disk feeding mech-
anism and, by its vertical motion, controls the feeding of
the cork disks. The feeler bar is guided in a slot cut in the
cap guide bar, and the opposite end rests in a slot in the
TRIP OR STOP MECHANISMS 194
TRIP OR STOP MECHANISMS, 197 TRIP OR STOP MECHANISMS
end of the lever A, where it is retained in place by a pin O.
Lever A, in turn, is pivoted on a screw V, and is balanced
about its pivot point so that the weight will be slightly
greater at the end where the feeler bar is located. This in-
sures the proper contact between the caps and the feeler
bar.
The opposite end of lever A rests on a horizontal projec-
tion on latch B and on the tapered button J. The tapered
button has a smooth vertical motion under the action of the
light spring U in the well provided for it in D.
The operation of this device' will be clearer by referring
to the three views in Fig. 4, which show lever A in three
different positions. The upper view shows the lever in the
position assumed when a cap is under the feeler bar. The
projection C on the latch is located in the slot on the driving
slide F. At the same time, the tapered button J is in con-
tact with the lever. The central view shows the position
of the parts when the feeding finger has pushed a cork disk
into place under plunger P. Lever A is in the same position
as in the upper view, which indicates that another cap is
under the feeler bar. The projection W on latch J1 has
depressed the tapered button, so that the projection C en-
gages the driving slide F. When there is no cap under the
feeler bar, the parts assume the positions shown in the
lower view. In this case, lever A has been raised from the
tapered button so that as the projection W rides up the ta-
pered surface it lifts projection C out of the slot in the
driving slide and thereby stops the movement of the feed-
ing finger M, Fig. 3.
Device that Prevents Engagement of Clutch Until
Slide is in Operating Position.-The rotating spinning
tool of a machine for spinning an inaccessible joint in
kitchenware had to be of the expanding and contracting
type to allow access to the work. The machine clutch was
required to be disengaged and the rotary movement of the
tool positively stopped while the tool entered the work, as
o
>
196
-, < 3:lD a (.) L&.
otherwise, the centrifugal force would cause the tool to
expand and damage the work. To prevent the operator
from accidentally leaving the clutch engaged at this time,
the simple locking arrangement shown in Fig. 5 was
devised.
The tool-spindle A rotates in bearings Band C, which are
cast integral with a vertical tool-slide D. This slide is fed
downward by a foot-pedal, which actuates a rack and pin-
ion. The foot-pedal and rack and pinion are not shown in
the illustration. The machine clutch is operated by lever E,
pivoted to the bracket cast on the machine frame F. This
lever is connected to the clutch mechanism by a link G. The
interlocking arrangement consists merely of the dog H on
the hub of lever E and the stop L, which is secured to the
vertical slide by a npton the stud J. This stop is of angu-
lar shape and has 3 slight vertical adjustment to accom-
modate similar work of different sizes. ~ adj ustment is
provided by the elongated holes for the aligning pins K and
stud J.
The slide is shown in its working or lowest position, and
the stop is down far enough to allow dog H to pass when
the lever is swung in a clockwise direction to engage the
machine clutch. In swinging the lever for this purpose,
however, the dog is moved toward the left, thus blocking
the return of the stop, with the slide, while the clutch is
engaged. After the work has been spun, the operator must
shift lever E back again to disengage the clutch before re-
turning the slide to its upper position. Thus, when the
slide is at any other point than the lowest point indicated,
ihe dog will come in contact with the stop and preve,nt the
lever from being swung clockwise to engage the clutch.
Roller Clutch with Tripping Device.-In designing spe-
cial machinery, it is often necessary to provide a tripping
clutch similar to that used on a power press. Such clutches
may be required to have the added safety feature of not
repeating should the operator fail to take his foot off the
starting treadle. Special wire or pipe bending machines,
special cutting-off machines, and single-action machines for
such operations as gluing, notching, stamping, and scoring,
are typical machines on which clutches of this kind are
used. To meet the requirements of such machines, the
clutch shown in Fig. 6 was designed. Although not new in
principle, the design has been developed to a point where
the device is light in weight, compact, and effective in ac-
tion. Different applications may, of course, necessitate
Fig. 5. Safety Device that Prevents Expanding Spinning Tool from
Being Operated while it is Entering or Leaving Work
changes in the mounting, treadle action, and driving means.
When the machine is in operation, the flywheel A re-
volves continuously. Shaft B remains stationary until the
operator depresses the foot-treadle. When the treadle is
pressed down, shaft B makes one complete revolution and
stops, regardless of whether the operator removes his foot
from the treadle or keeps the treadle depressed. In order
to cause the shaft B to make another complete revolution,
the treadle must be allowed to return to its normal position
and be depressed again.
Briefly, the action of the tripping device is as follows:
When the foot-treadle is depressed, the treadle-rod pulls
plate X to the right against the tension of spring Y. This
movement brings latch 0 into contact with collar U at V,
causing rod T to move to the right against the tension of
spring R. The downward movement of the foot-treadle is
continued until the latch P at the end of rod T is disen..
gaged from the nose J of the friction roller cage, also shown
in Fig. 7. The friction roller cage, being thus released, is
revolved clockwise on the hub of collar E through the action
of spring K fastened to pins Land M, Fig. 7. Referring to
Fig. 6, it will be noted that collar E is keyed to shaft B.
Now as the roller cage revolves, it carries the rollers N
with it, forcing the rolls to climb up the cam surfaces of
the cam member D, which is keyed to shaft B. The rollers
finally reach a point where they act as wedges between
cam D and the hardened steel ring G, which is pressed into
the hub of the flywheel A. Flywheel A then drives shaft B
forward in the direction indicated by the arrow, the roller
cage and collar E revolving with the shaft.
The shaft B is revolved but a fractional part of a revolu-
tion before the cam Q, secured to collar E, comes in contact
with the cam I at the end of plate X, causing plate X to
pivot about pin W against the tension of spring F. This
action serves to disengage collar U from contact with latch
o at point V, allowing spring R to force rod T back into
[ 1] J]
.!:l
4>
Q)
...,
I'l
4>
l>
Q)
.s
0:
'd
::>
A
Q)
0

A
bJl
l'l
's.
.8'
f1

:3
.B
0
1iJ
::::
0
eO
&n
...
Ul
Ul
J:
l&.
Fig. 7. Roller Cage J, Collar E, and Cam D of Clutch
Shown in Fig. 6
Fig. 8. Electrical Tripping Device that Stops Machine when Chain
Breaks or when the Slack Varies
in bead-chain forming machines and then delivered to other
machines where it is cut off to the required length for as-
sembly in the sockets. In the cutting-off machines, the
chain is passed over two sprockets A and B, Fig. 8. Creep-
ing of the chain on the sprockets is one of the major trou-
bles experienced with these machines; and if the machine
continues running after creeping occurs, mutilation of the
chain in another part of the machine results.
It was found that this difficulty could be overcome by
lower view. However, the construction is such that the
latch can be located at any desired angle relative to the
roller cage. To insure efficient operation of the safety de-
vice, care should be taken to see that the rod T slides freely
in its bearings, and that spring R has a very snappy action.
All wearing parts should, of course, be hardened.
Tripping Device for Bead-Chain Cutting-Off Machine.-
Bead chain made of brass is used in large quantities for
electric-light pull-:sockets. This chain is wound on spools
shaft B stops, while the flywheel continues to revolve. All
parts of the device are now in the positions shown in Fig. 6,
ready for the tripping operation to be repeated. While
the treadle-rod and the latches are shown in a horizontal
position in the illustration, they are usually located in a
vertical position, plate S being mounted on the machine
frame, portions of which are shown in cross-section in the
the position shown, with the latch P ready to engage nose J
of the roller cage when it has made a complete revolution.
As the rolls are prevented from. moving forward by the
roller cage when nose J is stopped by latch P, their wedging
action between the ring G and the cam D is released and
202
maintaining a certain amount of slack between the sprock-
ets; and to obtain this condition, the tripping arrangement
shown was incorporated in the machine. The tripping
mechanism is so arranged that if the slack becomes appre-
ciably greater- or less than that indicated, the chain closes
the electric circuit of a solenoid. This causes the core of
the solenoid to release a clutch which stops the machine.
The operator then gives the chain the required amount of
slack. One' of the advantages of this type of tripping de-
vice is that the chain is not required to lift or support any
weighted latch member in order to close the circuit; the
chain itself closes the circuit. In addition to this, if the
chain breaks, the circuit is also closed, causing the solenoid
to stop the machine.
The tripping arrangement consists chiefly of the fiber
slide C, which is guided in the stationary block D. On the
slide are mounted two sets of rolls E and F. At the end
of the small pins on which the rolls turn, copper wires are
soldered. These wires are connected to the two main wires
G and H leading to the solenoid (not shown). It will be
noted that slide C has a floating action, its weight being
supported by the spring attached to screw J. This pre-
vents excessive pressure of the upper rolls on the chain.
Screw J can be adjusted so that the chain is normally half
way between the upper and lower sets of rolls. The slide
is made from fiber in order to insulate it from the machine,
and the machine is separated from its foundation by layers
of insulation to prevent grounding of the current.
The action of the device is as follows: If the chain creeps
forward on sprocket B, the slack will increase until the
chain rests on rolls F. This closes the circuit formed by
wires G and H and operates the solenoid, which, in turn,
releases the clutch and stops the machine. If the creeping
of the chain is such that the slack is reduced, a similar
action of the solenoid occurs, the chain being drawn against
rolls E, in this case, and thus closing the circuit.
205
x
Fig. 9. Quick-tripping Mechanillm for Clamping Device
x
involute cam F pivoted in a slot cut through the middle of
the plate cam. These two cams actuate the cam-roll C
which perforn1s the required tripping and releasing opera-
tions.
The shaft B, to which the plate cam A is keyed, has a
reversing motion. It revolves approximately 180 degrees
Quick - Tripping Mechanism for Clamping Device.-
In designing a special clamping device, it was necessary
to incorporate a quick-tripping mechanism which would
provide for a rather slow releasing and an almost instan-
taneous clamping action. The mechanism designed for this
purpose consists of common plate cam A (Fig. 9), and an
in a counter-clockwise direction, reverses, and then returns
to the starting position, this oscillating movement being
continuous. As the plate cam A revolves in a counter-clock-
wise direction, the roll C is gradually depressed by the
cam F, causing the clamping device to be released slowly.
When the cam F the point where the roll C is in
contact with the lobe E of the cam A, the clamp is fully re-
leased, and continued rotation of the cam brings the end
of the adjusting screw of latch I into contact with roll C,
causing the latch to release cam F and allowing the springs
G to draw the cam into the position shown by the dotted
lines.
At this point the direction of rotation of shaft B is re-
versed by a mechanism on the machine, which is not shown
in the illustration. As the cam assembly turns in a clock-
wise direction, the roll C reaches the end of the dwell sur-
face of lobe E and is returned into contact with the con-
centric portion of cam A with a very sudden action through
the tension exerted by spring D. This sudden movement
of roll C engages the clamping device almost instantly. As
the cam continues to rotate, the roll C comes into contact
with the protruding end of cam F. As the tension of spring
D is sufficient to overcome the tension of springs G, the
cam F is returned to the position shown by the full lines,
where it is held by latch I, which is under the tension of the
flat spring J. The mechanism is thus set in position for a
repetition of the cycle just described, upon the reversal of
the shaft B.
Mechanism for Stopping a Machine After a Given
Number of Revolutions.-The mechanism shown in Fig. 10
is designed for use on either a hand- or a power-driven ma-
chine. The object of the device is to control the number of
pieces fed into an assembly from a magazine, by auto-
matically stopping the machine at the end of the count.
The device is applicable to any kind of machine in which
a shaft or the complete machine is required to be stopped
Mechanism with a and Nut Arranged to Disconnec.t the Driving Clutch
after a Given Number of Revolutions .
207
after a given number of revolutions. The machine or shaft
remains idle until the work is removed and the handle M
is moved to the starting position.
A pulley (not shown) drives the main tubular shaft B
through clutch members E, F, and G. Shaft B, in turn,
drives the machine. The pulley is keyed to the hub of
clutch spider E. The circular barrel F, having thirty in-
ternal is positively secured within the four arms of
spider E and revolves with the pulley. The connecting
and disconnecting circular clutch member G between Band
F has thirty external teeth designed to mesh with the teeth
in F at P. Member G is a sliding fit on shaft B, but is pre-
vented from rotating on it by key R.
The concentric spring-pad ring S, mounted on three slid-
ing pins U, is backed up by three compression springs T.
On the face of this pad is riveted a piece of brake lining or
fabric which provides a frictional engagement between
F and G. This friction clutch is adjusted to allow two
revolutions before the speeds of the two revolving mem-
bers become synchronized and the teeth become positively
engaged at P.
Within the shaft B is a sliding rod K having crosswise
holes near each end, through which two pins L are driven.
These pins project through slots in the sides of the shaft.
Shaft B has either a buttress or a square thread with a lead
and a horizontal length that is sufficient to provide for the
largest number of revolutions required. The half-nut H is
a sliding fit in the channel I, mounted on the slide J. The
threaded hole in nut H is elongated on one side an amount
equal to a little more than double the depth of the thread.
The thread is also cut away until only about one-half of the
threaded circumference is left for engagement.
The pin N in the cross-slide actuates the transfer chan-
nel I, either engaging the half-nut H with the lead-screw or
disengaging it, by its action on the cam slot 0 in the sliding
portion of handle M. Two coil tension springs Q are at..
tached to the half-nut, their opposite ends being positively
fixed to the left-hand bearing on the machine. The half-nut
is shown just making contact with the front of clutch mem-
ber G. As shaft B continues to revolve, the nut advances
until the clutch teeth at P are disengaged. The member G
then comes in contaG,t with pin L as both G and K are moved
forward, disconnecting the clutch pad S from frictional con-
tact with F. The machine is thus stopped, allowing the
clutch barrel to run idle.
When it is desired to start the machine, the handle M is
puIIed forward, causing the nut to become momentari};y dis-
engaged from the lead-screw, so that it returns instantly to
its left-hand position, and is in mesh again with the lead-
screw thread. On its return movement, nut H strikes the
pin L at the left and causes the friction pad S to engage
F. This, in turn, causes G to rotate in synchronism with E,
so that the teeth at P are engaged by means of rod K and
pins L. This starts the machine, and the nut begins to
travel on the lead-screw toward the clutch, where it repeats
the stopping operation. Cam slot 0 is designed to lock the
nut channel in its propeL' position while the nut is
on the lead-screw.
When the nut is disengaged from the lead-screw by
handle M, it is returned by springs Q and caused to strike
pin L at the left, thus being held momentarily in contact
with the pin. The nut cannot start back until it has caused
the clutch to engage and thus commence the count. The
springs T under the pad S act as buffers against the sudden
return impact of the nut on pin L, and allow the clutch to
engage more smoothly. Screws at the back of the com-
pression springs T provide means for adjusting the spring
pad to give the proper synchronizing friction and buffer
action. Screw V in the half-nut is adjusted to give the
exact number of revolutions required. Any desired number
of revolutions within the range of the lead-screw can be
obtained by using a split washer of the right thickness on
the contacting face of nut H or by screwing pins of the
required length into the face of the nut.
For a large number of revolutions which would require
a lead-screw of excessive length, if arranged as illustrated,
the nut can be operated on an independent screw in a chan-
nel at one side of the clutch, using speed reducing gears
between it and shaft B. In this case, the nut is made wide
enough to surround shaft B and long enough to lead prop-
erly in its guiding channel. However, with a lead-screw
12 inches long, having 18 threads per inch cut on shaft B,
over 200 shaft revolutions can be obtained before the clutch
is disengaged. This is sufficient for most counting and
machine stopping operations.
Stopping Spring Fat'igue Testing Machine at Time of
Breakage.- An old punch press is used as a fatigue testing
machine for shock absorber springs. The equipment op-
erates twenty-four hours a day and a small counter indi-
cates the number of times the spring is compressed. In the
past, when a spring broke during the night, the machine
continued to operate and a wrong number of compressions
was recorded.
The problem was solved by installing a photo-electric re-
lay in such. a position that the light beam passes beneath
the bottom of the plunger when the plunger is in its lowest
position. With this arrangement, the spring intercepts the
light beam and prevents it from falling upon the photo-tube
under ordinary circumstances. When the spring
however, it collapses and the beam passes over it to the
photo-tube, which actuates a relay and stops the operation
of the machine.
Power Press Stop Mechanism which Disengages Clutch
when Magazine Feed Jams.-When parts become jammed
as they are fed from a magazine to the dies of a press, it
is likely to prove disastrous, not only to the die members,
but to the press members as well. The most practical
method of preventing damage .in such a case is to stop the
press instantaneously at the top of its stroke by some auto-
matic means. This is done by the mechanism shown in
Figs. 11 and 12, which makes it possible for one operator
to tend three presses running at about 75 revolutions per
minute.
This arrangement, as applied to a battery of power
presses equipped with automatic feed mechanisms, has
proved highly satisfactory. In addition to eliminating dam-
age to press and die members, this mechanism also provides
a valuable safety feature in that the movement of two levers
is required to start the press; hence, both of the operator's
hands must be on these levers at this time and out of the
danger zone.
Only the magazine feed-slide and tripping mechanism
are shown. They are mounted on the baseplate A, which
is secured to the press at a point adj acent to the magazine.
The feed-slide, which is indicated at B, reciprocates in
guides on the block C, this block being fastened to the base-
plate. The reciprocating movement of the feed-slide is ob-
tained through link D, rocker arm E, lever F, and cross-
head G. Rocker arm E pivots about the stationary sleeve J,
and lever F is pivoted to arm E at K. The lower end of
lever F enters a slot in the side of sleeve J and is held
against the side of plunger L by the spring M (Fig. 12).
With this arrangement, arm E and lever F oscillate
mally as an integral unit. Thus, link D, which is attached
at its upper end to the press ram, oscillates arm E and
lever F, imparting an oscillating movement to the cross-
head G, which operates in the vertical guides H on the
feed-slide.
The oscillating movement of the cross-head causes the
feed-slide to reciprocate and push the work from the maga-
zine into the die. However, should jamming of the feed-
slide occur, the lower end of lever F would immediately
swing away from the side of plunger L and cause the trip-
ping levers N, Z, and P to operate, as will be explained
1-4
"'tl
0
P:l
en
8
0
"'tl
is:
t;j
0
>
Z
1-4
en
is:
UJ
A
G
p
o
_____-1. I
8 o0---r--
View of Power Press Stop Mecha.nisro (shown in Fig, 12) which Disengages Clutch when Magazine Feed Jams
- 1
0
I
I J t;
<"_ I I

R
8
1-4
"'tl
o
UJ
8
o
"'d
is:
t.%j
o
>
Z
1-4
en
a::
00
1-4
c
I' I I
It....../'............ , II
+- 0""'-:::-- '1 /1 ( \ I .
I I II
II ,.... ,,_ ."".1
t--------j / I "' .f 1-, I - I -..::u::
-+--1 ,- I -----+----.-l--------- -T-L---'--'------
I I l I I: l, Jl J---:::::......, I : I :\
-lC-J-fl.Jl-,.,-..:rr-=."...-J----.L--t--------1r
1-, I' I, I IL I __ "'.... I '\\ , \ 0..:" II I II .......
i=1-lt-.:-;r-ij--l+.-j------I---------
I I v II II I I /I.' L (, .... _..... ,\, , , , 1:""<'1 U-.J) 'I II
I II II I E __-- V ! - 1'. I .., .. 11 I
I I II 'I I\.. -- K ....__..... I \ II II J:.: I 1- --<- \ I I . I I
l/ I I I .... ---- I =J \1 Il II
"c.Jl 1- _' I ,"'--1 --j
" ,......-1---- =-"":;:.-::> "
," I 0 . ..
1'/;.........
'1 __ ........
1,/ _-_ .....
Fig. 12. Tripping Mechanism which Automatically Disengages the Press Clutch when the Magazine Feed Jams
later. Levers Nand Z are pivoted at S. Bracket U, se-
cured to lever N, is held against the adj usting screw T in
plunger L (Fig. 11) by means of the coil spring R, thus
holding plunger L in engagement with lever F. Latch Q,
on lever Z, is normally held in engagement with lever P by
the spring V. Link W (Fig. 12) is connected to the clutch
mechanism, and when moved toward the right disengages
the clutch and stops the press ram at the top of its stroke.
The Tripping Action when a Jam Occurs.- Assuming
that the feed-slide B has jammed, the movement of the
slide will be shortened or discontinued altogether, so that
the lower end of lever F will leave plunger L, allowing the
plunger to be forced further into the sleeve J by the lever
N. As levers Nand Z swing together (by resetting and
when jamming occurs only), the latch Q leaves the
end of lever P, allowing this lever and link W to move to-
ward the right under the action of a spring (not shown)
and stop the press at the top of the stroke. The cause of
the jamming can then be removed.
To restart the press, the operator grasps levers Z and P.
Lever Z is swung toward the right, carrying lever N back
into contact with the stop-pin X, and thus allowing the
shoulder at the end of plunger L to once more engage the
lower end of lever F. After this, lever Z is swung slightly
to the left to clear the notched end of lever P. Lever P
is then swung to the left until its notched end engages the
latch Q, thus throwing in the press clutch.
As the work is fed to the dies on the upward stroke of
the ram, jamming of the feed-slide usually occurs at this
time; hence, the press is stopped at the completion of this
stroke, thus preventing damage to the press tools. This
arrangement also insures the safety of the operator, as
both hands are occupied with levers Z and P when starting
the press.
Device Stops Press if Punch Breaks.-
Electromagnetic devices for stopping a punch press by re-
Fig. 13. Mechanical Device for Stopping Press if Piercing Punch is Broken
chanical type, but there are times when such equipment is
not desirable, especially when it is possible to install a non-
magnetic device that is cheaper and practically as simple as
the circuit-closing mechanism required for operating the
electromagnet. Such a device is shown in Fig. 13. It is
designed to stop the press and prevent the work from being
leasing the clutch when the machine or dies fail to function
properly are sometimes used (see Ingenious Mechanisms,
Vol. I, page 148). Serious damage to the dies or press is
often prevented by such devices. Electromagnetically con-
trolled devices have numerous advantages over the all-me-
spoiled in the event that the small piercing punch P becomes
broken.
Referring to the illustration, latch A is attached to the
frame of the press in such a position that the hook N will
snap over the hand trip-lever B or an auxiliary member
that operates parallel with the trip-lever when the latter is
depressed sufficiently to engage the press clutch. If punch
P is broken, the dog C, which swings freely in an extension
of the punch-holder D, is pushed outward into the position
shown by the dotted lines. On the next down movement,
dog C trips latch A and releases the clutch.
The mechanism by which dog C is pushed outward is
clearly shown in the illustration. The pressure exerted by
the spring F is just sufficient to overcome the friction of
the moving parts and the weight of dog C. Thus the pres-
sure of the finger H on the small punch is not great enough
to deflect the punch. The direction in which the spring
pressure acts is indicated by the arrows.
The cam E is used to operate dog C in preference to a
direct connection with the levers, because any jamming
effect on the dog will not be transmitted through the levers
to the small punch. Finger H is backed up by a spring I,
and moves up and down the punch, the knob G striking a
depression in the stripper plate. The movements are so
timed that finger Hdoes not touch the strip stock. It is
evident that the basic principles here described can be em-
ployed in a great variety of lever arrangements that may
be designed to suit different conditions.
Automatic Brake Mechanisms.- To safely hoist, hold,
and lower a load, hoisting machinery is usually equipped
with so-called safety, automatic, or retaining brakes. These
brakes permit a load to be lifted freely by the motor, and
lock the brake by the gravity action of the load as soon as
the lifting torque of the motor ceases to act in the hoisting
direction. The load is retained by the brake in any posi-
tion, and only when the motor runs in the lowering direc-
tion is the acting power of the brake diminished, allowing
the load to descend. The speed at which the load drops is
regulated and determined by the lowering speed of the
motor, while the brake, in the meantime, absorbs by friction
the greater part of the potential energy of the dropping
load, and generates heatin the brake.
Fig. 14 represents what is known as the Weston brake,
which is the typical form of a very large class of automatic
brakes used on hand and electric cranes to control the load.
A pinion A mounted loosely on the shaft has formed on one
hub a spiral surface normal to the shaft, and on the op-
posite end a faced surface to present to the friction disks e.
A collar D, fast on the shaft, has a spiral surface which
engages that of the pinion hub, and is backed up by a split
washer or other device to resist end-pressure along the
shaft. A flange B, loose on the shaft, has a faced surface
similar to that on pinion A, and carries a ratchet to engage
with a pawl C. A series of friction disks. e is placed be-
tween the faced surfaces on A and B in such a manner that
the disks in contact with A and B are keyed by sliding
feathers to B and A, respectively, as shown at X and y ~
This gives each disk a motion opposite to that of its
neighboring surfaces, and each two surfaces in contact hav-
ing opposite directions of rotation form one friction surface
of the brake. Thus the brake shown has five friction sur-
faces and four washers or disks. These disks are made of
various materials; alternate disks of steel and brass, or
steel and fiber are frequently used, and also polished saw
steel for all the disks. The shaft revolves in the direction
of the arrow on the right to hoist, and with the arrow on
the left to lower; ratchet teeth are formed to permit the
rotation of the flange B when hoisting, and prevent it when
lowering; pawl C is counterweighted to throw it into en-
gagement with the ratchet; flange B is backed against a
shoulder on the shaft, so that all the end-thrust is taken by
216 TRIP OR STOP MECHANISMS 'fRIP OR STOP MECHANISMS ~

.. "
" z
z Z
i
I z z '"
t----2-2----
:
I ......
I
ing the locked condition and holding the load suspended. A
further motion of the shaft results in a repetition of this
cycle, and the act of lowering the load consists of an in-
x
c
c
218
the shaft between this shoulder and the split collar E, and
the brake is self-contained.
Action of the Weston Type of Automatic Brake.-The ac-
tion of this brake is as follows: Suppose a load acts on the
pinion A (Fig. 14) tending to revolve it in the direction
of the left-hand arrow, and the shaft begins to turn in the
direction of the right-hand arrow. D being fast on the
shaft will.revolve opposite to A, which will cause the spirals
to slip or bind slightly and thrust A toward B, thus clamp-
ing the disks e between A and B, the end-thrust of D and B
being taken by the shoulders on the shaft. In this manner
Fig. 14. Weston Type of Automatic BrakE' for Use with Hoisting Machinery
the whole mechanism consisting of D, A, e, and B is locked
solidly together, and is made fast upon the shaft; thus the
pinion A is driven and the load raised.
To lower, the shaft is turned in the direction of the left-
hand arrow, carrying D with it, and since A (at the begin-
ning) is clamped tightly to B through the disks e, and B is
prevented from rotating by the pawl C, D is given motion
relative to A in the direction of releasing the spirals, and
hence the thrust upon A. As soon as this thrust is relieved,
A turns freely in the direction of the left-hand arrow under
the influence of the load, and, overhauling the shaft with its
collar D, brings the spirals again into contact, reestablish-
finite number of such repetitions in a unit of time, the mo-
tion of the loadresulting from each cycle being infinitesimal,
thus making the motion of the descending load uniform.
Special Type of Weston Brake.- Another type of Weston
brake, embodying exactly the same principle as that shown
in Fig. 14, is shown in Fig. 15. The ratchet is free to re-
volve when hoisting, but is held by two silent pawls from
turning in, the lowering direction. The friction nut is
geared' to .'the motor and the retaining shaft with gear
pinion leads to the hoisting drum. The retaining shaft
and friction nut are threaded either right- or left-hand,
according to the hoisting direction. The friction flange is
keyed to the retaining shaft and mates with the friction nut
by means of three jaws which have about 15 degrees angu-
lar play. The friction flange drives the pinion direct
through tongued and grooved projections between the pin-
ion and flange. Any tendency of the load to revolve the
retaining shaft when the motor is at rest causes the friction
flange with! friction disk to be pressed against the ratchet
wheel and the thrust washer of the nut, due to the action
of the threads. The friction of this washer against the
ratchet wheel, which, as already explained, does not turn
in the lowering direction, is sufficient to hold the load. Upon
starting the motor to lower, it turns the friction nut and
relieves a certain amount of pressure on the washers, until
the pressure is overcome so far as to permit the load to
revolve the friction flange in unison with the speed of
friction nut, or motor. In hoisting, the jaws of the friction
nut and flange engage, thus relieving the brake of all
friction.
CHAPTER VI
OVERLOAD." RELIEF MECHANISMS AND
AUTOMATIC SAFEGUARDS
Certain types of machines or other forms of mechanical
apparatus are likely to be subjected to excessive overloads
resulting possibly in breakage of one or more parts unless
provision is made to prevent, automatically, any dangerous
overloading. These overloads are due to some abnormal
operating condition and the function of the relief or release
mechanism is to automatically disconnect the machine or
driven member from the Rource of power, thus safeguard-
ing it against excessive strains and serious damage. These
overload relief mechanisms may be classed as a form of
tripping or stop mechanism designed especially to safe...
guard a machine or its parts against excessive strains and
breakage.
Automatic Overload Release for Worm-Gear Drive.-
A machine for cutting coal in mining is subjected to such
strains, jerks, and shocks that some overload protection is
essential. A cast-iron safety washer which has been ap-
plied on mining machinery for many years has certain dis-
advantages which have been overcome by the improved
overload release to be described. The safety washer is used
in conjunction with a worm-gear drive, as shown by the
left-hand sketch, Fig. 1. This washer is placed over the
worm and is held by a nut and a short section of pipe. The
idea is to make this washer strong enough to hold the worm
in place under normal loads. If the load is excessive, how-
ever, the thrust of the worm will break the washer, thus
releasing the worm from its driving key.
An overload release designed to eliminate certain dis-
221
Fig. 1. (Left) Cast-iron Safety Washer Release; '(Right) Improved
Type of Overload Release
advantages of the safety washer is shown by the sketch
at the right of the illustration. The worm is held in the
running position by the coil spring A, the tension of which
may be adjusted by nut B on the worm-shaft. A jaw
223 OVERLOAD RELIEF MECHANISMS
causing the small coil spring at H to swing clutch handle J
from position K to L, which locks the worm in the out or
disengaged position. To reset, lever J is simply returned
to its former place, which permits the driving and driven
parts of clutch C to come into engagement.
It is important to have the ball thrust bearing M be-
tween spring A and nut B, because when the clutch is in
the disengaged position, the worm-shaft and nut must
necessarily continue to turn, while the worm is idle. The
teeth of clutch C should be rounded at the edges to prevent
damage at the moment of disengagement under load.
This mechanism is quick and positive, and can be applied
to various other drives, especially when a machine is likely
to encounter some obstruction due to careless adjustment
or operation. It can be utilized to provide overload pro-
tection when a machine is running in one direction but not
in the other. For example, many machines are geared for
a higher speed during the return stroke, and overload pro-
tection is desirable for this reversal or backward movement.
Various other applications will be apparent to designers.
It is obvious that every machine subject to overload should
have its safety device, for the same reason that motoFs need
fuses and circuit-breakers.
Worm-Gear Equipped with Friction Drive that Prevents
Overload.-A friction release is incorporated in the worm-
gear shown in Fig. 2. This gear was designed for use in
a wrapping machine in which failure of any part to func-
tion would merely result in slippage of the drive gear. The
same principle, however, has many applications in special
and automatic machinery.
Instead of making the gear from one piece, it is con-
structed from three pieces, namely, a hub, a ring on which
the teeth are cut, and a friction disk. These are assembled,
as shown at the left, by six bolts. Originally helical springs
were placed between the disk and the bolt heads, as shown
at A, but in this particular application, it was found that
OVERLOAD RELIEF MECHANISMS
clutch C is used instead of a driving key, and the extended
worm-shaft has an outer bearing at D.
The action of the mechanism is as follows: During nor-
mal load, the parts are in the relative positions shown. If
there is an overload, the worm thrust compresses spring A
so that clutch C is disengaged. This axial movement of the
worm is transmitted through ring E and rods F to plate G,
222
225
spring lock-washers were satisfactory if the studs were not
screwed up too tight. The use of helical springs, however,
is recommended when slippage must occur at any accurately
specified stress. After the proper adj ustment has been
made, the bolts are restrained from turning by the wire B
which passes through holes in the heads of the bolts. To
insure concentricity, it is best to grind the surfaces as indi-
cated at the right,allowing just enough clearance to offer
a free-running fit. These units are then assembled, after
which the teeth are cut just the same as in any regular gear.
Before adopting this design, the gear was tested by
means of a prony-brake nlechanism, comprising a pinion
drive, a brake-shoe, and an arm that worked in conjunc-
tion with an ordinary weight scale. The precision with
which the drive could be made to release was quite surpris-
ing. A prony-brake mechanism is recommended for ad-
justing units for a given load that must be maintained
closely. The hub and gear ring of the worm-gear are made
of bronze, and the friction disk is made of steel.
Another Overload Release of Friction .Type for
Gears or for Other Rotating Members.- The release clutch
shown in Fig. 3 is of the friction type and has proved very
satisfactory in protecting parts of machine drives against
overloading. The device can be built directly into a spur
or worm gear and requires no additional space; hence it
can be easily incorporated in a drive where no provision
was originally made for such a device. The clutch is of
simple design and very economical to build, since standard
gears requiring only a little extra machining can be used.
The friction disks used are standard Ford parts, costing less
than five cents each.
Gear A is provided with six equally spaced holes B con-
taining the pins C. These pins engage notches in the fric-
tion disks E and act as drivers. Other disks F are pro-
vided with lugs H which engage corresponding notches
drilled in hub J. Disks E and F are free to slide on each
x
l/)
a
c
~
~
~
rIl
....
'a
p
< ~
t>
-.::
A
'"
0
bIl
.S
~
...
A
G)
~
bD
.S
'l:l
l
.5l
~
t>
0
'"
Cl)
t>
Cl)
...
Pol
....
l
~
~
.::l
0
l'l
.S
~
'I::
fol
~
~
1;;
G)
bD
S
...
~
CIi
6il
~
224
Fig. 3. Gear EqUipped with Friction Drive for Stopping the Driven shaft
when Excessive Loads are Applied
other. They are held tightly against the web of gear A
by hub J and collar L, the required pressure being trans-
mitted to the hub and collar by the springs M on the
shoulder-screws N. With this arrangement, gear A, pins
C, and disks E comprise the driving member of the clutch,
Fig. 4. Overload Friction Release with Adjustment for Controlling Point of Release
The object of this device is to prevent damage to the valve-
lifting mechanism in case the valve gate should be sud-
denly stopped by some obstruction.
The main spur gear unit consists of a manganese bronze
rim A (Fig. 4), about 37 inches in diameter, with teeth
cut on its outer face. The gear is free to rotate in a groove
formed by the cast-steel casing B and the cover C, which
are bolted rigidly together and keyed to the gear-shaft D.
In the casing is an internal brake-band E of cast steel,
mitted is directly proportional to the total axial spring
pressure applied on the clutch disks and their coefficient of
sliding friction, and can be controlled by proper spring ad-
justment.
Overload Friction Release for a large Gear Drive.-
Each machine operating the large valves for filling and
emptying the locks of a certain ship canal has embodied
within the main spur gear an overload friction release.
OVERLOAD RELIEF MECHANISMS 226
and disks F, hub J, springs M, screws N, and collar L, the
driven member.
Any excessive torque applied to the driven shaft will
cause the friction disks to slide on each other, thus stop-
ping the rotation of the driven shaft until the excessive
torque is removed. The magnitude of the torque trans-
which has an asbestos lining secured to it with copper
rivets. The band is pivoted to the casing by the pinF.
A spring-actuated lever is provided to expand the brake-
band and press it against the rim. Thus the torque is
transmitted from the gear teeth through the brake-band
to the casing and the shaft D to which the valve-
operating drum is The spring mounting is adj ust-
able, so that the proper load can be applied to the lever
and the load regula.ted to compensate for wear on the band
and rim. With this arrangement, the gear unit acts as a
whole. However, should a log or other foreign material ob-
struct the valve, slippage would occur between the bronze
rim and the brake-band and thus prevent damage to the
machine or valve.
Pneumatic Overload Relief Mechanism for Automatically
Disengaging Clutch at Remote Point.- A conveyor sys-
tem is employed in a certain plant for delivering gravel
over a relatively long distance to a washing and screening
machine. Too large a quantity of material fed into the
machine is likely to cause damage; to prevent this, an over-
load relief mechanism is provided on the machine for stop-
ping the conveyor, the power for which is applied at some
distance from the point of delivery of the gravel. With
this the relief mechanism opens a valve in a
compressed air line when the machine is overloaded and
delivers air to a cylinder, the piston of which disengages
the conveyor clutch.
This mechanism is shown in Fig. 5; the air cylinder and
conveyor clutch are omitted, as their design is generally
known. The driving gear A, which rotates at a constant
speed, transmits the required rotary movement to the ma-
chine through gears Band C and another gear (not shown).
Gear C is secured by pin E to the hollow shaft D, supported
in the stationary bearings G and H. Gear B is a running
and sliding fit on this shaft, but when the machine is not
overloaded, is caused to rotate with gear C by the bar F.
Balls secured to the ends of this bar engage corresponding
ball sockets in gears Band C.
Plunger J which operates the valve P in the compressed
air line Q when the machine is overloaded is a sliding fit
inside of the hollow shaft. Plunger J contains a groove K
which is engaged by the two fingers L. These fingers are
pivoted in the collar M, which is pinned to the hollow shaft.
At the left-:hand ends of fingers L are rollers N, which rest
on thetapefed hub of gear B. The fingers L, gear B, and
plunger J are held normally in the position shown by the
coil spring O. The collar-nuts T provide the necessary ad-
justment for setting the tension of spring 0 to hold gear B
in the position indicated when the machine is not over-
loaded.
In operation, gear A rotates shaft D in the direction indi-
cated by the arrow. When the machine is running under a
normal load, gear B maintains the axial position shown.
However, if the load becomes excessive, the pressure against.
the ball ends of bar F will increase so that the bar will push
gear B toward the right. As this movement occurs, the
tapered hub of gear B opens fingers L, which causes plunger
J to be forced toward the left and the button in valve P
to be depressed.
In this way, air is a.dmitted to the line Q leading to the
clutch-operating cylinder, which causes the piston to dis-
engage the clutch and stop the conveyor. When the exces-
sive load on the machine is relieved, gear B once more re-
turns to the normal position shown, causing plunger J to
move toward the right and close the air valve. Springs
provided on the air cylinder then return the piston and thus
re-engage the conveyor clutch.
It should be mentioned that a small hole is drilled in the
air cylinder head at the pressure end to permit the air to
escape when the piston is actuated by the springs. This
allows the air to leak out of the cylinder fast enough to per-
mit the springs to return the piston when the air valve P
8
231
c
.....-......
/ ,
--/-- -\-
_""- .L_
E
is closed, but not so fast that full line-pressure will not
operate the piston. This leak hole has another important
advantage in that it prevents the operation of the clutch
cylinder through leakage which might occur in the valve P.
Overload Relief for Oscillating Lever.-Arelease mech-
anism that was designed for a feed slide subject to jam-
Fig, 6. Arrangement for Automatically Disengaging a Driving Lever from its Shaft when the
Load Becomes Exc'}ssive
ming but that can also be applied to various types of move-
ments is shown in Fig. 6. Oscillating shaft A transmits a
reciprocating movement to link B connected to the feed
slide (not shown) through the lever C. Lever C is a slip
fit on the shaft, but is prevented from turning by a locking
arrangement consisting of lever D, locking bar E, locking
plate F secured to a projection on lever C, and spring G.
At the oute:r end of lever D, which is keyed to the shaft,
is pivoted the bar E. A tooth in this bar engages a notch
in plate F and is held in this position by the spring G.
Normally, the entire mechanism is locked together and
rocks back and forth with the shaft. However, if link B
becomes overloaded, lever C will stop oscillating and shaft
A will merely turn in the hub bore of this lever. Lever D,
being keyed to the shaft, will continue to oscillate and cause
the tooth on bar E to ride out of the notch and slide along
the now stationary plate F. The tooth will continue to
slide back and forth along this plate and in and out of the
notch until the overload on link B is removed. When this
is done, the tooth will engage the notch and the entire mech-
anism will once more function as a unit. An eccentric stud
H is provided so that the angular position of lever C can
be adj usted to vary the position of link B at the beginning
and end of its stroke.
Overload Slip Arrangement for Feed-Screw.-The over-
load slip mechanism, Fig. 7, is so designed as to allow for
the application of varying loads. The slide A of this mech-
anism is operated by means of a threaded sleeve or feed-
screw B in the threaded hole C. The rod D passes through
sleeve B and has ahandwheel pinned to one end. The hub
E of the handwheel has a cam-shaped end which is in con-
tact with a similar cam face on the end of sleeve B. The
opposite end of rod D is threaded and fitted with lock-nuts
F. When the handwheel is turned until the screw N comes
in contact with button 0, any additional movement of the
handwheel will cause the cam face on hub E to ridp, up on
Fig. 7. Feed-screw Operated by Handwheel that Ceases to Turn the
Feed-screw when the Slide Meets Obstruction or is Overloaded
the cam surface on sleeve B, compressing the spring P.
When the cam load reaches the high point, spring P causes
rod D to return to its original position. Varying pressures
from zero to maximum can be obtained either by adjusting
nuts F to vary the loading of spring P or by increasing or
decreasing the angle on the cam faces of the handwheel hub
and sleeve B. Boththe spring pressure and the angle of
the cam faces can, of course, be adj usted when this seems
desirable.
Ratchet Feed' with Automatic Overload Safety Stop.-
A ratchet feed mechanism provided with a safety attach-
ment that protects the mechanism from breakage in case
the feed becomes jammed, and that also serves to stop the
machine when this occurs is shown in Fig. 8. The attach-
ment is so designed that the feed can be reengaged as soon
as the obstruction has been removed. Previous to the in-
stallation of this attachment, a shear pin was used to pro-
tect the feeding mechanism from breakage. The shear pin
arrangement merely protected the feed mechanism and did
not prevent the loss in production that resulted from op-
234 OVERLOAD RELIEF MECHANISMS OVERLOAD RELIEF MECHANISMS 235

erating the machine while the feed was jammed; in addi-
tion, it required the suspension of production while the
shear pin was being replaced.
Referring to the illustration, the feed-shaft A is given
an intermittent rotary movement by means of the ratchet
wheel B and the pawl C which is carried on lever D. Lever
H
Fig. 8. Ratchet Feed with Attachment for Protecting Mechanism and
Stopping Machine if Feed Jams
G
D receives its movement from lever E through the connect-
ing-rod F. Lever E carries the swinging yoke G through
which rod F passes. Rod F carries the spring H, which is
compressed when the load on shaft A exceeds a prede-
termined limit. Pawl C is connected to the plate I by the
connecting-rod J. Plate!, which has an irregular-shaped
hole, rests on pin K carried on lever E. Under normal con-
ditions, connecting-rod J carries no load, merely riding be-
tween levers D and E.
The upper view of the illustration shows the mechanism
in its normal operating position. The oscillating movement
of lever E is transmitted to shaft A by pawl C, which is
held in engagement with the ratchet wheel B by a spring
(not shown). Should the movement of shaft A be pre-
vented, the continued movement of lever E would simply
result in compressing spring H, thus preventing the break-
ing of parts. The forward movement of lever E carries
pin K into the larger portion of the irregular hole, as indi-
dicated in the lower view. On the return stroke of lever
E, the pin K engages the shoulder at L on plate I, thus
causing pawl C to remain out of engagement with
wheel B, and preventing further movement of shaft A,
although the machine may not be stopped immediately. In
this position, plate I extends beyond lever E sufficiently to
push over the rod M far enough to open the electric switch
that controls the driving motor, and thus cause the machine
to come to a stop.
When plate I is lifted and disengaged from. pin K, the
machine is again ready to start, but if the resistance of
shaft A is greater than the tension of spring H, the ma-
chine will again be stopped on the first stroke of lever E.
In the actual construction, two pairs of levers D and E are
used, the mechanism being located between them. In order
to show the mechanism more clearly, however, the outer
levers have been omitted in the illustration.
Mechanism for Instantly Disengaging Clutch at Point
of Overload.- Many mechanisms designed to disconnect
the power drive to the machine when it becomes overloaded
function only at one point in the operating cycle. With the
mechanism shown in Fig. 9, however, the machine clutch
through which power is transmitted to the slide is disen-
gaged instantly, at the exact point in the slide movement
at which the overload, occurs.
This arrangement is incorporated in a machine for as-
sembling metal caps on electric fuse plugs, a number of the
plugs being capped simultaneously. The capping tool slide
actually consists of two slides A and B, slide B being super-
imposed upon slide A. Slide B carries the capping tools
and is normally held in one position relative to the main
slide A by means of a stiff coil spring E. If the tool-carry-
ing slide B meets with an obstruction, it telescopes into the
main slide, actuating a latch H, through rod F, which causes
a spring-operated hand-lever L to shift and disengage the
machine clutch. Although not shown here, a band brake
operated by the same hand-lever prevents over-run of the
machine members after the clutch is disengaged. Slide A
is reciprocated in a dovetail guide in the machine frame C
by the oscillating lever D. This lever is actuated by an-
other member of the machine (not shown).
Rod F, together with stop-pin G, limits the telescoping
movement of the slides, in addition to tripping the pawl H
when the slide meets an obstruction. Pawl H is pivoted
at the top of the main slide lug, and when swung upward
engages latch J sliding in the guide K on the machine
frame. The upper end of this latch, when the latter is
raised by pawl H, serves to disengage the clutch lever L
from the stationary pin M in the machine frame.
The coil spring N, secured to pin M, then forces the lever
L toward the right, disengaging the machine clutch and
applying the band brake. All these movements take place
at practically the same instant that the overload occurs, so
'i
1
41
I>-
0
a

P:a
,<:l
,!';>
i
E
.g
Gl
{/}
llll
.[
Pc
...
.
,<:l
()
G
:il
eli
110
that no further movement of slide B results after meeting

the obstruction. Slide A is then moved to the left by hand
and the obstruction removed, after which the machine is
started by shifting lever L back to its original position.
Disengagement of Feeding Mechanism when Pressure
on Tool is Excessive......:The mechanism Fig. 10 is part of
an "automatic" of the vertical type. The rods A and B
carry dogs which engage stops on the frame of the machine
and, under normal conditions, trip the advance and return
feed movements respectively. The rapid-traverse motion,
which retracts the tools quickly and can also be utilized to
bring them forward rapidly to the point of cutting, is op-
erated through gears C and D controlled by clutches. The
advance feed for cutting is through bevel gears E and
change-gears connecting shafts F and G, the worm H on
the shaft G driving worm-wheel I. These two trains of
mechanism give the desired advancing and retracting move-
ments through connection with screw J. A feature of this
feed is in providing means for automatically tripping it
whenever the pressure on the cutting tool becomes exces-
sive. This is accomplished by providing a thrust bearing
for the worm H which, through bellcrank K, is held in place
by an adjustable weight L. When the pressure is sufficient
to raise the weight, the mechanism operates to trip the
. latch M and engage the return motion the same as if the
regular tripping point had been reached.
Spring. Plunger Release Mechanism for Preventing
Damage to Reciprocating Parts.-Mechanisms for auto-
matically preventing damage to reciprocating parts are
sometimes required when there is the possibility of such
an occurrence resulting from the jamming or overloading
of the machine. A mechanism of this kind is shown in
Fig. 11. The reciprocating movements of the parts to which
this mechanism is applied are obtained by means of the
lever A,which swings back and forth as indicated by ar-
rows E.
239
Lever A is mounted on a shaft (not shown) which is
operated by a cam-and-roll mechanism. At B is shown a
connecting link, through the center of which passes a short
shaft C by means of which the rocking action of the lever
A is transmitted to a vertical reciprocating slide. This
slide travels back alldforth in the directions indicated by
arrows D, being propelled through the medium of the con-
necting-rod F, which is adjustable in the link B. Rod F
operates in a vertical position instead of in the horizontal
position shown in the illustration. This rod is securely
locked in place by nut G, the adjustment being obtained by
making a complete revolution of rod F, so that the cross-
wise notch at H will be in the proper position to receive the
locking plunger J.
Ordinarily, the movement of lever A is imparted directly
to shaft C. The safety unit is provided to prevent break-
age in case the machine becomes jammed or overloaded.
This safety device consists of the cast-iron housing K, which
is free to pivot on stud L in lever A. Screw M holds spring
N in place, so that the plunger J is forced into the notch
H in rod F. Under normal operating conditions, the. unit
. acts as a non-yielding driving block. In the case of an
overload on shaft C, spring N yields sufficiently to permit
plunger J to snap out of notch H, with the result that lever
A and block K will reciprocate without imparting any mo-
tion to rod F, thereby preventing the driven parts from
being broken or damaged.
When the obstruction is removed, plunger J automatic-
ally springs back into notch H and the normal operation
of the machine is resumed. The collar at P is provided to
insure a positive driving movement for rod F on the down
stroke. Thus, the driving movement imparted to rod F is
interrupted only on the upward stroke. There is a pin-
shaped end on screw Q that enters a keyway in plunger J
and thereby prevents the latter member from turning in
block K.
til
"5
j:l.j
Gl
:a
()
al
llfl
....
0
llD
=
's
~
I-)
'"
0
~
.S
"Cl
al
~
Q)
I-
0
0
....
cP
::s
I=l
Gl
llD
CIl
~
cP
'" III
....
I':
~
cP
'"
j:l.j
.s
"Cl
cP
~
Q)
I=l
~
t
H
llD
~
~
0
~
()
Gl
~
'"
~
~
~
Q)
llfl
c
Gl
I
<Il
al
Gl
Ql
~
..i
....
~
f:<l
241
243
ll
C.l'
!
....
0
'd
I'l
r.:I
.cl
0
01
r.:I
t
I>
Q)
P-1
'd
'P-
ol
P:l

"'"'
I'l
Q)
a
Q)
I>
0
'"' 01
Q)
:c
<D
P:l
'a
,Q
0
'"'
a
'a
01
.cl
0
<D
...
REVERSING MECHANISMS
Reversing mechanisms may be designed to act at a fixed
point in the cycle of movements or to vary the point or time
of reversal. A reversal of motion in some cases may also
be accompanied by a change of velocity. This chapter
deals with reversing mechanisms of the different types
mentioned and includes only special designs not found in
Chapter VI of Volume I (pages 161 to 197).
Compact Reverse Mechanism of Rapid-Acting Parallel
Worm Type.-In a certain type of can-seaming machine,
the work is controlled by a mechanism having a continu-
ous reciprocating movement. This mechanism provides a
traverse movement of constant velocity. The reversals are
positive and practically instantaneous. A compact design
was essential in this instance, because the mechanism was
used in making an alteration to a machine where the small
space available made it impossible to use a long-throw cam.
A nut and feed-screw provided with the usual dog-operated
reversing mechanism was considered, but was rej ected
owing to the lost motion attending each reversal.
The mechanism is mounted on the machine frame A,
Fig. 1, and consists essentially of the two worms Band C
and the follower-roll D. Both the worms have right-hand
threads and are rotated at a constant velocity in opposite
directions by means of gears E and F, mounted on their
respective worm-shafts. These gears, in turn, are rotated
by gear G on the shaft H, which is driven by another mem-
ber of the machine. Follower-roll D is free to turn on its
bearings in cross-slide K, which moves laterally in the
242
CHAPTER VII
REVERSING MECHANISMS OF SPECIAL DESIGN
slide J. Slide J is mounted on a dovetail guide on the ma-
chine and transmits the required movement to the work.
This slide is given a reversal of its movement at each end
of its stroke through the action of cam lugs Land M,
secured by screws to opposite ends of worms C and B, re-
spectively. The roll is held in engagement with each worm
. by the insert N which rides along one side of stationary
bar 0, depending upon which worm is engaged with the
roll. Bar 0 is held in the stationary position by the top
plate P, secured to the bearings of the worm-shafts.
When the follower-roll has reached the position indicated,
slide J is at the end of its right-hand stroke. It will be
noted that insert N on the roll cross-slide has just passed
the end of bar O. Now as the worm continues to rotate,
the cam lug L comes in contact with one flange of the roll
and forces it over into engagement with the beginning of
the thread on worm B, holding or locking it in this angular
position until the worm thread has carried the left-hand end
of the insert N past the right-hand end of bar O. Worm B
then reverses the movement of the follower with slide J,
carrying it toward the left until, at the end of the stroke,
cam M comes into contact with the other follower-roll
flange, which forces the latter over into engagement with
worm C.
The roll is held in this position until its movement to-
ward the right carries insert N past the end of bar 0, the
bar preventing disengagement of the roll and worm during
the remainder of the stroke. Thus worm C returns the
roll and slide J to the position shown, where the reversal
of the slide J is repeated. The reversals of slide J are
effected rapidly and with absolutely no shock. The pres-
sure between insert N and bar 0 is insignificant, owing to
the relatively small angle of the worm thread. However,
in order to insure a long life, as well as to increase the
efficiency of the unit, both of these members are hardened
and ground on their wearing surfaces.
Fig. 2. Pin Type of Mangle Gearing for Reversing Rotation of
Driven Shaft S
245 REVERSING MECHANISMS
Mangle Gear Mechanism for Changing Direction of
Rotation.- The mangle gearing mechanism shown in Fig. 2
is designed to drive, from a continuously rotating shaft P,
a shaft S a portion of a turn backward and forward. The
pinion shaft P is driven through universal joints which
permit it to move back and forth in the slot in guide B. To
the shaft S is keyed a center plate to which is attached con-
centrically the mangle gear proper, consisting of a ring of
cast iron or steel fitted with a number of pins which act
as gear teeth and which mesh with the teeth of a gear of
the sprocket type.
To the center plate is attached a reversing dog or guide D
into which the end of the sprocket shaft passes, restricting
REVERSING MECHANISMS 244
Fig, 3. Reversing Mechanism Similar to that Shown in Fig, 2,
but Designed to Produce Variable Velocity
Fig. 4. Pin Type of Mangle Gearing Arranged to Reverse Driven
Shaft after One Complete Tum
just described. This design is arranged to vary the velocity
of the driven shaft. The end of the pinion shaft may be
fitted with a ball journal bearing.
Mangle Gearing for Reversing Rotation of Shaft After
One Complete Turn.-The pin type of mangle gearing
mechanism shown in Fig. 4 is designed to reverse the
driven shaft after it has made a complete turn. With this
mechanism, the driven shaft has a somewhat variable mo-
tion. The smaller the lead of the spiral in relation to the
distances of the pins from the shaft center, the less will
be the velocity variation. Fig. 5 shows one arrangement
for driving the pinion shaft b, Fig. 4, which provides for
the required oscillation of the pinion or sprocket shaft.
slot in the fixed bracket B to the other. The ends of the
slot prevent the sprocket from being forced out of mesh
with the pins. When the center plate has rotated through
its full complement of a turn, the sprocket is again trans-
ferred to the side of the ring with which it was previously
in mesh through the action of the opposite guide. Instead
of rotating directly in the bracket B as a bearing, the shaft
may rotate in a sliding block E, such as shown in the small
cross-sectional view.
In Fig. 3 is shown a variation of the type of mechanism
246
the movement of the sprocket, and causing it to move from
one side of the pin ring to the other as the sprocket and
ring rotate together. After the passage of the sprocket
from one side of the ring to the other, the ring turns in the
opposite direction; that is, its motion is reversed, but its
velocity remains unchanged, except, of course, during the
passage of the sprocket to the other side of the ring while
it is in contact with guide D. In passing through the guide,
the end of the sprocket shaft travels from one end of the
It is obvious that an infinite number of velocity combina-
tions are possible by varying the shape of the mangle gear
shown in Fig. 4. The continuous groove G serves to keep
the sprocket in mesh with the pins. The end of the pinion
shaft b may either rotate directly in contact with the
groove or it may bear against the groove side through a
ball journal bearing attached to the shaft.
Fig. 6. Shaft-reversing Mechanism that Gives Higher Velocity in
One Direction
method shown in Fig. 5 is preferable to the bevel gear drive.
Shaft- Reversing Mechanism Giving Higher Velocity
in One Direction.- When a shaft-reversing mechanism is
required in which the velocity in one direction must or can
be greater than in the other, the driver and driven elements
may be ordinary gea:t::s 'Or gear segments, such as shown in
Fig. 6. With this type of mangle gearing, the velocity of
the driven shaft is greater in the direction indicated by
arrow a than in the direction b. The velocity is uniform,
however, in each direction. The pinion shaft in this case
is guided wholly by a groove in the center plate, into which
the end of the pinion shaft projects.
In Fig. 7 is shown a double-edge rack segment-form
mangle gear for obtaining reversal of the driven shaft. The
round end c of the gear ring can be half of a pinion, having
a boss or bub by which it is located in a driIIed hole in the
plate.
Stationary Guide
Bracket Universal
_______~ Joints
Straight Slot '
Types of Drives Arranged to Pennit Oscillation of Driving
Shafts such as the One Shown at b, Fig. 4
Fig. 5.
Perhaps the most common method of driving the pinion
of a mechanism of this kind is by bevel gears, the bevel
gear on the pinion shaft serving as a universal joint. This
method has the objection, however, that owing to the oscil-
lation of the shaft, the pinion occupies different angular
positions, not only during the oscillation but when it is driv-
ing. To allow for the change in the angle, the teeth of
the pins must be barrel-shaped. Generally they are per-
mitted to assume this s ~ p through wear. The driving
248
Shockless Reversing Mechanism which Varies Point of
Reversal.-Some mixing machines of the agitator type, em-
ployed for mixing liquid or plastic materials, require a re-
versing movement of the agitators; at the same time, how-
ever, the point at which reversal occurs must advance uni-
formly. These combined movements may be obtained by
means of the mechanism shown in Fig. 8.
Here the drive shaft D, rotating at a uniform speed, im-
parts the required movement to the shaft G through the
action of a combination planetary and elliptical gear train.
All three .shafts D, L, and G rotate in stationary bearings,
and. owing to the ever changing radii of the elliptical gears
at the tooth contact, an alternating accelerated and re-
tarded movement is imparted to shaft L. This movement,
in turn, is transmitted by spur gears J and K to ~ ring
251
t!l
~
~
~
fIl
....
0
1
~
~
~
~
fl
III
I>-
III
p;
0
~
til
~
III
t!l
'd
()
~
r.:l
l>.
.0
1l
a
~
~
III
...
~
'1::
~
al
~
III
~
t!l
.l!l
~
()
~
.a
fl
E-t
ce
~
t!l
~
~
~
eO
.!P
lit
Fig. 7. Mangle Gear Shaft-reversing Mechanism with Additional Gears
for Obtaining a. Complete Turn or More than One Turn
gear A. Now assume that the elliptical gears Band C
have rotated into the positions indicated in the end view
at the right, and that the ratio of spur gears J and K and
also the ratio (momentarily) of the elliptical gears is such
that the velocity of the centers of pinions E is one-half
that of the pitch line velocity of the ring gear. Then, ac-
cording to the principle of epicyclic gear trains, the pin-
ions will ;i,mply roll about and not rotate the spur gear H.
Now if the shaft D rotates in the direction of the arrow,
the ratio of the elliptical gears at the tooth contacts will
gradually change so that the movement of shaft L and ring
gear A will be retarded. Therefore, as the pitch line velocity
of the ring gear decreases, the velocity of pinions E rela-
tive to the spider F will also decrease, and the lag of these
pinions will cause the gear H and shaft G to rotate in the
same direction as shaft D. This movement of shaft G will
be accelerated until the elliptical gear B, whose engaging
radius is gradually diminishing, has rotated through an
angle of 90 degrees. At this point the ratio of the elliptical
gears is at its minimum and as they continue to rotate,
the ratio increases. This has the effect, through the move-
ment transmitted to the pinions, of retarding the angular
movement of gear H and shaft G until the elliptical gear B
has passed through another 90-degree angle. At this time,
theelliptical gears are once more (momentarily) in a posi-
tion where the pinions roll about but do not rotate gear H;
and, on further rotation of the elliptical gears, the velocity
of the pinions will be gradually increased with respect to
spider F, thus reversing the angular movement of gear H
and shaft G. This movement of shaft G will be accelerated
during a 90-degree movement of the elliptical gear Band
then retarded through the next 90 degrees, at the end of
which time the point of reversal has again been reached
and the mechanism has passed through a complete cycle.
The movement transmitted to the pinions during the
first half revolution of the elliptical gears is slower than
the movement transmitted during the second half; and
since the velocity of these pinions governs the amount of
angular movement of shaft G, then the angular movement
of this shaft, in a counter-clockwise direction, is less than
that in a clockwise direction. Therefore, the point of re-
versal of the shaft G will vary or advance about the shaft
center an amount equal to the difference in these two angu-
lar moven1ents. By varying the ratio of the spur gears. J
and K, the advance of the reversal points may be increased
or diminished to suit the requirements; or in case no varia-
tion of the reversal point is required, the same procedure
may be followed. This type of mechanism, owing to its
retarding and accelerating movements, is particularly de-
sirable where reversal must take place without shock.
Oscillating Motion Converted to Variable Reversing
Motion.- In a special electrical switch testing machine, an
oscillating motion of one shaft is converted to a reversing
motion in another shaft, the latter alternating at each re-
versal between the two speeds of 60 and 30 revolutions per
minute.
The shaft X (Fig. 9), on which the segment gear A is
keyed, is the oscillating member. The shaft T, to 'which
the irregular motion is transferred, turns in the machine
bearings (not shown) and serves as a pivot for the arm B.
Gears 0 and P, located under this arm, are keyed on shafts
U and Y and are connected by the three gears S, V, and G.
The concentric grooves E and D, milled in the segment gear,
are joined at both ends to form one continuous groove and
serve as a guide for the cam-roll C in the end of arm B.
Dogs Rand N, which engage projection Q on the arm, are
fastened securely to the segment gear. Latches J and M
swing on shoulder-screws, and normally bear against pins I
and K, due to the tension of the coil springs.
In the position shown in the illustration, the segment
gear A is oscillating in the direction of the arrow, and the
dog R, against lug Q, is about to swing the arm B around
253
Fig. 9. Mechanism for Converting Oscillating Motion into Reversing Motion
shaft T. A further upward movement of dog R will throw
gear 0 out of engagement with the segment gear. How-
ever, just before the teeth of gear 0 have become disen-
gaged, a partial engagement of the teeth in gear P and
segment A takes place. While gears 0 and P are being
shifted, roller C swings up to the beginning of the groove
o is engaged with segment A again. In the meantime, roll
C has forced latch J to one side and is swung down to the
end of groove D, being prevented from coming out of this
groove by the return of latch J. The running in groove
D, serves to hold gear 0 in mesh during the return stroke
of the segment. This completes one cycle of the movements.
Because of the difference in the number of teeth between
gears 0 and P, as noted in the illustration, and the arrange-
ment of the gear train, the uniform oscillation of segment
..A. will result in one clockwise revolution of shaft T for
every up stroke of the segment, while the down stroke will
result in two counter-clockwise revolutions of the shaft.
With some slight modifications in the design, shaft T may
be made to revolve at varying speeds other than described
and in the same direction instead of This may
be done by varying the number of teeth in the gears and
adding an idler between any two of the gears S, V, or G.
Mechanism for Reversing Tap Spindles in Drill Head.-
When more than one tap is used in a drill head, the problem
of reversing the taps is often simplified by having one tap-
ping spindle drive on the "in feed" and another spindle
drive on the "return feed." The arrangement of the gear-
ing for such a drive is shown diagrammatically in Fig. 10.
In this case, the large drill head carries a number of drilling
'3pindles (not shown in the illustration), in addition to the
four tapping spindles, A, B, C, and D.
The drill head slides up and down on column E, being
kept in alignment by an external projection that slides in a
vertical track. The drive is obtained from a vertical shaft
F at the end of which is keyed the pinion G. This pinion
is in mesh with the gear H which drives the drilling and
tapping spindles. The drive for the drill spindles is very
simple and is not shown in the illustration. The drive for
the tapping spindles begins with the clutch shaft I, which
is .driven from the gear H through the pinion J. The
shaft I carries a sawtooth double clutch K which can be
x
OSCILLATES THROUGH AN
ANGLE INCLUDING 36 TEETH
E. When the roll reaches this position, the oscillating seg-
ment A has come to the end of its upward stroke and is
about to return. The latch M closes the end grooves and
prevents the roll from dropping back to groove D when the
segment reverses.
The roll now follows groove E and serves to hold gear
P in mesh with segment A until dog N comes in contact
with the lug Q. This disengages gear P, after which gear
254
Fig. 10. Reversing Mechanism for Taps Used in Multiple-spindle Drill Head
engaged with either the upper member L or the lower
member M.
When the downward feed of the head begins, an arrange-
ment of levers similar to the belt-o;>erating mechanism on a
planer causes the clutch K to engage the upper member L.
The drive to the tapping spindles is then through the idler
gear N, which is mounted on the top plate 0, and thence
to the gear P on the top of the tapping spindle B. The
tapping spindle is then revolved in the direction required for
tapping. The other three spindles A, C, and D are driven
in the same direction through the idler gears R which are
mounted on the bottQmof the gear-case Q.
As soon as the head begins to travel upward, the clutch K
comes into engagement with the lower clutch member M
and drives directly through gear S, which is fastened to the
bottom of the tapping spindle C, revolving it, together with
the other spindles, in the opposite direction. The full-line
arrow-heads show the direction in which the meshing gears
revolve when tapping, while the dotted arrows indicate the
direction in which the gears revolve when the spindles are
reversed on the "out feed."
Rotary Reversing Mechanism for Varying Angular
Movement and Dwell of Driven Shaft.- Wire -forming
machines of the four-slide type usually have various in-
genious mechanical movements incorporated in their design
that are applicable to machines used for other purposes.
For example, in one four-slide, Wire-forming machine,
there is a reversing movement for a feed-slide shaft that
has unusual features. This mechanism is designed to give
the driven shaft a short dwell at each point of reversal.
Besides, provision is made for varying the angular move-
ment of the driven shaft without altering the dwell. The
movements are transmitted from another shaft which oscil-
lates continuously at a constant angular velocity.
On the oscillating driving shaft (not shown) is an arm
to which is connected the link A, Fig. 11. This link, in turn,
is pivoted to the sector or segment B. Sector B is free to
oscillate on the stationary stud C and is provided with a
sliding gear sector F which meshes with the driven gear G.
Sector B is also provided with adjustable split stops D and
E. These stops are used for regulating the angular move-
ment and the dwell of the driven shaft H, to which gear G
Fig. 11. Mechanism for Imparting Rotary Oscillating Movement to Shaft 1I, which
Permits Varying Angulal' Movement and the Length of Dwell at Each Reversal
is keyed. The stops are clamped in place by bolts on the
dovetailed periphery of the sector B.
An important part of the mechanism is a friction stop
or brake on shaft H, which is necessary to prevent over-run
of this shaft at the point of reversal. The brake arrange-
ment, however, being of simple and well known design, is
not illustrated.
259
left will carry the rack segment toward the left, rotating
gear G in the opposite direction. The rotary movement of
this gear continues until the sector comes to the end of its
movement toward the left. Now as the sector once more
moves toward the right, gear G dwells until stop D comes
in contact with the ,sliding gear segment. Thus, gear G
and shaft H are given a rotary reciprocating motion with
a short dwell at each point. of reversal. Owing to the dif-
ferent kinds of jobs adapted to this machine, a variation
in the angular movement of shaft H is frequently required,
the dwelling period remaining constant. This is obtained
by the combined adjustment of the link and the stops. The
extent, however, to which the angular movement can be
increased is limited by the length of the sliding gear seg-
ment.
Suppose, for example, a greater angular movement of
the shaft were required. In this case, the stud K would be
adjusted to a lower point and stops D and E would be moved
farther apart to avoid reducing the time periods of the
dwells. In making these adjustments, a few trials are
usually necessary in order to obtain the proper positions
of stud K and the stops. Obviously, the same arrangement
can be used to reduce or increase the dwell within certain
limits, the angular movement of the driven gear remaining
. the same.
When the machine is in operation, the sector B is oscil-
lated by link A at a constant angular velocity. In the posi-
tion shown, the sector has moved toward the right to its
central point, rotating gear G in a counter-clockwise direc-
tion. This motion continues until the sector has reached
its farthest position at the right. The sector then reverses
its movement and the rack F and gear G remain stationary
until the end of the rack comes into contact with the stop E.
At this time, continued movement of the sectortoward the
258
r------ ---- ------------. ------_.- ----- ---- ----
,.-------1-"':;,;;:;:.,,-"',"-'-,>--.---L+l--L-.f+-'--...,
__. i:J.JJ_._.. . ._.
the notch L. At this time, the slide is at the center of its
stroke; and since the plunger is all that locks the crank E
to the shaft, the shaft will turn in the bore of the crank
hub and allow the crank and slide to dwell. A spring-actu-
ated V-plunger is provided at N to hold the slide securely
in the "dwell"
As the shaft and arm. continue to rotate, pin J leaves
cam-block K and allows the end of the plunger to ride on
RECIPROCATING MOTIONS OF CRANK TYPE 261
Fig, 1. Reciprocating Slide Mechanism with Dwell at Center of Stroke
the periphery of the crank flange until it drops into notch
M. When this occurs, the crank is once more locked to the
shaft so that continued rotation of the shaft will cause the
slide to move toward the left and return to the position
shown. At this time, the center line of the crank will
coincide with center line 0 and cam-block K will have
forced pin J outward, thus disengaging the plunger from
its notch and allowing the'" crank and slide to dwell.
The withdrawn plunger then rides along the periphery
The special designs of crank mechanisms described in
this chapter are for transmitting motion to slides or other
parts having a reciprocating action. These drives may be
arranged to produce some special movement, such, for
example, as arresting the motion of the slide momentarily
during some part of the stroke or providing a quick return
movement to reduce the idle period; or the design may be
special in that provision is made for adjusting either the
length or position of the stroke while the machine is op-
erating.
Crank Motion that Causes Slide to Dwell at Center
of Stroke.- The crank mechanism Fig. 1 is incorporated
in a certain carton wrapping machine for changing the
position of the carton as it passes through the machine.
This mechanism imparts a reciprocating movement to the
work-slide A, with a dwell at the center of its stroke in
each direction. The slide is reciprocated in the stationary
guide D through link B by the crank E. This crank is a
free fit on shaft F, but rotates with F whenever spring-
actuated plunger H engages one of the notches cut in the
flange on the crank. A pin J in the plunger projects
through and below arm G. When this pin engages the cam-
block K, which is secured to the machine frame, the pin
and the plunger are moved radially outward. This causes
the plunger to disengage the notch and allows the crank
and slide to dwell while the shaft continues to rotate.
The shaft and arm G are rotated in the direction indi-
catedby the arrow. In the position shown, pin J has en-
gaged cam-block K and has withdrawn the plunger from
260
CHAPTER VIII
DRIVES OF THE CRANK TYPE FOR RECIPROCATING
DRIVEN MEMBERS
of the crank flange until it drops into notch L and locks
the arm to the crank again. The rotating arm now rotates
the crank, causing the slide to move this time toward the
right and then back to the position shown. At this point,
the cam-block once more disengages plunger 11. This com-
pletes one cycle of movements, which is repeated for each
revolution of shaft F.
It will be noted that the angular movement of the crank
is different' for each half of the slide cycle, owing to the
angular position of the connecting-rod B. This results in
a variation of the time interval for each succeeding dwell
and stroke. Fortunately, however, this variation is per-
missible. In other applications, where the dwell and stroke
must have the same time interval, the well-known Scotch
yoke crank movement could be used instead of the crank
and connecting-rod shown. In this case, the notches would
be located in the flange diametrically opposite each other.
Planetary Type of Crank Motion for Obtaining Dwell.-
In attempting to bend a stranded copper cable into a
U-shape by means of a kind of wing die, it was found, while
experimenting with a punch press, that a distinct stop or
dwell was required at a certain point in the bending stroke
to permit the copper to set. If the dwell was omitted, a
springing back of the metal occurred, resulting in varia-
tions in the form of the bent section. This dwell had to
take place before the end of the stroke, because the latter
part of the stroke was utilized to eject the formed piece.
A special machine was designed to actuate the slide from
which the bending die receives its motion. This operating
slide also requires a dwell at the top of the stroke to allow
time for inserting unbent parts into the die, so that the
machine can be operated continuously instead of using a
single-stroke clutch and tripping device. The planetary
type of crank motion used causes a crankpin to follow, dur-
ing the dwelling periods, an arc having a radius equal ap-
t>roximately tothe length of the connecting-rod, so that the Fig. 2. Planetary Type of Crank Motion for Obtaining Dwell of Bending Die
crank end swings without transmitting motion. Fig. 2
shows the general arrangement.
The housing A contains shaft C, which is driven through
worm-gearing hnd carries a crank disk D. An internal
gear 11 having 120 teeth is bolted to housing A and meshes
with a 24-tooth planetary pinion J attached to the eccentric
crankpin E; consequently, when crank disk D revolves,
263
I
0'
I '
I"",
I .
RECIPROCATING MOTIONS OF CRANK TYPE
Fig. 3. Path Followed by Eccentric Crankpin, and Chart Showing Dwelling Periods
to follow the path indicated by the heavy line d, Fig. 3.
The curve in the upper right-hand corner of Fig. 3 illus-
trates how the action of the driven slide is changed during
one complete cycle. The cycle begins at a point represent-
265 RECIPROCATING MOTIONS OF CRANK TYPE
ing the top of the stroke of the slide. The vertical dimen-
sions on the chart represent the stroke, in inches, and the
horizontal dimensions, the time in seconds. One revolution
is represented as 3 seconds, because the machine is designed
to run about 20 revolutions per minute.
The relative of the internal gear H and the
pinion J (Fig. 2) are indicated in Fig. 3 by dot-and-dash
pitch circles HI and J 1 The radius of the eccentric crank
E is considerably less than the pitch radius of the pinion,
which causes the axis of the eccentric crankpin to describe
a five-lobed curve d. The dwell of the driven slide at the
top of the stroke occurs between points a and b on the
chart and during about 6/10 of a second. This dwell is due
to the fact that the length of the connecting-rod equals the
radius of an arc which approximates that part of the crank-
pin path from e to f. As the lower end of the crankpin
swings from e to f it transmits only a slight movement, and
there would be none at all if this portion of curve d were
a perfect arc with a radius equal to the connecting-rod
center-to-center length. It is the dwell at this point that
is utilized for removing the work and inserting unbent
blanks. .
The pause during the down stroke to allow the metal to
set after bending occurs between points g and h where the
curve d is practically tangent to the arc of the connecting-
rod. This pause or dwell is represented on the chart at c,
and at this time, the upper end of the connecting-rod is at k.
An unnecessary dwell is made during the return stroke
between points m and n, which correspond to g and h, but
this slight delay in the upward movement does not affect
the practical working of the mechanism. The entire device
is located under a table about 2 feet square, which indicates
that it is quite compact.
Oscillating Crank-and - Toggle Mechanism for Rapid
Reciprocation of Slide.-In a metal ribbon crimping ma-
chine, four complete cycles of a slide are obtained from an
2 .3
.SECONDS
d
a b
/, I
1-
I
t-
en
1\ I
\ I
c:l
I'.
<D
\ I
&0
\ I
'<t
\
c
/
(Y)
N
k:\ ,'-'
\ II
....
\
j
0 1 J
en
w
:I:
o
W
l<:
o
a:
l-
ll)
pinion J and the crankpin revolve around their own axis
and also around shaft C. These combined rotary move-
ments modify the motion imparted to slide G and cause the
axis of the pin E, to which connecting-rod F is attached,
.Fig. 4. Reciprocating Slide of a Metal Ribbon Orimping Machine. Opera.ted by
Oacillatina- Ann and L.1nk Mechanism
oscillating arm as the latter passes through one cycle. This
arrangement, which is shown in Fig. 4, has the advantage
of simplicity of design and an unusually smooth action. The
slide A that controls the crimping tools is mounted in guides
B, cast integral with the machine frame C. Arm D is the
driving member and is keyed to the shaft E, which oscil-
lates at a constant angular velocity. This arm transmits
the movement to the slide through a toggle arrangement
consistir..g of links F, G, and H. Link F is pivoted at its
upper end to arm D by pin J, and at its lower end to links
Gand H by pin K. The outer end of link G is pivoted to
the slide, and the outer end of link H is pivoted to the
shoulder screw L in the machine frame.
Three positions of the arm and links are shown. At
Position 1, the toggle Jinks G, F, and H are at their highest
points; hence, slide A has been drawn to its farthest point
at the right. As the arm swings downward to Position 2,
these links assume a horizontal position, causing the slide
to move to its farthest position at the left. The arm then
continues its movement until it arrives at Position 3, where
link F has forced the toggle links down to their lowest posi-
tion, causing the slide to he carried back to the position
indicated. Thus, during this one-quarter cycle of the arm,
slide A has passed through a complete cycle. Consequently,
as a repetition of these slide movements occurs during each
quarter cycle of the arm, the slide will complete four cycles
for each cycle of the arm D. An added advantage of this tog-
gle arrangement is the unusually high working pressure that
is delivered at the end of the stroke toward the left at the
point where the pressure is needed most.
Auxiliary Crank that Assists Crankpin Past its Dead
Center.- One method of overcoming the dead center condi-
tion in transmitting rotary movement to a shaft by means
of a crank is shown in Fig. 5. Two of the outstanding ad-
vantages of this drive are its positive action and its low
cost. The driven crank is actuated by a similar crank
keyed to the driving shaft. By incorporating an auxiliary
or "dummy" crank, the driven crankpin not only is helped
past its dead center positions, but the n u l ~ velocity of
the driving and driven shafts is held constant. In addi-
tion to this, the torque transmitted to the driven shaft is
uniform at its various angular positions.
The shaft-to-pin center distance is the same for all three
Fig. 5. Arrangement for Preventing Crankpin from being Stopped
on Dead Center
269
be located too close to a straight line passing through the
driving and driven shafts.
Auxiliary Crank for Quick Return Movement.- The
cam-operated turret-feed mechanism of an automatic screw
machine is shown in Fig. 6. The advance feed is obtained
by the cam A operating through the segment lever B to
feed the turret-slide C. \ The return motion is accelerated
by the revolution of the crank D which brings the turret
back quickly, a distance equal to the throw of the crank.
In the operation of a machine for high-speed work, it
becomes important, both in securing the desired speed and
in avoiding objectionable shocks, to move and reverse the
lightest parts. For this reason, machines having turrets
of the "revolver" or "barrel" type, in which each spindle
can be fed independently, are especially adapted to high-
speed work. In such machines, each tool carrier is con-
nected successively with a reciprocating feed slide, and
only the feed slide with one of the tool carriers connected
with :it requires to be reciprocated for the feed and return
Fig. 6. Turret Slide is Withdrawn Quickly when
Crank D Rotates

this position, they will coincide with the dot-and-dash out-
line. Here it is obvious that the crankpin in the "dummy"
crank has passed its dead center and can continue its move-
ment unrestricted. Now, owing to the rotary action of
crank A, crank C will swing downward, and as a result,
crank B will be forced past its dead center. The same
action occurs in reverse order when crank C is on its dead
center relative to crank A. That is, crank B, having passed
its dead center, will serve to force crank C past its dead
center position. Incidentally, the location of crank C can
be varied to suit existing conditions, although it should not
o
268
cranks. The driving crank is indicated at A, the driven
crank at B, and the "dummy" crank at C. It is important
to note that the connecting-rod is of solid construction and
connects all three crankpins. With this arrangement, the
position of all three cranks is the same at any part of the
machine cycle.
In the full outline, the cranks and connecting-rod are
the dead center position. When they reach
movements. In order to "speed up" this type of machine
still further, the use of an auxiliary slide has been resorted
to. This auxiliary slide alone is moved during that part
of the quick-return movement required to retract each tool,
and even this slide is disconnected for the remainder of the
return movement, thus avoiding the shock which would re-
sult from rapid movement of the slide.
Fig. 7 shows an application of such an auxiliary slide
with its disconnecting means. The turret A carries a series
of tool spindles which are successively indexed to come into
operative positions and be engaged by the block B. A main
slide C, on which is an auxiliary slide D, is mounted on the
bed of the machine. A crank E which is also on the main
slide is connected to the auxiliary slide by the two-part
connecting-rod F, one end of which is connected with the
main slide and the other with the auxiliary slide. A latch
at G holds these two parts together except during the quick-
return motion which is obtained by revolving the crank
disk E; then the latch is disengaged by passing over the
cam H, which thus breaks the "connection with the auxiliary
or supplemental slide for the remainder of the crank throw
and gives the quick-return movement and the quick-advance
movement up to the point of cutting.
271
Rapid Return Movement Obtained by Roller Clutch
and Crank Arrangement.- In designing machinery, it is
frequently possible to make use of a roller friction clutch
for reducing the time consumed during the idle part of the
production cycle. This application is exemplified by the
simple crank motion of the Scotch yoke type shown in
Fig. 8. It is employed \for actuating a slow-moving slide
in a machine for forming plastic materials.
The slide indicated at A is reciprocated vertically. The
crank is composed of the core B, integral with drive shaft
C; the member D, which is bored to provide a running fit
for the core; and the rollers E. The roller F on the stud
that is secured in the projection on member D serves as the
crankpin and engages a slot extending across the slide. As
the crank rotates in the direction of the arrow, the slide is
given its upward or working stroke, the movement being
comparatively slow. During this stroke, the weight of the
slide causes the rollers E to grip both the core and the mem-
ber D tightly, so that both members rotate positively to-
gether. When the roll F has passed the centerline G, the
weight of the slide, which has caused the rolls to wedge
tightly on the upward stroke, releases the gripping pres-
sure of the rolls between the core and member D and allows
the latter to rotate one-half revolution, returning the slide
to its lowest position at a relatively higher velocity.
The downward stroke is the idle one, and its velocity in
this particular case is unimportant in so far as the timing
of the slide movements is concerned. This condition made
it possible to use this crank. At the bottom of the stroke,
the rolls E once more pick up the motion and move the slide
upward at the slow speed required for the operation. It is
estimated that with this design, an approximate gain of
30 per cent in production time is obtained over the time
that would be required if a crank of the solid type were
used.
Another Application of a Crank Motion for
ObtaIning a Quick Return
Fig. '1.
A
273
D
I Il--------- --- ------
G --------------l----------
::::::.=--- ----- ---------------------------- :_-_"": =====-:.
Fig, 9. Quick-return Crank Motion Mechanism with Means for
Varying Velocity of Stroke
Quick-Return Crank Motion with Adjustment for Varying
Velocity of Stroke.- Slotting machines, as a rule, are pro-
vided with some means of varying the cutting speed to suit
the different materials to be machined. However, in re-
ducing the cutting speed, the production is also reduced a
corresponding amopnt, because the velocity of the entire
cycle of the machine is slowed up. This objection was over-
come in the case of one slotting machine by using a crank
motion for actuating the slotting ram, the principle of this
motion being shown in Figs. 9 and 10. With this arrange-
ment, the velocity of the working stroke can be varied
within certain limits without changing the time taken for
the ram to pass through its cycle. Therefore, varying the
cutting speed of the tool in this way does not change the
rate of production, because, as explained later, the loss in
velocity during the working stroke is compensated for by
increasing the velocity of the return stroke.
The crank mechanism consists chiefly of the arm A,
------,--
I
I
I
o
I _________..L-_
~
272
Fig, 10. Diagram Indicating Operating Principle of Mechani\lm
Shown in Fig, 9
the center of driving shaft B. Let N indicate the center of
shaft C, and let the heavy line represent the arm D with
the cross-head at O.
Now, if the arm D is horizontal, as indicated by the heavy
line, the cross-head, with arm A and shaft B, will rotate
in the direction of the arrow only 160 degrees, in order to
rotate arm D one-half revolution. Thus, during this move-
ment, which corresponds with the return stroke of the ram,
arm D and crank F rotate faster than arm.A. In com-
pleting their revolution, however, the cross-head and arm
A rotate 200 degrees to turn arm D and the crank the re-
maining half revolution. Hence, during the latter move-
ment, which corresponds with the working stroke of the
ram, crank F rotates more slowly than arm A. Thus, a
slow working stroke and a rapid return stroke are obtained.
If it is required to reduce the velocity of the working
stroke, the cross-head is adj usted inward in slot P, Fig. 9,
to a new position, say, to Q, Fig. 10. In this case a 135-de-
gree movement of arm A is required to rotate crank F
through its return stroke, and a 225-degree movement to
rotate the crank through its working stroke. Thus, the
velocity of crank F is increased during the return stroke
and reduced during its working stroke. Crank F and arm
A, however, complete their cycle in the same time, so that
the reduction in velocity of the working stroke d03s not
affect the production rate of the machine. Incidentally, a
greater range in the velocity variation of the crank can be
obtained by increasing the offset X between shafts Band C.
This change will, of course, affect the length of the slots in
the arms.
Adjusting Operating Position of Reciprocating Slide
without Stopping Machine.- Occasionally it is necessary
to provide means for adjusting the operating position or
point of reversal of a slide having a :fixed length of stroke
without stopping the motion of the slide. A parallel to this
requirement is found in a vertical shaping machine, in
o
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
,
,
,
,
"",
'"........
------ ,,---- ...........
........................
"-
"-
"
,
,
,
" L
\
\
\\
\ -
\
---
D and crank P, the pivot block H on cross-head E slides
back and forth in the slot J. Arm D and crankF, there-
fore, will be given an irregular rotary movement; that is,
the ,crankpin K will travel faster in its circular path S,
Fig. 10, when below the horizontal center line of shaft C
than when above this center line. This action will be more
clearly understood by referring to Fig. 10. Here let circie
L represent the path of cross-head E, point AI indicating
Fig. 9, keyed to driving shaft B; the jack-shaft C, keyed to
the arm D in which slides a cross-head E fastened to and
adjustable along arm A; and crank F, also keyed to jack- /
shaft C and connected to the slotting ram by the connect-
ing-rod G. It will be noted that jack-shaft C is offset from
the driving shaft B. Consequently, as arm A rotates arm
274
which the reversal point of the tool-slide is varied manually.
A mechanism for obtaining this variation is shown in
Fig. 11, the tool-slide being indicated at A. This slide is
driven by the crank B keyed to shaft J. Shaft J is driven
by shaft C through gears D, E, and F. Roll 0, mounted on
a stud in crank B, engages a groove in the tool-slide and
operates on the principle of the Scotch yoke.
The center distances between gears D and E and between
gears E and F are maintained by the links G and H, re-
spectively. These links are a free fit on the gear-shafts J
and C. Gear E and link H are also a free fit on screw K.
Shaft J turns freely in a bracket cast integral with the ad-
justing slide L, and this slide is actuated by the handwheel
M on the feed-screw N. Screw N engages a nut cast on
slide L. Slide A is shown in its extreme left-hand position.
Assume that both the left-hand point of reversal and the
right-hand point of reversal are required to occur farther
toward the right. To effect this change, the operator
merely turns handwheel M the required amount or until
slide L has carried shaft J a corresponding distance toward
the right. In doing this, the links tend to straighten out,
yet the gears remain in mesh and continue the rotation of
the crank. The range of variation for changing the point
of reversal is controlled by the diameters of the gears. If a
larger idler gear E is used, the slide will have a greater
range of adjustment.
Adjusting Crank Throw of Wire - Forming Machine
while Machine is Running.- In the operation of a wire-
forming machine, difficulty was experienced in holding the
parts to a uniform shape, due to variations in the hardness
of the low grade of wire used. These variations in hard-
ness necessitated frequent adjustment of the forming dies
to prevent excessive variations in the depths of the formed
portions. As stopping of the machine for this purpose
seriously affected production, it was decided to provide
means for making the necessary adjustments while the ma-
276 RECIPROCATING MOTIONS O ~ CRANK TYPE
I
,
-------,
' ....------!...--{-:---i--
j
-------
j
'
I I
/,.----- .... - - T - - - r - - / ~ - - - - - -
277
279
chine was in operation. This was satisfactorily accom-
plished by applying the stroke-changing mechanism shown
in Fig. 12., With this mechanism, the length of stroke of
connecting-rod E, which operates one of the dies, can be
changed while the machine is in operation, simply by ad-
justing the nuts N on rod H.
The length of stroke of rod E is varied by means of the
eccentric bushing on the pin of crank A. Crank A is of the
conventional open-end type, except that the crankpin is
longer than would ordinarily be required. The bushing B
on the crankpin is turned eccentric with the bore to fit the
bearing in the connecting-rod E. The hub of bushing B,
which is machined concentric with the bore, carries the
gear C, as shown in the view in the upper right-hand corner
of the illustration. The yoke F is carried on the hub of
bushing B outside of gear C. This yoke carries rack D
which meshes with gear C. Rod H is fastened to yoke F
and is threaded on its outer end where it passes through
stud G. Stud G is located in a fixed position, but is free to
turn or swing. All three assembly views show the crank A
in its upper position. The bushing B is shown adjusted for
the maximum length of stroke.
As the crank A rotates in either direction, the crankpin
carrying bushing B moves in the slot in yoke F. This pro-
duces a rotating movement of bushing B on the crankpin
as a result of the action of rack D and gear C. The number
of teeth in gear C is such that a half turn of crank A pro-
duces a half turn of gear C and bushing B. Thus the throw
of eccentric bushing B is reversed in relation to the crank-
shaft as the crank A reverses its position. This causes the
throw of eccentric B to be added to the throw of crank A,
thus increasing the stroke of connecting-rod E. This condi-
tion exists only in the opposite positions of the crank A, as
the bushing B is constantly changing its position through-
out the cycle. As the nuts N on rod H are changed, the rela..
281
tive position of the bushing B is changed, causing a change
in the throw of crank A.
Electric Control that Varies Throw of Crank While
Machine is Running.-The mechanism illustrated in Figs.
13 and 14 provides a rapid adjustment of the throw of a
crank while the is in operation. The crankshaft
indicated at A serves toimpart a reciprocating motion to
another member of the machine, and any throw of the
crank between zero and the maximum is instantly available.
The crankshaft is mounted on tapered roller bearings.
Crankhead B is integral with the shaft and carries a sliding
block of which the crankpin C is an integral part. This
block is connected by of link D with the draw-bar
E, which is free to slide axially in shaft A. Sleeve F is
threaded at its right-hand end and has rack teeth on it that
mesh with gear G (Fig. 14).
Sleeve F is keyed to stationary cap H to prevent it from
turning, but is free to slide axially in this cap. The worm.
wheel nut J is a running fit in shaft A, and is threaded to
fit sleeve F. A reversing motor rotates the worm-wheel
nut through worm K, and thus moves the sleeve F,. with
draw-bar E, axially, so that, by means of link D, the radial
position of the crankpin is changed.
Mechanical and Electrical Mechanism for Regulating
the Crank Throw.-The apparatus for controlling the ra-
dial movement of the crankpin is shown in Fig. 14. It is
contained in a separate housing, and consists of a special
electric switch designed to control the reversing motor.
This switch has a disk L, which is connected by a bushing
to gear G and is provided with two semicircular contact
segments M. The segments are insulated from disk L.
Member N is connected to a handle and its pointer P.
The links Q, hinged to member N, are each equipped with
a contact blade R. The links, with their blades, are held
against the contact segments by a coil spring, as indicated.
This spring also se:rves to hold the pointer against the
l>
0
....

.14
@
"
<':l
....
0
.
0
Pol
:3
'd
oj
p:l
.,
:S
ar

1'l
0

.... e
,<:t,<:l
.E
H

oj

""<l)
c.>,<:l
....
oj
:S

't:l
.,
.S
,0
a
0
0
a
a. fJ2
N

l_
,<:t
c.>
I
:il
<l)

't:l
;..
.s
0
::EI
c.;
...
6D
r;:;
:c
Section of Mechanism in Fig. 13, Showing the Opera-tion of the
Electric Control Switch
283
graduated dial S and prevents its shifting after an adjust-
ment of the crankpin has been made. To further prevent
shifting, the finger is formed like a knife-edge and rests in
radial grooves in the dial, which also serve as the gradua-
tions.
The operation of the switch will be understood from the
switch diagram. Point"R + represents the positive con-
tact blade and R - the negative blade. The contacting
segments M are connected with the motor and are separated
from each other by insulators. When the R + and R _
blades are on the insulators, the motor is idle, as the circuit
is open, and the throw of the crank is indicated by the P9si-
tion of the finger on the dial S. If the finger is moved to-
ward the right, so that the blades R + and R -coincide
with line X-X, the blade R + is in contact with the right-
hand segment and R - with the left-hand segment, and
the electric circuit is closed. Consequently, the motor will
start and shift the crankpin, as already explained. In the
meantime, through the axial movement of sleeve F and the
resulting rotation of gear G, the disk L turns clockwise
until the contact blades engage the insulators. At this' point
the circuit is broken and the motor stops, leaving the crank-
pin in a radial position corresponding to the position of the
pointer on the dial S.
If the pointer is moved toward the left, say on line Y_Y,
the motor will run in the opposite direction and move
the crankpin back toward its former.,position. In this way,
to either shorten or lengthen the throw of the crank, the
operator merely swings the pointer handle so that the (
pointer engages the graduation on the dial corresponding
to the required throw. This adjustment, besides being
rapid, is made with a minimum amount of effort, as the
motor does the actual work of shifting the crankpin. In
designing the switch, great care should be taken to thor-
oughly insulate the electrical contacts.
Section ZZ Switch Diagram
Fig. 14.
282
CHAPTER IX
RECIPROCATING MOTIONS DERIVED FROM CA.MSt
GEARS, LEVERS AND SPECIAL MECHANISMS
In designing the driving mechanisms for some parts hav-
ing a reciprocating motion, cams, gears or levers are sub-
stituted for a transmission of the rotating crank type.
Examples of these different forms of reciprocating drives
will be described. As with the crank type of drive, the
object of using cams or combinations of levers may be to
vary the stroke in some way or the obj ect may be to obtain
a mechanical movement essential to meet a particular op-
erating requirement.
Double Lever Mechanism to Provide Strokes of
Unequal Length Synchronized During Part of Stroke.-
The mechanism shown in Fig. 1 fulfills an unusual require-
ment in a simple manner. Two slides of a wire-forming
machine were required to operate with different lengths of
travel, the slide having the longer travel being arranged to
operate in synchronism with the other during a portion of
its stroke.. Adjustability, both as to the length of travel
and the period of synchronization, was also required on the
slide with the longer t ~ a v e
Referring to the illustration, bearing H carries the shaft
A, which is given an oscillating motion by a cam-operated
lever (not shown). The motion of shaft A is transmitted
to lever B, which is keyed to it. Rod E transmits the mo...
tion of lever B to one slide, and rod D transmits the motion
of lever C to the other slide. Lever C oscillates on stud K,
carried on lever B, and has gear teeth cut on the end.
The gear teeth on lever C mesh with teeth cut in disk L ~
which is carried free on the hub of lever B. Disk L carries
284
RECIPROCATING MOTIONS FROM CAMS, GEARS, LEVERS 285
dwells could, of course, be obtained by means of cams. How-
ever, the nlechanism shown is simple and more compact
than a cam arrangement. In this mechanism, disks Nand
D, with their contacting pins, are arranged similarly to
the tumblers employed on a combination .lock. Referring
to the illustration, the slide A moves a given distance at
the start before slide Bmoves in the same direction. At
A
SECTION z-z
p
B
SECTION y-y
H
p
SECTION x-x
Mechanism that Enables Slides A and B to be Moved in Either Direction by
Turning lIandwheel D, Slide B Always Dwelling for a Certain
:Period During the Initial Movement of Slide A
Fig, 2.
the end of the stroke, slide A moves in the reverse direction
the same distance as at the start before slide B begins its
return movement.
These motions are obtained in the following manner:
Slide A, through rack C, is connected directly to the disk
or handwheel D by gear E, pin F, and shaft G. Shaft G,
however, is allowed to rotate freely in the combination gear
and bushing H. Gear-bushing H is connected to handwheel
D through pin K in collar L which comes into contact with
286 RECIPROCATING MOTIONS FROM CAMS, GEARS, LEVERS
a pad F, which is in constant contact with plunger G in
bearing H. Plunger G is backed up by a stiff spring. The
action of plunger G against pad F tends to hold the pad
down against the screw I.
As the shaft A rotates in the direction indicated by the
arrow in the view to the left, lever B is carried in the same
direction, but disk L is restrained from movement by the
pressure of plunger G against pad F. This causes the gears
to operate, so that the lever C is swung Oil stud !( in the
direction of the arrow. Rod D is thus given the combined
movement of lever B and lever C, which continues until
lever C makes contact with the stop-screw J on lever B.
At this point, lever C is restrained from further rotation on
stud K, and continued movement of lever B causes disk L
to be carried around with it, due to the locking action that
takes place between the gears and screw J.
As soon as. disk L turns with lever B, levers Band C re-
volve around a common axis-the center of shaft A-and
they move in synchronism from that point on. The view
to the right shows the levers Band C in their extreme for-
ward position, while an end view of the mechanism in the
same position is shown by the central illustration. On the
return stroke, synchronism is maintained until pad F again
makes contact with screw I, at which tirfle the movement of
lever C is increased by the action of the gears. Screw J
controls the period of synchronization, while screw I con-
trols the travel of lever C.
Slide which Always Dwells During Initial Movement
of Parallel Slide.- The mechanism shown in Fig. 2 pro-
vides a dwell or delay in the movement of slide B while
slide A enters upon the first portion of its cycle. On the
return stroke, slide B dwells in the same manner while slide
A begins its movement back to its original position.
This requires a delay arrangement that will operate at
each end of the cycle, so that the first slide will remain sta-
tionary in each position for a given length of time. The
Fig. 3. Diagram nlustrating Application of Hypocycloid to
Reciprocating Mechanism
Fig. 4. Saw-reciprocating Mechanism Based on Hypocycloid Principle
diameter of the generating circle G equals the radius of the
circle F. A mechanism designed on this principle will give
a long stroke with a minimum number of small strong
parts arranged in the most compact form.
In the principal application to be described, the circle F
in Figs. 4 to 6. This mechanism is designed to convert
rotary motion into reciprocating motion. The hypocycloid
98, Fig. 3, is generated by the point P in the generating
circle G as it rolls on the inside of the circle F. The hypocy-
cloid thus generated by point P is a straight line when the
F
--- ~ : : ~ ---- ---tH--S S
can be obtained by placing two pins in each of the three
disks at such angular positions as to give the required move-
ments. Thus, in the case shown, the total movement of A
in advance of B is 1 1/4 revolutions minus the thickness
of three pins if pins P are inserted. This movement lends
itself very readily to operations that require the withdrawal
of a certain tool from the work before the entire carriage
is withdrawn.
Mechanism for Converting Rotary into Reciprocating
Motion by Application of Hypocycloid Principle.-The
principle of the hypocycloid, as illustrated in Fig. 3,
has been applied very effectively in the mechanism shown
pin M in the free-running collar N. The opposite end of
pin M comes into contact with pin Oin handwheel D. Thus
pin 0 makes one revolution minus an amount equal to the
thickness of the pin before it comes in contact with pin M.
The opposite end of pin M can then make one revolution
less the thickness of the pin before coming in contact with
pin K which moves gear-bushing H, causing slide B to move.
On the return stroke, the reverse action takes place.
This means that two revolutions of disk D, less the thick-
ness of two pins, can be obtained before slide B follows the
movement of slide A. Less than this amount of movement
becomes the pitch circle of a fixed internal gear, and the
generating circle G becomes the pitch circle of a pinion that
rolls around on the inside of the internal gear. The point
P, which is at all times located at the exact intersection of
Fig, 5, Assembly of Saw Operated by Mechanism Shown in Fig, 4. Dotted Lines Show
Starting and Finishing Positions of Saw in Cutting off Closely Spaced Piles
the pitch line G with the center line SS of the internal gear,
becomes the stroke pin. As the pinion rolls, this pin moves
back and forth on a straight line from S to S, which is the
equivalent of the pitch diameter of the internal gear.
Hypocycloid Principle Applied to Saw- Reciprocating
Mechanism.- The arrangement shown in Figs. 4 to 6 forms
the operating mechanism of a saw for sawing off piling.
The saw A, Fig. 4, has a stroke of 12 inches, and the in-
ternal gear F has a pitch diameter of 8 inches. The com-
plete machine is rn,ade of Duralumin, and, without the
motor, weighs 43 pounds.
The specific problem was to design and build a one-man
portable machine for sawing off piles C (Fig. 5) at low tide.
These piles were 18 inches in diameter and were spaced
30 inches apart, center to center. Plan and elevation views
show the assembled machine attached to a 2- by 12- by
48-inch timber E, supported on pile D, which was hand-
sawed. The saw and the guide arms are shown in three
positions by dotted lines to indicate how the reciprocating
members clear the adjacent piles. Fig. 4 shows the recipro-
cating mechanism to a somewhat larger scale. Sectional
elevation and inverted plan views of the power-driven parts
are shown in Fig. 6.
The direction of the stroke is determined and fixed when
assembling stroke pin P and the pinion G in the internal
fixed gear F. In Figs. 4 and 6, the line x-y is at right angles
to the extension arm H of the frame J. The internal gear
F is made as a separate piece only for convenience in cut-
ting the teeth and to provide a bottom bearing for the driv-
ing pinion K, Fig. 6. The outside end L of pinion K was
squared and connected to an air motor which runs at a
speed of 800 revolutions per minute. This gives the saw
about 72 strokes per minute.
The stroke pin P and its bracket N, riveted to the rolling
pinion G, are shown in three positions in Fig. 4 to illustrate
how the pin P follows line x-y, carrying with it the forked
linkM which has pin R pivoted on its short end. The long
end of link M is forked around the squared fulcrum pin S,
Fig. 6, which swivels in the hub Q of the extension arm H.
The shoulder-stud T. Fig. 5. is supported in frame V and
fixed in position by pin U. A vise handle W in frame J
permits the operator to swing the whole assembly on stud
T to adj ust and feed the saw.
Referring to Fig. 6, the motor-driven gear X is a running
FIg. 6. Cross-section and Plan Views of Saw-reciprocating Mechanism
fit on stud T, the head of which serves as a support for the
gear. The crankpin Y, fixed in gear X, has pinion G
mounted on its head. Suitable thrust washers are provided
for both gears X and G. The stroke-pin bracket N is riveted
to pinion G, with the center line of the pin P located on
the pinion pitch line. The pin P turns freely in a. bushing
made in halves to facilitate assembling. The halves of this
bearing are pinned securely to the forked link M. Holes
and grooves for providing ample lubrication from one
grease cup screwed into the top of stud T are shown.
Uniform Reciprocating Motion.-A uniform reciprocat-
ing motion often is required in machine design, and the
r---------------------------
,
Fig, 7. Mechanism which Imparts an Even Reciprocating Motion to a Rotating Shaft
mechanism to be described produces such a movement. A
belt drive to pulley A, Fig. 7, rotates shaft B, which drives
gears C and D. Gear C meshes with and drives gear E.
Cam G is integral with gear E and is opposed to the mating
cam H, which is integral with gear N. Cam H and gear N
are attached to shaft F, which rotates and ~ receives a
reciprocating motion. Cam G and gear E are :free to re-
volve around this shaft.
Gear C has twenty teeth, and gear E nineteen teeth,
RECIPROCATING MOTIONS FROM CAMS, GlnARS, LlnVERS 295
Bobbin
-----
keyed to the hub of gear F, which has 100 teeth. Gear G,
which has 111 teeth of modified form and is of the same
diameter as gear F, is keyed to the hub of cam B, which
transmits motion to rod A through roll R and bar J.
The gears F and G are both driven by the wide-faced
pinion H, secured to ,<shaft K. The cam roll ]- is mounted on a
bracket secured to the machine frame, and remains in a fixed
position. As the gears F and G revolve, the former gains
eleven teeth on the latter at each revolution, thus shorten-
ing and lengthening the throw of slide bar J and rod A, the
stroke being lengthened when the relative angular positions
of the cams are such that they impart motion in the' same
direction, and shortened
when the motion imparted
by the cams is opposed.
Varying a Reciprocating
Movement at One Point
of Reversal.- In a certain
textile machine, the me,m-
ber that guides the yarn as
Fig. 9. In Winding this Bobbin, the Yarn
it is wound on conical bob- is Guided by Means of the Mechanism
Shown in Fig. 10
bins is given a reciprocat-
ing movement of uniform length until several layers
of yarn have been wound. Then the length of this
movement is gradually diminished so that when completely
wound, the yarn on the small end of the bobbin forms a
cone of greater taper than the bobbin itself, as shown in
Fig. 9.
The mechanism for producing this movement is shown in
Fig. 10, the member for, guiding the yarn being indicated
at A. This member slides on the stationary guide C and
receives its motion from the reciprocating cross-head G
through the bellcrank lever M, pivoted to the cross-head at
H. The cross-head slides on stationary bars E and F, and
is reciprocated by means of cam K on shaft L.
On the lower arm of lever M is a roll m which engages a
through lever J, holds cam H in contact with cam G during
the return movement. Gear D is made wide enough to per-
mit gear N to continue in mesh during the entire stroke.
This mechanism, with more or less modification to suit the
purpose, could be applied to various classes of machinery.
Variable-Stroke Mechanism.- The purpose of the mech-
anism shown in Fig. 8 is to impart a variable-stroke motion
to rod A. This is accomplished by two cams Band C,
mounted on shaft D. These cams are a free running fit on
shaft D and are held in place by two collars E. Cam C is
Fig. 8. Double Cam and Gear Combination for Producing Variable Stroke
whereas gear D, which drivee gear N, has nineteen teeth,
and gear N has twenty teeth; consequently, gear E and
cam G are driven somewhat faster than the mating cam H
and gear N, so that there is a differential motion between
the two. The result is that cam G forces cam H and shaft
F to the right at a constant speed until the point of the
driven cam passes the point of the driving cam, when the
return stroke begins. It will be noted that spring K, acting
channel cut in the bar 0, pivoted at n. Another roll P at
the free end of bar 0 engages the groove in the cam Q.
This cam controls the angular position of bar 0, and is
rotated at the required speed by the worm and worm-gear
8 and r. It will be noted that the path of cam Q is con-
Fig. 10. Reciprocating Mechanis:rn for Varying the Length of the Stroke
of Member A which Guides the Yarn as it is Wound on the
:Sobbin Shown in Fig. 9
centric with its shaft for 180 degrees. Hence, while roll P
is passing over this part of the cam, bar o will remain sta-
tionary and the length of the stroke of member A will re-
main constant. This is clearly shown in the diagram,
Fig. 11, where the length of the stroke at this time is indi-
cated at 8
1
It will be seen that this stroke is equal to the
movement ofthe cross-head G.. Fig. 10, plus the movement
of the upper end of lever M resulting from its engagement
with bar O. It is during the cam dwell that the first lay-
ers of yarn are wound along the length of the bobbin and
parallel to its conical surface.
At the end of the dwell, however, roll P moves toward
the center of the swinging the bar 0 downward and
thus changing the position of the lever. As a re-
sult, the stroke of member A is gradually diminished until
Fig. 11. Diagram Showing how the Oscillation of the :Sellcrank Lever
Shortens the Stroke in the Mechanism Illustrated in Fig. 10
the channel bar and the lower arm of the lever are in line.
In this position (momentarily), the linear speed of mem-
ber A and cross-head G are equal and their movement is
indicated at 8 in the diagram, Fig. 11.
As roll P, Fig. 10, continues toward the center of the
cam, the stroke of member A decreases still more until the
channel bar and lever have assumed the position indicated
by the dotted lines in Fig. 11. The stroke now is equal to
8
2
and at this time, the bobbin is completely wound. Re-
41
,.!ll
0
.l:l
fJ2
-e
.8
fJ2
oS
't:l
-1' If
_l_______
I'
~
"
I:l
I'
0
,!
H
)1 oS
,I
~
II
"
P<
a
I
H
I
~
I
1ii
I
e
I
$
I :;jj
I
~
I
41
I 't:l
I ~
II
~ ~ II
I'
~
~ ~
I
eUi ,
P<
,
'2 ~ ,
~
I
I
';;l
I
-;;
0
I ,2
,
0
I III
,
41
I
:S
I
I '5
,I :a
,! ~
I'
....
0
"
a
,I
II G)
"
~
"
l>.
,!
,c
I' ~
II
'a
Ii
;l
II
C)
G)
II ~
II
C'i II
I'
...
~
,I ~
"
~
0 1
II
-------- -II
ferring to the diagram, it will be seen that the stroke is
shortened only at one end. Consequently, as each succes-
sive stroke is shortened, the length of each successive layer
of yarn is decreased a corresponding amount. Hence, the
wound yarn at the small end of the bobbin forms a cone
having a greater taper than the bobbin itself. This in-
creased taper depends on the contour of cam Q and also on
the rotary speed of the cam. This type of mechanism is
used in many winding machines other than textile machines.
Alternately Imparting Long and Short Stroke to
Slide.- The cam mechanism, Fig. 12, imparts a long and a
short stroke alternately to a slide, a dwell occurring at both
ends of each stroke. This slide serves to change the posi-
tion of the carton of a carton-stapling machine, relative to
the stapling tools.
Perhaps the most interesting feature of this arrangement
is the fact that only one point of reversal is varied to obtain
the two different strokes. The cam is made in three parts,
consisting of block D, arm E, and bar F. It is mounted on
the slide A, which is given a constant reciprocating move-
ment by another member of the machine (not shown). The
required movement is imparted to slide B by contact of the
roll C with the cam.
Block D is secured to slide A and causes slide B to dwell
at the left-hand end of the stroke. Arm E is pivoted at G
to slide A, and its angular position is varied every other
stroke by means of the star-wheel H an'd the pawl J. Star-
wheel H, together with the block K, is keyed to a shaft that
is free to turn in its bearing in slide A, while pawl J is
pivoted to the machine frame. Contact between block K
and arm E is maintained by spring N. Bar F maintains
a horizontal position on both the long and short stroke of
slide B, and it was to obtain this condition that the link L
was incorporated. This link is pivoted to slide A at M and
is connected to the bar F. With this arrangement, bar F
remains in a horizontal position when arm E changes its
angular position, thus maintaining the dwell at the right-
hand end of the cam.
Reciprocating Slide with Cam Mechanism for Operat-
ing Tool or Drill Slide.- The reciprocating slide A, Fig.
13, is driven by an eccentric connected to rod D. This slide
has a cam mechanism by means of which motion is applied
to the slide B. The motion of slide B is employed for feed-
ing metal-cutting tools to the work. It can be applied to
Fig. 13. Reciprocating Slide Mechanism for Operating Tool-slide
the spindle of a drill press, for example, to advance and
withdraw the drill. By making suitable changes in the cam
slot the drill can be given a rapid approach and reduced
feeding movement, followed by a rapid return to the start-
ing position and dwell. The movements required for this
operation can be obtained by changing the cam-plate Q and
guide plate R. These plates are secured in place by screws
and dowels.
The cam-roll C is mounted on the driven slide B, which
can move only in a direction at right angles to the move-
RECIPROCATING MOTIONS }<'ROM CAMS, GEARS, LEVERS 301
ment of slide A. The cam slot E in slide A has latches or
slides F and G which project into the slot and prevent the
cam-roll from reversing its direction of travel in the cam
slot. When slide A is at its extreme right-hand position,
the cam-roll will be located in the cam slot as indicated at
H. The roll remains stationary while the slide A moves to
the left until it reaches the position indicated at J, thus
allowing the slide B to dwell. Any further movement of
slide A to the left will cause roll C to move down the in-
clined portion L of the cam slot, moving slide B in the direc-
tion indicated by the arrow K. When the cam-roll reaches
the point M, it forces the latch F back to the position indi-
cated by the dotted lines at N. As soon as the roll reaches
position 0, latch F, under pressure from spring P, snaps
back to the closed position. At this point, the eccentric
that reciprocates slide A has reached its highest point and
the slide commences to travel in the reverse direction. On
the return stroke, the same cycle is repeated, causing the
slide B to be returned to its original position when the cam-
roll reaches the position indicated at H. Within reason-
able limits, the dwell positions of the cam slot, as at S, can
be changed to produce any sequence of movements or dwells
required.
Combined Reciprocating and Elevating Movement.-
The device illustrated in Fig. 14 is used for skimming dirt
and oxides from the surface of molten lead in a galvanizing
vessel. Pieces to be galvanized are dipped in this vessel,
and in order that they shall have a smooth and bright sur-
face, all foreign matter must be removed from the lead be-
fore the pieces are withdrawn. The skimming is done by
means of the reciprocating blade G. The blade is in contact
with the lead on the stroke from right to left. The return
stroke, however, is made with the blade in an elevated posi-
tion, as shown in the end view. With the blade in the latter
position, the pieces to be coated can be readily placed in or
withdrawn from the vessel.
II II
On the bracket A, secured to the side of the vessel, is
fastened a stationary shaft B. Sliding on this shaft is a
sleeve C which, in turn, forms a bearing for the bushing D.
On one side of this bushing is an extension to which the
skimmer is fastened, while on the other side is mounted a
cam roller J which engages an angular slot in the carriage
E. The carriage slides on shaft B, and is given a recipro-
cating motion by a crank (not shown) through the con-
necting-rod F. Both members C and E are prevented from
rotating by keys in shaft B.
Referring to the plan view of the illustration, it will be
seen that the skimmer blade is at its farthest position to
the left. The carriage E now moves toward the right, and
after traveling a distance X, the surface H on the carriage
boss comes in contact with the end of the sleeve C. While
the distance X is traversed by the carriage, the sleeve C
is stationary and the roll J is forced downward due to the
angularity of the cam slot I. This movement of the roll
will cause the blade G to rjse a.bove the molten lead.
The carriage E continues to move to the right with the
blade in its elevated position until the end of the stroke is
reached. On the return of the carriage, the gap shown at
X will be on the other end of the sleeve C. As the width
of this gap decrea.ses, the cam roll will ride to the top of
the slot I, causing blade G to enter slightly past the surface
of the lead. The blade, held in this position, skims the
surface of the lead as it continues its stroke to the position
shown in the plan view.
There must be sufficient friction between the shaft a;nd
the sleeve so that the latter will remain stationary while
the roll J raises the skimmer blade. This friction is ob-
tained by counterboring both ends of the sleeve until the
length of its bearing on the shaft is shortened to a distance
Y. The location of this short bearing surface is such as to
cramp the sleeve enough to obtain the desired friction. In
this simple way, a very effective and dependable frictional
grip is obtained.
Quadrupling the Travel of a Slide.-In the mechanism
illustrated in Fig. 15, the reciprocating slide A has a stroke
four times as long as the slide B from which it re,ceives its
motion. This is effected through a series of racks and pin-
ions, the pinions moving in a straight line and meshing with
two opposite racks, one of which is fixed and the other free
to slide. Obviously, the rack that is free to slide will move
twice as far as the center of the pinion. This design is ad-
vantageous when a compact arrangement is required, and
by using more than two gear combinations, the stroke im-
parted by slide B can be increased to any length.
The mechanism is mounted on the stationary block C,
which is grooved to receive the three reciprocating slides
A, B, and D. On each of the slides A and D is secured a
rack, as indicated at G and H. Two stationary racks E and
F are fastened to block C. On the ends of the slides Band
D are the pinions J and K, each of which meshes with a
fixed and a sliding rack. Full lines are used to represent
the pitch lines of the gears and racks.
Now it win be seen that if slide B is advanced toward the
right, say 1 inch, slide D will move 2 inches in the same
direction through the action of pinion J meshing with the
racks F and H. The same combination of gearing exists
at the right-hand end of the block. Consequently, if slide
D moves 2 inches, the stroke imparted to slide A will be 4
inches. At the end of this 4-inch stroke, slide A will be
in the position shown in the lower view.
Intermittent Trigger Slide Having a Positive Working
Stroke and a Swift Return.-A reciprocating slide having
a trigger action is employed on an automatic nut-tapping
machine for feeding the nut positively and at a relatively
slow speed from the magazine to the tapping position.
There, the slide dwells during the operation, after which
r
r
the trigger action releases it, so that it returns swiftly to
the magazine for another nut.
The mechanism is mounted on the machine frame H,
Fig. 16. It consists of the dovetail slide A, on which is
guided the auxiliary slide B, both slides being actuated by
the oscillating segment gear C. Gear C oscillates at a con-
stant velocity and receives its motion from another mem-
Fig. 16. Slide Having a Positive Working Stroke and a Rapid Return Movement
ber of the machine (not shown). Secured in slide B is the
round rod D which is connected at its left end to the work-
carrier (not shown). Spring E, which imparts the rapid
return movement to the work-carrier,is mounted on rod D,
and the spring tension is released for the return stroke by
the trigger F, pivoted on the stationary bracket G.
Gear segment C, in the position shown in the illustration,
has carried both slides to their extreme left-hand position,
and in doing so, has caused rod D to transfer a nut from
the magazine to the tapping position. At this point, trigger
F has engaged the projection on the auxiliary slide B. The
gear segment now reverses its movement and carries slide
A toward the right. During this movement, slide B re-
mains stationary, since it is held by the trigger. Near the
end of the stroke of sFde A toward the right, the projection
J engages the end of the trigger and lifts the latter away
from the projection on slide B; consequently, slide B is re-
leased and under the action of spring E is carried toward
the right until the rubber bumper K comes in contact with
projection J. Thus, with the return of slide B, the work-
carrier and rod D are returned swiftly to the magazine for
another nut. This completes the cycle of the mechanism.
Slide which Dwells atOne End of Its Stroke.- The
screw shells on the plugs attached to electric. extension
cords are spun in place on the plugs in an automatic ma-
chine. The assembled shell and plug is delivered to the
machine from the magazine by means of a feed-slide hav-
ing a dwell at one end of its stroke. The slide is designed
to have a positive action. The dwell occurs when the slide
has carried the plug to its spinning position and continues
until the shell has been spun and the finished plug e j ~ t e
from the machine.
Referring to Fig. 17, the feed-slide A is mounted in
guides on the machine frame B. The driving lever C is
equipped with a roll D which engages a cam slot E in a
projection on the slide. The illustration shows the empty
slide in the position it occupies after being carried back
toward the left to the magazine (not shown). As the lever
reverses its motion, the slide is returned with a plug to
the position indicated by the dot-and-dash outline, the lever
rotating through angle b. This is the position of the slide
while the plug is being spun. The dwell of the slide that
permits this operation is obtained as the lever continues
its movement along the curved portion of the cam slot, the
latter being concentric with the lever shaft at this time.
..,
oS
fJ2
0
>:: .....
x
0
c: ()
0
:;:;
0
<l)
bll
(f)
$:l
oS
o!
t-
o!
t-
'1::
A
bll
:;::
0
R
0
I-<
CI)
::l
0
CI)
,!<l
0
.l:l
fJ2
'"
..,
....
X X .....
0
'd
$:l
Q)
R
0
,<:l
Q
:a
Q)
en
t-=
....

r<l
The dwell continues until the lever has moved through the
angle a minus b and back to the position shown by the dot-
and-dash outline. At this point the completed plug is
ej ected from the slide by a device not shown. The con-
Fig. 18. Reciprocating Mechanism of' a High-speed Machine for Operating
Slide Parallel to Driving Shaft
tinued movement of the lever returns the slide to the maga-
zine ready to pick up another plug.
Slide with Reciprocating Movement Parallel to Driving
Shaft.- In a special high-speed machine used to shear and
form fiber shields for electrical switches, it was required
that slide A (see Fig. 18) have a reciprocating motion
B
E
the lever B, which is fastened to gear C. Gear C and lever
B are free on stud D, and oscillate in unison. Gear C
transmits motion to gear E, which carries the lever F, both
of which are free on stud G. Lever F carries the pin H,
Fig. 19. Diagrams Illustrating Operation of Recillrocating Mechanism
~ !"T"-,.".,...-
which travels in a slot in lever J, transmitting motion to
rod K. The assembly is supported by the bearing L.
In the two upper views, rod A is shown at its extreme
right position and its extreme left position, representing
half its cycle of operation. It will be noted that in both
parallel to driving shaft B. It was also essential to op-
erate slide A without lost motion due to wear, and the de-
sign here shown has proved satisfactory in this respect.
The reciprocating motion is obtained from an angular
eccentric sleeve C, secured to driving shaft B. As this
sleeve revolves, it imparts a swinging motion to part D
about center E. This motion is transmitted to slide A
through a rod which is fixed to D and has a ball-shaped
end F. The spherical end engages concave seats in bronze
screws G, held in a cross-head that is free to slide vertically
far enough to provide for the rise land fall resulting from
the circular movement of ball F. Screws G provide ad-
justment to eliminate play, and the vertical cross-head slide
has adj ustable gibs.
The two ball bearings that support the driving shaft and
also the two between sleeve C and part D are of the com-
bination radial and thrust type. The mechanism is enclosed
in a bracket cast integral with the machine proper and
forming a well so that the lower members are always
in a bath of oil. This reciprocating mechanism operates
smoothly and accurately, and requires little attention other
than to add oil to the well at intervals of approximately two
months.
Obtaining Two Reciprocating Motions from One
Movement.- A change in a wire product necessitated
changing the mechanism of a wire-forming machine so that
the reciprocating motion originally used would be replaced
by two similar movements of lesser magnitude in the same
period of time. Fig. 19 shows how this was accomplished,
using the same source of power. Originally the required
reciprocating movement was furnished by rod A. In the
new arrangement, this rod actuates rod K, causing it to
move forward and back while rod A is moving in one
direction.
Rod A is given a reciprocating motion from a distant
source of power for transmitting the oscillating motion to
these views, lever J occupies the same position, having
passed through one complete cycle and returned to its orig-
inal position. Starting its movement from the position
shown by the upper left-hand diagram, lever B is moved
to the left by rod A, causing gear C to make a partial revo-
lution. Gear E, meshing with gear C, is thus given a par-
tial revolution in the opposite direction. As lever F is
fastened to gear E and moves with it, pin H is moved down-
ward in the slot in lever J, causing the latter to move to
the right until pin H reaches the horizontal center line of
stud G, at which time lever J is at, its extreme right-hand
position, as shown by the lower right-hand view.
Continued movement of rod A produces a further down-
ward movement of pin H. As pin H passes the center line,
it acts against lever J in the reverse direction, moving it
to the left. As rod A reaches its extreme left position,
lever J is also at its extreme left position, having completed
its cycle, whereas rod A has completed but half its cycle.
As rod A returns to its extreme right position, lever J again
passes through its cycle. The magnitude of the movement
of lever B may. be determined by comparing its positions
(see two upper views), while the movement of lever J will
be understood by reference to the upper left-hand and the
lower right-hand diagrams.
Slide with Dwell at Ends of Stroke and Quick Return.-
A mechanism designed to give an intermittent movement
to a reciprocating slide is shown in Fig. 20. For every revo-
lution of the shaft I, the slide J rises at a comparatively
slow speed until it reaches the position shown by the dotted
outline; the slide then dwells at this point for a certain
period of time, after which it returns to its original posi-
tion. These movements are secured through the action of
the lever arm D on the latch C and on the projecting lug K
of the slide. The end of the arm, rotating at a uniform
speed, engages the lug K and raises the slide until the latch
C catches ,on the lower lug G.
The slide is held in this dwelling position until the arm
trips the latch, when the slide drops down on stop-pin B to
the position shown, thus completing the cycle. A further
motion of the arm raises the slide. The member of the
machine on which the end H of the slide acts (not shown)
returns under the action of a coil spring, carrying the slide
A
Fig. 20. Slide Mechanism Producing an Intermittent Motion and a.
Rapid Return
back also. It will be noted that the angle through which
the arm must turn to raise the slide J the required height
is governed by the over-all length of the arm D and the
location of the shaft I. The slide is confined in its path by
the T-shaped gib F on the bracket A.
Slide which Dwells During Every Other Cycle of Driving
Slide.- On a certain bread-wrapping machine the mechan-
ism, Fig. 21, controls the action of the bread-shifting slide.
w
.---..---"'
'-_.,
........
"
,._._,,)
I
i
L_._......
I
./
0

l
0
'"
C3)
0
to
Cl)
t>
,e
A
0
..,
Cl)
'd
::l
UJ
'5
CD
't:l
::l
UJ
I':
Q
e
Po
'S
C3)
r4
b ..,
a
1n
I':
0
0
l
,.c
I':
Q)
t>
a
'5
'5
....
CII

This slide is operated by another sliding member and dwells
during every other cycle of the driving member.
The bread-shifting slide is indicated at A. This sJide
transmits its controlling motion to the loaf-holding mem-
ber (not shown) through stud P, and is actuated by the
continuously slide B through the connecting-
rod C. Rod C is automatically disengaged from slide A
after every other cycle of slide B by the switching arrange-
ment mounted on the base D, which is secured to the ma-
chine frame E. Thus, base D serves also as a guide for the
slide B. In the top of the base is machined aU-shaped
groove with which the roll F on the connecting-rod engages.
Two spring-actuated switching arms G and H are pivoted
to the base by the pins J and K. These pins are free to
turn in the base and have a square shoulder near their
upper end on which the arms slide. The arms are held
normally in the positIOn shown by the coil springs L. On
the lower ends of the pins are secured fingers M and N,
connected by the coil spring O. The tension of spring 0
serves to return the arms to their normal positions.
Slide B, together with connecting-rod C, moves A
through part of its stroke toward the right. As these mem-
bers continue their' movement in this direction, the roll F
enters the curved portion of the U-groove, withdrawing
the projection R on the connecting-rod from its recess in
slide A. This causes slide A to stop. In the meantime,
however, the end of arm H engages the shoulder on the roll
stud Q and is forced back toward the right. Thus, when
the roll has reached its extreme right-hand position, the
energy stored up in spring L forces the roll past the dead
center. At this point, the slide B reverses its motion, and
as it moves toward the left, the roll travels in the lower
part of the groove. During this stroke of slide B, and also
during its return stroke, the projection R on connecting-
rod C remains disengaged from slide A. Hence, the latter
dwells during this cycle. However, when slide B returns,
oj
the roll stud Qengages arm G, so that when the roll reaches
its extreme right-hand position in the groove, the arm
forces the roll past the dead center and into the opposite
section of the groove.
In entering this section of the groove, the projection on
the connecting-rod as-ain engages the recess in slide A, so
that this slide is carried with slide B toward the left. It
also returns with slide B to the position indicated by the
dot-and-dash outline. At this point, the connecting-rod
projection is again disengaged, as already described. Thus,
slide A has a dwell equivalent toa complete cycle after every
other cycle of the machine. In order to have slide A stop at
exactly the same position every time it dwells, the spring-
actuated plunger S was provided. The end of this plunger
merely rides along the top of the guide for slide A until the
slide reaches its dwelling position. When this occurs, the
plunger drops into the depression in the bushing insert T,
thus locking the slide securely during the idle stroke of
slide B.
Reciprocating Motion Obtained by Alternately En-
gaging Upper and Lower Sides of a Steel Belt.o:-The
turned shafts used in a certain type of machine tool are
finished by polishing with abrasive cloth. This work is
done on a machine in which the shaft is revolved between
centers while the abrasive cloth, in a suitable holder, is
held in contact with the shaft and moved back and forth by
a reciprocating table. The long reciprocating movement
of the table is obtained by alternately engaging and disen-
gaging opposite sides of a steel belt. The mech-
anism secured to the table for automatically engaging and
disengaging the belt is shown in Fig. 22.
The reciprocating table C is mounted on the beveled
rollers A. An apron D, cast integral with the table, carries
the reversing tumbler E, the spring-actuated plunger F and
the dog lever G. Tumbler E and lever G are pinned to-
gether, but are free to turn on the stud H, secured in the
L
I
I-------l--f-----''----.
1-------1--+----
I I
I I __________-.1. __..... _
c
Fig. 23. HydrauU.,ally Operated Racit>rocatinlr Mllcha.nism
RECIPROCATING MOTIONS FROM CAMS, GEARS, L:mVERS 319
apron. The belt drums are mounted on shafts supported
by brackets which are secured to the machine bed. Only
the left-hand drum J is shown. This is the driving drum
which rotates at a constant velocity. The other drum is
the idler, and its bracket has a horizontal adjustment for
taking up the slack in the steel belt K. On an extension on
each of the brackets is a pin L, which engages the lever G
at each end of the tab,le stroke, causing the movement of
the table to be reversed.
The spring on plunger F is made heavy enough to main-
tain engagement of tumbler E when the table is moving
toward the right. As shown, the action of plunger F causes
the top side of the belt to be gripped tightly between the
top prong of the tumbler E and the block M secured to the
apron. Consequently, the table must travel in the same
direction as the top side of the belt, as indicated by the
arrow. At the end of the movement in this direction, the
lever G engages stationary pin L which swings the lever in
a clockwise direction, thus disengaging the top prong of
tumbler E from the belt.
Although the belt is then disengaged from the table, the
resulting momentum causes the table to continue its motion
in the same direction, so that the lower prong of the tumbler
engages the lower side of the belt. This causes the belt to
be gripped between the lower prong of tumbler E and the
apron block N. As the lower side of the belt is moving to-
ward the right, the movement of the table will be reversed.
Wear resulting from use will eventually destroy the grip-
ping action of the prongs and blocks, but this condition can
be easily corrected by placing shims under the blocks M
andN.
Hydraulic Reciprocating Mechanism for Machine
10015.- The hydraulic control valve (Fig. 23) is applied to
hydraulically operated grinders. This valve controls the
flow of oil to and from the hydraulic cylinder that contains
the piston or plunger for operating the work-table.
A one-way pump supplies oil at a constant pressure
through pipe A, and the return flow is through pipe B. The
work-table is operated by piston-rod D, and the flow of oil
to and from cylinder C is regulated by control valve E in
conjunction with pilot valve F. The illustration has been
made partly diagrammatic to show the arrangement more
clearly.
When valve E is in the position shown, the oil from the
pump enters through port G, which is connected with pipe
A, and passes through port H, forcing the piston to the
right. Oil from pipe A passes through port J and through
the hollow pilot valve F and port K, thus exerting pressure
against valve E which causes it to shift to the left-hand
position shown. The arrows indicate the direction of flow.
During this movement of valve E to the left, oil which pre-
viously entered the left-hand end of the chamber containing
valve E is exhausted through ports L, M, and the main ex-
haust portN, as indicated by the arrows.
Now when a stop on the reciprocating part engages collar
P on the pilot valve rod and moves the pilot valve to the
right, port K is opened to the exhaust ports M and N, and
oil under pressure flowing through port J passes through
port L and shifts the control valve E to its right-hand posi-
tion. The main inlet port G and port Q are now connected,
so that the piston begins its movements to the left, and oil
in the left-hand end of the cylinder is exhausted through
ports R and then to the right through the interior of valve
E and out through ports now opposite the main exhaust
port N. The pilot valve F requires a movement of only
3/8 inch, and valve E is shifted quickly so that full port
opening is obtained without delay and the flow of oil is not
restricted.
CHAPTER X
SPEED CHANGING MECHANISMS
Many different types of mechanisms for obtaining speed
variations have been designed. These mechanisms, as ap-
plied to machines used in connection with manufacturing
processes, permit the speed of cutters or other tools to be
regulated to suit different materials or operating condi-
tions, as in the case of machine tools. Numerous designs
have also been developed for changing the speeds of moving
vehicles. In all of these applications, the general object is
to vary the speed of a driven member by mechanical means
and independently of the driving engine or motor. Chapter
XI of Volume I (pages 310 to 362) deals with different
types of speed-changing mechanisms. The additional de-
signs which follow are more or less special and embody
interesting principles relating to the design of mechanisms
of this general class.
Speed Reducing Gearing for Operating Press Fixture.....
An automatic fixture for a small punch press required a
cam to operate it and it was necessary for the cam to make
one revolution to seven revolutions of the punch press shaft.
The compact mechanism for obtaining this speed reduction
is sometimes known as "wobble gearing," owing to the
eccentric motion imparted to one of the gears.
The punch press shaft A (see Fig. 1) has keyed to it an
eccentric B (see also detailed view). This eccentric rotates
within and transmits an eccentric motion to arm C to which
is attached an internal or wobble gear D. GearD meshes
with and drives pinion E to which is attached cam F. This
cam has two working edges for operating followers G and
H, as these folJowers require different motions. At the
321
323
SPEED-CHANGING MECHANISMS
press shaft A rotates in a right-hand direction, the driven
pinion E revolves in a left-hand direction. In one revolu-
tion of shaft A, the rotation of pinion E is equivalent to
four teeth, this being the difference between the numbers
of teeth in internal gear D and pinion E. ~ r D has
thirty-two teeth and pinion E twenty-eight teeth and 32 _
28 == 4; therefore, pinion E will make one revolution for
every seven revolutions of the punch press shaft, which is
the reduction required. The gears are of 8 diametral pitch
and the eccentric radius is 1/4 inch, giving 1/2 inch throw.
The gear teeth are modified somewhat to provide clearance
for the eccentric movement. All parts are made of machine
steel. A 1/8-inch air hole (not shown) is drilled through
part B opposite the end of shaft A to permit the air to
escape when assembling A and B. The bearing surfaces
also have suitable oil holes, which are not shown.
Nine - Speed Gear - Box with Single. Lever Control.-
The single-lever control mechanism shown in Fig. 2 per-
mits the operator to obtain instantly anyone of nine dif-
ferent speeds. For instance, with a driving motor running
at 960 revolutions per minute, the gear-box gives .nine
speeds ranging from 10 to 50 revolutions per minute. These
speeds are obtainable, in the usual manner, with three pairs
of sliding gears on two parallel shafts, by sliding each group
of three gears. The gears and the gear-box of conventional
design are not shown, but the yokes that control the sliding
gears are indicated at J and K.
The interesting feature of this design is the arrangement
for obtaining the nine changes of speed by means of the
single lever A. A horizontal movement of lever A serves
to rotate the segment gear F, which is in mesh with the
rack teeth on the gear-shifting slide J, causing the slide to
move endwise. A vertical or up and down movement of
lever A imparts a similar sliding movement to the gear-
shifting slide K, which has rack teeth meshing with the
segment gear H. The range of movements imparted to the
J
END VIEW OF ECCENTRIC
SPEED-CHANGING MECHANISMS 322
D
Fig. 1. Compaot Speed-reduoinK Gearing for Operating Press Fixture
lower end of arm C there is a stud J. One end of this stud
is fixed to the press frame and the other end engages an
elongated slot in arm C, thus preventing the latter from
rotating about its axis, but permitting the axis to rotate
around a circle equal in diameter to the throw of the ec-
centric.
The action of the mechanism is as follows: When the
Fig. 2. Mechanism in which a Single Lever A Actuates Two Slides ;r
K that C')ntrlll a Nine-sJ;leed Gear-box
slides J and K by the horizontal and vertical movements of
lever A permits anyone of nine speeds to be selected.
When the handle A is moved horizontally, the housing B,
in which the lever is pivoted at C, turns with the lever and
the rod D. The teeth on gear E, secured to rod D, are a
325 SPEED-CHANGING MECHANISMS
sliding fit in internal teeth in the hub of the segment gear F.
Thus a horizontal movement of lever A transmits a sliding
movement to slide J through the rod D, gear E, and seg-
ment F. A vertical movement of lever A causes it to pivot
on stud C, resulting in transmitting a vertical movement
to rod D. The dowpward projecting end of gear E is a
turning fit in the helical gear G,. gear G has straight spur
gear teeth at L meshing with teeth in the housing that pre-
vent rotation of the helical gear. The vertical movement of
lever A causes gear G to move vertically and impart a ro-
tating motion to the segment H, which has internal helical
teeth that are a sliding fit over the helical teeth on gear G.
Combination Differential and Speed Reducer.- The
truck and tractor differential, Fig. 3, not only compensates
for the variable speed of the rear wheels but has a second
differential motion for obtaining two speeds at a ratio of
2 to 1; thus the pulling power of the car is increased at the
low speed approximately 100 per cent. Both of these move-
ments are enclosed in one casing.
In the sectional view of the rear axle assembly, the gears
are shown enclosed in the housings A and B, which are
mounted in ball bearings. A worm-gear C, clamped se-
curely between these housings and driven from the engine
by the worm, serves to drive the mechanism. The bevel
gear E is locked by a pin to the housing A, while the gear
F is free to turn in housing B and has a projecting hub on
which the clutch G is held by a feather key.
By sliding this 'clutch to the right into engagement with
the stationary member ,H, the gear F is prevented from
rotating; and when the gear E is rotated, the pinions I,
which are in constant mesh with bevel gears E and F, are
advanced in the same direction as gear E. However, as
these pinions are mounted on the four-armed spider J, their
rolling action on the gears E and F will cause the spider
to revolve at one-half the speed of the gear E.
The movement of the spider also carries the inner pin-
G
L
ions K and the gears Nand 0 around, driving the axles L
and M. It is obvious that the gears N, K, and 0 form a
differential similar to that found on most cars, permitting
either axle to lag. When clutch G is moved to the left into
engagement with the jaws P on the casing B, the entire
assembly is keyed tQgether and its action is the same as in
an ordinary differential Gase. The spider J is free to float
in the pinions K and1. The thrust of these pinions as they
roll on the bevel gears is taken by the casings A and B, the
spherical thrust seat being similar to that employed in a
standard differential. The clutch G is operated by means
of the lever Q, connected to a shifting lever near the driver's
seat.
Compound Planetary Speed Reducer.-A compound
planetary speed reducer, designed to give a large reduction
in a unit of small size, is shown in Fig. 4. The gearing
consists of a stationary gear F, doweled to housing D,. a
low-speed gear R, fastened to the low-speed shaft Eo' plane-
tary pinions G and H,. planetary gears Land M,. and a high-
speed pinion P, fastened to high-speed shaft Q.
Pinions G and gears M are carried on shafts J, while
gears L and pinions H are carried on the sleeves K, the two
assemblies being held on the planetary arm N. Pinions
G and H, and gears F and R, have the same number of
. teeth; but gears Land M, although they are of the same
pitch diameter, do not have the same number of teeth. In
this case, L is a normal gear, while M has one tooth more
than L, but is cut on the same pitch diameter.
The fact that gears M and L are both driven by the single
pinion P makes possible the large speed ratio between the
driver and driven shaft. It may be well to point out here
that the ratio will be greatly decreased if pinion P is made
with two sets of teeth in which one set is larger by a tooth
than the other, and the gears Land M are made normal-
that is, M is made to correspond with the lower half of the
divided pinion P.
327
329
1
80
20 X 32 X 80 X 50
G P L R
81 80-81
--------- = 1--= _
80 80
Calculating the Speed Ratio.- The method of calculat-
ing the ratio of this kind of reducer is not very different
from any other, although the fact that the movement goes
through two sets of gears may make it confusing. An
example will make the method clear.
Referring to the "illustration, the number of teeth in the
different gears of the mechanism are as follows: F = 50,
G = 20, H = 20, R --;- 50, L = 80, M = 81, and P = 32.
First, assume that all the gears are locked tight and that
the entire mechanism, case and all, is given one revolution.
Thus, both shafts E and Q are given one revolution. Next,
assume that arm N is held stationary, and that the case
D is turned back one revolution. As this, one revolution is
made, we analyze the rotation of the various gears, noting
first what happens to shaft Q and then to shaft E. The
movement is added to or subtracted from the first revolu-
tion in each case, and the two results are set up as the ratio.
Equations can now be written from this information.
Assuming that the first revolution was made In a clockwise
direction, the second revolution is made in a counter-clock-
wise direction. It will be noted that when we turn the case
back one revolution, while holding the arm still, the shafts
revolve in a counter-clockwise direction; so we must sub-
tract the calculated movement from the first revolution of
both the driving and the driven shafts. Thus we have,
Movement of driver Q equals
F M
50 X 81 405 64 - 405 341
1- =1--= = __
20 X 32 64 64 64
G P
and movement of driven shaft E equals
F MPH
50 X 81 X 32 X 20
1
SECTION C C
High Ra.tio Speed Reduction Mechanism of Compact Design Fig. 4.
o
328
M
----;---=----=--
Thus we have the ratio between the driving and driven
shafts equals
331
1
426
64
341 X 80 1
80 64
341
It should be noticed that the equations for both Q and E
are negative; hence their quotient is positive, which means
that the driven shaft E rUns in the same direction as the
driver Q. If the positions of gears Land M are reversed,
the same ratio is obtained, but with a negative sign, as will
be found by working out the example as in the first case.
The effect obtained by making P in two pieces, with 31
teeth for the lower half to match the 81-tooth gear M, and
32 teeth in the upper half to match L with 80 teeth, will
be to greatly reduce the ratio. Working out this example
by the same method as was used for the first example shows
the ratio to be 121.5 to l.
The general construction of the speed reducer is shown
quite clearly in the illustration. The low-speed shaft E
runs in a bronze-bushed bearing, and the drive can be taken
off to one side-that is, with a chain or gearing, if neces-
sary. The high-speed shaft Q, in this case, was designed
to be coupled directly to a motor. If it were necessary to
drive shaft Q with a chain or gears, the double-row ball
bearing would probably have to be split up into two bear-
ings, one being arranged as in this design, and the other
located close to the end of the shaft to take the radial load
of the chain or gear. The method of mounting will nat-
urally depend on conditions. In the application described,
the case D was fastened to two channels running parallel
with the shafts, legs S being provided for that purpose.
Gearless VariablemSpeed Transmission.-In many drives,
it is desirable to be able to shift from one speed to another
without stopping the machine and also to be able to obtain
any speed between the maximum and minimum. A design
which meets these requirements is shown in Fig. 5. It is
compact, and instead of using gears, chains, or belts for
transmitting the rotary movement to the driven shaft,
levers and roller clutches are employed.
In this particular model (built and patented by the Len-
ney Machine & Mfg. Co., Warren, Ohio), any speed be-
tween 15 and 150 revolutions per minute can be obtained
with the motor running at 1750 revolutions per minute. The
speeds are instantly changed by turning the handwheel in-
dicated atA. On the drive shaft is mounted a series of
eccentrics B. These eccentrics are connected to levers C
by yokes D. Roller clutches on the driven shaft are con-
nected to the levers by yokes E.
As the drive shaft rotates, the eccentrics impart an oscil-
lating movement to the left-hand ends of the levers C,. and
as these levers are pivoted at F, their other ends will also
oscillate and impart a rotary reciprocating movement to the
roller clutches within the yokes E. Each reciprocating
movement of the clutches will cause the driven shaft to
rotate a fraction of a revolution; and as the eccentrics are
spaced uniformly about the drive shaft, the impulses given
the driven shaft will be successive and overlapping. In
this way, a uniform rotary movement of the driven shaft
is obtained.
The oscillating movement of the right-hand end of the
links C determines the amount the driven shaft turns dur-
ingeach impulse, and this oscillating movement depends
upon the position of the fulcrum F along the slot in the lev-
ers. For example, if the fulcrum is moved down toward the
right by handwheel A, the reciprocating movement of the
clutch will be shorter, and a longer time will be required
to rotate the driven shaft. Obviously, the,entire range of
speeds is covered smoothly, enabling the mechanism to
glide from one speed to another. Although not indicated,
forward and reverse rotation of the driven shaft can be
obtained by merely shifting a lever. This lever may also
be shifted to neutral to stop the driven shaft.
Fig. 6. Gear-shifting Mechanism that Insures Easy Changing of Gears
in Order of Speed ~ t o s
Mechanism that Insures Changing Speeds According to
Successive Gear Ratios.-An ingenious application of in-
termittent gears is incorporated in the mechanism shown
in Fig. 6. This mechanism is designed for shifting change-
gears axially in a metal-spinning machine. Provision is
made for obtaining three different speeds and for shifting
the gears into the neutral position in the order of their
ascending and descending ratios. Only one hand-lever is
employed for manipulating the gears. The speeds are ar-
ranged in geometric progression and the provision for
changing them in accordance with their ratios was made to
avoid clashing of the gear teeth when changing speeds
while the machine is in operation. With this arrangement,
the pitch-line velocities of the gears to be engaged are so
nearly the same.that the teeth slide readily into mesh.
The gear-box is indicated at A and its cover at B. On the
cover is mounted the entire gear-shining mechanism, which
consists essentially of the two slides C and D to which are
attached the gear-shifting forks E and F,o the hand-lever
G keyed to shaft H,o and the intermittent gear J, which is
keyed to the shaft and engages the slides C and D.
With the hand-lever in the position shown, the change-
gears (not shown) are in neutral. By rotating this lever
in a clockwise direction, the two teeth in pinion J engage
the tooth spaces K in slide C, causing the latter to move in
the direction of arrow L. The movement of slide C con-
tinues until fork E slides the corresponding change-gear
into mesh for imparting the lowest speed to the machine
spindle. At this point, the cylindrical part of the pinion
engages the corresponding depression M in the slide, lock-
ing slide C in a stationary position. To obtain the next
higher spindle speed, the rotary movement of the lever is
continued until the teeth in gear J engage the tooth spaces
N in slide D. Up to this point, this slide has been locked
in a stationary position by the cylindrical part of the
pinion J.
As the lever continues to rotate, slide D is moved in a
direction opposite that indicated by arrow L, causing the
fork F to shift another gear into mesh and thus obtain the
second speed. The next two speeds are obtained in like
manner-that is, by continuing the rotary movement of
lever G in a clockwise direction. Graduation marks on the
gear-box cover and an arrow attached to the lever hub in-
dicate the positions of the lever for the various speeds, as
well as the position when the gears are in neutral. In order
to shift the gear to neutral when the lever is in the "high
speed" position, the lever must be swung through an angle
of approximately 450 degrees. However, owing to the suc-
cessive arrangement of the gears, their action in shifting
is so smooth that the lever can be shifted very rapidly be-
tween these two points.
Speed - Changing Transmission of Hydraulic Type.-
Transmissions for cars driven by internal combustion
engines must be designed to provide the required speed
changes, a reverse or backward motion, and a neutral posi-
tion to permit of stopping the car while the motor contin-
ues to run. The transmission to be described provides un-
limited speeds from zero to the high or direct drive, and all
speed changes, as well as the neutral position and the re-
verse, are controlled by a single foot-pedal, there being no
gear-shifting lever.
This transmission has been tested under road conditions
as explained later. Fig. 7 shows a cross-sectional view,
and Fig. 8 an end view of the "fluid clutch" or hydraulic
part of the mechanism.
The two opposed cylinders A are attached to the engine
flywheel, and another pair of opposed cylinders B is at-
tached to shaft D, which is offset, or eccentrically located,
relative to the main center line x-x. The four pistons C,
Fig. 8, located in the four cylinders, are in the form of a
one-piece cross with ar:rns of equal length, located 90 de-
grees apart; consequently, the two pairs of cylinders always
rotate together and one pair is held at right angles to the
other.
Rotation of the cylinders and pistons mayor may not be
accompanied by a reciprocating motion of the pistons in
the cylinders. Such a motion will occur, due to the offset
position of cylinders B and shaft D, unless the pistons are
locked hydraulically so that movement is impossible. When
the pistons are locked relative to the CYlinders, the direct
or high-speed drive is obtained.
How Direct Drive is Obtained.-The clearance spaces
in all cylinders and the holes through the piston arms are
always filled with lubricating oil. If the four-way plug
valve P, Fig. 7, located at the intersection of the holes in
the pistons, is closed so that oil is trapped in each cylinder,
any movement of the pistons relative to the cylinders is pre-
vented. (The control of this valve by foot-lever T will be
explained later.)
When the pistons are thus locked, the variollsparts of
the transmission from the motor shaft to the rear trans-
mission shaft J rotate as a unit. These parts include, in
addition to the cylinders, pistons, and eccentric shaftD,
the eccentric bushing E (which is keyed to casing M and is
free to turn with it in the main casing N), pinions G in
casing M (which carries the pinion studs), internal gear H,
and shaft J to which it is connected.
During this direct drive, the axis of eccentric shaft D
rotates around the common axis x-x of the transmission,
but shaft D does not turn about its own axis. The eccentric
bushing E, in which shaft D is free to revolve, is forced to
rotate about axis x-x by shaft D. While driving direct,
pinions G cannot rotate about their own axes, because on
one side they are in mesh with the driving pinion of D,
which is locked against rotation about its axis, and on the
other side they mesh with internal gear H, which offers
resistance to rotation due to the fact that it is coupled in-
directly to the wheels of the car. The result is that pinions
G merely act as locking members or driving keys between
the pinion of shaft D and internal gear H.
Reversing the Direction of Rotation.- The action of
the mechanism during the intermediate speed changes and
when in neutral win perhaps be easier to .understand when
the movement during the reverse drive is described. Valve
337
P, which was tightly closed for the direct drive, is wide
open for reversal, thus allowing the oil to flow freely and
permitting the pistons to reciprocate. The result is that
eccentric shaft D now rotates about its own axis, but it also
has a planetary movement about axis x-x, because when
valve P is either partly or wide open, the eccentric bushing
E, being keyed to casing M, is free to rotate when pinion
gears G revolve inside internal gear H. When foot-pedal
T is pushed down to the reverse position, it first opens
valve P and then locks gear-case M and eccentric bushing
E against rotation by gripping the 'gear-case with an ex-
ternal brake-band. The latter action is so timed that it
does not occur until valve P is wide open and foot-pedal T
controls the action of the brake, as well as that of the valve.
With casing M and eccentric bushing E held stationary, mo-
tion from the motor is transmitted through cylinders A, the
pistons, shaft D, pinions' G (which now rotate about pins
fixed in casing M) , reversing internal gear H and shaft J.
Transmission in the Neutral Position.-If foot-pedal T,
Fig. 7, is allowed to rise from the reverse to the neutral
position, casing M and eccentric bushing E will remain re-
leased from the brake-band and valve P will be wide open.
The revolving cylinders A then rotate cylinders B and ec-
centric shaft D, which merely turns about its own axis and
axis x-x. The rotation of shaft D, however, is not trans-
mitted to internal gear H and shaft J, because gear casing
M and eccentric bushing E now are free to turn. The re-
sult is that pinions G merely rotate planetary fashion inside
of gear H, because casing M and eccentric bushing E offer
only slight frictional resistance to rotation, whereas in-
ternal gear H is coupled indirectly to the rear wheels of the
car.
Action of Mechanism During Intermediate Speed
Changes.-As foot-pedal T is allowed to rise from the
neutral position toward the high-speed position, valve P
is gradually closed. As it closes, there is a proportionate
Fig, 8. End View, Showing of the Cylinders and Pistons of the
'''Fluld Clutch"
increase in the resistance to the flow of oil between the four
cylinders; moreover, this resistance to the oil flow causes
a corresponding increase in the resistance to the rotation of
D about its axis until, finally, when valve P is completely
closed, there is no such rotation, shaft D merely turning
about axis x-x. However, when valve P is partially opened,
shaft' D has a planetary movement, there being rotation
about its own axis and about axis x-x. The movement
about axis x-x is, of course, accompanied by rotation of
eccentric bushing E, which is forced to rotate by the studs
in casing M when its pinions G revolve idly around H in the
neutral position. .
Now when shaft D begins to turn about axis x-x at an
increased rate due to increasing the resistance of the oil,
rotary motion will be transmitted to gear H at a rate de-
pending upon the planetary movement of shaft D and its
rotation about its own axis. The planetary movement in-
creases and the rotation about the axis diminishes as valve
P is closing. Finally, when the valve is entirely closed,
thus preventing all rotation of shaft D about its own axis,
pinions G act something like fixed keys that connect the
pinion of shaft D with internal gear H, as previously men-
tioned.
The movement of foot-pedal T is transmitted to a sliding
collar Z, which, in turn, slides a helical gear segment U
that is continually in mesh with two helical pinions V keyed
on short shaftsW (Fig. 8). A quarter turn of these shafts
can be obtained easily, as the gear segment slides in an
axial direction while guided by a key to prevent rotation.
This rotary motion of the pinion shafts is transmitted to
the inside of the casing through oil-tight bearings. The
elongated slots in the connecting link X allow space for the
valve lever rolls to operate in when the pistons are recipro-
cating in the cylinders.
The car responds to the slightest touch of the foot-pedal
without any jarring action or shocks. No trouble has been
experienced from excessive' heat generated by the compres-
sion of the fluid, as there is sufficient radiating surface;
this has been proved by tests on the road. The main casing
N of the transmission is made oil-tight and should be kept
entirely filled with some good quality lubricating oil.
Safety valves are provided at the head of each cylinder,
and they are set to blow at 1500 pounds per square inch.
In conjunction with each safety valve, there is a sensitive
one-way automatic check valve opening toward the inside
of the cylinders. If a vacuum is created in the cylinders
by the pistons due to insufficient oil as the result of leakage,
the proper amount of oil will automatically be restored
through the check valves. This is an important provision,
since the cylinders must always be completely filled to ob-
tain a smooth, even starting torque.
It is necessary to have two counterbalancing plates Rand
S, Fig. 7. One is used to counterbalance the two offset
cylinders B, and the, other to counterbalance the pistons.
The plate R is forced to move in opposition to the cylinders
by eccentric bushing E, and the other plate S is driven by
plate R, but it is keyed so as to slide in direct opposition to
the pistons.
This transmission has been applied to a car and sub-
jected to various driving conditions during 1000 miles of
road tests. While there is doubtless considerable sliding
friction in the design shown, no difficulties have been ex-
perienced from overheating, although continuous runs up
to forty miles per hour have been maintained for three
hours. Nevertheless, the mechanical efficiency can be in-
creased by the use of ball or roller bearings, especially
between the eccentric bushing and the main casing. Other
changes may also be made subsequently in the construction
of this transmission.
Automatic Speed Compensating Mechanism.-In re-
cording sound on a sensitized motion picture film, it is
necessary that the film have an absolutely uniform linear
.movement through a microscopic light beam which photo-
graphs on it electrical vibrations coming from a micro-
phone. This film is pierced at the time it is manufactured
with two rows of very accurately spaced sprocket holes.
The pitch of this spacing changes from film shrinkage-
when the film is aged by being stored, or otherwise-often
as much as one-half per cent; that is, five feet per thousand
feet of film. When new film is used for recording sound,
sometimes there is no shrinkage at all. Most frequently,
however, it will be found that the shrinkage amounts to
about one-fourth of one per cent.
Since an absolutely uniform motion of the film is neces-
340 SPEED-CHANGING MECHANISMS SPEED-CHANGING MECHANISMS 341
sary for perfect sound recording, means must be provided
to compensate for this shrinkage and thereby maintain
synchronism between the sound record and sprocket holes,
because the sound track record must synchronize with the
pictures being taken by one or more cameras operated in
synchronism with one or lnore sound recorders.
Referring to Fig. 9 (view at the left), the sprocket A
causes the film B to travel in synchronism with a film pass-
ing through a corresponding camera, because the camera
and sound recorder are actuated by synchronized electric
motors. The film, after passing under the control roller C
and over the roller D, snugly engages the drum E and is
thereby caused to pass, with an absolutely uniform motion,
through a microscopic oscillating light beam coming from
a galvanometer, as indicated by the dotted line F.
Evidently, if the film has shrunk considerably, the periph-
ery speed of the drum E must be correspondingly reduced
in such a precise manner as to maintain the required uni-
formity in rate of film travel through the light beam. That
is, the speed compensating mechanism about to be described
must automatically select and maintain a speed ratio be-
tween the sprocket A and the drum E with a high degree
of precision for the purpose of maintaining this uniform
speed.
The perspective view at the right in Fig. 9 shows the
mechanism as se-en from the side opposite to that shown by
the view at the left. Sectional views are shown in Fig. 10.
By referring to these illustrations, it will be seen that con-
trol wheel G transmits motion from the driver H to the
driven wheel J and drum E. The frictional contact between
these wheels is maintained by a spring (not shown), which
presses the driver H and its hinged bearing arm K toward
the control wheel G.
The control wheel is journaled in a gimbal mounting
formed by the members L, M, N, 0, and P. The position
of the control wheel is governed by the film loop Qthrough
343
the control roller C, lever arm R, spring S, control screw
shaft T, nut U, and a swivel connecting with lever V. This
lever is keyed to the trunnion P formed on the journal bear-
ing L that supports the journal which is part of the control
wheel G.
Owing to this construction, a very slight. change
(1/64 inch) in the position of the control roller C causes
a corresponding change in the position of the control wheel
G with respect to the driver H and driven member J. The
friction contact surfaces between G and H are ground
spherical, with great precision. The periphery of G is
given a slight crowning to provide an actual contact fric-
tion driving surface of approximately 1/8 inch width. The
slightest movement of the lever V tilts the control wheel G
about its contact points with the wheels Hand J, so that it
automatically engages a new friction path that gives a cor-
responding change in speed ratio. Any slight wear or lost
motion that Inay occur is taken up by means of springs.
In the apparatus, the arm R is 2 inches long, and a
1/64 inch movement of the control roller C gives approxi-
mately 1/800 turn of the screw shaft T, which has a double
thread of 1/7 inch lead; consequently, the axial movement
of the nut U is approximately 0.0002 inch. This slight
movement of the nut automatically causes a new selection
of speed ratio, thereby giving an extremely high degree of
refinement in speed control. A very short time after start-
ing under normal operating conditions, when running uni-
formly shrunk film, there is no appreciable change in posi-
tion of the control roller C, and its related parts.
Many sound recorders embodying the control mechanism
described in the foregoing have been in successful opera-
tion for some time. The original model was developed in
the Schenectady engineering laboratory of the General Elec-
tric Co. and operated daily over a period of two years,
continually making perfect sound records without the least
trouble.
345
FiB'. 10. Seetional Views, Showing- how Minute Speed Variations are Obtained
E
344
CHAPTER XI
SPECIAL TRANSMISSIONS AND OVERRUNNING
CLUTCHES
The transmissions described in the preceding chapter are
designed to permit changing the speed of the driven mem-
ber relative to the speed of the driver. Even when speed
changes are not required, some special type of transmission
or connection between the driving and driven members may
be necessary because of their respective positions or to pro-
vide for some other operating requirements. Interesting
examp1es of these special transmissions will be found in
this chapter.
One-Way Rotation with Reversing Driver.- The pur-
pose of the mechanism shown in Fig. 1 is to obtain a one-
way rotation for the driven shaft regardless of the direction
of rotation of the driver. In other words, the driver B
may at any time, at the will of the operator, reverse its
rotation without changing the rotation of the driven
sprocket H, and this result has been accomplished by a very
simple mechanism consisting of few parts, as the illustra-
tions show.
Gear C and sprockets Band F are mounted on and keyed
to the sleeve, which is bushed and revolves freely about stud
shaft A. Sprocket B is driven by a reversing motor. Spur
gear D is driven by spur gear C. Gear D, sprocket Hand
sprocket G all revolve freely on stud E. 'Sprocket F drives
sprocket G. Since sprockets F and G are connected by
chain, they rotate, of course, in the same direction. Gear
D always revolves in an opposite direction to that of
sprocket G.
In the illustration the clutch teeth of sprocket Hare
346
SPECIAL TRANSMISSIONS 347
Fig. 2. Driven Sprocket of One-way Transmission and Form of
Clutch Teeth Used
shown in mesh with the clutch teeth of gear D. Assunle
that gear D and sprocket H are revolving in a clockwise
direction and that sprocket H is to continue rotating in
that direction. Suppose now that the rotation of sprocket
B is suddenly reversed to a clockwise direction, thus caus-
ing gear D to revolve counter-clockwise. This change of
motion, owing to the shape of the clutch teeth, will throw
sprocket 11 over into engagement with sprocket G, and the
latter, which, of course, reversed its direction at the same
349 SPECIAL TRANSMISSIONS
faces J act against the corresponding tapers K on the
sprocket, thus exerting a wedging or cam action which
thrusts the clutch over into engagement with the opposite
side.
When this shifting of sprocket H occurs, it is evident
that the tops or lands, L of the clutch teeth might strike
the tops of the teeth, say, on sprocket G instead of entering
the spaces between the teeth. If this should occur, there
would be a serious wedging action between gear D and
sprocket G, because the width of the clutch part of sprocket
H is somewhat greater than the clearance space between
the clutches on gear D and sprocket G. If such wedging
action should occur, however, it would be relieved instantly
by the lateral movement of gear D, which is free to shift
against the action of spring llf. This relieving movement
would be followed quickly by the return of D to its normal
position as the clutch on sprocket H snaps into place. The
machine on which this device is used consists of two con-
veyors driven by one reversing motor. One conveyor is
reversed at the will of the operator, .and the other must
travel in one direction only. This mechanism has been
fully covered by U. S. letters patent.
Gearless Transmission for Angular Drives.-An unu-
sual form of transmission for shafts located at an angle is
shown by the diagram, Fig. 3, which includes a side view
and an end view. Motion is transmitted from the driving
to the driven shaft through rods which are bent to conform
to the angle between the shafts. These rods are located in
holes equally spaced around a circle, and they are free to
slide in and out as the shafts revolve. This type of drive is
especially suitable where quiet operation at high speeds is
essential, but it is only recommended for light duty.
The operation of this transmission will be apparent by
following the action of one rod during a revolution. If we
assume that driving shaft A is revolving as indicated by
the arrow, then driven shaft B will rotate counter-clock-
SPECIAL TRANSMISSIONS
L
time as shaft B will now be rotating clockwise, which is
the direction desired for sprocket H.
Why a reversal of motion causes sprocket H to shift
from engagement with the gear over into engagement with
the sprocket will be apparent by referring to the detail
view Fig. 2, which shows this sprocket and the gear clutch.
When this clutch (which is a duplicate of the sprocket
clutch) is driving the sprocket, the under-cut surfaces of
the clutch teeth are in engagement, but when the rotation
of the driving clutch member is reversed, the tapering sur-
348
Fig. 3. Gearless Transmission Consisting of Shafts Connected by Rods
which Slide in and out as the Shafts Revolve
equipped with small drills which revolved at 1500 to 1800
revolutions per minute. This transmission was used to' re-
place universal joints consisting of forked ends, each of
which was pivoted by means of screws to a connecting
block. These universal joints rapidly deteriorated, but the
sliding rod transmission proved durable and quiet.
In making this transmission, it is essential to have the
holes for a given rod located accurately in the same relative
positions in each shaft; all holes must be equally spaced
both in radial and circumferential directions. The holes
in each shaft must also be parallel to each other, and each
rod should be bent to the angle at which the shafts are to
be located. If the holes drilled in the ends of the shafts
have "blind" or closed ends there ought to be a small vent
hole at the bottom of each rod hole for the escape of air
compressed by the pumping action of the rods. These holes
are also useful for oiling. To avoid "blind" holes, the shafts
may have enlarged ends with holes extending clear through
the enlarged part or shoulder. This transmission may be
provided with a central rod, located in line with the axis
of each shaft and provided with a circular groove at each
end for a cross pin to permit rotation of the shaft about
the rod, the central rod simply acting as a retaining device
for shipping or handling purposes.
Changing Relative Positions of Two Revolving Shafts.-
The relative positions of two revolving shafts may be varied
while in operation by the mechanism shown in Fig. 4. The
speed ratio between shafts A and B is constant, but the
relative rotative positions of the two shafts can be varied
by means of the worm H and the worm-gear M. This mecn-
anism is used in a wire-forming machine on which the tim-
ing of one section of the machine must be changed relative
to the timing of another section.
The driving shaft B, supported by bearings D and E,
carries the gear J, which is keyed to it. Bracket F is free
on shaft B, and carries the stud N, which supports gears I
I II II II II, I
I I! II II " I
I II II II I) I
I l ~ ~ II ,I r-'ll ,
I Ii 1 1,1 I
I II I II II I
1'1
I
II
II
Ir--1
1-'1. I I I It I
IlLJ! II II I
';' v ~ j -"v-Jl"..;>'
Although this transmission is an old one, many mechan-
ics are skeptical about its operation; however, it is not only
practicable, but has proved satisfactory for various ap-
plications, when the drive is for shafts located permanently
at a given angle. Although the illustration shows a right-
angle transmission, this drive can be applied also to shafts
located at any intermediate angle between 0 and 90 de-
grees.
One application that proved successful was on a special
multiple-spindle drilling machine for drilling meter cases.
This machine had between thirty and forty spindles
wise. As shaft A turns one-half revolution, rod C, shown
in the inner and most effective driving position, slides out
of both shafts A and B during the first half revolution, and
rod C will then be at the top; then during the remaining
half, this rod C slides inward until it again reaches the in-
nermost position shown in the illustration. In the mean-
time, the other rods have, of course, passed through the
same cycle of movements, all rods successively sliding in-
ward and outward. .
350
353
Fig,S, End View of Timing Mechanism Illustrated in Fig, 4
with gear J, will be rotated on stud N as an axis in the ratio
of 2 to 1. As the axes of shafts A and B coincide, gear K
rotates around shaft A.
If gear K were independent of gear I it would revolve on
stud N as an axis in the ratio of 1 to 1 with shaft A, but
as gears I and K are pxed together, and must revolve as a
unit at a ratio of 2 to 1 with shaft B, gear L will be revolved
in the reverse direction. The ratio of rotation between
gears K and L will still be 1 to 1, but each of the gears wiIl
revolve one-half turn in opposite directions. As gear L is
keyed to shaft A, the latter must revolve with it. Under
actual operating conditions, the effect is merely that of a
gear train until the handwheeI is turned, at which time
shaft A is advanced or retarded as the bracket P is rotated
forward or backward.
Changing Angular Velocity of Driven Member Twice
During Each Revolution.- The velocity-changing mechan-
ism to be described is incorporated in a hat-finishing ma-
B
and K. The two latter gears are free to rotate as a unit.
Gear L is keyed to shaft A, which is supported by bearing
C. Each of the gears K and L have 18 teeth, while gears 1
and J have 24 and 12 teeth, respectively.
Power is transmitted from shaft B through gears J, I, K,
and L to shaft A at a 2 to 1 ratio in the same direction.
Worm H is keyed to shaft G, which is supported on the
upper end of bearing E. Shaft G carries a handwheel (not
Fig. 4. Mechanism for Varying Relative Rotative :Positions of Driving
and Driven Shafts
352
shown) on one end, by means of which the worm is rotated.
WormH meshes with the worm-gear M on bracket F, caus-
ing the latter to rotate on shaft B when the handwheel on
shaft G is turned. In Fig. 5, the dotted outlines of bracket
F and gear I show the rotative movement around shaft B
produced by the action of worm H and worm-gear M.
A better understanding of how the change of timing be-
tween shafts A and B is accomplished may be had by as-
suming these shafts to be stationary. Then, as bracket F
is caused to rotate on shaft B as an axis, gear 1, meshing
chine. The finishing of the hat is done by a pad faced with
sandpaper. This pad automatically travels from the top
or center of the hat to the band while the hat is being re-
volved. An automatically controlled oscillating movement
is also imparted to the finishing pad. The oval rotary mo-
tion mechanism referred to is required in order to keep the
work in proper contact with the finishing pad.
Now, in order to finish the hat evenly all over, it is neces-
sary to vary the angular velocity of the chuck on which the
hat is mounted. If the spindle were revolved at a uniform
speed, the front and back portions of the crown would be
over-finished and the sides under-finished as a result of the
difference in surface speed caused by the oval shape of the
work. It is the purpose of the mechanism shown in Fig. 6
to increase the speed of rotation of the spindle as the front
and back surfaces pass under the finishing pad.
As the oval head revolves, the quarter sections between
the side and end portions must lift the working pad
3/4 inch in one-quarter revolution, thus increasing the pres-
sure on the pad. As it passes from the end portion to the
lower side, the pad drops 3/4 inch in one-quarter revolution,
and this falling action gives less pressure on that portion.
The oval head mechanism so acts that all portions of the
section of the body with which the pad is in contact are
raised to the same plane.
The same oval shape condition makes necessary the use
of the differential angular velocity mechanism. The curva-
ture of the end portions is sharper and the contact area of
the pad on the hat is, therefore, less on these portions and
the intensity of pressure greater. The side portions, being
flatter, are subjected to less pressure by the pad. This
condition would result in cutting the ends faster than the
sides if the differential angular mechanism did not move
the ends more quickly under the pad, the change in velocity
being adjustable to suit the shape of hat.
The block that carries the hat is revolved by the spindle
Mechanism which Increases and Decreases Angular Velocity of a. Shaft Twice During
Each Revolution
s
~ ~ ~ l ~ l \
Fig. 6.
C which extends through the machine frame at the right.
By means of the control lever S, the spindle C can be con-
nected directly with the driving pulley A so that it will run
at the same speed, which might be required in finishing the
band of a cylindrical or perfectly round hat. By moving
the control rod S in the opposite direction, the variable
velocity mechanism is brought into action. This mechan-
ism causes spindle C to make one complete revolution to
every four revolutions of the driving pulley A.
By means of the velocity-changing mechanism, the angu-
lar velocity of spindle C can be i'ncreased and decreased
twice during one complete revolution. This change in
velocity is synchronized with the oval motion mechanism,
so that a uniform finishing effect is obtained. The amount
of variation in the velocity is controlled by the cam-operated
plate P which is actuated by the same cam that controls the
oval motion mechanism.
Operation of Mechanism for Changing Angular
Velocity.- The operation of the mechanism may be de-
scribed by following the drive through from the pulley A to
the spindle C, Fig. 6. Passing through a slot or opening in
the push-rod M is a clutch finger N which is securely locked
in the push-rod by the pointed rod O. Corresponding with
the clutch finger opening in the push-rod are similar open-
ings in the spindle C through which the clutch finger N
freely passes.
When the push-rod M is moved backward by the control
rod S, the clutch finger N engages the clutch face of the
pinion B. The spindle C, through this contact, is driven at
the same speed and in the same direction as the pinion B
and its driving pulley A. When operating in this manner,
the gear D, pinion H, and gear I all rotate on their free
bearings and do not have any effect on spindle C.
When the push-rod M is pulled forward by rod S, the
clutch finger N is disengaged from pinion B and engages
Fla'. 7. Diagrams Used to Illustrate Operation of Velocity.changinF Mecha.ni.sm
357
the clutch face of gear I which then drives the shaft C. The
drive is now transmitted through the pinion B to gear D,
through link J to pinion H and thence to gear I at a reduc-
tion in speed of four to one as compared with the direct
drive from the pulley A.
The gear D is mounted on the stud E secured to the sleeve
member P, which can be swung about the hub bearing on
the cover plate T. When the stud E is in axial alignment
with stud G, gearsH and D have the same speed and this
speed is constant. The slide P has an angular slot in it
which fits over the slide shoe Q on stud E and serves to
move stud E of gear D out of alignment with the stud G in
accordance with the movement imparted to rod R by the
cam that also controls the oval mechanism.
In Fig. 7, angle x and dimension y indicate the amount
859
of Uout of line" adjustment between the studs E and G.
This adjustment is varied automatically from zero, when
the finishing pad is at the top or center of the hat crown,
to the maximum amount, when the finishing pad reaches
the band of the hat. It is this changing of the axial rela-
tion of gear D and pinion H that controls the differential
velocity. The diagram to the right will help make clear
how the changing of the relative angular positions of the
studs Land K and their connecting link J produces a varia-
tion in the velocity of the driven pinion H.
The change in angular velocity occurs once in each revo-
lution of pinion H, but since pinion H makes two revolu-
tions for each one of driven gear I, the change in the angu-
lar velocity of the latter gear and its spindle C occurs twice
during each revolution. By changing the linkage connec-
tions between the cam and plate P, Fig. 6, it is possible to
control the amount of variation in angular velocity. A seg...
mental circular opening is provided in the lower portion of
the cover plate T to allow sleeve F to swing on its hub bear-
ing. The link J has no center bearing, and is held in posi-
tion by the two drive pins K and L. The pin L projects
from the inner face of gear D into a hole in link J. The
pin K is made eccentric for convenience in assembling, but
it would be possible to use a straight pin, as far as the op-
eration of the mechanism is concerned.
Intermittent Motion Converted to a Constant Drive.-
All moving projectors are equipped with some sort of in-
termittent device to cause the film strip to dwell at every
picture. This is necessary, because running the film through
the projector at a constant speed would result in a blur on
the screen. With the advent of the "talkies," however, this
motion had to be reconverted to a steady drive for the film
strip while it passes through the sound-producing attach-
ment, as otherwise the latter would not function correctly.
This was done in one instance with the arrangement shown
in Fig. 8.
:i
:i
z
0
t::
0
UJ.
<I)
G)
I-
0;::
A

I'l
0
al
.s
I'l
oS!

..::t -;;
...i $
z

0
t::
g $
I/)
t.l
6Il
I::

G)
0
0
0

,..
0
...
G)
()
oj;:
G)
A
eO
.
{;I;j
858
Fig. 9. Device for Eliminating Lost Motion in Gear Teeth
The intermittent motion is transmitted to disk A through
bevel gearing. This disk is equipped with two studs B
which pass through elongated slots in the web of the fly-
wheel C and are connected to two studs in the flywheel web
by coil springs. The shaft Z is keyed to the flywheel. The
intermittent motion transferred to disk A will be absorbed
through the combination of the coil springs and the fly-
361
ter-clockwise direction. It is obvious that any play in the
teeth of the gears would produce inaccuracies in the dial
readings.
The driving gear E meshes with both the gears Band C,
the latter being fastened to the shaft D. In both gears B
and C are drilled hples F for the springs A. One end of
each spring is secured to gear B and the other end to gear
C. The thickness of the teeth in both these gears is less
than that of the driving gear E, so that normally, there
would be considerable play between the meshing teeth.
However, owing to the tension of the springs A the teeth
in gear C are advanced ahead of those in gear B and serve
to fill the tooth spaces in the driving gear. In this way, as
wear occurs, it is obvious that all lost motion in the gear
transmission is eliminated, and that no matter in which
direction the gears are run, there will be no play between
the teeth nor inaccuracy in the dial readings.
Over-Run Pawl Clutch to Permit Accelerating Drivenu
Shaft Speed.- The pawl clutch shown in Fig. 10 has been
used very successfully in machines having camshafts or
feed-screws which must be driven at accelerated or, high
speeds a part of the time. The low-speed shaft S drives
the high-speed shaft H under normal operating conditions
through the ratchet wheel A and pawls G of the collar K
which is keyed to the high-speed shaft. When the speed of
shaft H is to be accelerated, a clutch mechanism, not shown,
is engaged, and this drives the high-speed shaft at the ac-
celerated speed through gearing connected with shaft H by
gear J. The arrangement of the over-run clutch is such
that it permits shaft H to be operated at the higher rate of
speed without affecting the speed of shaft S.
Referring to the construction of the clutch, ratchet wheel
A is keyed to shaft S. The pressure disk B is a sliding fit
on shaft S, and is driven by ratchet A through pins C. The
tension springs D tend to force the pressure disk B inward
toward the ratchet wheel. Between disk B and the ratchet
wheel, resulting in a constant speed for the shaft Z, which
is the drive for the sound-producing attachment.
Double Gear for Eliminating lost Motion in Gear Teeth.-
In devices where gears are used, such as those operating
graduated dials, it is often desirable to eliminate all lost
motion resulting from wear occurring between the gear
teeth. The gears shown in Fig. 9, which are only recom-
mended for light transmissions, impart motion to a dial
indicator that must register in both a clockwise and a coun-
860
J
363
gaged position until the high-speed clutch is disengaged,
at which time the drag on the plugs F is reversed, causing
the pawls to be drawn down into engagement with the teeth
and the ratchet wheel again.
Centrifugally Operated Starting and Over - Running
Clutch.- In Fig. 11 is shown an automatic starting and
over-running clutch of the centrifugal type. It consists of
the driven housing A, in which rotates the driving clutch
member B.Three cavities C are milled in member B to
accommodate the three sliding weights D. To one of these
weights is riveted the spring steel band E. Over the steel
band and riveted to it is the brake lining material G. At H
SECTION X-x
wheel are fiber drag-plugs F, which are set in holes in the
ways of the pawls G. Behind the pawls are stop-pinsP
which keep the drag-plugs from swinging through too large
an arc and thereby becoming entirely disengaged from the
disk and the ratchet wheel. When the high-speed clutch is
tripped and the gear J is driven at a higher speed than the
ratchet wheel A, the pawls G are disengaged, and the plugs
F, which then drag between the pressure disk and the
ratchet wheel, cause the pawls to swing clear of the teeth
in the ratchet member. The pawls remain in this disen-
Fig. 11. Automatic Starting and Over-running Clutch
40'
....
<ll
,<:l
Ul
~
~
~
~
....
0
'd
~
Pc
Ul
~
:S
()
<P
~
~
.8
;tl
~
~
'g
~
C!)
~
~
()
()
clj
Q)
,.Q
0
.s
....
....
0
<ll
....
r2
\ ~ t ~ ., ..:
~
J:
~ CJ)
0
~ -'
0
....
0
'd
Q)
<P
Pc
Ul
]
<P
~
~
:a
~
~
]
0
~
~
~
l>
0
C
....
~
362
Fig. 12. Modified Design of Clutch Shown in Fig. 11
365
SECTION X-x
x
FiB". 18, Over.running Olutch with Toggle-actuated Shoel>
place of the balls, if desired. The balls F force the three
equally spaced sliding blocks G outward, causing the spring
steel band H to expand, so that the brake lining material J
will grip the outer housing, thus connecting the driving and
driven members. The screw-pin is for the purpose of con-
necting the shaft collar C to the housing B, while the ball
spring arrangement is provided to hold the shaft collar in
either the open or the closed position.
Toggle Type of Over-Running Clutch.- An over-run-
ning clutch employing the toggle joint principle for obtain-
ing the required locking action is shown in Fig. 13. It
consists of the spider A having three milled slots spaced
the form of two halves of a brake-shoe, a centrifugal weight
being used to force the two halves apart. However, this
type of construction would involve a problem of dynamic
balancing.
Fig. 12 shows the same type clutch employed. in the re-
verse manner. Here, the housing A serves as the driver,
the driven member being the housing B, which is caused
to rotate when the clutch collar C is forced over the pins D.
These pins, of which there are three, force the connector
pin E against the three steel balls F. Pins can be used in
weights are forced inward by the spring band E, immedi-
ately disengaging the clutch and allowing half of the clutch
to slip upon the other half. If the driving force is entirely
cut off, the clutch disengages,aIlowing the driven half to
over-run until it comes to rest.
Simplicity of construction and a large contact area are
advantages of this clutch. It should be noted that the effec-
tive gripping power can be increased without increasing
the diameter by merely lengthening the clutch. It should
also be noted that, for a given velocity, the force exerted
is proportional to the mass of the weights D, so that the
larger the housing of the clutch. the greater will be the
gripping force. This type of clutch can also be made in
is a steel thrust washer, while at J is a retainer plate for
keeping both halves of the clutch assembled.
The operation of the clutch is as follows: As the clutch
is rotated by the driving member B, centrifugal force
causes the weights D to move outward. This, in turn, ex-
pands band E, forcing the brake lining into contact with
the inner surface of housing A. As long as the speed of
driver B is maintained or increased, the gripping force is
also maintained or increased, but the moment it is reduced,
either from the slowing up of the driving force or because
of resistance set up in the driven member, the sliding
367
120 degrees apart, the outer casing H, and the toggle levers
D. At points B, which are slightly offset from the center
lines of the slots, are milled semicircular recesses which act
as seats for the toggle levers D. The shoes E are made
slightly smaller than the width of the slots and have an
outside diameter eqlJal to the diameter of the ... spider A.
Seats are milled in the rear sides of the shoes for the toggle
levers D. The flat springs C, fastened in the slots in the
spider, tend to keep the shoes E in contact with the inside
of the outer casing H. A retainer plate J, held in place by
screws, keeps the members of the clutch assembled.
The operation of the clutch is similar to that of any free-
wheeling clutch. The toggle levers D are set at as slight an
angle as possible, making due allowance for wear on the
shoes E. After the shoes become worn, the faces Lare
machined or cut back. When the shoes have been cut back
so that the toggles D become ineffective they are replaced.
Air-Operated Clutch for Two-Speed Drive.-The speed
of a shaft that drives the feeding and indexing mechan-
ism of a multiple-spindle drilling machine must be increased
from 2.13 to 15 R.P.M. to permit indexing in 1 2/3 seconds.
This speed change is controlled by a cam-operated, four-
way air valve and an air-operated clutch which alternately
engages the high- and low-ratio gearing.
Starting and stopping of the machine is controlled by
hand-operated clutch Q (Fig. 14) which connects or dis-
connects gear P with shaft E. The main shaft A drives
the feeding and indexing mechanism only. When the ma-
chine is drilling and the feeding mechanism is in operation,
motion is transmitted from shaft E to A through the low-
speed gearing C and F, as a result of the engagement of
clutch B with gear C. When an indexing movement is re-
quired, clutch B is automatically shifted into engagement
with gear D, thus driving shaft A through gears D and G
and increasing the speed to 15 revolutions per minute, so
that the indexing will be completed in the allotted time;
<
then the clutch is shifted back automatically to the feeding
position.
Clutch B is shifted by means of compressed air acting
against a piston which is within cylinder L and is con-
nected to clutch yoke M. The admission and exhaust of
the air to and from cylinder L is controlled by a cam J act-
ing in conjunction with a four-way valve H. This valve
connects with the main air line, and there are two 3/8-inch
pipes R leading from it, provided with reducing bushings
to fit the small tubes connecting with each end of the air
cylinder L. When cam J, which is attached to shaft A,
moves in the direction of the arrow, it comes into contact
with end K of the air valve operating lever, thus admitting
air to the left-hand end of the cylinder and exhausting it
from the. opposite end. The result is that clutch B is thrown
into engagement with gear D, as the illustration shows.
This high-speed drive of 15 revolutions per minute contin-
ues until cam Jengages end K1 of the lever, thus admitting
air to the right-hand end of the cylinder and exhausting it
from the left, which throws the clutch into engagement with
gear C. An air pressure of 80 pounds per square inch is
carried in the main line, and the total pressure exerted
against the piston in cylinder L is about 98 pounds.
B68
CHAPTER XII
SELF-CENTERING PIVOTED LEVERS AND
SLlDING MEMBERS
It is sometimes necessary or desirable to provide certain
machine elements with mountings that will permit them to
be deflected from or forced out of their normal positions
by other parts of the machine. Usually such elements must
be so designed or equipped that they will return automat-
ically to their normal positions when the deflecting forces
are removed. The term "self-centering" is used in refer-
ence to the devices shown in Figs. 1 and 2, because they
serve to return the elements to their central or normal
positions when the deflecting force is removed. Probably
the most familiar example of a self-centering device is the
spring-actuated control rod employed to operate a dog-tooth
clutch. With this type of clutch, the two members may not
be in the correct angular relation to permit them to engage
when the control lever is thrown over. Under these condi-
tions, it is the function of the self-centering spring-actuated
control rod to yield and permit the clutch lever to be thrown
over without unduly straining the mechanism, causing the
two parts of the clutch to engage as soon as they are in the
proper positions.
Another application of self-centering devices is to the
control levers of power-operated machines. For such' ap-
plications, the lever is normally held in the neutral or
central position by the self-centering device, and is returned
to this position automatically as soon as it is released by
the operator. Manual operation of the lever in one direc-
tion or the other places the machine either in forward or
reverse motion, and its release causes the machine to stop.
369
Self-Centering Devices for Angular Movement.-The at-
tachment of a weight, pendulum fashion, as shown at A,
Fig. 1, is one of the simplest examples of a self-centering
device having an angular movement. A device of this kind
may be used for a lever having a range of movement of
20 degrees each side of the vertical center line. This type
of self-centering device, however, may be objectionable on
account of the inertia introduced by the weight. Another
objection is that the weight offers little resistance to angular
movements of small amount, as the self-centering force is
zero at the central position. Still another objection is the
tendency of the weight to oscillate after displacement.
The device shown at B is similar to the one at A ex-
cept that spring tension is substituted for the weight. This
type of self-centering device is often used and is fairly effec-
tive for some purposes. The self-centering effect, however,
is zero at the mid-position of the lever, and effective center-
ing forces are not developed until a considerable angular
movement of the le'-er has taken place. The lever also has
a tendency to vibrate after the decentralizing forces begin
to act. In practice, short stiff springs are usually employed,
which cause a heavy pressure to be exerted on the bearings
or pivots of the lever.
The self-centering device shown at C typifies approved
practice. Two clip levers pivoted about the boss of a lever
are employed in this device. A pin carried by the lever is
gripped between the two clip levers with a force depending
upon the initial tension of the spring connecting the ends
of the clip levers. Another pin of the same width as that
on the lever is fixed to the stationary framework of the ma-
chine and interposed between the two clip levers. The re-
sult is that no movement of the lever in either direction can
take place without forcing the clip levers apart against the
resistance of the spring. The majority of self-centering
problems involving angular movement can be solved by the
application of the principles embodied in this device.
Self-Centering Device Applied to Electric Switch.-The
self-centering device employed on a rotary snap-action elec-
trical switch is shown at D, Fig. 1. The principle on which
this centering device operates is similar to that of the device
shown at C. In this case, a C-shaped spring is used to force
the clip levers together, as the angular movement is only a
few degrees. The centering forces are equal in both direc-
tions of angular movement in the devices shown at C and D.
It is sometimes. desirable, however, that the decentering
forces be more strongly resisted in one direction than in
the other. A modification of the design shown at C to meet
this requirement is illustrated at E. The unequal tension is
obtained by employing two separate springs of unequal
strength for the two clips. As the springs are anchored
to the machine framework, it is a simple matter to provide
them with means for adjusting the tension.
The designs shown at C and E have proved highly satis-
factory in general practice, but when absolute precision in
the self-centering action is necessary, the type shown at F
is preferable. With the designs shown at C and E, any
difference in the size of the two pins located between the
clip levers will result in lost motion, whereas the design
shown at F is free from this possibility.
In this design, one of the clip levers is dispensed with,
and a spring is used to pull the main lever and the clip lever
together. This provides a definite self-centering action
without the possibility of the slightest lost motion, and has
been successfully employed in the design of a shock absorber
in a train of gearing connecting a gun to its elevation indi-
cator. Under the shock of the recoil of the gun, the device
yields, but immediately regains its proper position with
respect to the indicating pointer. In this application, any
lost motion would destroy the accuracy of the elevation
indicator.
RoUer and Spiral Cam-Operated Centering Device.-
In the case of the self-centering device shown at G, Fig. 1,
370
CENTERING MECHANISMS
CENTERING MECHANISMS 371
373 CENTERING MECHANISMS
the actuating forces are applied to the lever by a roller
which is pressed into engagement with a spirally shaped
cam through the action of a coil spring. The arrangement
is similar to that of the "zeroizing" cam lever used in stop
watches. By shaping the cam curves properly, any desired
variation in the centerjng force can be obtained from the
spring that presses 'the roller radially inward. A heavy
pressure on the roller and the lever bearings would result if
the pitch of the spiral cam were made small in order to
secure a wide range of angular movement, and in such a
case, it would be advisable to use ball bearings for the roller
and for the lever bearings.
Another design, consisting of two arms extending in op-
posite directions and carrying rollers that are subjected to
spring pressure from a radially sliding T-shaped piece, is
shown at H. When the main lever is in the central position,
the T-shaped piece exerts an equal pressure on both rollers.
Angular movement of the lever in either direction results
in one or the other of the rollers depressing the T-shaped
piece against the action of the spring.
At J is shown a design similar to that at H, except that
the rollers are onlitted and a pivoted lever is used in 'place
of the T-shaped piece. When there is a limited amount of
space directly below the lever, this design may be used to
advantage. The devices shown at G, H, and J possess one
feature that is often desirable, namely, they permit the
self-centering action to be rendered inoperative when de-
sired by forcing the centering T-shaped piece or lever out
of contact with the main lever.
At K is shown an interesting, effective and extremely
simple self-centering device. There is no lost motion in
this type, and it can be arranged to give equal or unequal
resistance to movement in either direction. It requires but
one actuating spring, which can be readily provided with a
tension adjustment.
The device is simply a flat connecting-rod slotted at each
....
o
375
c
o
B
o E
A
Fig. 2. Self-centering Devices of the Sliding Type
motion must be eliminated, it is better to use a device of the
type shown at D, Fig. 2, in which the upper collar is pinned
to the sliding member. In this design, the sliding member
Methods of Eliminating Lost Motion.- Unless the dis-
tance between the faces of the washers employed in the
sliding self-centering device is equal to the corresponding
distance between the faces of the proj ecting members, lost
motion will occur. Where the possibility of the slightest lost
374
end, one slot being engaged by a pin on the lever, and the
other slot by a pin secured to the machine framework in a
fixed position. The spring is fastened to the connecting-
rod and to the lever. If the upper end of the spring is con-
nected at a point midway between the fulcrum of the lever
and the connecting-rod, the self-centering forces will be
equal in both directions. If the upper end of the spring is
moved nearer the lever fulcrum, the self-centering force
opposing clockwise rotation of the lever will be reduced,
while the o r ~ opposing anti-clockwise rotation becomes in-
creased. The action of this design is illustrated by the
model shown at L. Three pins, a cardboard lever, a piece
of wire, and an elastic band suffice to provide this working
model of the device.
Self - Centering Devices of the Sliding Type.- One of
the earliest types of sliding self-centering devices is shown
at A, Fig. 2. The centering forces are supplied by two
springs acting in opposite directions on the sliding mem-
ber. When flexible springs are used, t h ~ centering or posi-
tioning action is rather indefinite with this type of device,
especially if the springs are flexible. The position of the
slidfng member depends upon the value of the force op-
posing the self-centering springs.
At B is shown what may be considered the usual or stand-
ard practice in the design of self-centering sliding members.
In this case, the springs apply the centering pressure to
washers placed on each side of a collar located on the sliding
spindle. The inner sides of the washers engage the sides
of a member that projects from the machine frame. Any
vertical movement of the sliding member is resisted by the
projecting member on which one of the two springs acts.
The springs may exert equal or unequal pressure on the
collars, as desired. When an equal resistance in either direc-
tion is desired, the design is frequently modified, as shown
at C, so that only one spring is required.
START l> <I RUN
Fig. 3. Gherkin Latch Used on Electrical Equipment
At F is shown a design, similar to that illustrated at D,
which is intended for use where the possibility of the slight-
est lost motion must be eliminate,d. In this design, both
springs are of the same size and provide equal resistance
to either compression or extension of the connecting-rod.
Gherkin's Latch.- Fig. 3 shows a mechanism which is
known as a "Gherkin's latch" which is used in conjunction
with certain types of centering devices. This latch con-
sists of a handle A which is mounted on shaft B. The
handle has a projecting boss E which engages with the
latch C that is pivoted on the pin D. The pin D is carried
by the case G and the movement of the latch is limited by a
second pin F. This latch is so constructed that, when the
handle is moved slowly to the left, the latch will prevent
the handle moving beyond the notch N,. but if the handle
is moved over to the extreme right-as shown dotted in the
illustration-and then thrown quickly in the opposite direc-
tion, the boss E on the handle will leave the top of the in-
cline 0 on the latch with sufficient speed to enable it to
jump across the notch N, in which case the handle will come
to rest in the position marked 0
1
which is the running posi-
tion. The pin R riding on the surfaces H will lock the
handle in the cavity J when the action of the centering
spring becomes effective. In this way, the handle is se-
curely held in the central or off position.
Applications of Gherkin's Latch.- This latch may be
used in connection with either of the centering devices
shown in Figs. 4 and 5. The centering spring has one end
attached to the shaft B of :rig. 3 and the opposite end to the
case G. Referring to the illustration of the centering
spring, or so-called "cross-legged spring" shown in Fig. 4,
it will be seen that a coiled spring A is employed to connect
the shaft B with the case. The effectiveness of this spring
is dependent on the following conditions: first, that the
ends cross each other in a line which is perpendicular to
the horizontal axis of the spring; second, that the ends of
lost motion is possible and the centering action is precise.
The device shown at C is commonly employed in the de..
sign of spring-actuated connecting-rods used in dog-clutch
control link work and for similar purposes. At E is shown
a typical connecting-rod of this class.
is mounted within a sleeve which is pressed upward against
a projecting member on the machine frame by a spring. A
depressing movement of the sliding member carries the
sleeve with it. On the upward movement of this member,
the sleeve cannot follow, and the sliding member rises out
of the sleeve against the pressure of a second spring that
acts between the two parts. With this arrangement, no
376
Figs., 4 and 5. Two Forms of Centering Devices that may be Used
with a Gherkin Latch
379
to this illustration, it will be seen that there is a bracket A
which supports a pivot B and a pin C. Two arms D and E
are mounted on the pivot B, on which they are free to swing.
On the ends of the arms are projections F and G which are
secured to opposite ends of the spring S. These projec-
tions F and G also engage with bosses J and K on the mov-
ing member H. This moving member is carried by the pin
C, upon which it is free to swing. Assuming that the mov-
ing member H is rotated in a clockwise direction, the center-
ing device will assume the position shown. The arm E is
held against the pin C, while the boss G on the arm D en-
gages the boss K on the movable member H. Further rota-
Figs. 6 and 7. Two Types of Double-a.nn Oentering Devices
tion of the member H will compress the spring S and this
will return the movable member to the central position when
the action of the spring becomes effective. If the movable
member H is rotated in a counter-clockwise direction, the
action of the centering device will be exactly reversed, the
arm D being held by the pin C while the boss F on the arm
E engages the boss J on the movable member H, thus caus-
ing the compression of the spring S.
In the centering device shown in Fig. 7, the frame A
is provided with a stop B and two pivots C and D. Two
arms E and F are mounted on the pivot C, these arms be-
secured to the central position when the action of the spring
becomes effective. A very simple centering device is illus-
trated in Fig. 5, the only difference from the preceding type
being that two separate springs are employed in this case.
One end of each of these springs S is secured in a slot in
shaft B, whilethe other end is held by the fixed pin C. When
shaft B is turned in either direction, one of these springs
is put under tension and this spring tension provides for
returning the shaft to the central position when the action
of the spring becomes effective. Two modifications of this
design are shown in the lower corners of this illustration.
Miscellaneous Types of Centering Devices.- Another
form of centering device is illustrated in Fig. 6. Referring
378
the spring extend far enough above the outside of the coils
to enable a pin or bar C and a fixed boss D to be inserted
between these two ends. The pin or bar C is carried by
the crank E, which, in turn, is carried by the shaft B of the
mechanism shown in Fig. 3. An arm G or some other
means provides for transmitting the motion so that when
the shaft B is moved in either direction the cross-legged
spring will be put in tension by having one end turned
through the action of the pin C. This spring tension pro-
vides for returning the arm G and the shaft to which it is
Figs. 8 and 9. Two Types of Centering Devices in which Sliding
Conta.ct of the Control Arms is Employed
ing free to swing and provided with projections G and H at
their upper ends. vVhen the centering device is in its nor-
mal position, both of the projections G and H are in contact
with the stop B, owing to the action of the compression
spring S which forces the lower ends of the arms in op-
posite directions. It will be seen that the movable member
J is mounted on a pivot D and provided with a projecting
lug K on its lower side. This lug engages with the projec-
tions G and H, and when the member J is rotated in either
direction, it swings one of the arms about the pivot C and
compresses the spring B. When the action of this spring
two sliding surfaces K and L which work in contact with
the pin B and the boss C, respectively. The tension spring
S is secured to the arms E and F at the points N. Assuming
that the movable member 0 is to be rotated in a clockwise
direction, the arm E will be pulled down by the supporting
pivot H and in so doing, the surfaces M and J will slide on
the boss C and pin B. For the same reason, arm F will be
pushed up, the surface L sliding on the boss C and the sur-
face K sliding on the pin B. This action increases the dis-
tance between the pins N to which the spring is secured,
thus putting the spring S under tension; and when the ac-
tion of this spring becomes effective, it will return the mov-
able member 0 to the starting point.
In the device shown in Fig. 9, the frame A carrfes two
pivots Band C, and a boss D to which one end of the spring
S is secured. The arm E is pivoted at B and has a pro-
jection F which engages the opposite end of the spring S;
this arm also has two sliding surfaces G and H, which work
in contact with the projections K and L on the movable
member J. This movable member is carried on pivot C.
When the member J is rotated in either the clockwise or
counter-clockwise direction, one of its projections causes the
arm E to be rotated in a clockwise direction about the pivot
B. When this rotation takes place, the projection F on the
arm E compresses the spring S. When the movable mem-
ber J is released, the action of the spring S becomes effective
and returns it to the central position.
Device for Small Angular Movements.-Fig. 10 shows
a form of centering device which is limited in its applica-
tion, but has been found particularly effective in those cases
where it can be used. It is only applicable for returning
mechanisms which have a relatively small angular move-
ment. Referring to the illustration, it will be seen that the
shaft A has a hub B secured to it. An arm or other means
of transmitting the motion may be secured to the shaft A.
The hub B has two recessed surfaces Hand J that receive
becomes effective, it returns the arm to the normal position;
and the projection at the upper end of the arm acts on the
lug K, causingthe movable member J to be returned to the
stflrting point.
The centering device illustrated in Fig. 8 works on a
somewhat different principle from that of the preceding
types. The frame D carries a stop C and a pivot A. The
movable member 0 is carried by this pivot A, and, in turn,
carries two arms E and F. The arm E is carried by the
pivot H and provided with two sliding surfaces J and M
which work in contact with the pin B and the boss C, re-
spectively. The arm F is supported on ~ 'Pivot G and has
388
c
Fig. 12. Another Form of Double-arm Centering Device
K
o
H which limits the rotation of the arm F in a counter-clock-
wise direction through contact with the stop B1 The ten-
sion of the spring S hold;s the arms E and F against their
respective stops Band BI When shaft A is rotated, the
hub C and its lug D are moved in either a clockwise or
counter-clockwise direction as the case may be. This rota-
tion causes either the arm E or F to be rotated against the
tension of the spring S, and when this spring tension be-
comes effective it causes the shaft A to be returned to the
starting point.
s
tion and returns the shaft A to the starting point through
the action of the cam roller F on the cam.
Oil-Switch Control Centering Device.- A type of cen-
tering device which finds wide application in the control
of oil switches is illustrated in Fig. 12. In this illustration,
A represents a shaft to which a hub C is secured. This hub
carries a projecting lug D which extends between the two
arms E and F of the centering device. These arms are free
to swing about the shaft A. The arm E is an
extension K to which one end of the spring S is secured,
and a second extension G which limits the movement of the
arm E in a clockwise direction through contact with the
stop B. The arm F has an extension J, to which the op-
posite end of the spring S is secured, and a second exteusion
to it. The bellcrank E is mounted on the pivot D; and this
bellcrank has the cam roller F mounted at one end and the
other end secured to the spring S. The opposite end of the
spring is secured at the point H. When the shaft A is
rotated in either direction, the lobe C or C1 of the cam
pushes down the end of the bellcrank; and this causes the
crank to rotate about the pivot D. The result is that the
opposite end G of the bellcrank swings out and places the
spring S under tension. When the action of this spring be-
con1es effective- it rotates the bellcrank in the opposite direc-
L
Figs. 10 and 11. Yoke and Cam Types of Centering Devices
382
the ends K and L of the yoke D, which is held in position
by means of a bolt E. The opposite end of this bolt is car-
ried by a lug C, and the bolt carries a spring S and washer
F which supports the pressure of the upper end of the
spring. When the shaft A is rotated in either direction,
the hub B raises the yoke D, thus compressing the spring S,
and when the action of this spring becomes effective, it
pushes down the yoke and returns the shaft A to the start-
ing point.
Cam, Bellcrank, and Spring Combination.-One of the
simplest forms of centering devices, that can be used con-
sists of the combination of a cam, bellcrank, and spring,
illustrated in Fig. 11. Referring to this illustration it will
be seen that the shaft A has the two-lobed cam B secured
spring S will return the levers to their normal positions.
The arrangement of the mechanism shown in Fig. 14 is quite
similar to that of the preceding illustration, except that the
levers C and D are provided with cam rolls E and F which
are mounted on pivots Hand G. When the cam J is rotated
in either direction, by turning the shaft K, it causes the
levers C and D to swing outward about the pivots A and B,
thus placing the spring S under tension. When the torque
tending to rotate the shaft K is released, the tension of the
spring S returns the levers C and D to the starting point.
Lever-Returning DeviCes.- Figs. 13 and 14 show two
simple devices for returning two levers to their normal posi-
tions. In the device shown in Fig. 13, the lever C is carried
by the pivot A and the lever D is carried by the pivot B. An
arm G is pivoted between these levers and connected to
them by means of two links E and F. When arm G is ro-
tated in a clockwise direction, it causes levers C and D to
swing in about pivots A and B, thus placing the spring S
under compression. When the force tending to bring the
levers C and D together is released, the compression of the
385
Mechanical movements may in many cases be derived in
the simplest manner by the use of properly proportioned
levers or combinations of levers and connecting links. Sev-
eral lever combinations which are arranged to provide a
period of dwell during the cycle of movements will first be
described and these designs will be followed by certain spe-
cial lever applications or other devices allied in some way
to mechanisms of the lever type.
Multiple-Lever Mechanisms Designed to Obtain Dwells
in Lever Movements.- Levers, in combination with links,
can be used as a means for obtaining a dwell or idle period
during the cycle of movements imparted to the lever of a
driven shaft. The cam and follower-roll mechanism is per-
haps the only simple one in which complete elimination of
motion is obtained during the dwell period, but it cannot
always be applied conveniently; moreover, it is often diffi-
cult to obtain sufficient movement by means of cams.
When a close approximation to complete elimination of
motion during the dwell period will meet requirements,
levers and links provide a simple solution of the transmis-
sion problem, particularly when the driving and driven
units are not located too close together. Fig. 1 illustrates
a case of this kind, in which a hand-lever (not shown)
mounted on the driving shaft operates two distinct mechan-
isms near the ends of its stroke, while the middle section
of the stroke operates the driven shaft, which receives no
noticeable movement when the other two mechanisms are
being actuated.
CHAPTER XIII
MULTIPLE - LEVER MECHANISMS WITH DWELLING
OR IDLE PERfODS AND OTHER SPECIAL
LEVER COMBINATIONS
s
Centering Devices for Returning Two Arms
Simultaneously
Figs. 13 and 14.
384
Fig.!l. Lever and Link Mechanism Having Dwell Period for Driven Shaft at Each
End of Oscillating Movement of Driving Shaft. Fig. 2. Diagram Used to Illustrate
Method of Laying out Level' and Link Mechanisms. Fig. 3. Arrangement for Ob
taining Dwell at Beginning of Driving Lever Stroke with Shafts Turning in Opposite
Directions
Advantages of the Lever Type Dwell Mechanism.-
The lever type mechanism has many advantages. For ex-
ample, with the lever and link mechanism, it is a simple
matter to increase or decrease the movement imparted to
the driven member and change the direction of movement.
387 MULTIPLE-LEVER MECHANISMS
not shown in the illustration, were required for the trans-
mission of motion from the front of a machine to a higher
position at the rear. This is accomplished, with the addi-
tional feature of a dwell period of the driven- shaft near
each end of the stroke of the driving shaft.
Operation of a ~ v e r Type Dwell Mechanism.-In op-
eration, the lever A (Fig. 1) on the driving shaft moves from
position A
l
through A2 and Aa to A4, serving to operate two
mechanisms (not shown) from levers also mounted on the
driving shaft. The movement from A2 to Aa is transmitted to
the lever on the driven shaft, causing it to move from E I to
Ea. Lever E on the driven shaft dwells while the lever on
the driving shaft is moving from Al to A 2 and from Aa to
A4 The first dwell of the lever on the driven shaft, as lever
A moves toward A4, occurs while the lever on the driving
shaft moves from position Al to A 2, and while the longer or
driving arm of the bellcrank H swings from H
l
through the
neutral point to H 2, causing lever E to move only a very
short distance, as indicated by the full line and the dot-and-
dash line. The actual over-travel transmitted to lever E at
this time amounts to an angular movement of only one min-
ute. Even this small movement can be reduced by incor-
porating a similar arrangement at another point in the
transmission system. As a matter of fact, the motion of
lever E during the dwell period does not exceed 8 per cent
of the total movement.
The movement of lever A from Aa to A4 results in trans-
mitting practically no movement to link B and lever C. This
movement simply causes 'positions C
a
andC4 to become
merged at one point, giving corresponding positions H
a
and
H4 to lever H. It is generally necessary to increase the
length of the driving levers or decrease the length of the
driven levers to compensate for the decreasing effects, on
the driven levers, of the angular motions of the drivers as
they approach the position of dwell. This can be done con-
veniently, but the designer must be careful not to reduce
FIG. 1
I
Driving Shaft
MULTIPLE-LEVER MECHANISMS
FIG. 3
Driven Shaft
Such mechanisms can also be arranged easily to avoid
obstacles. Only simple parts which can be made easily in
any machine shop are required for the lever mechanisms.
These mechanisms operate smoothly and quietly without
requiring any attention other than an occasional oiling. All
the levers shown in Fig. 1, together with some that are
386
too greatly the moment arms of the driving forces in the
links.
Incidentally, it may be mentioned that link and lever ar-
rangements of this kind are self-locking against the reversal
of the lever moments when the driving lever is at each end
of its stroke. In the case illustrated, there was no neces-
sity to utilize the toggle action of the levers for the pro-
duction of heavy pressure or for locking purposes, but this
feature might be useful in some cases.
Laying Out a Lever-Type Dwell Mechanism.- The gen-
eral method of laying out a mechanism of this kind is
illustrated in Fig. 2. This lay-out can be varied consider-
ably without seriously affecting the results. First, the p ~
proximate or definite locations for the driving and driven
shafts are laid out and the directions of the motions are
determined, so" that intermediate levers and links can be
sketched in for a preliminary trial. Isolating one unit, as
in Fig. 2, arcs representing the swing of the link-pins are
drawn, and from the center of the driving shaft is drawn
line OCT tangent to the arc of the driven link-pin.
It is not absolutely necessary to have line OCT in the
tangential position, but this position ordinarily gives the
best results. From the center of the driven shaft, line RT
is drawn at right angles to line OCT. Now, CT represents
the length of the connecting link. From C mark off at D
and A arcs representing one-half the angle through which
it is desired to eliminate the transmission of movement to
M, and with length CT and centers A and D draw arcs
which cut OCT at F. This point F is the final position of
the driven link-pin. From OA layoff the point B, so that
arc AB subtends the whole angle of rotation of the driving
lever. Then point B is the starting position of the driving
link-pin.
From point B, with a radius equal to CT, draw an arc
cutting the arc of the driven link-pin at M. Now, RM indi-
cates the initial position of the driven lever, while BM indi-
Fig. 4. Levers Arranged to Have Driven Shaft Dwell at Beginning. of
Driving Shaft Stroke with Both Shafts Turning Counter-clockwIse.
Fig. 5. Arrangement for Dwell at Mid-point of Driver Oscillation
a direction as to p r o d u ~ the minimum amount of angular
movement.
In order to eliminate motion at the beginning of the
stroke instead of at the end as just described, and at the
same time retain the same direction of rotation for both
levers, it will be necessary to carry the lever-pin to the
right-hand side of the driving shaft. This necessitates
using an overhanging transmitting lever and link, in order
cates that of the link. Thus, it will be seen that while the
driving lever is given a continuous forward motion, the
driven lever moves forward up to its final position and then
has a slight additional forward motion, after which it re-
turns to its final position. This last reciprocating move-
ment between F and T. is\usually so slight as to be negligible.
This slight movement also acts on the driven lever in such
MULTIPLE-LEVER MECHANISMS 388
Fig. 6. Mechanism that Allows the Driven Member B to Remain in
Position Shown while Crankpin of Driving Arm Passes through Arc C
methods have been evolved to determine such curves, but
they are rather complicated. However, some very remark-
able improvements in dwell movements have been made by
applying such formulas.
There are curves that show a near relationship to cir-
cular forms and therE! are others in which the radii of cur-
Fig. 7. The Driven Member D Remains in the Position Shown while
the Crankpin of the DriVing Arm Passes through Arc E
vature will increase to such an extent that the curves prac-
tically resemble a straight line. Mechanisms with dwells
can be designed, in which the driven member o n n e ~ with
the base of the mechanism has a sliding way, such as shown
at W, Fig. 7. A member with two vertical slide ways at
90 degrees or any other angle can be used in place of the
swinging lever.
Driven Lever which Dwells while Driving Crank Turns
Part of a Revolution.- A link mechanism which allows
the driven member to dwell for a relatively long interval
is shown by the diagram Fig. 6. Any point in the flat
triangular plate which constitutes the rod A can be used
for a link connection. For the designing of such mechan-
isms, it is necessary to study the different forms of curves
described by the various points on rod A. The forms of the
curves traced by the different points on this rod vary dis-
tinctly according to their relative positions. To obtain long
dwell periods, only the curves that have large circular sec-
tions on a part of their outline are used. Geometrical
390
to allow the link to pass across the center of the shaft-see
Fig. 4. If it is possible to reverse the direction of the driv-
ing lever, elimination of the motion at the beginning of the
stroke can be achieved by the arrangement shown in Fig. 3.
Fig. 5 shows another arrangement in which the dwell
occurs at the mid-point of the swing of the driving lever, so
that the driven lever is given an oscillating motion with a
dwell at the extreme left-hand position.
Link Mechanism on Textile Machine for Obtaining
Dwell in Lever Movement.- Crank - driven mechanisms
which also provide lever movements having a dwell period
are shown in Fig. 8. The view at the right shows a design
applied to a textile machine which provides a dwell period
for the lever K equal to nearly one-third the period required
for a complete revolution of the crank-arm L. This mech-
anism is used on a weaving loom and has proved very suc-
cessful. The pause or dwell obtained with this arrange-
ment is of sufficient duration to permit the shuttle to pass
from one side of the machine to the other.
Referring to the view at the left, which shows the princi-
ple of operation, it will be noted that the driving arm E,
which revolves continuously in the direction indicated by
the arrow, is connected to rod or link D at a point approxi-
mately one-fourth its length from the end connected to link
G by the stud M. Link G, in turn, is connected with the
upper end of the driven lever H, which oscillates through
the arc RS, dwelling at R while the stud M travels from
J to I. The lever or arm C, connected to the left-hand end
of link D, also oscillates through an arc as indicated. The
amount of dwell and the length of the arc through' which
the driven lever oscillates depends, of course, on the posi-
tioning and the lengths of the links and levers. The use of
slide ways for varying the relative positions of the links
may be advantageous in some of the many applications for
which a mechanism of this kind is adapted.
High - Speed Oscillating Motion with Dwell at Each
End.- It is possible, by means of a mechanism consisting
of links and gears, but no guides or cams, to obtain an oscil-
lating motion with a dwell at each end of the oscillation. A
mechanism of this kind is shown in Fig. 9. This mechan-
ism has two gears, the driving gear A and the driven gear
D. Gear D is only half the diameter of gear A. It will be
noted that the gear shafts are mounted in the fixed base E
of the mechanism.
Fig. 9. Mechanism that Causes the Short End of Lever L to Oscillate
through Arc N with Dwell at Each End of Arc
The lengths of crank-arms F and G, or the distance of the
crankpins. of the push-rods H and I from the centers of
their respective gear shafts, as well as the lengths of the
push-rods, can be of any suitable dimensions. The crank
F works in a different phase from crank G. The push-rods
H and I are connected by the joint J. If crank F makes
one revolution, and crank G, by means of the spur gears,
dwell while the joint J describes the arcs X and Y. Mem-
ber L is thus given an oscillating movement indicated by
arc N, with a dwell at each end of the arc. The members H
and I in the design shown are of identical size. A mechan-
ism of this kind can be used for high speeds.
Straight-line Motion for Oil Circuit-Breaker.-Straight-
line motions are not extensively, since they are only
adapted to certain and they have some
inherent disadvantages. The particular straight-line mo..
tion illustrated by the diagrams Fig. 10 (which represent
side and end elevations of the links) produces an approxi..
mate straight-line between the two points A and B. 'This
mechanism is part of a heavy-duty oil circuit-breaker.
Straight-line and toggle linkages have had considerable ap-
plication to this type of electrical apparatus.
The pivots of what might be called the main lever are
located at A, C, and E. The fixed pivots or hinge points
are at D and F. The links CD and EF are free to rotate
around their respective fixed pivots or bearings. The line
EG indicates a link connecting with a crank or other form
of driving member. A force indicated by the arrow at A
acts along the path AB, and the triangular lever ACE
moves from the "closed position" shown in full lines to the
"open position" indicated at B, C1, and E1 This latter posi-
tion represents approximately the lower limits of the main
lever movement. The load from A to B varies in a manner
characteristic of circuit-breaker operation, and the velocity
in each direction also varies from zero to as high as 12 to
15 feet per second in order to operate the brushes fast
enough to open or close in from 1/3 to 3/4 second. The load
at A may vary from 150 to 3000 pounds during normal op-
eration .. and may be higher under certain conditions. The
line AB is vertical in the apparatus, and the line FP at
right angles to AB.
In considering the advantages of this design, first note
that the main lever ACE is a triangle with the load at one
makes two revolutions in a reverse direction, joint J will
describe a curve having the unusual form indicated.
The curvature is so selected from the possible forms that
it has the same radius at the maxima and minima points.
If this radius nearly corresponds to the length of member
K, which is connected to joint J at one end and to swing-
ing member L at the other, member L will be oscillated
about a fulcrum bearing M in the base E and will pause or
394
397
corner A. This form provides maximum strength and rigid-
ity for a given amount of metal, and few straight-line mo-
tions, except the more complicated ones, have this feature.
Second, the members AE and EF are struts well located
with reference to the load at A. These struts are disposed
to form the familiar tqggle joint. Third, the rod from A to
B, carrying the load, about midway between the
points E and F, allowing proper clearances. Morever, the
rod is in the center of the double link EF, there being a
link on each side, as shown by the end elevation; this is
also the case with link CD. As the result of this construc-
tion the pins are in double shear and with practically no
bending due to overhang. The line from A toB deviates
only slightly from a true one and is accurate enough for the
purpose mentioned. This motion has the advantage that
the pivot points and links can be varied at one place and
compensated for somewhere else to an extent not possible
with a number of other types. All pivot points, however,
must be in the proper relation to obtain the most accurate
line, although this does not nec'essarily require the particu-
lar arrangement shown.
The real geometrical reference axis of this linkage is
indicated by the line x-x. Note that the dotted line and
small arrows starting from A extend through B downward
curving to the left and then, after making a small loop, ex-
tend upward through N and back to the starting point A.
This line indicates the path which point A would follow if
the motion were continued beyond point B and through a
complete cycle.
The four-sided linkage CDFE is similar in principle to
the skeleton for most of the straight-line and parallel mo-
tions from Watts down to the Roberts type. The radius
arms CD and EF are of equal length, but would not need
to be, if the main lever ACE were changed to an isosceles
form of suitable length and the center D were swung clear
over the top until directly pivot F, then the Roberts
k
w c
/
;/
I
!
'-+-_.
<
S96
Fig. 11. Diagram of Straight.line Mechanism Used on Granite Gang Sa.w
compensating motion would result. It will be noted that
the path of point A crosses the axis x-x twice. If all the
links in the linkage CDFE were of different lengths and
if CE were longer than DF, and CD shorter than EF,
then a point near the middle of the oscillating link CE
would cross the axis six times. This will be recognized as
the more general case of the irregular four-sided linkage.
When crossed linkages are used, as in Watts and some other
motions, the line is crossed only twice. From a practical
standpoint this motion has a few decided and inherent ad-

399
arc CD. The resultant movement of the point 0 is very
nearly a straight line.
When this mechanism is applied to a granite gang saw,
a slight rise at the ends of the stroke 8 and 8
1
is required,
so that links of special length are used. These lengths, in
inches, are as :AB = 8 1/2; OB = 66 1/2; EB =
22 13/16; AP = 13 1/2;\CD - 16; ED = 12; RT = 12;
R1T = 12. The rise at the end of the stroke is 1/4 inch, ap-
proximately.
Four mechanisms of this type are used on the granite
gang saw. Each mechanism is so located that the center
line x-x is vertical, the straight-line movement being hori-
zontal. The machine is equipped with a rectangular "sash"
in which there are numerous steel blades. Each corner of
this sash is attached to one of these straight-line move-
ments, and the sash is moved back and forth by a crank and
connecting-rod. Steel-shot under the blades works against
the stone and does the cutting at the rate of from 3 to 6
inches per hour. The object of the slight rise at the ends of
the stroke is to allow the grains of shot to fall under the
blades as the shot drops down from above. By shortening
the dimensions AB and EB equally, the end 0 can be made
to travel in an exact straight line for a certain distance.
Stroke Adiustment for Oscillating Lever.- The arrange-
ment of levers shown in Fig. 12 provides a simple
means of transmitting a variable oscillating movement to
the lever D from the lever C. The oscillating or up and
down angular movement of lever C about center H remains
constant, while the oscillating or angular n10vement of lever
D about center J can be varied to suit requirements. Ad-
justment of the angular movement of lever D is obtained by
shifting the position of block A, which is in contact with the
two levers. The levers are held in contact with block A by
springs (not shown in the illustration). Lever C transmits
the smallest angular movement to lever D when block A is
in the position shown to the left. The largest angular move-
Straight-Line Mechanism for Gang Saw.-Themechan-
ical movement shown in the accompanying diagram
(Fig. 11) is used in connection with a gang saw for sawing
granite, to obtain an approximate straight-line motion with
a combination of links. The bearings or pivots A and Care
stationary. Link AB is free to turn about bearing A, and
CD is free to turn about bearing C. The rigid bar or link
OB has an extension ED at right angles to it, which is
pivoted at D to the lever CD. As the end 0 is moved in
the direction of the arrows, the pivot B swings about an
arc a radius AB, and the pivot D swings about an
398
H
401
Fig. 13. Roller :Searing Block Used in Place of Solid Contact Block A,
FIg. 12, when Lever D is Heavily Loaded
trunnioned separating block E, Fig. 13, is a single roller F,
while on the lower side are two similar hardened rolls G.
With this arrangement, only a slight sliding motion is pos-
sible between the rollers and the lever tracks, the movement
of the rollers being limited by the end flanges of the block.
The close fit between the side plates and the rollers, and the
squaring effect of the end flanges of block E, tend to keep
the rollers parallel.
Cam and Rack Mechanism for Increasing the Movement
of an Oscillating lever.- When compactness is essential
in a mechanism for producing a long movement with a
short lever, the design shown in Fig. 14 may be used to ad-
vantage. The lever indicated at G is pivoted to a slide D
confined in the guides of the machine. Cast on the lower
end of the lever is a gear segment which meshes with a sta-
tionary rack H. Movement is imparted to the slide by the
continually rotating cam A, which is mounted on a shaft in
If A is a single-piece block, it must either have a roller or
else have a flat face contact with the track of the upper
lever and a lower surface formed like the portion of a cylin-
der of relatively large diameter. The block and the tracks
of the levers must be hardened. Grease lubrication is best
where a flood of oil cannot be applied.
When the loads are heavy, sliding friction is likely to de-
velop flats on block A and rough spots on the lever tracks.
In such cases, the design shown in Fig. 13 is preferable.
With this design, the sliding friction is reduced to a mini-
mum by substituting rollers F and G for the plain bearing
surfaces of block A, Fig. 12. On the upper side of the
Fig. 12. Arrangement by which a Variable Oscillating Movement is
Transmitted by Lever C to Lever D
ment of lever D is obtained with the block in the position
shown by the dotted lines at K.
The track surfaces of the levers in contact with block A
are set parallel with each other when the levers are at either
the top or the bottom of their strokes, according to whether
the motion is required to be more nearly constant in speed
at the upperbr the lower position. In Fig. 12 the levers
are shown in their lowest positions. Contact block A can
be adjusted by the machine operator to any position along
the levers. The adjusting rod B is hinged to the control
lever, so that it can swing in a vertical plane as lever C
oscillates.
the bracket C and engages roll F on the lever
stud. Coil spring E, fastened to the slide and the machine
frame, serves to hold the roll in engagement with the cam.
As the cam rotates in a clockwise direction from the posi-
tion indicated, the slide D will move toward the right. The
lever will, of course, travel with the slide, and owing to the
engagement of the gear segment and the rack, will swing
in a clockwise direction. The lever will continue to swing
in this direction until the cam has carried the slide to its
extreme position at the right. The position of the lever at
this point is indicated by the dot-and-dash lines.
In determining the movement b of the upper end of the
lever, it is only necessary to add the throw a of the cam to
the normal angular movement of the lever, all measure-
ments being taken horizontally. The movement of the lever
can be varied by changing the throw of the cam, the pitch
radius r of the segment gear, or the length R of the lever
itself.
Push - Button Mechanism for Alternately Changing
Position of Lever.- Fig. 15 shows a mechanism designed
to change the position of lever C from the right to the left
of the vertical center-line or vice versa each time the push-
button D is operated. The cam-shoe F (left-hand view)
which is an extensio:q of push-button D, is in position for
changing lever C to the position shown by the middle view,
by coming in contact with the inclined face of pawl Gwhen
the button is pushed upward. The upward motion of cam-
shoe F will cause pawl G to move in the direction of arrow
O. When the cam-shoe reaches the end of the inclinEt the
fulcrum of the connecting links J will rest against the flat
face of the cam-shoe. Pawl G will then be lifted, causing
lever C to swing and change from the right-hand to the
left-hand position.
During this motion, the pressure of' the shoe applied to
the connecting links J automatically moves the link or pawl
H toward the left. This obviously prevents pawl G from mov-
ing too far to the right and from becoming disengaged from
the cam-shoe. The right-hand view shows the push-button
D released and returned to its normal position by spring K.
When the connecting links J are released from contact with
the cam-shoe, the spring L causes pawls Hand G to move
toward each other until links J come in contact with pins M
.and N. Lever C is now ready to change from left to right
when the push-button is again operated. The stem of the
push-button D is square and is a sliding fit in the square
hole in guide E.
Multiplying Action of Lever for Obtaining Quick-
Acting Brake Movement.- Fig. 16 shows the construction
of a mechanism designed to provide more than the custom-
ary amount of clearance for a brake-shoe without sacrific-
ing any of the braking effect. This is accomplished by a
system of levers that provide for a quick take-up of the
clearance space, after which the brake movement is effected
in the usual manner.
Combination Cam-and-rack Movement for Increasing the
Throw of a. Lever
Fig. 14.
402
o
.;...
0
.r:::..
.
~
~
c::
~
J
\Q.'tJWVvp'f'f,, ,_,
I
~
I-t
'"tl
~
I
~ _(" ~ .AU, I O ~ ~ L , N ~ r--..../ /\ \ I
~
-
tr:j
;j
~
~
tr:j
(')
::I:l
>-
Z
I-t
00
~
00
Fig. 15. (Left-hand View) Push-button Mechanism with Lever C in Right-hand Position. (Middle View) Mechanism with Push-button Pushed in to
Tn.nsfer Lever to Left-hand Position. (Right-hand View) :Push-button Released with Lever Remaining in Left-hand :Position
E
Fig. 16. Quick-acting Cam-and-lever Mechanism for Operating Brake-shoe
~
o
C1l
Part A is fastened to the stationary part of the machine
and carries the pin F on which the double levers B pivot.
The upper surface of part A is machined to' conform with
the arc of a circle of which pin F is the center. It will be
noted that the pin F is located off center in part A and that
the upper edge of part A terminates in a small arc-shaped
surface on the. right-hand end. Levers B carry between
them lever C which fulcrums on the pin G and carries at its
upper end the bar D attached to it by the pin H. The op-
posite end of bar D is attached to the brake-shoe.
The side view at the left and the end view at the center
show the arrangement with the brake-shoe in the released
position. As the bar E is moved to the left, lever B fulcrums
on pin F, and the upper right-hand corner of part A acts on
lever C, which is caused to fulcrum on pin G. As the move-
ment of the lower end of lever C is multiplied at the upper
end, bar D is drawn forward quite rapidly in advance of
levers B, thus quickly reducing the clearance space between
the brake-shoe and the drum. As soon as the lower end of
lever C has passed over the corner of part A, lever C ceases
to act independently, and moves in unison with levers B.
lever Mechanism for Block Brake.- The type of block
brake known as the "clam shell" brake, Fig. 17, is often
used in place of the band brake, over which it possesses the
advantage of even wear on the blocks, and positive release,
although not possessing as great a gripping power. The
cast arms A and Al are pivoted at 0 to the frame of the ma-
chine, and carry blocks formed to grip the brake wheel.
Links L connect these arms to the bellcrank B, having the
floating center n. To layout this brake to the best advan-
tage, draw lines from 0 through the center points of contact
a and ab on the rim of the wheel; also with 0 as a center,
draw arc CC, intersecting these lines at points e. At these
points, draw tangents to arc CC, intersecting at u, and draw
un, bisecting angle gug'. Select a point n on un for the
center of circle b, drawn tangent to eg, so that the required
leverage will be obtained for the brake system. .
'Vhen the brake is new, the exact nature of block contact
is doubtful, and must be considered as only a line across the
face of the l o k s ~ but the wear on the blocks causes such
a condition of pressures per unit area that the rate of wear
is the same at all points of contact between the block and
the drum. The point 0 may be placed below the wheel.
making the axis aal horizontal, the arms A and Al falling
apart by gravity, when released. When the arms are not
heavy enough to do this without one of them bearing against
the wheel, while the other is free, light springs may be at-
tached to points e to keep them apart, when released. The
arms are sometimes extended so that points e may be con-
nected by a spring which sets the brake, the release being
made by. toggles separating the arms when applied. The
Arrangement of Links and Levers for Operating the
Clam-shell Type of Block Bra.ke
Fig. 17.
406
409
Safety tacking Device which Prevents Accidenta.l
Shifting of the Clutch Lever
Fig, 19.
tion by the clamping lever C, pivoted on the stationary
bracket D.
In the position shown, the cover can be swung upward
on its hinge to allow loading or unloading of the container.
While the cover is up, clutch lever E is prevented from be-
ing returned accidentally to its engaged position by the
this requirement is shown in Fig. 19. The stationary casing
A and the cover B enclose the rotating container (not
shown) for the cloths. The cover is hinged at the left-hand
side of the casing and can be secured in its closed posi-
c
E
m U B
Fig. 18. Other Methods of OperatlIlg Block Brakes
the arcs 8 and t, struck from the points a, cross at u, it is
evident that the point u becomes fixed in its relation to
points c where the system is connected to the frame, and
thus u is the fulcrum of the arms E, although not the point
which receives the thrust of the brake arms, this being
taken at points c.. At B is shown a good type of brake in
which both arms act as tension members in transferring
the braking force to the fixed points c.
Safety Locking Device for Clutch Lever.- Safe opera-
tion of an extractor used for drying wiping cloths requires
that the cover of the machine be tightly closed before the
starting clutch is engaged. One device which complies with
wheels of these brakes may be made V-shaped, the same as
for band brakes. The blocks are often made to embrace a
larger portion of the wheel than shown-sometimes nearly
180 degrees.
In Fig. 18 are shown two types of this brake, the fixed
points being indicated by a dot within a circle, and the
floating points by a plain dot. At A is shown a form of
brake that is useful when there is no convenient way of
pivoting the arms to the frame at u. The bellcranks ace
and lever mnai.'e pivoted as shown, but the point u is fixed
in space only by its geometrical rel;;ttions to points a. Since
Fig. 20. Crank Motion with Auxiliary Rod that Eliminates Dead Center Effect
necting-rods are "running over," or passing through the
upper half of their cycle of rotation, withdrawing as the
rods approach the center position. Obviously, this arrange-
ment would be impossible with a chain or gear drive, which
remains in the same position at all times.
Referring to the illustration, the shafts A and B carry
the crank-arms C and'D, respectively, which are connected
by the rod H that runs free on its crankpins. In the actual
installation, rods G and H were longer than shown. The
length of these rods, however, does not affect the operation
of the drive. The upper crankpins, which are keyed to
the crank-arms C and D, carry the auxiliary arms E and F,
which are set at an angle with arms C and D. Connecting-
rod G, which is exactly the same length as rod H, connects
arms E and F. Although this arrangement may be classed
as being without a dead center, it really has two dead center
positions, but there is a time element between the two which
renders them both ineffective in arresting the driving mo-
tion. When one crankpin reaches dead center, the other is
still approaching and is effective in forcing the first past
the dead center.
It is essential that each pair of similar parts be of exactly
the same length; otherwise, there will be a binding action.
Although the length of arms E and F should be kept as
short as possible for the sake of compactness, they should
not be less than one-half the length of arms C and D. The
movement will operate without any dead center effect over
a wide range of positions for arms E and F, although the
smoothest movement seems to be attained when the angle X
is not less than 20 degrees,
G
G
Crank Motion with Dea,d Center Eliminated.- When a
rotary motion is transmitted from one shaft to another by
means of cranks and a connecting-rod, the dead center posi-
tions may be avoided by the arrangement shown in Fig. 20.
This mechanism is for a Wire-forming machine and trans-
mits 'power between two shafts located some distance apart.
The purpose of the auxiliary rod G is to carry the driven
shaft past the dead center positions. The question may be
raised as to why a crank motion is used when a chain drive
would produce the s ~ effect. The reason is that on the
machine in question, a reciprocating part of the machine
passes into the space between the two shafts while the con-
projection H on the lever C. Lever C, in turn, is prevented
from returning to its clamping position by the spring-actu-
ated plunger G, mounted on the casing. With this arrange-
ment, both levers are automatically locked when the cover
is up and are automatically released when the cover is in
its closed position. As the cover descends, plate F, which is
welded to the.cover, depresses plunger G and allows lever C
to be swung into its clamped position. At this time, finger
K will clear the projection H, permitting lever E to be
swung in position to engage the clutch. Plate F is provided
with a stop-pin J to limit the clamping movement of lever C.
Fig. 1. Hopper which Delivers Two Solder Sluga to Eaoh Fuse Plug in
Solderlna- :Machine Dial
413
G
K
J
I
i I
11ft'll
i II II
i II!II
III I
FEEDING MECHANISMS
CHAPTER XIV
FEEDING MECHANISMS AND AUXILIARY DEVICES
The expression "feeding mechanism" may indicate me-
chanical means of presenting parts successively for some
. manufacturing operation or this term may be applied to a
mechanism for imparting a feeding- movement to a metal-
cutting or other tool. This chapter deals with feeding and
allied mechanisms of various types and designed for mis-
cellaneous application. It supplements the four chapters in
Volume I which deal with this general subject (pages 447
to 519).
Hopper Feeding Mechanism Used in Soldering Fuse
Plugs.- In manufacturing electrical fuse plugs, such as
those used for house circuits, a thin fuse strip is soldered to
a split rivet that has previously been assembled into the plug.
The soldering is done. on a special indexing dial machine in
which the solder slugs are automatically dropped on the
rivet on the inside of the plug. In another position of the
dial, the plug dwells under a concentrated gas flame long
enough to melt the solder slug. At the next station the op-
erator places one end of a fuse strip in the molten solder.
The dial is then indexed to another position where the plug
is automatically ejected from the machine.
A detail view of the mechanism fo:t automatically feed-
ing the solder slugs is shown in Fig. 1. The dial indexes
intermittently and is shown with a plug in position to re-
ceive two slugs which are held up in the end of the tube B
by the stop G riveted to the arm F. This arm swings on
the pin I and is normally held in position by the coil
spring C.
The hopper A is fastened in the boss D of the machine by
412
a set-screw. Slide E carries arm F and tUbe B, and receives
a vertical reciprocating movement through rod J, from a
cam located on the machine. The slide completes one cycle
during the indexing of each station. The top of tube B is
cut at an angle to produce greater agitation of the slugs in
the hopper. The slugs, collecting in the tube as the latter
passes through the supply in the hopper, drop down on
stop G.
At the end of the down stroke of slide E, the stop K en-
gages projection F, swinging the latter up to the left. This
motion withdraws stop G from the end of the tube and
allows the two bottom slugs to drop out and into the fuse
plug. Just before this happens, however, the spring-actu-
ated plunger H forces the slug N against the side of the
tube, holding back the flow of slugs until the return stroke
of slide E disengages members K andF, permitting stop G
and plunger H to return to the position shown in the illus-
tration.
Agitating Device for a Pin Hopper.-Difficulty was ex-
perienced by a plant manufacturing electrical switches in
maintaining a sufficient flow of switch pins from hopper to
power press. The pins are made from brass rod and are
about 3/16 inch in diameter by 3/8 inch long. The hopper
is of simple design, consisting chiefly of a stationary conical
shell in which the pins are placed. A length of tubing hav-
ing an inside diameter slightly larger than the diameter of
the pins is a slip fit in a vertical hole bored in the lower
end of the hopper; this tubing is given a vertical movement,
which is transmitted from the press crankshaft through a
rack and pinion.
As the end of the tube passes through the pins, some of
them drop into the tube and down to a connecting chute1
which carries them to the press. It was found, however,
that the pins had a tendency to collect around the tube hori-
zontally instead of vertically, so that the number entering
the tubing during each stroke was insufficient to supply the
p ~ s s After some experimenting, this difficulty was over-
come by the use of an agitating device, as shown in Fig. 2.
Bracket A is stationary, the upper end (not shown) sup-
porting the conical shell with its tube while the lower part
carries the agitating device. The tube is secured to .the
sliding bar B, both parts being raised to the upper position
by means of the reciprocating arm G pivoted to the cross-
head D. A double-end latch E is also pivoted to the cross-
head, and engages teeth cut in bar B, as well as projections
on the plate F, which is secured to bracket A.
In the position shown, the cross-head has already started
its upward stroke, carrying with it bar B and the tube.
Further movement of the cross-head causes the upper end
of the latch to be forced to the left by the lower projection
on plate F. At the same time, the lower end of the latch is
forced out of engagement with the lower tooth in bar Band
allows the bar to drop back by gravity, aided by the action
of coil spring G. The lower end of the latch is held away
from the bar momentarily only; thus, as the upper end
passes the projection on plate F, its lower end at once en-
ters the next tooth space in the bar B, which then continues
its upward movement until the latch engages the next pro-
jection on plate F. At this time, and for each remaining
projection, the action described is repeated.
At the end of the upward stroke, bar B is held suspended
by the latch, but upon starting its downward stroke, the
latch again comes into contact with the upper projection
on plate F and is released from the bar, allowing the latter
to drop to its lowest position. Here the slide is picked up
once more by the latch after the cross-head returns to the
bottom of its stroke. Incidentally, a bumper (not shown)
is provided to take the shock upon the return of bar B. A
series of reciprocating movements is imparted to the tube
as it passes upward through the pins, agitating them suffi-
ciently to cause a greater number to enter the tube. It
should be mentioned that the success of a device of this
414 FEEDING MECHANISMS
FEEDING MECHANISMS 415
Fig. 3. Maintaining a Constant Flow of Ore from a Hopper by
Means of Endless Chains
crushed ore at a uniform rate to a grading machine is shown
in Fig. 3. The ore, which consists of pieces about the size
of an egg, is dumped into the hopper A and passes through
the opening F. As the ore must be delivered from the chute
E at a uniform rate, some means must be provided for
regulating its flow. This is accomplished in the following
manner: A number of endless chains D passing over the
sprockets B rest upon the ore a3 it flows down the chute.
type depends upon the speed of the cross-head, because if
the speed is too slow, the lower end of the latch will fail
to catch the tooth in the sliding bar, thus rendering the
device inoperative.
Mechanism for Feeding Granular Material Uniformly.-
One of the methods :used in a stamping mill for feeding
o

FEEDING MECHANISMS
G
(2)

\
81
0
A
Fig. 2. Device. which Increases the Flow of Work from a Hopper b;r
Imparting Short Reciprocating Movements to the Feeding
Tube as it Passes through the Parts
416
Fig. 4. Simple Press Fixture for Automatically Burnishing Bushings
chains. The movement of the chains is obtained by revolv-
ing the sprockets B on the shaft C, the latter being driven
from the driving shaft of the grading machine. The nature
of this ore is such that it will flow very freely, and little
trouble is experienced from jamming at the mouth of the
chute.
Automatic Ball-Feeding Attachment for Ball Burnishing.-
Steel balls are frequently employed for burnishing holes
when a very fine finish and an accurate job are required.
With the automatic ball-feeding device shown in Fig. 4 the
work can be burnished in a power press. The bushings to
be burnished are fed into a chute, the end of which is shown
at D, and carried down by gravity to a position directly
over the reciprocating plunger G. When the plunger is at
its lowest point, one of the balls in the return tube C rolls
on the end J, directly under the hole to be burnished. As
the plunger ascends, it pushes the ball up through the work.
Continuation of this upward movement carries the ball
against the angular surface of the block B, and into the
return tube C, as indicated by the dotted outline of the
plunger and ball when at their highest position.
The reciprocating motion of the plunger is derived from
the ram of the press through the connecting posts A and
the plate H in which the plunger is a drive fit. A clearance
hole in the bolster plate is necessary to allow a through
passage of the plate H. The bushing E is a drive fit in the
fixture F and a slip fit for the plunger. One side of. this
bushing has an opening for the lower end of the return
tube. This tube may be fastened by straps to the fixture,
or it may be soldered to the bushing E and to the chute D.
Although not shown, the usual provision must be made
for tripping the press clutch in case the work becomes
jammed in the chute or fails to line up properly with the
plunger G. One advantage of this fixture is that the wear
incident to burnishing is distributed equally among a num-
ber of balls.
Chain Feed Mechanism with Periodically Accelerated
Motion.- Fig. 5 shows a mechanism used for feeding tree
trunks T to a sawing machine with a periodically accel-
erated motion that might also be applied to other machines.
This motion is obtained by an interesting arrangement for
simultaneously taking up slack in one side of the chain while
FEEDING MECHANISMS
If there is no movement of the chains, the friction result-
ing from the weight of the latter will prevent the ore from
sliding down the chute. If motion is imparted to t.he chain
so that it will travel at a constant speed in the direction of
the arrow, the ore will be carried downward at a uniform
rate and at approximately the same speed as that of the
418
tive view, Fig. 6, to illustrate the arrangement clearly, has
been applied to internal grinders of planetary design, used
for grinding holes in parts of such bulk that rotation is im-
practicable. The radius of the path of the grinding wheel,
which has a planetary motion, is changed while the wheel
is at work by an movement that is transmitted
through differential gearing. The grinding wheel spindle 1
is located eccentrically in a .cylindrical member 2, which is
rotated to vary the radial position of the wheel. Center line
A represents the axis of the main body 6 of the grinder
head; center line B is the axis of cylindrical part 2; and C
represents the axis of the grinding wheel spindle. The dis-
tance from A to B equals the distance from B to C, so that
by turning part 2, axis C can be made to coincide with axis
A, thus permitting the wheel to be located anywhere from
a central position to its maxiInum position radially.
When the grinding wheel has been adjusted for a given
cut, it has, in addition to rotation about its axis, a planetary
movement about axis A of the grinding head. This plane-
tary motion is obtained from the driving shaft which ro-
tates head 6 through gears 9 and 10 at one end, and 5 a!1d 8
at the other. The driving gears 8 and 9 are the same size,
and the driven gears 5 and 10 are also equal in size; conse-
quently, these two sets of gearing normally rotate at the
same speed, but when a feeding movement of the wheel is
required, gear 8, through an adjustment of the differential
gearing located between gears 8 and 9, is caused either to
lag behind or advance, thus shifting eccentric 2 through
worm-gearing 3 and 4 and a screw gear which meshes with
teeth on the inside of gear 5.
The action of the differential gearing will be explained
in connection with Fig. 7 which shows a cross-sectional
view. When the driving shaft G revolves, pinions P (14 in
Fig. 6) which are mounted on studs fixed in a stationary
housing of the differential, also revolve. This rotation of
the pinions is transmitted to the internal gear Q (12 in
giving out slack in the other side. The mechanism is driven
by the spur gear A which drives gear B by means of an
intermediate gear C, thus driving chain D at a uniform
speed. The chain is carried over four pulleys in the base
of the mechanism. The pulleys E and F are attached to a
swinging armG. This arm is oscillated by a crank and rod
mechanism Hand J, also connected to the driving gear A.
The gear K, driven by
chain D, imparts the pe-
riodically varying feed mo-
tion to the rollers M, in con-
tact with the tree trunk, by
a second chain drive indi-
cated by the light dot-and-
dash lines at L. If pulleys
E and F remained station-
ary, the feeding m 0 ti 0 n
would be uniform. How-
ever, as the pulleys are on
the periodically swinging
lever G, the motion of
chain D is changed in such
a manner that it will re-
main stationary during one
short period and will be
celerated or retarded in the
other. The swinging lever
G is slotted so that rod J
can be adjusted to give the Fig. 5. Mechanism for Producing Periodic
ally Aocelerated Motion
feeding motion required. A
cam-actuated motion could be substituted for the crank mu-
tion obtained by crank H and rod J, the cam being given
the profile necessary to obtain the desired motion.
Planetary or Differential Type of Feeding Mechanism
for Internal Grinder.- The eccentric and differential type
of feed controlling mechanism which is shown by a perspec-
Fig. 7. Sectional View of Differential Gearing of Eccentrio Feed Meohanism
For adjusting the grinding wheel in or out, worm W is
turned by hand, thus turning worm-wheel R, which changes
the position of pinions S relative to pinions P. If pinions
S are advanced or moved in the direction of the rotation of
Fig. 6) which is free to turn within worm-gear R (16 in
Fig. 6). As internal gear Q revolves, it drives pinionsS
(18 in Fig. 6) which are mounted on pins fixed in worm-
gear R. Pinions S rotate the left-hand section G1 of the
driving shaft at the same speed as the right-hand section,
except when a feeding movement occurs.
gears, and the teeth of the screw gear which engages the
internal teeth of gear 5 were cut on a horizontal universal
boring mill. The cutter used was a duplicate of the internal
gear and formed the teeth by a generating action.
Planetary Adiustment for Feeding Deep-Hole Recessing
Milling Cutter.- An ingenious application of planetary
gearing to tool design is shown in Figel. 8 and 9. This tool
Fig. 9. Plan View of the Recessing Tool, Showing How the Cutter Shaft is Fed
toward the Work by an Eccentric Sleeve
internal gear Q, then during this period of adjustment,
shaft G1 will turn somewhat slower than G,' consequently,
there will be a movement of gear 5, Fig. 6, relative to the
main head" thus causing worm-gearing 3 and 4 to rotate
and changing the position of the grinding wheel. On the
other hand, if the rotation of worm-wheel R is such as to
move pinions S in the direction of the rotation of internal
gear Q, the speed of shaft G1 will be accelerated relative to
G, thus adjusting the grinding wheel in the opposite direc-
tion. A spacer plate or disk V (Fig. 7) is located within
the internal gear Q and between the two sets of gearing.
The internal teeth of gear 5 (Fig. 6) were cut on a lathe,
the indexing being done by disengaging the feed-screw
Fig. 10. Diagram of Work, Showing the Irregular Recess Cut by the Tool in Fig. 8
shaft and is supported along its length by the two jaws G.
These jaws are secured to the plate H, upon which is
mounted the worm-wheel J, which is keyed to the eccentric
sleeve. Meshing with this worm-wheel is the worm K,
which serves to rotate the eccentriC! sleeve for feeding the
cutter (attached to lower end of shaft D) into the work.
The thrust of the cutter is taken by the roller bearingM
through the check-nuts N on sleeve F.
To recess the port A, Fig. 10, the cutter is lowered to the
bottorn of the port, and the plate H, located by pin 0, is
fastened by T-bolts to the top of the forging. The jaws G
are made slightly less in width than the port, so that they
serve to centralize, as well as to support the eccentric sleeve.
As the machine spindle rotates, the internal gear revolves
about the pinion, rotating the latter with the shaft and
cutter.
To start the cut, the eccentric is rotated by han through
the worm and worm-gear, a handwheel (not show being
provided for turning the worm. As the eccentric eeve
rotates, the cutter is swung into the side of the port. he
greatest depth of cut is reached when the worm-wheel has
rotated 90 degrees, as indicated in Fig. 10 by the dot-and-
dash circles representing the cutter. When the cut is com-
pleted, the worm-wheel is reversed to withdraw the cutter
from the recess. The tool is then removed and set up in
the next port, where the other recess is cut.
Friction-Grip Wire-Feeding Device.- The device shown
in Fig. 11 can be used for feeding wire on any wire-forming
or other machine requiring an accurate feed. The outer
shell S is mounted on a slide or other reciprocating part of
the machine which has a movement equal to the desired
feed. Cage C is carried inside shell S, bearing with an easy
sliding fit at both ends. This cage has two holes dia-
metrically opposite each other into which balls B are placed.
The holes are slightly larger than the balls, so that the balls
move freely within them. The holes are not full size clear
A
Position of
cutter at the
Ef
' 7th.cut
, r l ~
l 0'111:-1-. -;r,;-Ht
I ~ ~ ~
I ~ ~ . <
I Section X-X Position of
::O-,-----..J_J cutter as it is
lowered into
the port
FEEDING MECHANISMS
gear is the pinion C, secured to the end of the cutter shaft
D. Endwise movement of both pinion and shaft is pre-
vented by the retaining plate E.
The eccentric sleeve F provides a bearing for the cutter
426
is used in a radial drilling machine for milling, at a depth
of 8 1/2 inches, an irregular recess in the ports of a steel
forging, as indicated at A in Fig. 10. Internal gear A
(Fig. 8) is fastened to the shank B, and meshing with this
Fig. 11. Simple Design of Wire-feeding Device of Friction-grip Type
The wire comes to the factory wound on heavy spools, a
full spool weighing approximately 175 pounds. The inertia
of such heavy spools caused an uneven feeding o v ~ n t
that resulted in a variation in the lengths of the wires. To
overcome this trouble, an operator was employed.to turn
the spool, so that a small amount of wire would be kept
slack at the feeding 'end of the machine. It became evident,
however, that such an arrangement would be too expensive,
as the job appeared to be one that would last for several
years. The attachment illustrated in Figs. 12 and 13 was
built to eliminate the necessity. for hand-feeding.
The spool of wire is indicated at the left, Fig. 12. There
are three large sheaves C, D, and E, and one idler F. Two
of the main sheaves E and D are drivers, being geared to-
gether and driven by a sprocket and chain which is con-
nected to a cross-shaft H at the end of the machine A,
Fig. 13. In the driven sprocket is a free-wheeling clutch.
The shaft to which this clutch is keyed is squared for a
crank-handle. This permits the train of sheaves to be
turned forward independently of the driving mechanism.
The original driving shaft of the machine was replaced
by a longer one. To this longer shaft is secured a' large
friction disk G. Adjoining this disk and attached by suit-
able mountings to the end of the machine is the cross-shaft
H. To the end of this shaft is secured the driving sprocket-
wheel. Also keyed to this cross-shaft is a small friction
wheel I which contacts with and is driven by the large fric-
tion disk. Set into a groove in the cross-shaft is a small
screw J (see enlarged view). This screw is threaded
through a half-nut which is secured to the side of the driven
wheel. The screw is retained in the shaft by means of a
plate which is fastened to the end of the shaft. By means
of this screw, the driven wheel is adjusted across the face
of the driving disk to obtain any desired ratio of speed. To
facilitate setting the driven wheel, the cross-shaft is scored
and numbered every half inch, the numbers corresponding
not affect the accuracy of the device for ordinary purposes.
As the shell starts on its return stroke, the balls roll out of
the taper, thereby releasing their grip on the wire. The-
oretically, three balls should be used in this device, but it
has been found that two balls are entirely practical. It win
be noticed that several sizes of wire can be fed and that
variations in the wire do not affect the accuracy of the feed.
Adiustable-Speed W'ire-Feeding Unit for Wire-Cutting
Machine.- Various lengths of wire for carrying electric
current are used in the manufacture of a certain product.
These wires are cut to length and the ends are stripped of
insulation on a well-known make of wire-cutting. machine.
through to the central hole in part C, but end in a conical
seat, thus allowing the balls to project through to the wire
W, .but preventing them from falling through when there
is no wire there. Spring P pushes the cage so that the balls
are carried into the taper portion of S and against the wire.
In action, the device is moved in the direction of the ar-
row shown on the diagram. As the balls are in contact with
the wire and the shell, any resistance to the movement of
the wire causes them to roll into the taper and grip the
wire more tightly. This movement is very slight and does
I-
I

( \
I \
\
\
\
"-
"'-..
tz.1
t:1
Z
o
tz.1
(J
;t>
Z
..-.4
00
is:
00
Fig, 12. Adjustable-speed Friction-driven Feeding Unit for Wire-cutting Machine-See Continuation, Fig, 18
CI:l
i
z
o
::=
t%j
o
::r:
>
z
1-1
rn
rn
\ 'II "CT
_... 8PO'
... - - - _'M'""IIZ
--,K
SHAFT SCORED EVERY f AND NUMBERED TO FACILITATE"
SETTI NG OF DRIVEN WHEEL
NUT ON FRICTION-DRIVEN WHEEL
Fl&,. 13. Wire-feed Driving Mecha.nism which Tra.nsmitll Motion through a Sprocket a.nd Ohain Tra.namission to the Feeding
Shea.ves, Fig. 12
to the length of wire that will be fed by the rolls for that
particular setting.
In operation, after the wire has been laced through the
feed-rolls and into the machine, the operator places the
crank-handle on the squared end of the shaft previously re-
ferred to, and turns" the feed-rolls forward, feeding a small
amount of slack wire ahead of the wire-cutting machine.
The wire-cutting machine is then started, which also serves
to start the feed-rolls. If the length of wire is one that
has been cut previously, the setting, no doubt, will be fairly
accurate and the same amount of slack wire will be main-
tained. However, should the length of wire to be cut be an
odd size, an approximate setting is made. An occasional
glance from the operator, while pursuing other duties, de-
termines whether the feed-rolls are losing or gaining on the
wire-cutting machine. In either case, a turn of knob K at
the end of the screw in the cross-shaft readj usts the feed.
This can be done while the machine is running.
Automatic Wire-Tension Equalizer.- On a special ma-
chine for producing a wire product, numerous strands of
wire are woven or interlaced around two lengthwise strands.
After the required number of interlacings have been made,
the two lengthwise strands are pulled tightly and the whole
locked together. It is essential, however, that both length-
wise strands have the same degree of tension during this
locking action. Hand methods of tensioning had been used
until the attachment shown in Fig. 14 was developed. This
attachment automatically maintains an equal tension on the
two wires.
The two sprockets A fastened on the driving shaft B
drive the two sprockets C by means of the chains D, which
have considerable slack. This slack, because of the direc-
tion of the drive, will be normally at the bottom. A uni-
form tension is maintained in the wires by means of the two
idler sprockets E carried on slides F, which, in turn, are
connected by the equalizing lever G. Sprockets C and
'd
Q)
'5
....
Q)
.t:
rll
X bll
><
.
Q)
IQ
Z
0
i=

C)
W
0
en
E-f

I:l

l'l
Q)
E-f
G)
<I}
;.:::
oj
::s
0'
;l
.
.<l
0
rll
0
.!4
0
G)
;l
,Q
,g
'I:
<D
A
FEEDING MECHANISMS
433
drums [ are fastened on the short jack-shafts H. The
lengthwise strands of wire are fastened to studs J on
drums [.
When the wires are ready for tensioning, shaft B is given
a slow rotary motion in the direction of the arrow. This
motion is transmitted to the sprockets A and C and the
drums [ through the chains D. The idler sprockets E op-
erate on the tight or load-carrying side of the chains D.
Therefore, any increase in the tension of the wires will pro-
duce R corresponding increase in the tension of the chains D,
and also in the pressure against the idler sprockets E.
As long as the tension of the two chains D remains equal,
the lever G will be inactive. However, as soon as this ten-
sion becomes unequal, the sprocket E on the chain having
the greater tension will be forced upward, causing the
lever G to force the other sprocket E downward until the
tension again becomes the same in both chains. Except at
the very beginning of the tensioning operation, this attach-
ment scarcely seems to operate. The slightest difference
in the tension of the two wires is transmitted to the chains
and idler sprockets, causing an almost imperceptible equal-
izing movement of the lever G.
Mechanism for Removing Incompletely Assembled
Caps from Conveyor Wheel.- Cork disks S, Figs. 15 and
16, are assembled in caps W by automatic machinery hav-
ing a conveyor or transport wheel A. Occasionally, the
mechanism for feeding the cork disks into position for as-
sembling becomes jammed, with the result that caps W
pass to the ring B of the transport wheel A unprepared for
the operations that are to follow.
The automatic mechanism shown in Fig. 15 for removing
the caps that fail to receive cork disks was developed after
some experimental work and attached to the transport
wheel. This self-contained mechanism prevents the incom-
pletely assembled caps from continuing along the line and
thus causing unnecessary expense for useless work. The
434
--i
FEEDING MECHANISMS
!c
0
G)
~
l>.
:
0
+'
~
x
oS
X
r<I
'" Z
G)
'C
0 G)
i=
Q)
0 :::;
w
~
(/)
G)
~
l'l
~
~
~
G)
~
t:
M
0'"
~ ~
1'1 ....
olA
8,!ll
E l ~
0
~ < l
~ ~
~
0
'"
~
~
.eo
~
.S
~
g
~
~
~
,<:l
+>
.
=
i
~
l:!il
:> .0
...
z
~
:s
c
Q.
~
'iii
0
Il.
assorting device operates satisfactorily and performs the
desired sorting operation at a point that could not be
reached readily by the operator's hand. The principle is
simple and should be easily adaptable to other work ofa
similar nature.
Ring B is fastened to disk A, the caps W being carried
in machined recesses provided in ring B. The ring-gear C
is attached to the bottom of disk A, and through its con-
nection with the gear E, serves to actuate the automatic
assorter. Gear E is fastened to the flange member F, which
is part of a spool consisting of two flange members F and G,
held together by screws H. The spool rests on the thrust
bearing T and revolves on the spindle P, which is part of
the stationary support R.
Holes are drilled and reamed in the flanges F and G to
permit a sliding fit for the plungers D. In order to pre-
vent the plungers from twisting in their bearings, a slot U
is provided in each one in which a set-screw J acts as a
key. A light spring N keeps the plungers down. Each
plunger is equipped with a lifter K, pinned in place at its
upper end. The combined cover and cam-holder 0 is held
in position on spindle P by the nut Q. Two cams Land M
are fastened to the cam-holder O.
Operation of the Automatic Cap Assorter.- In opera-
tion, the movements of plungers D are controlled by cams
Land M. The position of the first cam M is shown in the
view to the left. In Position 1, Fig. 16, the lifter K is
shown making its initial contact with the cam surface.
Position 2 shows the plunger resting so as to clear the cap
entirely. In Position 3 the plunger is shown released and
dropped into the cap under the action of spring N, Fig. 15.
Positions 1, 2, and 3, Fig. 16, correspond to the points
marked 1, 2, and 3 in Fig. 15.
The function performed by cam L is illustrated in the
views to the left, Fig. 16. In Position 4, plunger D is shown
resting on top of a cork disk inserted in the cap. The lifter
437 FEEDING MECHANISMS FEEDING MECHANISMS
I
I
1
10 co
Z z
0 0
;:: ;::
1"
(i) (i)
0 0
'II
0.. 0..
II
,.,

436
in the bed of the machine and is adj ustable by means of the
screw G.
The illustration shows the eccentric at its extreme right-
hand position. The arms on strap C gradually assume an
angular position after the eccentric has passed the top
center. The effect i$ that of a lever with E acting as the
fulcrum, so that rod D has a movement greater than would
be obtained by direct connection with the eccentric strap C.
If the roller E is moved toward or away from the shaft A,
the effective length of the slotted arm is increased or de-
creased; and as the length of the upper arm remains con-
stant, its nlovement is accordingly increased or decreased.
Adiustable Stroke - Feeding Mechanism for Sewing
Machines.-The feeding mechanisms of sewing machines
used for commercial production work must be designed to
handle a great variety of fabrics. This requires a wide
range of adjustment in the length of stitch. The parts of
the mechanism must be so proportioned that they will be
durable and require a minimum of power for their opera-
tion. While the method of adj usting the length of stitch
should be simple and positive, it need not be of a char:;tcter
suitable for adjustment by the operators.
Referring to the feed-dog shown at B, Fig. 18, it is neces-
sary that the path of travel of this part while above the
throat plate N in the working part of its cycle of motion
be approximately a straight line. It is also desirable that
the working path of the feed-dog be capable of being tilted
in either direction from a line parallel with the top of the
throat plate. The mechanism shown accomplishes these
several objects in the nlanner to be described.
The feed-dog B is attached at or near the front end of
the feed-bar A. The rear end of this feed-bar is supported
by rocker arm C by means of shaft D, about which it is free
to pivot. In a similar manner, the front end of the feed-bar
is carried by rocker arm E, which is free to pivot about the
pin connection F. The rear rocker arm C is pivoted at its
Fig. 17. Adjustable-stroke Mechanism
K, irJ. this case, is raised high enough to permit it, to make
contact with the cam surface. In Position 5, plunger D is
shown resting on the bottom of a cap, with no cork disk in
place. In this case, the lifter K is positioned too low to
make contact with the cam surface, so that it passes under
cam L. Since the plunger is not raised out of the cap in the
latter case, it ca,uses the cap to be removed from its position
in the transport wheel by the plunger D. In Position 4,
however, the cap moves on, because the plunger is raised
sufficiently to allow the cap
to retain its position in the
transport wheel.
This device can be oper-
ated successfully at rela-
tivelyhigh rates of produc-
tion. In increasing the op-
erating speed, it becomes
necessary to place cams L
and M farther apart, in or-
der to give plunger D time
to drop into the cap before
the lifter K makes contact
with cam L. The space be-
tween the plungers on the
automatic assorter should
be equal to the distance be-
tween the caps which are located on the transport wheel.
Adiusting Stroke without Stopping Machine.- The feeder
slide on a wire machine is operated by an eccentric mechan-
ism (Fig. 17), which has an arrangement for varying the
length of stroke while in operation. The shaft A rotates
the eccentric B, which carries strap C. The upper end of
the strap carries an arm, the motion of which is trans-
mitted to the slide through the rod D. The lower end of
strap G has a slotted arm, which is positioned by the roller
E. This roller is carried on block F which slides in a groove
A
A
~ w r end to the frame of the machine at G and is driven
by link H. Link H is pivoted to arm C at bearing I. The
other end of link H is pivoted to the adjustable feed-crank
J, carried on the end of main shaft K. The lower end of
rocker arm E is in the form of an eccentric strap L,which
engages an eccentric, driven by the main shaft K. This
eccentric is termecl the "feed-lift eccentric." Both the feed
and lift motions 8l e positive, and their combined action on
the feed-dog reslllts in a path of motion relative to the
c
Fig. 19. Diagrams Showing Adjustments of Sewing Machine Feeding Mechanism
for Both Short and Long Feeding Strokes
throat plate N such as is illustrated by the dotted lines of
the two diagrams Fig. 19.
This arrangement causes the rear end of feed-bar A to
rise and fall twice with each revolution of the shaft K. The
amount of this rise and fall depends upon the length of the
rocker arm and its angular displacement each side of the
vertical position. In a like manner, the front end of the
feed..;bar will rise and fall, due to the relation between it and
N
FEEDING MECHANISMS
Fig. 18. Adjustable-stroke Feedinlf :M:echa.nism for Sewmgo Machine
c
c
440
the front rocker arm. The front end of the feed-bar is also
caused to rise and fall by the rotation of the lift-eccentric
on the main shaft. It is evident, therefore, that the rise
and fall of the front end of the feed-bar will be the result
of these two actions. The rise and fall of the feed-dog will
be similar to that of the front end of the feed-bar, but not
exactly the same, depending upon its size and location rela-
tive to the front end of the feed-bar.
The upper diagram Fig. 19 shows the adjustment for a
relatively short stitch, and the lower diagram, the adjust-
ment for a relatively long stitch. These views indicate the
relationship between the rocker arms, feed-bar, feed-dog,
throat plate, and lift-eccentric. The dotted lines in these
illustrations show roughly the path of the toe of the feed-
dog. The path of the heel would be similar to that of the
toe, but not exactly the same. By a suitable proportioning
of the parts and adjustment of the angular relationship be-
tween the feed-crank and the lift-eccentric, the feed-dog
may be caused to emerge through the throat plate parallel
to the latter member and to travel a very nearly straight
line parallel with the top of the throat plate.
By altering the angular relationship between the feed-
crank and the lift-eccentric, the feed-dog may be caused to
emerge from the throat plate toe first; that is, the feed-dog
may be tilted backward at a slight angle. By changing this
angular relationship in the opposite direction, the heel of
the feed-dog may be caused to rise first. These various re-
lations of feed-dog to throat plate are desirable because of
the feeding requirements of different kinds of fabrics and
the kind of seam required. In the design described, exces-
sive wear and violent velocity changes have been avoided.
This enables the mechanism to be operated at high speeds
with relatively small wear and with a comparatively small
consumption of power.
Mechanism for Operating Magazine Feed-Slide.- Elec-
trical knife switches are automatically assembled on their
Fig. 20. Mechanism that Feeds Knife Switch Bases from Magazine A
to Slots in the Dial Q
link H and the stop J, stop J being attached to the slide by
the pivot pin K.
The lever G is shown in its farthest position to the right,
where it has carried the base L out of the magazine. As
the lever and slide move toward their left-hand position,
base L is carried against the counterweighted pawl M,
pivoted to the block N which is secured to the magazine.
Continued movement of the lever toward the left causes the
pawl to push the base off the slide, so that when the latter
slate bases in a machine equipped with a magazine that
feeds the bases to a dial by means of a pusher-slide. An
interesting feature of this magazine is that, although the
stroke of the feed-slide is only 4 3/4 inches, this slide. serves
to transfer the base over a distance of 7 1/2 inches. Re-
ferring to the illustration (Fig. 20), the magazine is shown
at A fastened to the machine frame B. The feed-slide is
indicated at D. It rests on the top of the machine and op
erates between two guides, one of which is shown at F. The
slide is reciprocated by the oscillating lever G through the
FEEDING MECHANISMS) 442
M
its left-hand position. Obviously, as the lever swings to-
ward the left, the stop will swing in a clockwise direction,
so that its protruding point recedes below the top of the
slide. The stop remains in this position until the lever and
slide are at the left-hand end of their stroke, as indicated
by the dot-and-dash outline. When the lever moves toward
the right, the dog automatically swings back to its former
position and pushes .. base. P out of the magazine. In the
meantime, base L, :resting on the machine, is pushed by
the front end of the slide into a slot in the dial Q. An added
advantage of this mechanism is that it can be used effec-
tively where space at the left of the magazine is l i m i t ~
as it is in this case by the machine wall R. Ordinarily, a
long slide would have been used which would have required
considerable clearance at this point.
Transferring Parts from Station to Station.-In a ma-
chine for wrapping packages, the conveying mechanism
shown in Fig. 21 is employed for transferring the packages
to each successive station. In doing this, the transfer arms
A must pick up the packages, carry them toward the right
to the next stations, lower them into position, and then,
after dropping enough to clear the bottom of the packages,
return to their starting position. A package partly wrapped
is deposited automatically on the carrier at B when the
mechanism is moving up from the position shown.
The diagram Y indicates the path through which the
packages theoretically are moved during one cycle,although
they rest on bars in the upper position while the carrier
drops below them when returning, the diagram represent-
ing the transfer arm travel. An eccentric in combination
with a cam is used to obtain this movement, although two
cams could be used that would cause the package to follow
the path indicated at Z,. or two eccentrics might be used if
the motion imparted would be suitable.
The two carriers A support both ends of the packages,
while the slide beneath supports the carriers and is con-
FEEDING MECHANISMS
SECOND
b
)
k
z
.Fig, 21. Mechanism for Transferring Packages :from Station to Station
has reached its extreme left-hand position, the base drops
on top of the machine frame B between the guides.
Since the bottom base in the stack rests on the pins 0,
the stop J must clear the bottom base as the slide moves to
444
nected by link F to the lever G pivoted on stud H. The slide
is operated through this lever arrangement by the cam J
which engages the roll K attached to the yoke L. Shaft M,
which drives the entire mechanism, passes through the
yoke, while a pin at N pivots the yoke to the lever. Sup-
porting the slide that carries the transfer arms A is a
bracket P to which the slide is dovetailed. This bracket is
mounted on two levers shown at Q and R, which are free to
pivot on the studs S. Connecting link T ties these levers
together, and increases the strength of the assembly. Form-
ing part of the lever R is an arm U to which is pivoted a
connecting-rod V fastened to the eccentric strap W. Both
the eccentric C and the cam J are pinned to the drive
shaft M.
In operation, as the shaft M revolves, the movement of
the eccentric causes levers Rand Q to oscillate in the direc-
tion of the arrow, thus raising bracket P. In the mean-
time, a dwell on the cam prevents the slide from moving
to the right or left. When the carrier reaches the position
shown by the dotted outline, the cam operates lever G, so
that the slide is moved to the right; the -dwell on the cam
then holds the lever stationary until the eccentric swings
the lever R back so that the carrier will be in the position
indicated at X. The cam then operates lever G to bring the
slide back to its starting position. As the eccentric travels
continuously through an arc, at no time will the slide be
held stationary, the path of the carriers being curved; how-
ever, for practical purposes, this departure from a straight
line movement may be disregarded. If it is desired to con-
trol this mechanism so that there is no up or down travel
while the slide is traversing, a cam may be substituted for
the eccentric. The dwells and rises on the cams may then
be varied so that the path of travel will be as shown at z.
Elevating Pile of Sheets to Keep Top Sheet in Alignment
with Feed RoUs.-The top sheet in a pile is automatically
kept in approximate alignment with a pair of feeding rolls
Fig'. 22. Mechanism that Keeps Top Sheet of Stack in Magazine in
Line with Feed-rolls
feeding movement by means of the screw D secured to the
slide. The screw engages a nut E which is an integral part
of the ratchet wheel F. Bearing G, cast on the machine
frame, serves as a support for the nut 3.ud ratchet wheel.
,by the mechanism shown in Fig. 22. It is used for feeding
sheets to a paper-tube rolling machine and can be readily
adapted to the feeding of metal sheets as well.
The rectangular sheets A are stacked on the vertical slide
B mounted on the machine C. This slide is given a vertical
Stacking Mechanism at End of Conveyor Belt which Raises Pieces from Belt, Arranges
Stacks, and Transfers the Stacks to a. Roller Carrier
The latter is rotated to feed the screw and slide B upward
by means of the pawl H pivoted to the oscillating bar J.
This bar receives its movement through the constantly ro-
tating crank K, and at its left-hand end is connected to link
L. Link L, in turn, is connected to the bar M which slides
in a guide on the s ~ i B. At the top of bar M is a cross-
piece N, which rests on the top of the sheets.
As indicated, slide B is loaded with sheets and the suction
cups 0 have raised the end of the top sheet preparatory to
carrying it forward and between the moving belts on the
rolls P. These belts then transfer the sheet to the rolling
mechanism. This top sheet is under the cross-piece N. The
pawl H remains out of engagement with the ratchet wheel
and there is no upward feeding movement of slide B until
N, together with bar M, link L, and arm J, drops down far
enough to cause pawl H to engage the teeth in the ratchet
wheel, rotating the latter and feeding screw D.
Now, as cross-piece N travels upward with the top sheet,
arm J will once more lift pawl H out of engagement with
the ratchet wheel and thus stop the feeding action of the
screw and slide B when the top of the pile of sheets has
been elevated to the required level.
To permit reloading of the magazine, bevel gears Q and
R are provided. Gear Q is keyed to the nut, while gear R
is keyed to a shaft which turns freely in bracket S cast on
the machine. The shaft for gear R is square at its outer
end to accommodate a hand-crank used for moving the slide
manually to its loading position. At this time, pawl H is
swung up out of engagement with the ratchet wheel.
Mechanism for Stacking Articles at the Delivery End
of a Conveying Belt.- The basic mechanical motion used
in the mechanism illustrated in Fig. 23 has various applica-
tions and should be of interest to machine designers. In
this case, it is applied to the problem of stacking articles
which are being carried along a conveyor belt. Its advan-
tage for this work is that it will handle articles in varying
Fig. 23.
FEEDING MECHANISMS
449
to arm OF. This arrangement causes arm OL to oscillate
through the angle a. The secondary arm HLW, which is
carried on arm OL, will pick up plate P under certain con-
ditions, to be described, and swing arms OA and SB to their
upper positions.
It is, of course, understood that these arms carry the
elevators K and that the "pick up" action is accomplished
as a result of the "firing" of the trigger T which allows the
catch arm to drop off the small pin E and the lower end R
to assume the position shown by the dotted lines. The cam
arm YC and arm YR are tied together and turn or swing
as one piece on the pin Y fixed in the frame. Part HLW
also carries a small pin D which strikes roller R, and when
in the lower position, locks into plate P on the upward part
of the oscillating movement of arm OL. At the same time,
cam C is moved to the position indicated by the dotted lines
to the left. This action relatches the trigger T on pin E if
no article is in position to be raised to the stack.
The discharge action may be arranged to take place on
the return or downward part of the stroke. When the fifth
article has raised arm J, the latter arm, which is connected
to a bolt clutch finger of standard design, causes the part
indicated at Z (Fig. 24) to rotate one complete revolution.
Through suitable connections, which are clearly indicated,
this action moves pusher G to the position indicated by the
dotted lines at G1 and returns it to its normal position. This
movement transfers the stack of five pieces to the roller
carrier and completes the cycle, after which the operations
are repeated automatically.
Variable Rotary Movement for Operating Shell Hop-
per.- Brass shells are fed to a thread-rolling machine by
means of a rotary hopper attached to the machine. After
extensive experiments, it was found that a variable rotary
movement of the hopper drum increased its efficiency; that
is, more shells per minute could be fed by the drum when
the pulsating movement was used. The mechanism shown
Fig. 24. Sectional View of Stacking
Mechanism Shown in Fig, 23
_ ........0<- _
FEEDING MECHANISMS
quantities or singly, as
the case may be. In
this instance, the arti-
cles, shown by dot-and-
dash lines, are stacked
five high and are dis-
charged on ~ roller
conveyor as shown.
The operation of the
mechanism is based on
the "firing" of a trig-
ger T which is moved
to the position shown
by the dotted n ~ s by
a single article, which
will then allow the
conveyor belt to slip or
pass beneath until the
elevator K rises to the
upper position, indi-
cated by the dotted
lines. This places the
article at the bottom
of the preceding arti-
cles which make up
the stack. The article
is prevented fro m
dropping back by four
latches U which are
hinged in the side. walls. Each article, of course, supports
the one above it. until the pile is complete, when the entire
stack is moved to the right.
The action of the lower part of the mechanism is as fol-
lows: An oscillating movement is imparted to the rocker
arm OL by the driver shaft which rotates continuously.
This shaft carries an eccentric E and, in turn, is connected
450
In Fig. 25 was designed to give the required pulsating
movement.
With this arrangeluent, the drum is rotated a partial
revolution at a slow velocity through a train of gears and
a double roller clutch. The remaining part of the revolu-
tion is imparted bY,acrank which causes the roller clutch
to over-run so that the drum rotates at a relatively rapid
velocity.
The drive-shaft B is supported in the bearing C, which is
an integral part of the machine. On this shaft is keyed the
pinion D, which meshes with the gear E, keyed to sleeve F.
The left-hand end G of this sleeve forms the core of a roller
clutch; the outer ring for this core is indicated at H. The
sleeve on ring H is supported in the bearings J and K, and
its bore provides a bearing for the core sleeve P. Keyed to
the ring sleeve is the gear L, which meshes with gear M,
keyed to the drum shaft A.
It will be noted that ring H forms the core for the second
or outer roller' clutch, the ring for this clutch being indi-
cated at N. The long shaft 0, integral with this ring, is a
free fit in the bore of core sleeve P, and a collar at its right-
hand end serves to lock in position all the members sup-
ported in bearings J and K. On an offset boss on the side
of ring N is pivoted the connecting-rod P, the lower end of
which is connected to the crank disk Q, keyed to shaft B.
As shaft B rotates one-half revolution in the direction of
the arrow, core G turns in a clockwise direction (see end
view), rotating ring H and gear L with it. As a result,
gear M and drum shaft A turn at a constant velocity in a
counter-clockwise direction. In the meantime, crank Q,
through rod P, rotates ring N in a counter-clockwise direc-
tion; but, as the clutch rolls between members Hand N
are free at this time, this movement does not affect the
movement of shaft A. However, as soon as shaft B com-
pletes one-half revolution, the crank reverses the rotation
of ring N. Now as this ring rotates at a much higher
velocity than core G, the rolls between members G and H
will be released, so that ring H will over-run and rotate
gears Land M and drum shaft A at a high velocity. This
high velocity of shaft A continues until shaft B has com-
pleted its second half revolution, after which the movement
of ring N is again reversed, thus permitting the rolls to
wedge between members G and H. This will cause mem-
ber H to rotate the drum shaft at the slow velocity. There
is practically no over-run of the drum when its velocity
changes from high to low, owing to the frictional contact
of the drum with the shells in the hopper. These slow and
fast movements of shaft A are repeated alternately, impart-
ing the required pulsating movement to the hopper drum.
CHAPTER XV
FEEDING AND EJECTING MECHANISMS
FOR POWER PRESSES
Power presses and dies are utilized for such a large vari-
ety of manufacturing operations that many different types
of feeding, ejecting, and other mechanisms have been de-
signed. In fact, a large volume could be filled with mech-
anisms of this class alone; hence this chapter is not in-
tended as a treatise on such mechanisms but it does contain
illustrated descriptions of a number of feeding and ejecting
mechanisms which incorporate in their design certain me-
chanical principles likely to be of value to users of a book
on the general subject of mechanism.
Inverting Shells After they Leave the Hopper.- Some
hoppers used for feeding shells to power presses are de-
signed so that the closed end of the shell will enter the feed-
tube first. To permit this type of hopper to be used for
work in which the shells are required to enter the press dial
with the closed ends at the top, some means must be pro-
vided for inverting the shells after they leave the hopper
and before they enter the dials.
This may be done by employing the device shown in
Fig. 1. Here it will be seen that the shells leave the hopper
tube and drop into recesses in the disk A., These recesses
are equally spaced and the disk is indexed one space for
every cycle of the press. The indexing occurs during the
upward stroke of the ram. Motion is transmitted to the
disk for this purpose by means of the link B and the lever
C. At one end of lever C is mounted a pawl which engages
the ratchet wheel D. The ratchet turns freely on the shaft
E and transmits the required rotary motion to the disk A
by means of friction washers (not shown).
455
Fig. 1. Simple Device for Inverting Shells before they Enter the Dial Press
The stationary guard F provides for retaining the shells in
the disk. It will also be noted that one corner of each of
the impressions in the disks is beveled. This is done so
that as this corner passes the hopper feed-tube it will not
jam the shell in the end of the tube, but will force it up-
457 FEEDING AND EJECTING MECHANISMS
ward into the tube. In case the stroke of the press is such
as to cause the disk to be indexed more than one division,
the link B can be equipped with a coil spring acting against
the connecting member of the press ram, and a stop can
be provided for lever C, so that the latter will oscillate only
the required amount.
It may also be added here that the friction drive for the
disk A provides a means for stopping the disk automatically
in case of jamming when defective shells are fed through,
in which case the guard F should be made removable, so
that the shell can be extracted. After the shell is extracted,
the disk must be rotated by hand until it assumes the cor-
rect position relative to the ratchet wheel. Corresponding
lines scribed on both of these members may be employed for
this purpose. It is evident that this arrangement may also
be used for feeding shells into the dial with their closed
ends at the bottom, provided, of course, that they leave the
hopper tube with their closed ends at the top.
Hopper Attachment for Feeding all Shells with Their
Closed Ends Up.- Regardless of whether shells are fed
from a hopper with the closed end at the top or at the
bottom, the attachment shown in Fig. 2 will deliver them
to the press dial with the closed end at the top. This de-
vice greatly simplifies the design of the hopper, inasmuch
as no attention need be paid to the position in which the
shell leaves the hopper opening. By modifying the design
of the attachment shown, the shells may also be delivered
to the dial with the closed end at the bottom. Hence, by
constructing two demountable attachments, shells may be
made to enter the dial with the closed end at the top or at
the bottom, only one hopper being employed in both cases.
The shells are fed from the hopper into th8 tube A. From
the tube, they drop into openings in the annular ring B,
which is given an intermittent rotary motion by means of
the ratchet wheel C and ratchet lever D. This lever is given
an oscillating movement through the link E which is carried
FEEDING AND EJECTING MECHANISMS 456
In the position shown, a shell has just entered the top
depression in the disk, with its closed end at the bottom,
while at the lower part of the disk another shell has dropped
into the press dial with its closed end at the top. One-half
revolution of the disk A is required to invert each shell.
458 FEEDING AND EJECTING MECHANISMS FEEDING AND EJECTING MECHANISMS 459
Fig. 2. Device for Feeding Shells into a Dial with their Closed Ends. up Regardless of
their Position a.Sl they Leave. the Hopper
E
in the press ram; and for every cycle of the ram, the ring
B is .rotated one division. If all the shells were to drop
into the ring in the position indicated at F, they would drop
out of the lower end of this ring in the proper position to
enter the press dial G. But when a hopper of the design
mentioned is employed, the shells can take the position
shown as they pass dQwn into the tube A. Hence, provision
must be made for delivering all the shells to the press dial
with the closed end at the top. The shell G must be in-
verted before it reaches the dial. Instead of the shell being
carried around with the ring, however, it will be forced
down through a hole in the stationary core H by means of
the plunger K secured to the press ram; and from there it
will pass once more through the ring and into the tube J.
When a shell in the position indicated at F is indexed to
the top of the ring, it will not pass down through the core
H, as the plunger K will simply enter it without making
contact. The shells are prevented from dropping by gravity
at the top of the ring by a spring (not shown) which bears
against the side of each shell as it passes this point. The
tube J is made long enough to contain six shells, or half the
number that can be held in the ring B. This length of tube
was necessary, as, with a shorter tube, it is possible for the
shells to pile up and be carried around once more past the
tube A.
The ring is operated through a friction disk from the
ratchet wheel C, and the position of the holes in the ring,
relative to the hole in the core H and the tube J, is governed
by the downward movement of the lever D, which is limited
by the stop L, secured to the base M of the device. The base,
in turn, is securely fastened to the press bed. Lever D
strikes stop L before the downward stroke of the press has
~ n completed, link E sliding, against the pressure of a
coil spring, in a projection on the press ram. In case a
damaged shell is indexed into position under plunger K, the
plunger, instead of moving downward, will be held sus-
G
Fig. 3. Rotary Hopper for Feeding Split Rivets to a Dial Press
keyed to shafts E and P, respectively. Shaft P is the driv-
ing member for the hopper, and receives its motion through
a chain drive connected to the press crankshaft.
The rivets are placed in the reservoir R, and as member
C revolves in the direction of the arrow, some of them will
straddle the blades, as shown in the cross-sectional view x-x.
As the member C continues to revolve, the rivets slide along
the curved edge of the blade until they arrive at the posi-
tion shown at T. Each blade dwells long enough at this
point to permit the rivets to slide off and into the chute
O. To facilitate the delivery of the rivets to the chute, the
latter was constructed to support the rivets under their
heads (see section y-y), the strips M acting as a guard to
prevent them from piling up on each other on the incline.
The top of the chute is kept clear of incorrectly delivered
rivets by the sliding finger L. This finger receives its mo-
tion from the lever I, pivoted at G, and is actuated by the
revolving cam K which engages the lug J. The spring H
carries the finger toward the hopper, while the outward
movement is positive. The plate N serves as a gib for the
sliding finger L.
Feeding Round Pins to a Dial Press.- A hopper for
feeding round pins to a dial press is shown in Fig. 4. With
this design, the open end K of the revolving conical coil of
tubing E is continually passing through the mass of pins
in the hopper reservoir L, some of which enter the tubing
at K and slide, both by gravity and by the pushing action of
the pins entering, down the incline to the center of the coil
where they pass into a stationary tube F leading to the
press.
The bracket C, fastened by screws to another bracket A
on the press, has two bosses which serve as bearings for
the turned shank M on the revolving member G. The latter,
driven by the flanged pulley B, which is connected by a belt
to a pulley on the press crankshaft, serves as a holder for
the coil E.The lower end of this coil is straight and passes
SECTION y.y
ENLARGED VIEW
rivets to a dial on a power press, where they are assembled
into porcelain fuse plugs. The hopper A, fastened to a
bracket on the press in a position above the dial, is equipped
with the four-bladed member C. For each revolution, mem-
ber C is given an intermittent motion including four equally
spaced dwells, through the action of the gears .D and F
pended, as it telescopes within the holder N, and the shell
will be prevented from passing down into core H (see also
simple device for feeding shells open end up, Volume 1,
page 455).
Feeding Split Rivets to Power Press.- The automatic
feeding mechanism, Fig. 3, is used for feeding split brass
460
Fig. 4. Hopper with 'Revolving Coil of Tubing through whioh Pins
are Fed to Dial
down through the shank M into the swaged end of the" sta-
tionary tube F, while the upper end of the coil passes at an
angle through the face of the outer flange on the member G,
as illustrated at N. The hole for the tubing in member G
atNis first cut through with an end-mill, and after the tube
has been properly located, it is babbitted in place. The
babbitt is next doweled. to member G to complete the joint.
With this type of hopper, the length of the pins to be fed
governs the diameter of the coil. Such a hopper could not
be used for very long pins, as the diameter of the coil would
have to be so large as to be impractical.
Eiecting Shells that Enter Hopper Chute Wrong
Side Up.- Among the many problems encountered in de-
signing hoppers for feeding shells to dial presses is the
delivering of each shell to the dial right side up. This is
accomplished in one plant by means of the device shown in
Fig. 5. The device is attached to the table of the press at
the dial end of the chute, and is equipped with a vertical
plunger for keeping in the chute those shells that have their
open sides up. Another plunger ejects from the chute the
shells that have their closed sides up.
A screw shell A is shown at the end of the chute B. This
section of the chute is adjacent to the dial (not shown) and
is secured in the bracket C,. the bracket, in turn, is fastened
to the side of the press table. Slide D, equipped with a
spring-actuated ejecting plunger E, is mounted in bracket
C, and is given a reciprocating movement by means of the
bell-lever F. This lever is oscillated by a link on the arm
G" which is bolted to the press ram.
A vertical sleeve H, also secured in this arm, supports
the spring-actuated plunger J. This plunger serves to pre-
vent those shells that have their open sides up from being
ejected from the chute. For example, the shell A is shown
with its open side up; now, as the press ram descends,
plunger J enters and bottoms in the shell. As the ram con-
tinues to descend, the plunger remains stationary; in the

1
PINS
I
I
..- I -
I I ; " " 1\ \ \
I I I I /' J J \ \ '01
{{ _{r :' /--, \ ;\J '\ \\ iL__J
JI -J.-..l-.----;,"",-,'1' ,i....=..c.r--;--ft+,1-++--!!-, I ',1--
1

'---:'. I' i ,
t<St\ lid' " \\ " / / / / I
\ \ '\'. ,/ ,.//' "
462
15. DevicG for Shells from Hopper Chute which Enter Chute Closed Side 'Up
E
Fig. 6. Action of Device Shown in Fig. 5 in Ejecting a Shell from the Chute
the left, the latch L snaps into place behind the shoulder on
plunger E, locking this plunger to the slide. Consequently,
when the slide is returned toward the right, the pressure
of plunger E on the shell will be released before the vertical
plunger J leaves the shell. If this provision for locking
plunger E were not made, the shell would be forced from
the side of the chute. However, just before slide D has
reached its extreme position at the right, latch L is disen-
gaged from the plunger by coming in contact with the sta-
tionary pin M. This allows pIunger E to return to its
ejecting position in the slide. At this time, however, both
plungers are out of the chute; hence the shell is free to
enter the dial.
When a shell enters the chute with its closed side up, it
comes into position under plunger J, which, in this case,
rests on top of the shell. Then, when plunger E moves
toward the left, the shell will be pushed out of the chute,
as shown in Fig. 6. During the ejecting process, the vertical
meantime, the slide D has advanced toward the left, forcing
plunger E against the side of the shell. Continued down-
ward movement of the ram will merely result in both
plungers J and E collapsing into their holding members.
Thus, plunger J acts as a lock, preventing plunger E from
forcing the shell out of the chute.
Just before slide D has completed its movement toward
plunger merely drops off the edge of the shell and to the
bottom of the chute. This plunger is forked to allow it to
straddle plunger E. It will also be noted that a guide rail K
is provided to retain the shells in the chute while the eject-
ing device is inoperative. This rail is spring-actuated to
allow it to return to 'its normal position. The ejected shells
drop on a belt conveyor and are returned to the hopper.
Hopper for Feeding Washers t ~ a Dial Press.- The
hopper shown by the diagram Fig. 7 was designed for
feeding special brass washers to a dial press, where they
are assembled to electrical toggle switch levers. As slide B
passes up and down through the mass of washers at A, some
of the washers drop into spaces L or M, which are slightly
wider than the washers, and roll down the incline at the
top of the slide and thence intol the chute C. The slide is
shown in its lowest position, the highest position being indi-
cated by the light dot-and-dash lines at [.
The reciprocating movement of slide B is obtained from
a crank which is connected to the bracket J on the slide by
the link E. The washers are prevented from jamming at
the entrance to the chute by the wheel D. This w ~ l re-
volving in the direction of the arrow, is driven by a sprocket
and chain from the hopper crankshaft, and is equipped with
eight flat spring projections which agitate the washers
sufficiently to insure a uniform flow down the chute. The
sides of the hopper are carried down at K to resist the
side thrust of the slide set up by the hopper crank. Any
dirt which may enter the hopper will pass out through the
chute. The lugs G, cast integral with the hopper, provide
a means for fastening the hopper to the bracket F on the
press.
Automatic Ejector of Lift Type for Press Dial.-Fig.8
shows a device for ejecting an assembled shell from the dial
of an inclined press. The device is attached to the press ram
by bracket J, which holds the post B with the pins E on
which fingers A are pivoted. The operation is as follows:
466
F
A
SECTION XX
Fig. 7. Hopper of Simple Design for Feeding Washers to a Dial Press
467
When the ram starts to descend, the fingers A are closed at
the lower tips, so that they will enter the hole in the work
W, which consists of two assembled shells. Before the ram
reaches the end of the down stroke, the stopK pushes the
sliding plates D and C upward. These plates are connected
by shoulder pins 'The illustration shows the beveled part
on plate C leaving the fingers A so that the spring G is per-
mitted to open the lower tips inside the work.
When the ram starts to ascend, the shell is gripped and
lifted up out of the dial. Before the ram reaches the top
of the upward stroke, the stop H, connected with the press
frame, pushes plate C down. The beveled part of plate C
then comes in contact with theupper end of fingers A, caus-
ing the tips to close and allow the work to drop down a
chute and slide into a container, thus completing the cycle.
The press is operated at a speed of about 75 revolutions per
minute.
Device for Eiecting Fuse Plugs from Dial Press by
Lifting Fingers.- A device used for ejecting porcelain fuse
plugs from the dial of a press is shown in Fig. 9. In this
press, the plugs are assembled with the metal caps that re-
tain the isinglass covers. To eject the plugs, two spring
fingers A, pivoted on the swinging arm B, are provided.
The arm is mounted on a cam bushing C, the bore of which
is a slide fit over the post D to allow vertical and rotary
movement of the bushing. The post is stationary, and is
secured to the press by means of the cast-iron bracket E.
In the side of post D is secured the pin F, which engages
the cam slot in the bushing and imparts the required oscil-
lating motion to the arm B during the vertical movement
of the bushing.
A flange at the top of this bushing engages the bracket G,
which is secured to the press ram, so that as the ram re-
ciprocates, the arm B will be given a combined vertical and
oscillating movement.
As shown, the fingers A have gripped the plug prepara-
--,
1--
--..f-=4-.f=1
I I t---<
---r--4-....
r-.1 1.._
--'
Device for Ejecting Assembled Part from Dial of
Inclined Press
,-----
J

I

TO PRESS RAM --I---l---t--"
Fig. 8.
468
471
r:::::-
t ~ ~
~
0
()l
q:;f,
--t-1
~ : N
I
N-j"j
()
I ",1::: ... ,
I
I
I I
()o()
I I
I,
r---------...--... ~ i
. "'---t--l I
lJ H .J
o
E
Fig. 9. Ejecting Device for a Dial Press which Lifts the Work from the Dial and
Deposits it in a Container or Chute
470
tory to ejecting it from the dial. In this position, the ram
is at its lowest point. As it ascends, the plug is lifted clear
of the dial, and further upward motion of the ram causes
the pin F to slide in the angular part of the cam groove
and swing both bushing and arm enough to carry the plug
over the edge of the dial. At this point the top ends of the
two fingers A come in contact with the stationary stop H,
Fig. 11. Stop Operated by the Mechanism Illustrated in Fig, 10
which opens the fingers, allowing the plug to drop into a
chute at the side of the machine. From the chute, the plug
slides into a container. A coil spring J is provided to give
the required gripping pressure to the fingers. Also, in
order to locate the fingers properly over the plug, centraliz-
ing pins K are provided. Although the stop H is shown in
the illustration directly over the plug, this is not its actual
position; it is placed at one side of the dial so that it will
release the fingers only when they are above the chute.
Magazine Die with Stop which Shifts while Eiecting
Work.- Several automatic magazine dies used for piercing
and trimming operations on previously blanked parts are
equipped with stop mechanisms like that shown in Fig. 10.
During the upward stroke of the press ram, this mechan-
ism serves to move the work locating stop A toward the
right to permit the finished part to be ejected and a new
blank to be put in place. Before the ram has reached the
top of its stroke, the stop returns to its former position
against the new blank. During the entire downward stroke
of the ram, the stop is stationary.
As indicated in Fig. 11, stop A is riveted to the slide B,
which is mounted in the die bolster. Cam-arm C (Fig. 10)
is pivoted to. the punch-holder and can be swung in the
473
direction of the arrow. At the top of the stroke, the lower
end of this arm assumes a position corresponding with the
sectional area in Fig. 11, and is normally held there by the
spring-actuated plunger D. As the press ram descends, the
angular edge at the bottom of the projection E on the arm
engages edge F on. the slide, causing the arm to swing in
the direction of the arrow. Upon the continued descent of
the ram, the projection E passes the corner at F, allowing
the arm to swing back to its normal position.. During the
entire downward stroke, slide B is held against the die by
the spring-actuated plunger G, and therefore remains sta-
tionary.
As the ram begins to ascend, the angular edge at the top
of proj ection E engages the under side of the corner at F,
causing the slide to be moved toward the right. At this
point, the finished part is ejected from the die and a new
blank is slid into place by means' of the magazine feed slide
(not shown). As the ram continues its upward movement,
the projection E leaves the slide and the slide is returned by
plunger G to a position against the new blank. The blank
is thus located centrally over the die in the
next downward stroke of the punch. The action of the stop
slide can be timed accurately by adjusting the arm to its
correct position along the hinge H.
Oscillating Arm for Dislodging Pieces that Obstruct
Hopper Feed Exit.- In using hopper feeds of the flat, re-
volving disk type shown in Fig. 12, there may be trouble
due to jamming of the work on the aligning strip A at the
point where the pieces leave the hopper. The purpose of
strip A is to line up the work so that it will enter the chute
opening in a predetermined position. The clogging of the
hopper exit results in loss of production and unnecessary
wear on the punch and die members. As an operator often
runs three or four presses of this kind, jamming or clog-
ging of the work in the manner referred to may not be
noticed immediately.
r
"-..
10 0
I
I \
,/.

I
!o 0
'.... )
I
8
'
I !
I r-I r I' ! ! ! I
472
'The entire device is mounted on the baseplate B. This
plate is secured to the under side of the hopper. feed hous-
ing. The gear C is an integral part of the driving shaft,
which revolves at a speed of 100 revolutions per minute.
The idler D transmits motion to the cluster gears E and F.
Gear F meshes with 'gear G, which is free to revolve around
the driving shaft and is riveted to cam H. Cam H revolves
at 10 revolutions ~ r minute.
The piece of work T which has obstructed the exit of
the hopper is swept away or dislodged in the following
manner: The circular cut-out on the cam H causes a sweep-
ing motion of arm I from S to Z when the cam-roll L drops
into the cut-out. The cam-roll is attached to lever K. Link
J connects lever K to lever N. Lever N is riveted to the
holder 0 of the armI. Cam-roll L is kept in contact with
the periphery of the cam by spring M. The small spring P
provides flexibility for the arm I on the return movement.
The shoe Q serves as a guide and steadyrest for lever K.
The mechanism described can, of course, be applied to work
of various shapes by making suitable alterations.
Transfer Mechanism for Stacking Parts on Rods a,s
They Leave the Die.- In making parts such as shown in
the lower right-hand corner of Fig. 13, it was necessary to
stack them on rods with the irregular-shaped holes in cor-
rect alignment as they left the combination piercing and
cut-off die. Stacking the parts in this manner facilitates
subsequent operations. The transfer mechanism shown in
Figs. 13, 14, and 15 provides an efficient means for stacking
the parts. It is mounted at the right-hand end of the die
and is operated by a c-am attached to the punch-holder, the
parts being stacked on rod W.
Referring to Figs. 13 and 14, the punch-holder A carries
the piercing punch B and the cut-off punch C. On block D,
which is secured to the die-bed, are mounted the slides E
and F. Slide E carries the auxiliary cross-slide G which
supports the shaft H at its left-hand end. The right-hand
474
3}
()
~
~
'"
CD
llIl
llIl
0
0
llIl
.s
llIl
't:J
~
~
.....
A
~
~ ~
0
"
....
~
~ ~
~
~
a
J.....
oS
Q)
~
c '5
~ Uj
CD
~ J.....
ll!I
~
"
~
~
~
~
'd
~
CD
CD
~
ro:c
lot
[
CD
PI
PI
~
0
~
CD
~
E-l
,.!4
~
~
:E
0
~
P:l
c.i
...
.
ro:c
Fig. 13. Front Elevation of Mechanism for Transferring Parts Direct from the
Die to the Stacking Rod
is backed up by the spring N on the flanged stud O. The
flange of this stud serves as a stop for slide E. Slide G car-
ries roller P, which is held in contact with cam Q by spring
R. Slide E carries the spring-actuated latch S which en-
gages slot T in slide G, and is connected to slide F by the
slotted link U.
As indicated in all three views, the ram is in its lowest
Fig. 14. Side Elevation of Transfer Mechanism, Showing the Action of the Slides
Operating the Transfer Member
with the roller P in contact with the low part of cam Q. It
will be noted in Figs. 14 and 15 that the front edge of work J
is in alignment with the axis of the shaft H, so that when
this shaft rotates, the work will rotate around its own front
edge.
As the ram ascends, the cam K, acting on lever L,moves
slide F toward the left until its inner end is in contact with
the inner end of slide E, which, up to this point, has re-
position. The strip has been fed toward the right,. its end
entering the recess in shaft H. The part is then pierced
and cut off by punch C. Slides E and F (see Fig. 14) are
in their extreme right-hand positions. Latch S is held up
out of engagement with slot T by link U, the screw at the
rear end of which is in contact with the rear of slide F.
Slide G is at its extreme left-hand position (see Fig. 13)
end of this shaft is supported by a. double over-hanging
bearing which is part of slide E. The left-hand end of shaft
H is enlarged and recessed to slip over the end of the work
shown at J.
Slide F is given a reciprocating movement by means of
the cam K on the punch-holder through lever L and roller
M. Bracket X supports lever L at its upper end. Slide E
476
F
stroke slide G is drawn to the right by the action of roller
P on cam Q. The work cannot follow this movement, being
restrained by the rod W in the work-slot; hence shaft H is
entirely removed from the work, allowing the latter to drop
to the bottom of the rod. At this point in the cycle of
operations, slide G is in its original position, at which time
latch S is free to drop into the groove T, thus locking slide
G to slide E.
As the ram gescends, slides E and F move toward the
right until the flange of stud 0 comes in contact with block
D, which discontinues the movement of slide E. The move-
ment of slide F, however, continues, and through link V re-
volves shaft H to its original position. As slide F ap-
proaches the end of its return movement, it engages the ad-
justable screw on link U, disengaging latch S from slide G
and causing this slide to be drawn to the left (see front
elevation, Fig. 13) by spring R.After slide G moves to-
ward the left, the enlarged end of shaft H is in position to
receive the end of a new part, thus commencing another
cycle of movements. Rod W is about 4 inches high and will
accommodate 5-00 pieces. It can easily be removed from the
die when it has been completely filled, and replaced by an-
other rod
l
after which the cycle of operations is repeated.
Q
p
u
o
Fig. 15. Plan View of Transfer Mechanism, Showing the Position of
the Part after Entering the Transfer Member
E
mained stationary. Prior to this, the motion of slide F has
been transmitted to link V, which causes shaft H, to which
the link is keyed, to revolve 90 degrees. At this point the
work is standing on edge. Latch S has been permitted to
swing downward; but as it is not in alignment with groove
T, it merely rests on top of slide G.
Further upward movement of the ram causes slide F to
push slide E toward the left, so that the work is placed over
rod W.As the ram continues to move to the top of its
478
angles to the needle and at right angles to the direction in
which the goods travels. In addition, the looper must have
a back-and-forth motion at right angles to the needle in the
line of travel of the goods being stitched. This latter mo-
tion is commonly called the "avoider" motion, since its ob-
ject is to avoid or"prevent interference with the needle. The
path followed by any point on the looper A consists of a
closed curve that resembles an ellipse bent to fit the surface
of a sphere.
The main shaft B carries the flat strap eccentric C and
the ball-joint eccentric D, which drive the rocker arm E,
mounted in the spherical bearing F. Arm E carries the
looper A. Eccentric C imparts motion to arm E by means
of pin G, which passes through the center of bearing F with
which it is in sliding engagement. This gives the looper A
an oscillating movement. Eccentric D, by means of its con-
nection with the ball-ended bellcrank H and link J, causes
arm E to oscillate about the center of pin G, so that A moves
back and forth between the positions shown by the full lines
and by the dotted lines at M.
It will be noted that eccentrics C and D impart ,motions
to A which are approximately at right angles to each other,
in producing the spherical-elliptical movement. Eccentric
C gives the needle the "avoider" motion, while eccentric D
imparts the motion that causes the looper to pass in and out
of the thread loop formed by the needle that pierces the
goods.
Considering the action of eccentric C in producing the
"avoider" motion, it will be noted that only one component
of the circular motion of this eccentric imparts motion to
the looper, the other component resulting in pin G sliding
through the ball joint in F. With reference to eccentric D,
it will also be noted that only one component of this circular
motion is imparted to looper A through its connection there-
to by means of bellcrank H, link J, ball-pin K, and rocker
arm E, whereas the other component of this motion causes
CHAPTER XVI
MISCELLANEOUS MECHANISMS OR
MECHANICAL MOVEMENTS
Whenever mechanisms have a similar function or a o ~
mon operating characteristic, they have been grouped to-
gether in chapters both in this volume and in Volume I to
assist the user in finding whatever, general type of mechan-
ism may be wanted. In this chapter will be found mechan-
isms of such a miscellaneous character that they cannot be
placed in any general classification.
Spherical- Elliptical Movement of Sewing Machine
Double-Lock Stitch Mechanism.- Many of the sewing ma-
chines used in manufacturing clothing, bags, awnings, etc.,
use what is commonly known as a double lock stitch. These
machines have two needles operating at right angles to each
other. The lower needle operates beneath the throat plate
that supports the goods being stitched. This needle is com-
monly termed a "looper," as it does not pierce the goods,
but passes into and out of the loop of thread made by the
other needle in its vertical motions. The loop of thread is
formed at the desired location below the throat plate during
the upward motion of the needle by permitting the thread
to become slack at the proper time, thus causing it to buckle
and form the loop. A mechanism used to impart the re-
quired motion to the lower needle, or looper, is shown in
Fig. 1.
The looper A is required to pass very close to the needle
in taking up the loop of thread. It must hold this thread
loop and position itself on the opposite side of the needle's
path by the time the needle has descended below the throat
plate in forming the next stitch. From this it is apparent
that the looper must have a back-and-forth motion at right
480
MISCELLANEOUS MOVEMENTS 481
482 MISCELLANEOUS MOVEMENTS MISCELLANEOUS MOVEMENTS 483
Fig, 1. Mechanism in which Ball Joints, Links, and Levers Operated by Two Eccentrics are
Used to Obtain Spherical-elliptical Movement of Member A
Fig, 2. Mechanism for Producing Shearing Motion
rotation about its connection with the bellcrank H. Thus
the motion imparted to the looper A may be considered as
being the resultant of two circular motions at right angles
to each other. The relative values of these two 'motions
have been changed by means of levers, in order to give to
each the desired am'plitude.
The motion described could be obtained from a single ec-
centric, except for the mechanical difficulties encountered in
obtaining suitable proportions for the components required
for such motion. The motion produced by the mechanism
illustrated is the resultant of two simple harmonic motions
at right angles to each other, each being modified by the
length and angularity of the connecting links. This form
of looper drive is adapted to high speeds, since it is rela-
tively simple, has few parts, and the few rapidly moving
parts required can be made quite light. There are no violent
changes in velocity, and the energy changes and friction
losses are thus kept at a minimum.
Shearing Motion which Varies Angular Position of
Blade.- The mechanism shown in Fig. 2 was applied to a
shearing machine to obtain an action approximating that
r-7
X
PLAN VIEW
of hand-operated shears. The mechanism is arranged to
make one complete cycle of movements automatically when
the driving clutch is engaged. The sides S of the shearing
machine serve as guides for the cross-bar E which supports
the movable blade above the stationary blade F. As the
crank disks D revolve, the ends of the movable blade are
carried to different positions, as shown at points Bl' B2, Bs,
and B
4
on the left, and by C1, C2, Cs, and C4 on the right.
When the end of the -blade is at Bl' the right-hand
end is at C1, and when the left-hand end is at B2, the right-
hand end is at C
2
, and so on. This,wabble or shearing ac-
tion is obtained by locating one of the crankpins 90 degrees
ahead of the other.
The successful operation of the mechanism is made pos-
sible by the spherical pin and connecting-rod bearings A.
These bearings were easily produced from soft steel balls
purchased from stock and bored out to a press fit on the
bearing pins. The boxes at the ends of the connecting-rods
were formed by pouring babbitt over the balls while the
two parts were mounted on a surface plate in their proper
relative positions. A few strokes with a soft-faced ham-
mer served to loosen up the bearings sufficiently to permit
them to operate satisfactorily.
Grease lubrication is provided by a hole drilled through
the bearing after the babbitt was poured. This hole crossed
another hole leading from the outer end of the pin. Side
motion of the holder E is prevented by using curved guides
having sufficient clearance to prevent binding. Machines
equipped with this shearing mechanism are used in con-
nection with the production of cotton batting and similar
fibrous parts.
Transmitting Motion to Indexing Plunger by Steel
Balls.-A rather unusual application of steel balls for trans-
mitting motion to an indexing plunger on a dial press is
shown in Fig. 3. The plunger J slides in the fixed bearing
I and receives its motion from the lever A through the steel
Fig. 3. Transmitting Motion to a Plunger with Steel Balls Confined in a Tube
balls H. The lever oscillates about the fixed stud B, and its
lower end engages a slot in the member C. The latter is
a sliding fit in the stationary bearings D and E, and as the
lever A oscillates, member C forces the balls up the tube,
causing the plunger to move upward into the dial. The
plunger is returne(} to the position shown by the coil spring
K which also keeps the balls in contact with member C. It
is obvious that with this simple device the tube containing
the balls may be bent to almost any shape desired) permit-
ting it to clear any member of the machine.
485 MISCELLANEOUS MOVEMENTS
Counter Used on Type-Setting Machine.- In setting
type on a linotype machine (for lay-out pages), each line in
the different sections is counted so that the type set will
agree with the lay-out calculations. With the instrument
shown in Fig. 4, however, no mental effort is required, as
actual count is registered automatically on the dial at
X, which is returned to its zero position by one simple mo-
tion of the operator's hand.
The lower part of the counter is bolted to a stationary
bracket on the frame of the machine. An adj ustable finger
MISCELLANEOUS MOVEMENTS
487
4>
=
:a
()
c;:
>l
&.0
~
~
cD
Pi
I
8
=0
't:l
<l>
~
]
']
.~
03
.d
()
i
~
=
l;
ai
~
.,j
'p,
03
~
:;l
~
~
.s
=
::s
0
0
..;
.
~
attached to a reciprocating member on the machine strikes
the end of the lever B, causing the pawl.C to advance the
ratchet wheel D one tooth, or one graduation on the dial.
The dial continues to register until the required number of
lines to be cast is indicated. The operator then depresses
lever F, causing, the dial to return once more to the zero
position ready for the next group of lines. When the lever
F is depressed, the cam-plate H forces the pins in pawls C
and G outward, disengaging the pawls from the ratchet
wheel and allowing the clock spring E attached to both cam-
plate and dial to return the dial to the zero position. Stop-
pins (not shown) are provided to limit the return move-
ment of cam-plate H and lever B, as well as that of the dial
on its return to the zero position. The counter is located on
the machine so that the dial is at right angles to the line of
vision, assuring easy and accurate reading.
Mechanism for Advancing and lifting Parts to Clear
Lugs of Conveyor Chain.- In a production line where a
chain conveyor is used, it is sometimes necessary to lift the
article conveyed clear of the lugs on the chain while the
chain is in continuous motion.
The mechanism shown in Fig. 5 was developed to meet
a requirement of this kind. The article conveyed in this
case is required to be rapidly advanced ahead of the chain
travel at the last station and brought into position where it
can be elevated by an auxiliary mechanism before it is over-
taken by the chain lugs.
The action of this entire unit may be summarized as fol-
lows: As the chain conveyor carrying the work travels
along, arm E swings up and in back of the work, rapidly
advancing it throughout its forward motion. After the
work has been lifted clear, the arm swings in back of the
next article.
In the side view the articles conveyed are indicated at
A and B. There is a pair of chain conveyors at C, which
travel in the direction indicated by the arrow D. The arm
489
Fig, 6. Details of Friction Drag Applied to Lever R, Fig, :;
longitudinal reciprocating movement to a pair of rods Q.
Rods Q transmit a rocking and transverse lnovement to the
unit consisting of arms E and levers R, which results in ad-
vancing the work A and B and returning the unit to its
starting point.
The side view... shows the work B fully advanced, while
the lower view at the, right shows the position of the vari-
ous members during the first portion of the return move-
ment of arm E, as rod Q advances in the direction indicated
by arrow S. This movement causes arm E to pivot about
stud T as a center until lug U comes in contact with the
side of the lever. It will be noted that, during the advance
movement, the lug V was in contact with the other side of
lever R. When the lug U is in the position shown in the
view in the lower right-hand corner, the top of arm E is
below the level of the work, as indicated at W, although
lever R has not yet been moved. Continued movement of
rod Q in the direction indicated by arrow S causes lever R
to be pushed to the left until the entire mechanism assumes
SECOND MOVEMENT
FIRST MOVEMENT
E is in contact with the work and has advanced it ahead
of the position it would nOl'mally have reached as a result
of the conveyor movement. The mechanism is shown at
the completion of the advance movement. This mechanism
has, a grooved cam F which revolves with shaft G. Over
the block H is assembled a yoke J, which carries a roll K
that rotates in the cam groove, causing yoke J to oscillate

This action, through the medium of rod L, causes lever
M to rock shaft N back and forth. A similar movement is
imparted to a pair of levers P which, in turn, transmit a
FiR', 5. Mechanism fOT Raising Work from Chain Conveyor and Advancing it to Operating POl'\tion
the position indicated in the upper view, where lug U is still
in contact with the lever and the arc of travel is indicated
byX.
Another article has now been brought forward, as shown
at Z, and the position of arm E is such that rod Q, in pulling
arm E to the right, will cause it to pivot about stud T until
it swings behind the work Z, when lug V will be in contact
with lever R.
Continued movement of rod Q will cause the article at Z
to be rapidly advanced ahead of the chain travel, so that
another mechanism (not shown) can pick up the work and
raise it clear of the chain lugs into the position indicated
at Y.
To insure that arm E will pivot about stud T during the
first movement of the advance action and the first move-
ment of the return action without imparting any movement
to lever R, the latter lever is constructed as illustrated in
Fig. 6. Lever R is shown as pivoting on the short shaft A,
which is pinned at B to the sida frame C of the machine.
Two lock-nuts D permit the tension exerted by the spring E
against the lever to be so adjusted that its movement is
retarded until there is a definite pull in either direction that
is sufficient to assure the correct functioning of the mech-
anism.
Air-Chuck Valve that Reduces Air Consumption Forty
Per Cent.- In shops using a large number of air chucks
for machining purposes, the air consumption may be re-
duced as much as 40 per cent by utilizing the type of pneu-
matic apparatus to be described. The full-line pressure is
commonly used for both opening and closing the chuck.
While the full-line pressure is required for closing the
chuck, only a fraction of this pressure is needed to release
the jaws.
By means of the valve shown in Fig. 7 the same air is
employed for opening the jaws as is used for closing them.
The principle can be more clearly explained by referring
Fig. '7. Pneumatic Valve by Means of which the Same Air is Used for
Opening and Closing a. Chuck
Fig. 8. Detail View of Body of Air Valve, Showing Positions of the Various Ports
to a diagram of the air cylinder (Fig. 10). This cylinder is.
designed so that when the chuck is closed, the space on both
sides of the piston will be about the same, as indicated.
To release the jaws, the piston must be moved toward the
Fig. 9. Detail View of the Valve Disk
To release the jaws, the lever is swung toward the left
until it comes into contact with the spring stop K. As the
lever commences its movement toward the left, portsG and
H are disconnected, thus closing the exhaust from the right-
hand side of the cylinder. At this time, ports C and Bare
also disconnected" closing the inlet and confining the air at
line pressure to the left-hand side of the cylinder. Con-
tinued movement of the lever causes port G to connect ports
C and F, so that the air is by-passed from the left-hand side
of the cylinder to the right-hand side until the pressure on
both sides of the piston is equal. Further movement of the
lever disconnects port G from port F, thus closing the latter
and confining the air to the right of the cylinder.
As the lever comes in contact with the spring stop K,
port G connects ports C and H, and the air on the left side
of the cylinder is exhausted into the atmosphere. Thus,
air at a pressure of approximately one-half the line pres-
sure is left on the right of the cylinder. This air expands,
pushing the piston toward the left and opening the chuck
jaws. If for some reason
this pressure is insufficient
to release the jaws, the
lever is forced farther to-
ward the left, depressing
the spring stop !(. This
additional movement of the A 8
lever causes port L to con-
nect with port F, so that
air at line pressure enters Fig. 10. Diagram of Air Cylinder with Piston
in "Closed Chuck" Position
at the right of the piston
and overcomes the resistance. When released, the lever will
immediately spring back to the unchucking position, shut-
ting off the line pressure.
Mechanism 'for Winding Spherical Cores for Golf Balls.-
Cores for golf balls are produced by winding a soft rub-
ber band on a spherical rubber center. The thin rubber
MISCELLANEOUS' MOVEMENTS
With the valve lever in the position indicated in Fig. 7,
the air entering at line pressure passes over the disk at A,
up through the hole B in the disk, out through port C in the
body, and into the pipe D which leads into the left-hand side
of the cylinder. The air entering the cylinder forces the
piston toward the right and closes the chuck. During this
movement, the air is exhausted from the, right-hand side of
the cylinder through pipe E, port F in the body, port G in
the disk, port H in the body, and out through the exhaust
opening to the atmosphere.
..-----,---------------------
492
left. This is done by exhausting air from side A into side
B until the pressure in both sides is equal. The air in side
A is then exhausted into the atmosphere, leaving side B
with about one-half of the line pressure-about 50 pounds
-to expand and push the piston toward the left, in this way
releasing the jaws. It is very seldom that a pressure of
more than 45 pounds per square inch is required to release
the chuck jaws.
The valve (Fig. 7) that controls the air in the manner
described is of the rotary self-seating type, which requires
no packing. The position of the va:r:ious ports in the valve
body and disk are shown clearly in the detail views, Figs. 8
and 9, the reference letters corresponding in all views.
Fig. 11. Plan View of Winding Mechanism Shown in Fig. 12
~
~
~
.
~
a=
~
r:n.
0
t?;l
t"4
t"4
>
Z
t?;l
0
c::
r:n.
a=
0
-<:
t?;l
~
t?;l
z
~
r:n.
,0
'..... _-- ... ~ ~ .;z:::::::; \
Fig. 12. Mechanism for Winding Thin Rubber Band Evenly over the Surface of a Small Spherical Center of Rubber
A
~
~
r:n.
o
t?;l
~
~
>
Z
t;Ij
o
c::
rn.
~
o
t;j
~
t;Ij
Z
t-3
r:n.
~
~
~
band is approximately 1/16 inch wide and must be wound
evenly about the rubber center under uniform tension. The
completed core must have a true spherical form. These re-
quirements necessitate a somewhat complicated winding or
rotational movement, in order to have the crossing points
of the rubber band evenly distributed over the spherical
surface of the core, which is constantly increasing in size
during the winding operation.
The principal elements of the mechanism that provides
the necessary winding movement are shown in Figs. 11 and
12. 'The work is started by placing' the rubber center be-
tween the four truncated cones or rollers J (Fig. 12)
mounted in the right- and left-hand winding heads B. The
rollers are kept in contact with the core by the compressive
action of the helical springs P, which allow the heads to
recede equally as the diameter of the core increases. The
bellcranks V equalize and centralize the outward movements
of the winding heads so that the core is always kept in
the central position. The bellcranks are connected with a
treadle that permits the operator to withdraw the heads,
so that the finished core W can be removed. The two ball
casters indicated at N (Fig. 11) serve to guide or retain the
core in its proper position between the rolls.
The two winding heads B (Fig. 12) have hollow shafts 0,
which are geared to a countershaft (not shown) at the rear
of the mechanism. The countershaft is belt-driven and is
provided with a handwheel at one end to allow the mechan-
ism to be operated slowly by hand for making adj ustments.
The shafts A, which run inside shafts 0, are also geared to
the countershaft and run at a somewhat higher speed than
shafts O. Shafts A provide for the secondary revolving
movements imparted to the core by the four rollers through
the bevel gears C and D, and the intermittent gears E! F,
G, and H. The shafts of gears H drive the two upper rollers
J, and the shafts of gears F drive the lower rollers
mounted on the two opposed heads B. Thus different move-
ments are imparted to the upper and lower rolls.
rfhe four rollers have their conical surfaces spotted to
give a better frictional grip on the core. The winding op-
eration consists of feeding the rubber band by hand over
the first and under the second tensioning rolls R (Fig. 11)
and on through the guide slot S down on the soft rubber
core which revolves rapidly in two directions simultane-
ously. The feed guide with the tensioning rolls attached
swings on a fulcrum pin T (Fig. 12). A helical spring
(not shown) attached to the guide provides the proper
winding tension. The winding nlovements are obtained
from the constant rotation of the heads B in the direction
indicated by the arrows, combined with the motions im-
parted to the core by the four rollers J driven by the' in-
termittent gears E, F, G, and H. These movements are so
timed that the rubber band is wound on the rubber core
evenly.
When the core reaches the finished size, the machine is
stopped automatically through an electrical contact made
by the spindle of one of the receding heads. While the
approximate winding movements described appear quite
simple, the exact path followed by any particular point on
the surface of the core is somewhat complicated,
as WIll be apparent when the effect of the difference in
speed of the shafts A and 0 is considered in conjunction
with the rotational movements obtained by the four in-
termittently rotated rollers J and the constant rotational
movement of the heads B.
loading and Discharge Door Control for Enameling
Oven.- An oven for baking the enamel on automobile
wheels is so arranged that the wheels roll down gravity
runways through the oven and are automatically discharged
into runways which lead them either to the next operation
or to the loading dock for shipment. The baldng time for a
497
499
given length of oven depends entirely On the rate at which
the wheels are put in.
In operation, the wheels are placed twelve abreast in com-
partment A (see vertical longitudinal section, Fig. 13). The
operator, using handle B, then raises the door, which is
made of three pau',els-C, D, and E-all mounted rigidly on
a common frame and suspended from above. As the door
is raised, panel C rises, closing compartment A, and panel D
rises, letting the twelve wheels roll into the oven. Simul-
taneously panel E rises, opening compartment F, which has
been closed at the back by panel D. Compartment F is now
ready to be loaded with twelve wheels, after which the door
is lowered again to reload compartment A.
The door at the discharge end is similarly constructed,
and provides an automatic escapement for the wheels. The
doors are connected by two cables which pass over sheaves
above the oven and thus counterbalance each other. The
two sheaves at each end are keyed to the shafts in order to
keep the doors on an even keel and make them work freely
in their guides. The two doors being connected, the dis-
charge door is automatically lowered when the charging
door is raised and vice versa, thus releasing a row of wheels
every time a row is put in and keeping the oven full all the
time. The man at the loading end sprays the wheels and
places them in the runways, closing the door when he has
inserted twelve wheels. Then, without further labor or
attention on the part of the operator, they are baked the
proper length of time and delivered to the next operation.
With a given number of wheels per hour to be baked, any
desired length of baking time may be obtained by making
the oven of the proper length. Another point to be noted
is that the doors are closed
l
practically all the time, which
cuts down the loss of heat to a minimum and also adds
greatly to the comfort of the operator.
Short-Stroke Mechanism for Operating Fixture Lock..
Pin.- A semi-automatic facing fixture used on a single-
cated on one side of the fixture, has a stroke of 1 5/8 inches.
One and one-half inches of this stroke are utilized for in-
dexing the fixture 60 degrees and the additional l/8-inch
movement is all that is necessary for withdrawing the stop-
pin.
Attached to slide A isa pin J, which engages a slot S in
lever R. The lever R is free to swing about the fixed pin
spindle drill press carries six castings that are equally
spaced around the circular table of the fixture. As each
casting is indexed around to the machining position, where
it is faced by a profie cutter, the fixture table is locked in
the proper position by a 3/8-inch tapered pin which enters
a tapered hole. The mechanism to be described is for op-
erating this stop-pin. Fig. 14 shows sectional and plan
views of the stop-pin mechanism. The slide A, which is 10-
501
K, and carries an extension C, which is free to swing about
pin H. The outer end of lever C has inclined surfaces B
E, and F, which come into contact with a, roller D on
stop-pin when lever C-R is turned pin K.
The plan view shows the in the position it
occupies just before the stop-pin is withdrawn. When slide
A moves in the direction of the arrow, pin J, acting against
lever R, brings inclined surface B beneath roller D; l/8-inch
movement of slide A is sufficient to lift the stop-pinout of
engagement. Before roller D has passed the end of surface
E, the hole from which it was withdrawn has been moved
from beneath the pin by the indexing movement of the fix-
ture derived from slide A through a pawl (not shown),
which engages one of six indexing pins. Soon after the end
of surface E has passed roller D, the swinging movement
of the hinged lever C-R discontinues, as slot S has moved
around to a position parallel to the movement of slide A;
consequently, slide A and pin J continue their movement
without affecting the position of the slotted lever, and this
additional movement of A is utilized to index the fixture
60 degrees.
During the return movement, slide A ejects the machined
casting. When pin J engages the curved end of slot S, the
lever C-R is forced back to the position shown, and the in-
clined surface F engages the opposite side of roller D, forc-
ing it into the next stop-pin hole as lever C swings upward
about the pin H against the action of spring G. As soon as
the end of lever C has passed roller D, the lever is forced
downward by spring G to the position shown in the sec-
tional views. When in this position, lever C rests against
slide A, as shown by the lower sectional view. The fixture
is now in position for machining the next casting, after
which the cycle of operations just described is repeated.
The pin H, about which lever C swings, is made adjustable
to compensate for wear or for variations caused by regrind.
ing the chasers and the edges of the facing tool.
Mechanism for Operating the Pin that Locks Table of Fixture
During Machining Operation
,c

Fig. 14.
500
503
Mechanism of Contour Grinding Machine.- The m e h ~
anism shown in Fig. 15 controls the traversing movement
of a grinding wheel in such a manner that hardened cutters
can be quickly and accurately ground to contours such as
are indicated by the three outlines (see upper right-hand
corner) . By simply moving the handle H from left to right,
the grinding surface of the wheel at A will follow a path,
such as is indicated by the line AlBIG1D
l
(lower center dia-
gram). In this case, the wheel grinds the straight surface
fronl A l to BI , and without pausing forms the radius from
B
I
to Gl , continuing to the point D
I
, the side G
1
D
1
being
ground at right angles to side AlBI and the corner formed.
in one continuous pass.
By reversing the movement of handle H, the wheel is
caused to travel back along the same path to the starting
point A l Provision is made for setting the machine to
grind the sides AIBl and GlDI to any included angle from
70 to 110 degrees instead of 90 degrees as shown, and with
a radius of curvature at the corner of fron1 0 to 11/2 inches.
During the movement of the grinding wheel from Al to
B
I
the handle H revolves about the center line Y-Y, trans-
mitting the required longitudinal movement to carriage V
which slides on G. The gear train that transmits motion
from gear G to the rack VI secured to carriage V is shown
in section. It will be noted that handle H is secured to gear
G, which is actually a segment gear.
When the grinding surface of the wheel reaches point B
h
the revolving movement of handle H about axis Y-Y is
automatically stopped and continued pressure on the handle
causes the carriage V and slide G to revolve about the ver-
tical axis of shaft D until the grinding surface of the wheel
reaches the point Gl , when further movement about the axis
of shaft D is stopped, and lever H again revolves about axis
Y-Y, causing the wheel to travel from G
I
to D
I

The grinding wheel is directly connected to the motor,
which is mounted on the cross-slide B on carriage V. The
c
Z
ll.O a:
s::
I:;l
::a
>- .f!
...
c
...
$
1j
0
~
't:l
Q}
s::
~
Q}
A
Q}
.S
.-"l
'"
0$
W
~
b.o
U. s::
;t;j
.5
.; ~
<!'
...
2
s::
0
0
....
0
~
'a
<:<l
.<:l
'"
~
~
bil
~
502
distance X from the center line of shaft D to the grinding
face of the wheel determines the radius of curvature of the
corner. Carriage V is fitted to the slide C, which is secured
to the top surface of shaft D. Shaft D thus supports the
slide C, carriage V, cross-slide B, and the grinding wheel
and its driving motor. These parts all swing together about
the axis of shaft D during the corner-forming portion of
the traversing movement.
Underneath slide C and fastened to the supporting frame
or member are two plates 1 and J, also shown in the plan
view (see left-hand illustration) . These plates have stops
K and L and cut-out portions on their peripheries which
terminate in the cam surfaces at T and U. The spacing
between T and L on plate 1 is definitely fixed, as is also the
spacing or relationship of K and U on plate J. These plates
are adj ustable around the center of shaft D, and may be
clamped in any desired position. The angle between T and
U determines the angle of rotation of shaft D and slide C
in forming the corner and, consequently, the included angle
between the sides of the piece ground.
Midway of the length of slide C and in line with the
center of the shaft D is a vertical shaft 0, supported by
bearings on slides C and N. On the upper end of shaft 0
is a two-tooth segment of a gear which meshes with a single
rack tooth Q, attached to the mid point of the front face
of carriage V. Also fixed to shaft 0 are two arms Sand R,
provided with rollers which make contact with the periph-
eries of plates J and 1. The arms are offset vertically, so
that S is in line with plate 1, and R in line with plate J. The
plan view shows the relative positions of the parts at the
middle point of the corner-forming portion of the traverse
movement. At this stage of the traverse movement of the
grinding wheel, the shaft D is free to rotate in its bearings,
and a movement of handle H to the right causes slide C
and all parts attached to it to swing to the right about the
vertical axis of shaft D. With the tooth Qin mesh with the
two teeth of segment P, as shown, and the roller in arm S
in contact with the periphery of plate 1, movement of car-
riage V along slide C is positively prevented.
Rotation of slide C will continue until arm S drops into
the cut away portion T, at which point slide C makes con-
tact with stop Lang. further rotation about the axis of shaft
D is positively prevented. When the roller of arm S drops
into T and the parts are .locked by stop L against further
rotation about the axis of shaft D, the tooth. Q is released
from contact with the locking teeth of segment P by the
rotation of shaft O. This leaves the carriage V iree to slide
on member C, so that resumption of the turning movement
of handle H about axis Y- Y will complete the grinding
movement along line C
1
D
I

When the movement of handle H is. revel"sed, carriage
V will slide along C until tooth Q enters the space between
the two teeth of the segment P on shaft O. The continued
motion of V and, consequently, the rotation of shaft 0
,
causes the arms Sand R to rotate until the roller in S is
free of the opening T and the roller in arm R is in contact
with the periphery of plate J.
When R makes contact with J, further motion of V on
C is prevented, but rotation of C about D is permitted un-
til Renters U and C makes contact with stop K, thus com-
pleting the corner-forming movement from C
1
to B
I
The
carriage V can now slide on C and the revolving movement
of handle H to the left about axis Y-Y completes the move-
ment of the wheel from B
1
to AI.
When the rotating movement required in forming the
corner to a radius is taking place, all parts of the mechan-
ism are locked against relative movement with each other,
and the motion of handle H acting on gear E through gears
G and F causes the complete assembly to revolve about the
axis of shaft D. The combination of movements is caused
by the continuous movement of H. There is no hesitation
in the movement at the corners when rotation starts or.
505
Ol
o
K I r
--.-::::::: J J en - N
........ I I} ... ..!.-, '- -, J.
i ,;Iii' * t.;t
a=
1-4
rn
A .. (/ Ilgl R I
tot
;I>
z
Q / 1\ - I I I ,'\ " - III I I II \ - A I g
rn
B'\\ \ \ \ '\.: 'i r :/ III t1 \ \ r I I' P. \a,l,II H I I Itt I I
tr:l
Z
1-3
rn
Fig. 16, Mechanism for Rotating Groups of Rods Arranged to Smooth Wrapper over Tapered Ends of Cigars
,. ROD HEADS
I I I A r.,
..... ,
',/ ..k. \
UNIT - y
ROD HEADS,
E-;O
/' .L
UNIT-Z
....
rn
tot
tot
;I>
Z
l'J;j
o
r:n
l'J;j
Z
1-3
rn
Fig. 17. Diagram Illustrating Operation of Wrapper-smoothing Mechanism Oonsisting of Two 'Units the One Shown in Fig. 16
Ol
o
-:J
stops, and no lost motion in the locking and unlocking ac-
tion of the mechanism.
Mechanism for Smoothing Foil Wrapper Over Ends
of Tapered Package.- Rods having a compound rotary
motion are employed to smooth the creases of foil-wrapped
cigars or other objects having tapering ends. Four round
rods are arranged in a group at A, Fig. 16. Four rods are
also arranged in a group at B. Each rod has a ball-shaped
end mounted in a two-piece socket C in which the rod is
free to pivot.
A group of springs D, of which. eight are used in each
unit, tie the rods flexibly together. In the center of Fig. 17
is indicated a tubular part X having an irregular shape with
tapering ends, such as a foil-wrapped cigar. The cigar has
been encased in its wrapper cylindrically and is to have the
foil smoothed out and creased taperingly at the ends so that
it folds smoothly over the irregularities and depressions of
the rough-shaped ends.
To accomplish this, two entire mechanisms or units such
as the one illustrated in Fig. 16 are employed, as shown in
Fig. 17. The left-hand unit is shown at Y, and the right-
hand unit at Z. The upper rods A are revolved in the direc-
tion indicated by the arrow E while the lower rods Bare
revolved in the direction indicated by the arrow F, the
direction of rotation being determined by the bevel pinion
drive. As each rod comes in contact with the wrapping
on the work X, it smooths and creases it. The springs
yield sufficiently to allow the rods to ride smoothly over the
wrapping.
Each rod head, of which four are shown in Fig. 17, has
eight springs D attached to four retaining screws G, two
springs being attached to opposite sides of each of the rods
A and B. The rod sockets are mounted on plates H, Fig. 16.
Plates H are attached to gears J; thus the revolving of each
large gear K causes the smoothing rods A and B to revolve
continuously and stroke the work lengthwise while the foil-
wrapped part is held stationary in gripping fingers L.
In addition, the entire rod-actuating arrangement is
mounted on a bracket M, which, in turn, is attached to a
large gear N. Gear N is caused to revolve, thereby carry-
ing the entire arrangement about the axis Q. Thus the
rods not only 'Work lengthwise along the wrapping but
radially as well. These combined movements serve to draw
the wrapping tight. The bevel gear P is revolved by shaft
R which causes bevel pinions S to drive gears K that op-
erate the bar-holding members. The rod-actuating units
are comparatively small, and form one section of an entirely
automatic machine.
Mechanism for Preventing Creep of Wire -Mesh
Conveyor Belt.- Wire-mesh belts are used in a certain
plant for feeding lacquered parts through drying ovens.
Because of unequal stretching of the wire, however, the belt
had a tendency to creep to one end of the driving roll and
against the machine frame. This often resulted in dam-
age to the belt. To overcome this difficulty, an idler roll
was incorporated, as indicated at G in the diagram Fig. 18.
This roll is pivoted at C. End D is automatically swung
either to the right or left, according to the direction of belt
creep. For example, if the belt E. creeps toward the rear
of the driving roll F, idler G immediately swings toward
the right, causing the belt to return to its normal path. If,
on the other hand, the belt creeps toward the front, the
idler will swing toward the left and return the belt as be-
fore to its normal path.
The automatic movement of this idler is produced by
means of the ratchet mechanism shown in Fig. 19. This
mechanism is indicated at A in Fig. 18, and operates a
screw represented by the dot-and-dash line B. This screw
engages a nut on the swinging bearing D. Base A, Fig. 19,
is stationary, and on it is mounted ratchet wheel B and the
double pawl C. The ratchet wheel is pinned to shaft D
Top of Conveyor Belt
Fig. 19. Ratchet Mechanism for Automatically Swinging the Idler Roll into
:Position to :Prevent Creep in a Wire-mesh Conveyor Belt
shown at N and is rotated by the ratchet wheel through
the miter gears E.
With the pawl in the position shown, the belt is running
in its central position on the driving roll; hence neither end
of the pawl engages the ratchet wheel. However, if the
belt were to creep, say, toward the left, the edge of the belt
WQuld force paddle H\also toward the left, causing the pawl
to swing on stud F. Asa result, the hooked end of the pawl
C
I I
I I
I
,
I I
I I
I I
\
I
I
\
I
I
I
I I
I I
\
I
I
I I
\
I
I
I
I
I
\
\ I
I
~
E
B
Fig. 18. Diagram Showing Swinging Idler Roll which is Actuated by
:M:echanism Shown in Fig. 19
and has closely spaced teeth cut on each side which are en-
gaged by the pawl. Pawl C is pivoted on stud F in the
vertical slide G and has an extension paddle H which is
kept in contact with the edge of the belt by the counter-
weight J.
Slide G and pawl C are given a continuous vertical re-
ciprocating movement by means of the pulley K through
the crank L and the connecting-rod M which is pivoted at
its upper end to the stud F. Pulley K receives its motion
from another member of the conveyor (not shown). The
screw engaging the nut on the swinging roll bearing is
510
would engage the teeth in the ratchet wheel, rotating the
ratchet wheel, miter gears, and screw N. As the screw ro-
tates in the nut on the bearing roll, the roll is swung in the
correct direction to guide the belt, through the angular posi-
tion of the idler roll, back to the center of the driving roll.
If the belt should creep toward the right, the movement of
the paddle would cause the straight end of the pawl to en-
gage the right-hand side of the ratchet wheel. As the teeth
on this side of the wheel are cut opposite to those on the
other side, the screw would rotate in the opposite direction
and cause the idler roll, in turn, to swing in the opposite
direction.
CHAPTER XVII
ENGINE VALVE. D,IAGRAMS AND THEIR APPLICATION
IN STUDYING VALVE ACTION
The "valve-gear" or' mechanism for operating the valve
(or valves) which controls the admission and exhaust of
steam in/an engine cylinder is a comparatively simple mech-
anism especially if the engine has a single slide-valve; how-
ever, even the simplest form of valve-gear provides an in-
teresting example of a mechanism requiring correct timing
or relative action between certain main parts. This timing
pertains to the action of the valve relative to the piston
and steam ports, and it is secured first by proper design of
the valve and its mechanism and finally by correct adj ust-
ment of the assembled parts. In connection with the design,
so-called valve diagrams are used to determine in advance
the action of a valve of given design. These valve diagrams
and their application will be explained because of their re-
lationship to the general subject of mechanism.
Diagrams which Show Valve Action.-When designing
a slide-valve for a steam engine and the mechanism which
operates the valve, it is desirable to be able to determine
readily the position of the valve relative to the steam ports,
for any given position of the crank or piston. Valve dia-
grams are commonly used for this purpose. These dia-
grams not only show graphically the relative positions of
the valve and crank, but make it p o ~ s i l to design a valve
with reference to a predetermined form of indicator card.
Valve diagrams also indicate the effects of changes in the
design of the valve on the steam distribution. In connec-
tion with steam engine work, certain problems or quantities
relating to the point of cut-off, lead, etc., are assumed, and
the remaining ones are required and may be determined by
513
514 VALVE DIAGRAMS VALVE DIAGRAMS 515
means of the valve diagrams. For instance, a designer
might be given the point of cut-off, point of release, the
lead, and the maximum port openings, the problem being
to determine the valve travel, the outside and inside lap,
and the angle of advance. By means of a suitable diagram,
the valve travel, lap, etc., corresponding to these specified
quantities may be readily determined. There are several
different forms of valve diagrams, the Zeuner and the
Bilgram diagrams being the ones most commonly used. The
Fig. 1. Diagram Showing Slide Valves with and without Lap and
Positions of Eccentric Relative to Crank
methods of laying out these diagrams and using them, in
connection with steam engine work, will be described after
considering some fundamental features of slide-valve de-
sign, so that the practical application of the diagrams may
be more readily understood.
Position of Valve Relative to Ports.-A plain "D" slide-
valve is represented at A in Fig. 1 on its seat and in mid-
position. The steam lap or outside lap S is the amount by
which the valve extends over the port on the admission side
of the valve, when in mid-position on its seat. Similarly,
E is the exha'U8t lap, or inside lap, and is the amount by
which the valve extends over the port on the exhaust side,
when the valve is in mid-position on its seat. The necessity
for having lap on a valve is shown by considering the lap-
less valve at B. Any movement of the valve to the right
will admit steam. behind the piston, and the other side of
the piston will be open to the exhaust. The admission of
steam on one .side and the opening of the exhaust on the
other will continue until the valve returns to its mid-posi-
tion, which will occur when the piston is at the other end
of its stroke. Such a valve arrangement as this would per-
mit of no expansion of the steam in the cylinder; in other
words, cut-off occurs at full stroke. This is an uneconomical
type of valve.
For the lapless valve, the relative positions of the crank
and eccentric are shown at D. It is necessary; for the ec-
centric to be 90 degrees from the crank, in order that the
valve shall be in mid-position when the piston is at the end
of its stroke. Now, if there were any steam lap, it would
be necessary to move the valve on its seat a distance to the
right at least equal to the steam lap, in order that the port
be open as soon as the piston starts on its stroke. By in-
creasing the angle between the crank and the eccentric (for
a direct motion), the valve can be moved along on its seat
this amount. This angle is known as the angle of advance,
and is indicated at C.
The Zeuner Valve Diagram.- The Zeuner valve dia-
gram is illustrated in Fig. 2. As will be seen, there are
two circles that are concentric and two smaller circles with-
in the inner concentric circle. The larger circle need not be
drawn to any particular scale, as it merely serves to repre-
sent the path of the crankpin. The smaller circle is either
drawn to scale or full size, and has a diameter correspond-
ing to the valve travel or twice the eccentricity. This is
known as the valve circle. The two circles within the valve
circle have a diameter equal to the radius of the valve circle,
and are known as the Zeuner circles. The angle between
the vertical center-line and the center-line upon which the
two Zeuner circles are drawn is equal to the angle of ad-
vance. The cylinder is supposed to be on the left-hand side
of the diagram, and the crank is turning in the direction
indicated by the arrow.
For a head-end diagram or one for the head end of the
valve and cylinder, the upper Zeuner circle is used for the
admission or outward stroke, and the lower circle for the
Fig. 2. Zeuner Valve Diagram
exhaust or return stroke. Fig. 2 is an example of a head-
end diagram. With a center at the center of the valve
circle,an arc with a radius equal to the steam lap is drawn,
cutting the upper Zeuner circle. An arc with a radius
equal to the exhaust lap is drawn on the lower circle in the
same manner. These are called the steam-lap and the ex-
haust-lap arcs. The relation between the center-line of the
crank for any given position, and these lap arcs and Zeuner
circles, indicates the position of the valve. When the crank
center-line crosses the steam-lap arc and the Zeuner circle,
the port opening equals the distance between the steam-lap
arc and the Zeuner circle measured along the crank center-
line. For instance, when the crank center-line is at a, the
valve is off e n t e ~ a distance L equal to the steam lap, and
the port is about to be opened. When the crank has moved
Fig. 3. Relation :Between Zeuner Diagram and Indicator Oard. :Paton
Positions are Marked A, for Admission; 00, for Out-off;
R, for Release; and 0, for Oompression
up to the horizontal center-line xx, representing the dead..
center position, the port is opened an amount l equal to the
lead, since l is the distance between the steam-lap arc and-
the Zeuner circle measured along the crank center-line.
When the crank is at b, the maximum port opening occurs;
at C, the steam is cut off; and at d, the exhaust port opens
518 VALVE DIAGRAMS
VALVE DIAGRAMS 519
as shown by the intersection of the crank center-line with
the lower Zeuner circle at the exhaust-lap arc. The exhaust
port closes at e and compression begins. This cycle is then
repeated.
From the foregoing, it will be seen that, as the crank
center-line is rotated, it will intersect the valve circle, the
two Zeuner circles, and the lap arcs. As the distance from
the center of the valve circle to any point of the Zeuner
circle, when measured along the crank center-line, shows
the amount by which the valve has moved from its mid-
position, the between the lap arc and the Zeuner
circle shows the amount by which the port is uncovered.
Relation of Diagram to Indicator Card.- Since the
valve diagram shows the relative positions of the crank and
the valve for the various events of the steam engine cycle,
it is possible to draw the valve diagram from the indicator
card, or vice versa. Fig. 3 shows the relation between the
two diagrams. The positions of the crank for admission,
cut-off, release, and compression are indicated by the radial
lines. To find the relative positions of the piston these
events, an arc is swung from the intersection of the crank
center-line with the valve circle, to the horizontal center-
line. The radius of this arc should be in the same propor-
tion to the radius of the valve circle that the length of the
connecting-rod of the engine is to the crank; that is, if the
connecting-rod is five times as long as the crank, then the
radius of the arc should be five times the radius of the valve
circle. The center of the arc should be on the horizontal
center-line extended to the left. The point which has been
determined by this arc shows the relative distance which the
piston has moved from the end of its stroke, for that par-
ticular position of the crank. These points can be projected
down upon a diagram below to give the four principal points
of the. indicator card, the vertical distances on this card
being determined by the relative steam pressures which
exist at admission and at exhaust. The compression curve
and the expansion line can be drawn as equilateral hy-
perbolas. Starting with the indicator diagram, the four
piston positions on the valve circle diameter, where admis-
sion, cut-off, release, and compression occur, are found by
projecting upward from these points on an indicator card
to the center-line of the valve circle. Then, by swinging
arcs from these points to the valve circle, the crank posi-
tions are determined, and the valve diagram is laid out
accordingly.
Application of the Zeuner Diagram.- A construction
which is often necessary in working the Zeuner .diagram is
shown at A in Fig. 4. A small circle is drawn around the
intersection of the valve circle and the horizontal center-
line. The radius of the circle is equal to the lead. A tangent
ab to this circle, perpendicular to the center-line oc of the
Zeuner circle, will cut the valve circle at the crank posi-
tions of admission and cut-off oa and ob. If the point of
cut-off and the lead are known, as is generally the case when
a steam engine is designed" this lead circle can be drawn,
the cut-off point determined, and a line ab from the cut-off
point be drawn tangent to the lead circle. A perpendicular to
this line OC, through the center of the valve circle, gives the
center-line of the Zeuner circles and determines the angle
of advance. The lap arc is at once determined, as it will
always cut the Zeuner circle at the intersection of the crank
positions d and e.
The diagram for the head end' of the cylinder has been
referred to in the foregoing. The crank-end diagram is
similarly constructed and used. As shown at B, Fig. 4, the
Zeuner circle for determining the admission of steam and
the cut-off is on the lower side of the horizontal center-line,
and the circle for determining the release and compression
is on the upper side; in other words, the positions of the
two circles are reversed from the head-end positions. Lap
arcs are drawn as before, but the lead circle is at the right
end rather than the left. The positions of the piston, cor-
\
\
'",
'''''-.,
----t----
A
/
!
t--
\
B

\
\
LEAD
CIRCLE
I
t>:>
o
-<
:>
t"'
;]
C'.
1-1'
>-
'U:i
Fig. 4. (A) Construction of Zeuner Diagram when T"ead is Known. (B) Diagram for Crank End of Cylinder
___ t ?
--1---''----
A
',,-
""
'",-.
CRANK POSITION
AT CUT-OFF
C'
1-4
UJ
Fil'. 5. Zeuner Dia.grams Laid out from Given Data.
.Ol
t>:>

responding to the crank positions at the four important
points, are found by means of the arc proportional to the
connecting-rod length, as before.
Construction of the Zeuner Diagram.-In order to illus-
trate the practical application of the Zeuner diagram, as-
sume that a valve is to have a travel of 3 inches, a lead of
1/8 inch, and that the point of cut-off, under normal con-
ditions, is to be at five-eighths stroke on the head end of
the cylinder. The valve is to have an equal amount of out-
side lap on the two ends; hence, the cut-off will vary for
the head and crank ends, owing to,the angularity of the
connecting-.rod. As the result of this angularity, the amount
of piston travel for the head- and crank-end strokes differs
considerably for corresponding crank positions; conse
quently, a valve which has the same outside lap on both ends
will give a shorter cut-off on the crank end than on the head
end, and, in order to equalize the cut-off, it will be necessary
to have a smaller lap on the crank end of the valve. If the
amount of lap were varied, however, the lead would be un-
equal, and, as this is considered objectionable, it is common
practice to make the lap equal and allow the variation in
cut-off. Assume that the connecting-rod in this case is five
times as long as the crank.
When constructing the Zeuner diagram, first drraw a
valve circle having a diameter equal to the valve travel, or
3 inches. Determine the piston position for five-eighths
stroke, which represents the point of cut-off. (See Dia-
gram A, Fig. 5.) Now, with a radius of 7 1/2 inches (or
five times the radius of the valve circle) and with a center
on the horizontal center-line of the valve circle extended,
draw an arc upward to the valve circle, marking the posi-
tion of the crank at the point of cut-off. Then, with a
:radius of 1/8 inch, draw the lead circle at the left of the
diagram, as shown in the illustration. Draw a tangent ab
to this circle which will terminate in the cut-off position.
A perpendicular oc to this tangent and passing through the
center of the valve circle will be the center-line of the two
Zeuner circles. The angle between this perpendicular and
the vertical is the angle of advance, and represents the
angle between the eccentric and the crank. The steam-
lap arc is drawn through the intersection d of the Zeuner
circle with the r ~ p k position at cut-off) and will be found
tangent to the line which was drawn tangent to the lead
circle. The exhau$t-lap arc is also drawn through the in-
tersection e of the lower Zeuner circle with the crank POSI-
tion at release. The two laps may now be measured and
the port openings for any position of the crank be de-
termined. The maximum steam-port opening is measured
along the center-line of the upper Zeunercircle between
the valve circle and.; the lap arc.
To determine what will be the point of cut-off for the
crank end of the cylinder, the process is as follows: Draw
the valve circle as before, with a3-inch diameter. Draw
the lap arcs, reversing the positions as shown at B, Fig. 5,
the steam-lap arc being in the lower right-hand quadrant
and the exhaust-lap arc in the upper left-hand quadrant.
The two Zeuner circles are next drawn, the center-Ii,ne hav-
ing the same angle of advance as in the diagram A. Now
find the crank positions for the various events of the cycle
by means of radial lines representing the different posi-
tions of the crank. Then, with a radius of 7 1/2 inches and
with a center on the horizontal center-line extended to the
left, as before, find the corresponding positions of the piston
by swinging the arcs upward to the horizontal center-line.
Effect of Changing Eccentricity.-By means of the Zeu-
ner diagram, it is possible to see clearly the effect of chang-
ing the eccentricity and the angle of advance in a slide-valve
engine. If the eccentricity is increased without making
other changes, the lead will be increased, cut-off occurs
later, release sooner, and compression later. If the eccen-
tricity is decreased, the lead is decreased, cut-off occurs
earlier, the release later, and the compression earlier. In-
creasing the angle of advance (as the diagram, Fig. 2,
shows) will cause the cut-off and all the other events to
occur earlier, whereas decreasing it will have the opposite
effect. These two methods of changing the operation of
the valve are made use of in all types of shaft governors.
A combination of the two, where the eccentricity is changed
at the same time as the angle of advance, makes it possible
to change the cut-off without changing the lead.
In the foregoing the piston has been assumed to be on
the left of the diagram; if it were assumed to be on the
right side, the Zeuner circles should be on the opposite
sides of the vertical center-line and the other parts of the
diagram similarly changed.
Summary of Principles of Zeuner Diagram.- When
using the Zeuner diagram, it is well to have the following
principles well in mind:
1.. Any radial line on the valve circle represents a position
of the crank.
2. The intercept on this radial line between the center and
the Zeuner circle represents the movement of the valve from
its mid-position.
3. The intercept on this radial line between the lap arc
and the Zeuner circle represents the amount the port is open
for that position of the crank.
4. The relative piston position can be determined, if the
proportion of connecting-rod to crank is known.
5. The radial line representing the crank position for
cut-off must pass through the intersection of the lap arc
and the Zeuner circle. This also applies. to release, com-
pression, and admission.
6. A perpendicular to the crank position at the inter-
section with the lap arc and Zeuner circle will intersect
the valve circle at a point coinciding with the center-line
for theZeuner circles; moreover, a perpendicular to any
crank position at the intersection of the Zeuner circle will
intersect the valve circle at the intersection of the center-
line for the Zeuner circles.
Bilgram Diagram.- The methods of laying out a Eilgram
diagram for both the head and crank ends of a cylinder are
shown at A and B, Fig. 6. The diameter SSl of the outer
circle represents the stroke of the engine; this circle may
be drawn to any convenient scale. A smaller circle is drawn
from the center a, having a diameter equal to the travel of
the valve. This valve-travel circle may also be drawn either
to a reduced scale or to full size, if more convenient. As-
suming that the inside and the outside lap and the lead are
known, proceed as follows: Draw a line II parallel to SS, and
a distance above it equal to the required lead or amount of
port opening at the beginning of the piston stroke. Next
draw another circle from center b having a radius equal to
the outside lap of the valve. As the diagram shows, this
circle should have its center b on the valve-travel circle and
should be tangent to line ll. About center b, draw a smaller
circle having a radius equal to the inside lap of the valve.
Now, to obtain the location of the center-line of the crank
at the point of cut-off, draw a radial line ac tangent to the
outside of the lap circle. A vertical line cd intersecting the
stroke line ss shows approximately how far the piston
travels before the steam is cut off. This vertical line will
not locate the exact point of cut-off, owing to the angularity
of the connecting-rod and the resulting variation between
the movements of the crankpin and the piston. To obtain
the exact position of the piston at the point of cut-off, line
cd should be an arc having a radius proportional to the
length of the connecting-rod and drawn from a center lo-
cated at some point on an extension of center-line SS.
A line ae through center b indicates the angular position
of the eccentric corresponding to a given amount of out-
side lap and lead, whereas, angle eas
1
equals the angle of
advance. Line af tangent to the inside-lap circle (on the
lower side for diagram A) locates the crank position when
526 VALVE DIAGRAMS
VALVE DIAGRAMS
527
the steam is released by the opening of the exhaust port,
whereas line gh, tangent to the opposite side of the inside-
lap circle and passing through center a, shows the position
of the crank for the point of compression or the closing
of the exhaust port. The maximum steam-port opening is
represented by the distance from center a to the outside-
lap circle, the measurement being taken along the center-
line ae.
By studying these diagrams A and B, the effect of changes
in the design of the valve may readily be determined. For
instance, if the outside lap is increased (thus increasing
the diameter of the lap circle), the point of cut-off will occur
earlier in the stroke, giving a greater range of expansion;
this change, however, will also cause an earlier compression,
even if the inside lap is not increased, because the effect of
enlarging the outside-lap circle is to change the position of
the inside-lap circle and the angular position of line gh, so
that the exhaust port is closed earlier. Increasing the in-
side lap also increases compression and delays the point of
release or exhaust. By means of this diagram, if the point
,[)f cut-off, lead, maximum port opening, and point. of com-
pression were given, the necessary inside and outside lap
and valve travel could be determined.
INDEX
PAGE
Agitating device for pin hopper A14
Agitator reversing mechanism which varies point of reversaL250
Alternate and intermittent drive for two shafts 7fl
Angular shaft drives, gearless type 349
Angular velocity, changing twice during each revolution 353
Automatic screw machine turret feed mechanism. 269
Automatic stopping or tripping mechanisms 189
Balls, golf, winding spherical cores A93
Balls in tube for transmitting motion to indexing plunger A84
Belt conveyor, preventing creep 510
Bilgram engine valve diagram 525
Brake, lever mechanism for block type A07
Brake mechanisms, automatic 216
Brake movement, quick-acting 403
Cam and differential gear for dwelling conveyor 91
Cam and eccentric combinations__. ~ 15
Cam and parallel motion for guiding follower along square
path 7
Cam applicati0 ns 1 to 60
Cam curves of high-speed intermittent motion, laying out 111
Cam, double-action type, that rotates follower and moves it
axially -________________________________________________________________ 55
Cam dwell, varying with two adjustable follower rolls 29
Cam follower, obtaining instantaneous movement 35
one cycle of movement from two cam revolutions 43
returns to starting position when machine is stopped.___________ 38
straight-line movement applied to 28
Cams, adj ustable-Iobe type______________________________________________________________ 3
cam sections rotating at different speeds to provide axial
movement c____________________________________________________________ 21
compound arrangement to reduce cam rise 17
double-acting pivoted type, for folding die 51
double-acting, which oscillates follower and indexes it hori-
zontally ~ 27
double-faced, for rapid rise without excessive side thrust 31
double type, for reciprocating motion 34
duplex action, fol" cam-turning attachment-- . 25
feed type, changing angular positions for machining differ-
ent parts--- ----------------- 15
528
INDEX 529
PAGE
Cams, helical-gear segment type, for reciprocating motion__~ _ _ _ 32
indexing type, for varying stroke of follower_________________________ 1
intermittent moti0 ns 61 to 113
long stroke and small diameter, with rapid return 19
single-cam action performs four different functions________________ 39
single-groove type" for operating two slides in opposite
dir ections 51
square path traced by follower 5, 7
threaded type, for converting rotary into oscillating motion__ 11
threading-tool ' operation ~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 47
triangular design, having sliding movement '53
two-revolution type, for one cycle of follower ~ 43
uniform circular motion changed into variable movement 10
Cam-turning mechanism for maintaining proper cutting angle
of too1 ~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 25
Cap-disk feeding mechanism, operates only when caps are in
receiving positi0 n ~ 193
Centering mechanisms for levers and sliding members 369
Chuck valve that reduces air consumption ~ .490
Cigar foil-wrapping mechanism 507
Circuit-breaker, straight-line motion for 39p
Clutch and crank arrangement, quick-return movement 271
Clamping device with quick-tripping mechanism 205
Clock-controlled adjustable intermittent motion 99
Clutch, air-operated, for 2-speed drive 367
centrifugally operated, over-running 363
free-wheeling or over-running type 141
one-revoluti0 n type 199
over-running, toggle type ---- 365
over-running type, to permit accelerating driven shaft .361
power press, disengagement when magazine feed jams 210
roller type and ratchet for imparting variable rotary move-
ment 141
Clutch disengagement at remote point by pneumatic overload
relief mechanism 229
by overload at any point in cycle of movement 237
Clutch engagement prevented until tool-slide is in operating
position 197-
CIutch lever, safety locking device ~ AO8
Conveyor belt mechanism for stacking articles at delivery end_A49
Conveyor belt mechanism for preventing creep 510
Conveyor chain mechanism for lifting parts to clear lugs_. ~ 4 8 7
PAGE
Conveyor, drive for obtaining dwells of regular intervals 91
Conveyor dwell at regular intervals for loading 135
Conveyor of wire stitcher, intermittent motion for 65
Counter for type-setting machine 485
Counting machine, clock-controlled intermittent mechanism_____ 99
Crank-and-toggle mechanism for rapid reciprocation of slide 265
Crank, auxiliary, for assisting crankpin past dead center 267
for quick-return movement --- 269
Crank motion, dead center eliminated 410
dwell at center of strcke 260
dwell from planetary type--- .262
planetary type for varying speed of driven member from
zero to maximum and vice versa __ 73
quick return, with adjustment for varying velocity of stroke__ 273
Crank throw, adjusting, while machine is running .. 277
electric control, while machine is running 281
mechanical and electrical regulating mechanism 281
Crank type of drives for reciprocating members 260
Cutting-off machine, tripping device for bead chain 203
Dead center, auxiliary crank for assisting crankpin past. 267
eliminated from crank motion 410
Die, folding type, equipped with double-acting pivoted-cam
mechanism. 51
Differential gear and cam combination for dwelling conveyor-- 91
Differential gear and speed reducer .325
Differential ratchet for imparting slight axial movement to
feed-screw 143
Dwell at center of reciprocating movement 260
conveyor at regular intervals for loading 135
conveyor, of sprocket-chain type 91
driven lever while driving crank turns part of revolution 390
driven shaft at. point of reversaL 257
during every o t h e ~ cycle of driving slide ...; 313
during initial movement of parallel slide 286
each end of oscillating motion. 393
ends of stroke of slide and quick return 312
from cam, varying with two adjustable follower rolls 29
from planetary type of crank motion 262
Geneva moti0 n " 170
lever movement, link mechanism for 393
of 180 degrees, high-speed intermittent motion ~ 69
530
INDEX
INDEX 531
PAGE
Dwell at one end of stroke of slide 307
one revolution followed by one ~ h f t revolution 65
Dwelling or idle periods from lever mechanisms 385
Dwell mechanism of lever type, laying out 388
Eccentric and cam combinations ._-' 15
Ejecting mechanisms for power presses A55
Electrically operated reversible ratchet mechanism for remote
controI .., 123
Engine valve diagrams 513
Escapement type of indexing mechanism 84
Feed-cams, changing angular positions for machining different
parts ~ 15
Feeding mechanisms 412
adjustable stroke for sewing machines ~ A39
adjusting stroke without stopping machine A38
disengagement when bar of stock requires renewaL 193
disengagement when pressure on tool is excessive 239
dislodging pieces that obstruct hopper. feed exit A73
ejecting fuse plugs from dial press A69
ejecting shells if wrong side is up A63
ejector ,of lift type for press diaL A67
elevating pile of sheets to keep top one in line with. feed
rolls .. 446
grinding machine -'- 143
high-speed, ratchet type 117
inverting shells after they leave hopper A55
link-motion adjustment without stopping machine 127
operates only when cork cap-disks are in receiving position__193
power presses 455
ratchet type, with overload safety stop 233
round pins to a dial press A61
shell, for thread-rolling machine A51
split rivets to power press A60
stacking articles at delivery end of conveying belt A49
washers to h dial press 467
wire 427, 428
Feeding motion from combined eccentric and friction ratchet__146
Feeding wire to cutting-off machine, intermittent motion. 156
Feed-screw with overload slip mechanism- 232
Fixture lock-pin short-stroke operating mechanism- A99
PAGE
Follower, cam, obtaining instantaneous 35
returns to starting position when machine is stopped 38
Friction drive, spur gear, to prevent overload 225
worm-gear, to prevent overload _ 223
Friction-driven gear to reduce starting shock of intermittent
gearing 86
Gearing, intermittent types __ 61 to 113
Gearing, ratchet, intermittent motions from 114
Gearless transmission for angular drives 349
Gear, split design, for eliminating lost motion 360
Geneva motion, application to turret indexing 179
combined with intermittent gear ...: 167
combined with segment gear for intermittent movement 177
determining velocity ratios 184
graphical analysis 181
intermittent moti0 ns 164
inverse type 169
laying 0 ut velocity curve 185
locking driven wheeL 172, 177
reducing rate of acceleration and deceleration of driven
member 164
working and idling angles of driver rotation 170
work-reversing and transfer mechanism 174
Gherkin's latch 377
Grinding machine, contour mechanism of 503
feeding mechanism 143, 420
Golf balls, winding spherical cores 493
Hat-finishing machine, mechanism for changing angular
velocity __ __353
High-speed intermittent motion 65, 69, 109
High-speed ratchet feeding mechanism 117

Hydraulic reciprocating mechanism for machine tools 319
Hydraulic type of speed-changing transmission 335
Indexing and oscillating movement from double-acting cam______ 27
indexing for multiple-thread cutting----------__________________________________ 47
Indexing mechanism, escapement type --------------------------------------- 84
with interchangeable tool-holding turrets 161
with self-locking device----- 153
Lever mechanisms, dwelling or idle periods from 385
throw increased by cam-and-rack mechanism AOl
to provide strokes of unequal length 284
Lever returningo devices --------------- 384
Levers, self-centering --------- ------- 369
Lever type of dwell mechanism, laying out--- 388
PAGE
Indexing plunger operated by steel balls in tube A84
Intermittent drive, duplex type 137
one-revoIuti0 n ----------------- ----- 131
Intermittent gear combined with Geneva wheel 167
Intermittent gearing, double, with planetary combination 61
planetary --------------------------- 61, 70
reduction of starting shock. 86
Intermittent and alternate drive for two shafts 75
Intermittent motion, adj ustable, clock-controlled__________________________ 99
alternate to parallel shafts ,.________________________ 89
automatic indexing head--- 153
automatically increases and decreases driven shaft move-
ment twice per revolution 120
converted to a constant drive 359
constant reciprocating motion____________________________________________________ 99
continu0 us rotary moti0 n___________________________________________________________ 83
feeding wire to cutting-off machine 156
from gears and cams 61 to 113
Geneva type --------- ----------- 164
high rotary speeds-- 65, 69, 109
r atchet gearing---- . 114
reciprocating motion, from cam operated by chain 106
reducing rate of acceleration and deceleration of driven
member --------------------- ----------------------------------------- 164
rotary, derived from reciprocating movement 151
rotary motion from constantly rotating shaft 116
rotary motion, positive, high-speed 65
turret indexing--------------- -- 161
unif0 rm heavy-duty----------- --- 114
Intermittent rotation for measuring ribbon while winding on
sp0 01 -------------------_____________________________ 81
Intermittent rotation of ratchet wheel during forward and
reverse movements of pawl Iever 129
Intermittent sprocket drive with adjustment during operation 77
Inverse Geneva-wheel motion 169
532 INDEX
INDEX
533
PAGE
Lever which dwells while driving crank turns part of revolu-
tion ~ . 390
Link motion, non-stop adj ustment, for ratchet feed mechanism__127
Link mechanisms, dwelling or idle periods from 385
Locking r ~ v e n wheel of Geneva movement 172, 177
Lost motion, split gear for eliminating 360
Machine, stopping, after given number of revolutions 207
Machine, stopping if feed jams 233
Machine, stopping spring fatigue testing at time of breakage__210
Magazine feed mechanism for disengaging clutch when jam-
ming occurs 210
Magazine feed-slide operating mechanism A42
Mangle-gear reversing mechanisms 245 to 249
Motion-picture.intermittent motion 109
Motion-picture projector, intermittent sprocket drive 77
Nut-tapping machine slide, quick return 305
One-revolution intermittent drive 131
Oscillating motion converted to variable reversing motion 253
for machine part mounted on a moving member 149
high speed, with well at each end 393
Oven, loading and discharge door controL A97
Overload reUef mechanisms 221
Over-running clutch, centrifugally, operated 363
to accelerate driven shaft 361
toggle type 365
Parallel motion and cam combination for guiding follower
along square path________________________________________________________________________ 7
Parallel shafts, intermittent drive for 89
Planetary and double-intermittent gear .;. 61
Planetary intermittent gearing ~ 61, 70
Planetary type of crank motion for varying speed of driven
member from zero to maximum and vice versa______________________ 73
Planetary type of grinder feeding mechanism A20
Planetary type of speed reducer 327
Pneumatic overload relief mechanism for disengaging clutch
at remote point 229
Power press feeding and ejecting mechanisms A55
Power-press stop mechanism which disengages clutch when
magazine feed j ams 210
Power press, stopping if punch breaks 214
534 INDEX
INDEX 535
PAGE
Quick-return movement, auxiliary crank for---------
M
.269
roller clutch and crank arrangement ------ 271
slide of automatic nut-tapping machine-_. 305
with dwell at ends of stroke of slide------- 312
with stroke-velocity adjustment 273
Ratchet feed with automatic overload safety stop------------------- 233
Ratchet gearing, adjustable pawl shield to vary movement 145
differential type ~ ~ ----------------------- 143
friction type for automatically varying feeding motion 146
heavy-duty ----------------------------- --------------------------------114
intermittent moti0 ns from------ 114
pawl having slow movement at both ends of stroke ~ __152
Reciprocating drives, crank type-------------.;.----------------------------------- 260
Reciprocating motion, adjustment of slide without stopping
machine ------------------------------- -------------------------- 275
advancing, with dwell at each point of reversaL______________________ 61
alternate engagement with upper and lower sides of steel
belt --------------------------- ------------------------ 317
alternate long and short strokes ---------------------------------- 299
converted from rotary by application of hypocycloid prin-
ci pIe ------------------- 288
converting rotary into---------- 288
converted to intermittent rotary movement. 151
doub1e-cam drive-----------------__________________________________________________________ 34.
dwell at center--------------- --------------------------- 260
dwell at ends of stroke and quick return------------------- 312
dwell at one end------------------------- --------------------------------------- 307
dwell during every other cycle of driving slide- 313
dwell during initial movement of parallel slide--- 286
from cam of helical-gear segment type 32
from cams, gears, levers ---------- 284
hydraulic, for machine tools --- 319
intermittent, from cam operated by chain c 106
intermittent movement from constant 99
lever mechanism, providing strokes of unequal length _.-- 284
long stroke from small cam . 19
obtaining two motions from one initial movement -----------------310
overload release, to prevent damage 239
parallel slides, with one operating intermittently 93
parallel to driving shaft --__________ 309
planetary type, frJr obtaining dweU . .,. .. 262
PAGE
Reciprocating motion, quadrupling by rack-and-pinion mech-
anism---__~ . 305
rapid movement of slide 265
slide with intermittent movement 95
two slides moved in opposite directions from one single-
groove cam 51
uniform 293
variablestroke ~ 294
with dwell, obtained from triangular sliding cam-------------c ---_ 53
Reducing gearing, speed 321
Relief mechanisms to prevent overloads 221
for feed-screw 232
for oscillating lever ~ ~ 231
for ratchet feed mechanism 233
for reciprocating members -------------__239
friction type for gearing 223, 225, 227
instantaneous clutch disengagement at any point in cycle
of movement 237
pneumatic, for disengaging clutch at remote point 229
when pressure on turning tool is excessive 239
worm-gear drive 221
Remote control through electrically operated reversible ratchet
mechanism ---- - 123
Reversing mechanisms -----------------------------------------c------------ 242
feed-slide shaft of wire-forming machine_____________________ 257
mangle-gear type 245 to 249
rapid-acting parallel worm type --- ~ 242
ratchet mechanism, electrically operated, for remote con-
t roI 123
Reversing driver, one-way rotation of driven shaft 346
Reversing shaft rotation after one complete turn 247
tap spindles in drill head 255
varying point. of reversal .___________________________________________ -- 250
velocity of shaft greater in one direction than in the other 249
Reversing motion derived from oscillating movement. - ---_ 253
Revolutions, stopping machine after given number 207
Ribbon, measuring while winding on spooL________________________________ 81
Rivets, feeding to power press -- 460
Rotary motion, changing angular velocity of driven member__ 353
changing relative positions of revolving shafts 351
changed to oscillating by threaded cam 11
constant, intermittent rotary motion froID 116
536 INDEX
INDEX 587
PAGE
Rotary motion, in one direction from reversing driver "_346
increased and decreased twice per shaft revolution 120
intermittent, derived from reciprocating motion 151
transformed to intermittent rotary motion 83
variable, from roller clutch and ratchet mechanism 141
varying from zero to maximum and vice versa________________________ 73
Safeguards, automatic, to prevent overloads 221
Saw-reciprocating mechanism ------ 288
Sewing machine double-lock stitch mechanism A80
Shafts, changing relative positions while revolving.--------- 351
Shearing motion which varies angular position of blade A83
Shells, ejecting, if wrong side is up---------- A63
Shell feeding mechanism for thread-rolling machine A51
Shells, inverting, after they leave hopper c A55
Shock absorber for high-speed intermittent gearing 86
Shockless reversing mechanism which varies point of reversaL250
Shock of intermittent gearing, reduction at starting 86
Slides, parallel, with one operating intermittently 93
Solenoid-operated reversible ratchet mechanism for r ~ o t
controI 123
Speed-changing mechanisms 321
automatic 341
combination differential gear and speed reducer 325
compound planetary ' 327
gearless transmission 331
hydraulic type 335
insures changing speeds according to successive gear ratios._333
nine-speed gear-box with single-lever controL 323
Speed-reducing gearing ~ 321
Sprocket drive, intermittent, with adjustment during opera-
t ion 77
Spur gear with friction drive to prevent overload 225
Square path, cams for moving follower along 5, 7
Stop or tripping mechanisms 189
disengagement of clutch when reel is filled with wire 189
disengagement of feeding device when new bar of stock is
required 193
disengagement of power-press clutch when magazine feed
jams 210
for bead-chain cutting-off machine 203
for stopping machine after given number of revolutions 207
538 INDEX
PAGE
Stop mechanism, for $topping power press if punch breaks 214
stops spring fatigue testing machine at time of breakage 210
Straight-line motion 'applied to cam follower_________________________ 28
for gang saw ~ --------- 398
for oil circuit-breaker ~ 395
Switch, centering device for oil type------ 383
Switch, self-centering device for electric 371
Tapping machine slides moved in opposite directions by one
single-groove cam ------------_________________________________________________________ 51
Tap spindles in drill head, reversing 255
Thread-rolling machine, shell feeding mechanism A51
Transfer mechanism for stacking parts on rods as they leave
die ---------- 475
Threading tool, cam-operated 47
Transmission, gearless, variable speed 331
Transmissions, special. designs 346
Triangular cam, sliding type 53
Tripping or stop mechanisms 189
Turret indexing, application of Geneva wheeL 179
Valve, air chuck ~ . 490
Valve diagrams, steam engine __.---------------------------------------------------513
Washers, feeding to a dial press A67
Weston type of automatic brake 218
Wire feeding device, friction grip .427
Wire feeding unit, adjustable speed A28
Wire-forming machine, reversing feed-slide shaft 257
Wire-forming machine. slide with intermittent movement_______ 95
Wire reel, stop mechanism which acts when reel is filled 189
Wire tension equalizer, automatic .433
Worm-gear drive with friction type of overload release 223
Worm-gear drive with spring-type of overload release 221
Worm type of rapid-acting reverse mechanism 242
Wrapping mechanism for cigars or tapering objects 507
Zeuner valve diagram . o _ ._ ~ 5 5

Ingenious Mechanisms Volume 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ingenious Mechanisms Volume 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ingenious Mechanisms Volume 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INGENIOUS MECHANISMS

FOR DESIGNERS AND INVENTORS

directions. It is desirable to introduce as much variety as

INTERMITTENT MOTIONS FROM RATCHET GEARING 119

that no further movement of slide B results after meeting

RECIPROCATING MOTIONS FROM CAMS, GEARS, LEVERS 315

522 VALVE DIAGRAMS VALVE DIAGRAMS 523

You might also like